Mist Name Syllabus_2021 (2)

MILITARY INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
(MIST)
COURSE CURRICULUM
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN
NAVAL ARCHITECTURE AND MARINE ENGINEERING
DEPARTMENT OF
NAVAL ARCHITECTURE AND MARINE ENGINEERING
(NAME)
JANUARY 2021
APPLICABLE FOR NAME- 9 & ONWARDS

COMMITTEE OF COURSES – NAME DEPT, MIST
The undergraduation course curriculum of the department of Naval Architecture and Marine
Engineering (NAME) of Military Institute of Science and Technology (MIST) has been reviewed by
the committee as mentioned below.
A. President
1.
Commodore M Muzibur Rahman, (E), psc, BN
Head, NAME Department
Dean, Faculty of Science and Engineering (FSE)
Military Institute of Science and Technology
B. Internal Members
1.
Air Commodore M Abdus Salam, BPP, psc,
Dean, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering (FME)
Head, Department of Aeronautical Engineering
2.
Captain Kaosar Rashid, (E), psc, BN
Senior Instructor, NAME Department
3.
Commander M Golam Mohiuddin, (E), BN
Instructor Class-A, NAME Department
4.
Commander M Masum Ul Haque, (E), BN
5.
Lt Col Osman Md Amin, PhD, Engrs
6.
Dr. S M Ikhtiar Mahmud
Assistant Professor, NAME Department
7.
Md Touhidul Islam
8.
Md Mezbah Uddin
9.
Major SM Kamruzzaman, EME
Instructor Class-B, NAME Department
10.
Md Daluar Hussain
Lecturer, NAME Department
C. BUP Members
1.
Brig Gen Md Anwar Shafique, ndc, psc
College Inspector
Bangladesh University of Professionals (BUP)
2.
Brig Gen Md Zahidur Rahim, ndc, afwc, psc
Dean, Faculty of Science and Technology (FST)
Bangladesh University of Professionals (BUP)
D. External Members
1.
Dr. Goutam Kumar Saha
Professor
Department of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering
Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology
2.
Commodore M Mohidul Hasan, (E), psc, BN
Chittagong Dry Dock Limited (CDDL),
Chattogram, Bangladesh
E. Member Secretary
Lt Col Muhammad Rabiul Islam, PhD, EME

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Introduction to MIST 1
1.2 Vision and Mission of MIST 1
1.3 Salient Features of MIST 2
1.4 Location 2
1.5 Faculties 2
1.6 Eligibility of Students for Admission in MIST 3
1.7 Number of Seats 4
1.8 Admission Procedure 4
1.8.1 Syllabus for Admission Test 4
1.8.2 Final Selection 5
1.8.3 Medical Checkup 5
1.9 Students Withdrawal Policy 5
1.9.1 General Policy of Withdrawal 5
1.9.2 Withdrawal on Disciplinary Ground 6
1.9.3 Withdrawal on Own Accord 6
CHAPTER 2
RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMME AT MIST
2.1 Introduction 7
2.2 The Course System 7
2.3 Number of Terms in a Year 7
2.4 Duration of Terms 7
2.5 Course Pattern and Credit Structure 8
2.6 Course Distribution System 8
2.7 Assignment of Credits 9
2.8 Types of Courses 9
2.9 Course Offering and Instruction 9
2.10 Teacher Student Interaction 9
2.11 Students‟ Advisor 9
2.12 Course Registration 10
2.13 Registration Procedure 10
2.14 Pre-conditions for Registration 10
2.15 Registration Deadline 10
2.16 Penalty for Late Registration 11
2.17 Limits on the Credit Hours to be Taken 11
2.18 Course Add/Drop 11
2.19 Withdrawal from a Term 11
2.20 The Grading System 12
2.21 Marks Distribution 12
2.21.1 Theory
i
2.21.2 Sessional/Practical Examinations 13
2.21.3 Sessional Course in English 13
2.21.4 Class Attendance 13
2.22 Calculation of GPA 13
2.23 Minimum Earned Credit and GPA Requirement for Obtaining 14
Degree
2.24 Minimum Earned Credit and GPA Requirement for Obtaining 15
Degree Additional Course)
2.25 Impacts of Grade Earned 15
2.26 Classification of Students 15
2.27 Definition of Graduating Student 16
2.28 Performance Evaluation 16
2.29 Application for Graduation and Award of Degree 17
2.30 Time Limits for Completion of Bachelor‟s Degree 17
2.31 Attendance, Conduct and Discipline 17
2.31.1 Attendance 17
2.31.2 Conduct and Discipline 17
2.32 Teacher-Student Interaction 17
2.33 Absence during a Term 17
2.34 Recognition of Performance 17
2.35 Types of Different Examinations 18
2.36 Rules of Different Examinations 18
2.36.1 Term Final Examination 19
2.36.2 Supplementary Examination 19
2.36.3 Improvement Examination 19
2.37 Irregular Graduation 19
CHAPTER 3
DEPARTMENT OF NAVAL ARCHITECTURE AND MARINE ENGINEERING (NAME)
3.1 Introduction to the Program 20
3.2 Vision and Mission of the Program 20
3.3 Faculty Members of NAME department 21
3.4 Facilities of the department 22
3.5 Program Specific Criteria 23
3.6 Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) 23
3.7 Program Outcomes (POs) 23
3.8 Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) and Program Outcomes (POs) 24
Matrix
3.9 Course Outcomes (COs) 24
3.10 Course Content
3.11 Knowledge Profile, Range of Complex Engineering Problem Solving 24
and Range of Complex Engineering Activities
3.12 Generic Skills 24
3.13 Curricular/Skill Mapping 25
CHAPTER 4
COURSE CURRICULUM OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NAME
4.1 Course Schedule 26
4.1.1 Summary of Course Curriculum 26
4.1.2 Contact hours and credit hours‟ distribution in eight terms 26
4.1.3 Distribution of credit hours for different categories of courses in NAME 27
Dept.
4.2 Term-Wise Course Distribution 28
4.2.1 List of Program Core Courses 32
4.2.2 List of Optional/ Elective Courses 32
4.2.3 List of Interdisciplinary Courses 33
4.2.4 List of Basic Science and Mathematics Courses 33
4.2.6 List of Languages/ Communicative Language 34
4.2.7 List of General Education Courses 34
CHAPTER 5
COURSE DESCRIPTION
5.1 Program Core Courses 35

5.2 Technical Elective Courses 203
5.3 Interdisciplinary /Other Engineering Courses 299
5.4 Basic Science and Mathematics Courses 331
5.5 Languages/ Communicative Language 375
5.6 General Education Courses 385
Annex-A: Chapter 4. (of BAETE Manual 2019 Version 2) Criteria 426

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Introduction to MIST
The necessity of establishing a technical institute for the Bangladesh Armed Forces was felt in the late
eighties. In the absence of such an institution, officers of Bangladesh Armed Forces had been
graduating from Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology (BUET), Bangladesh Institute
of Technology (BIT) and other foreign institutions of science and technology. With a view to meet the
increasing demand for the development and dissemination of engineering and technological
knowledge, Bangladesh Armed Forces established the Military Institute of Science and Technology
(MIST) that promises to provide facilities for higher technical education both for the officers of
Bangladesh Armed Forces as well as for civil students from home and abroad. The motto of MIST is
―Technology for Advancement. Founded on 19 April 1998, MIST started its journey on 31 January
1999 by offering a four-year bachelor's degree on Civil Engineering. Bachelor degree on Computer
Science Engineering course started on 2001. Bachelor courses on Electrical, Electronic &
Communication Engineering and Mechanical Engineering started its journey from 2003. Bachelor of
Science program on Aeronautical Engineering (AE) and Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering
(NAME) program were started from 2008-2009 and 2012- 2013 respectively. Besides, four new
departments started their academic session from 2014-2015i.e. Nuclear Science & Engineering
(NSE), Biomedical Engineering (BME), Architecture (Arch) and Environmental, Water Resources &
Coastal Engineering (EWCE).
Foreign students from Sri Lanka were admitted for the first time at MIST. Presently students from
Maldives, Palestine, Nepal and Ghambia are also studying in different Engineering Programs. MIST
envisages creating facilities for military as well as civil students from home and abroad dedicated to
pursue standard curriculum leading to Graduation Degree. As an Institution without any gender
biasness, MIST is already on steady stride upholding its motto “Technology for Advancement”. MIST
remains committed to contributing to the wider spectrum of national educational arena and play a
significant role in the development of human resources and ardently pursuing its goal to grow into a
“Centre of Excellence”. MIST has well equipped class rooms with multimedia and web camera with
internet facilities and laboratories with modern equipment. The medium of instruction for all
engineering programs is English. All academic programs of MIST are affiliated with the Bangladesh
University of Professionals (BUP) and have close cooperation with Bangladesh University of
Engineering and Technology (BUET) and Dhaka University (DU).
1.2 Vision and Mission of MIST
Vision: To be a center of excellence for providing quality education in the field of science,
engineering and technology and conduct research to meet the national and global challenges.
Mission:
a. Provide comprehensive education and conduct research in diverse disciplines of science,
engineering, technology and engineering management.
b. Produce technologically advanced intellectual leaders and professionals with high moral and
ethical values to meet socio- economic development of Bangladesh and global needs.
c. Conduct collaborative research activities with national and international communities for
continuous interaction with academician and industry.
1
d. Provide consultancy, advisory, testing and other related services to government, non-
government and autonomous organization including personnel for widening practical
knowledge and to contribute in sustainable development of the society.
1.3 Salient Features of MIST
a. Rigorous admission and selection process for best possible screening interactive sessions in the
classroom.
b. Regular guest lectures and educational visits.
c. Culture of timeliness, commitment and uninterrupted curriculum.
d. Flexibility in choosing competent faculties through outsourcing.
e. Well thought-out and continuous feedback and assessment system.
f. Effective teaching through innovative method.
g. Industrial attachment for on job training.
h. Emphasis on code of conduct and dress code.
i. Focus to develop students as good human with all possible attributes of successful leader.
j. Tranquil, pollution free and secure campus life.
1.4 Location
MIST is located at Mirpur Cantonment, northwest edge of the greater Dhaka city, a hub of knowledge
for the armed forces. Mirpur Cantonment is a small, calm and quiet education village and free from all
possible pollution of a city life. A garland like lake with migratory birds, three sides with extended
green fields in the summer and water bodies in the rainy season, whistling birds on the tree branches
and overall bounty of nature adds to the already existing splendid academic atmosphere. Other
neighboring academic institutions are National Defense College (NDC) and Defense Services
Command and Staff College (DSCSC) – two international standard education centers.
1.5 Faculties
1.5.1 Faculty of Civil Engineering (FCE):

 Civil Engineering (CE)
 Architecture (Arch)
 Civil, Environment, Water and Coastal Engineering (CEWCE)
 Petroleum and Mining Engineering (PME)
1.5.2 Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering (FECE):

 Computer Science and Engineering (CSE)
 Electrical, Electronic and Communication Engineering (EECE)
1.5.3 Faculty of Mechanical Engineering (FME):

 Mechanical Engineering (ME)
 Aeronautical Engineering (AE)
 Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering (NAME)
 Industrial and Production Engineering (IPE)
2
1.5.4 Faculty of Science & Engineering (FSE):
 Biomedical Engineering (BME)
 Nuclear Science and Engineering (NSE)
 Department of Science (Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry) and Humanities (Only Post
Graduate)
Presently MIST has 12 (twelve) departments to conduct B Sc. Engineering program under 04(four)
different engineering faculties. The departments impart education basing on common objectives and
outcomes set by MIST and have defined program objectives and outcomes, specific to the
departments respectively.
1.6 Eligibility of Students for Admission in MIST (Subject to review each year)
The students must fulfill the following requirements:
a. Bangladeshi Students. Minimum qualifications to take part in the admission test are as
follows:
(1) The applicant must have passed SSC / equivalent examination from Board of Intermediate
and Secondary Education/Madrasa Education Board/Technical Education Board in Science
Group obtaining GPA 4.00 (without fourth subject) on a 5-point scale and in
HSC/Equivalent examination from Board of Intermediate and Secondary
Education/Madrasa Education Board/Technical Education Board in Science group the
applicant must have obtained minimum GPA 4.00 on a 5-point scale. In HSC/Equivalent and
SSC/Equivalent examination: (i) the applicant passed HSC or Equivalent in must obtain
minimum total grade point 17 in four subjects (Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and
English), (ii) SSC Examination (or Equivalent).
(2) The applicant must have qualified in minimum five subjects including Mathematics,
Physics, Chemistry and English Language with minimum „B‟ in average [i.e. A=5, B=4,
C=3, D=2 & E=1, minimum required grade point=20] in GCE „O‟ Level and in „A‟
level/Equivalent background of Minimum „B‟ grade in Mathematics, Physics and
Chemistry.
(3) Applicants who have passed HSC or Equivalent examination in the current previous year
must grade obtain 19 in four subjects (Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and English).
(4) Sex: Male and Female.
b. Foreign Students. Maximum 3% of overall vacancies available will be kept reserved for the
foreign students and will be offered to foreign countries through AFD of the Government of
the People's Republic of Bangladesh. Applicants must fulfill the following requirements:
(1) Educational qualifications as applicable for Bangladeshi civil students or equivalent.

(2) Must have security clearance from respective Embassy/High Commission in Bangladesh.
(3) Sex: Male and Female.
3
In the event of non-availability of foreign students, Bangladeshi civil candidates will fill up the
vacancies.
1.7 Number of Seats
The highest number of seats for 04 (Four) years Bachelor Degree in Engineering programmes (Unit –
A) and 5 (Five) years Bachelor Degree of Architecture programme are as follows:
Allocation of Seats
Ser Unit Department Seats

1. Civil Engineering (CE) 60
2. Computer Science and Engineering (CSE) 60
3. Electrical, Electronic & Communication Engineering 60
(EECE)
4. Mechanical Engineering (ME) 60
5. A Aeronautical Engineering (AE) 50
6. Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering (NAME) 40
7. Biomedical Engineering (BME) 40
8. Nuclear Science and Engineering (NSE) 40
9. Civil & Environmental Engineering 60
10. Civil & Water Resources Engineering
11. Industrial and Production Engineering (IPE) 50
12. Petroleum and Mining Engineering (PME) 25
13. B Architecture (Arch) 25
Total 570
1.8 Admission Procedure
1.8.1 Syllabus for Admission Test. Admission test will be conducted on the basis of the syllabus
of Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry and English (comprehension and functional) subjects of
HSC examinations of all boards of secondary and higher secondary school certificates. There
will be no multiple-choice type questions (MCQ). Admission test will be conducted out of
200 marks and the distribution of marks is given below:
Ser. Subjects Marks

a. Mathematics 80
b. Physics 60
c. Chemistry 40
d. English 20
Total 200
1.8.1 Final Selection. Students will be selected on the basis of results of the admission test.
Individual choice for selection of departments will be given preference as far as possible.
Minimum qualifying marks in the test is 40% for the applicants. In case of tie in the result
of admission test, difference will be judged on the basis of marks obtained in Mathematics,
4
Physics, Chemistry and English respectively in admission test.
1.8.2 Medical Checkup. Civil candidates selected through admission test will go for medical
checkup in MIST medical center. If the medical authority considers any candidate unfit for
study in MIST due to critical/contagious/mental diseases as shown in medical policy of
MIST will be declared unsuitable for admission.
1.9 Students Withdrawal Policy
1.9.1 General Policy of Withdrawal
The under graduate (B.Sc.) Engineering programs for all engineering disciplines are planned
for 04 regular levels, comprising of 08 regular terms for Architecture programme it is
planned for 3 & regular levels, comprising of 10 regular terms. It is expected that all students
will earn degree by clearing all the offered courses in the stipulated time. In case of failure
the following policies will be adopted:
a. Students failing in any course/subject will have to clear/pass the said course/subject by
appearing it in referred examination as per examination policy. In case of students
completing level-4, maximum three courses/subjects will be allowed in the referred
examination (which is to be cleared within 6 years of registration).
b. Referred examination will be conducted at this institution before commencement of next
level.
c. Maximum grading for supplementary examination etc. of failed subjects will be B+ as per
examination policy.
d. One student can retake/reappear in a failed subject/course only twice. However, with the
Permission of Academic Council of MIST, a student may be allowed for third time as
last chance.
e. In case of sickness, which leads to missing of more than 40% classes or miss term final
examination (supported by requisite medical documents), students may be allowed to
withdraw temporarily from that term and repeat the whole level with the regular level in
the next academic session, subject to the approval of Academic Council, MIST.
However, he/she has to complete the whole undergraduate program within 06 (six)
academic years (for Architecture 07 academic years) from the date of his/her
registration.
f. Minimum credit requirement for the award of bachelor‟s degree in Engineering (Bsc.
Engg) and Architecture (B. Arch) will be decided by the respective department as per
existing rules. However, the minimum CGPA requirement for obtaining a bachelor
degree in engineering and Architecture is 2.20.
g. Whatever may be the cases, students have to complete the whole undergraduate Program
within 06 (six) academic years from the date of registration.
h. All other terms and condition of MIST Examination Policy remain valid.
1.9.2 Withdrawal on Disciplinary Ground
a. Unfair Means. Adoption of unfair means may result in expulsion of a student from the
programme and expulsion so from the Institution. The Academic Council will authorize
5
such expulsion on the basis of recommendation of the Disciplinary Committee, MIST
and as per policy approved by the affiliating university. Following would be considered
as unfair means adopted during examinations and other contexts:
(1) Communicating with fellow students for obtaining help in the examination.
(2) Copying from another student‟s script/ report /paper.
(3) Copying from desk or palm of a hand or from other incrimination documents.
(4) Possession of any incriminating document whether used or not.
b. Influencing Grades. Academic Council may expel/withdraw any student for

approaching directly or indirectly in any form to influence a teacher or MIST authority
for grades.
c. Other Indiscipline Behaviours. Academic Council may withdraw/expel any student on

disciplinary ground if any form of indiscipline or unruly behavior is seen in him/her
which may disrupt the academic environment/programme or is considered detrimental to
MIST‟s image.
d. Immediate Action by the Disciplinary Committee of MIST. The Disciplinary

Committee, MIST may take immediate disciplinary action against any student of the
Institution. In case of withdrawal/expulsion, the matter will be referred to the Academic
Council, MIST for post-facto approval.
1.9.3 Withdrawal on Own Accord
a. Permanent Withdrawal. A student who has already completed some courses and has
not performed satisfactorily may apply for a withdrawal.
b. Temporary Withdrawal. A student, if he/she applies, may be allowed to withdraw

temporarily from the program, subject to approval of Academic Council of MIST, he
will be allowed to apply fresh in future batch. If approved from the date of his/her
registration.
6
CHAPTER 2
RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMME AT MIST
2.1 Introduction
MIST has introduced course system for undergraduate studies from the academic session 2017-
18. Therefore, the rules and regulations mentioned in this paper will be applicable to students for
administering undergraduate curriculum through the Course System. This will be introduced with an
aim of creating a continuous, even and consistent workload throughout the term for the students.
2.2 The Course System
The salient features of the Course System are as follows:
a. Number of theory courses will be generally 5 in each term. However, with the recommendation
of course coordinator and Head of the Department, Commandant MIST may allow relaxation
in this regard. This relaxation is to be reported to Academic Council of MIST.
b. Students will not face any level repeat for failing.
c. Students will get scope to improve their grading.
d. Introduction of more optional courses to enable the students to select courses according to their
individual needs and preferences.
e. Continuous evaluation of students‟ performance.
f. Promotion of student-teacher interaction and contact.
2.2.1 Beside the professional courses pertaining to each discipline, the undergraduate curriculum
gives a strong emphasis on acquiring thorough knowledge in the basic sciences of mathematics,
physics and chemistry. Due importance is also given on the study of several subjects in
humanities and social sciences.
2.2.2 The first two years of bachelor‟s degree programs generally consist of courses on basic
engineering, general science and humanities subjects; while the third and subsequent years
focus on specific disciplines.
2.3 Number of Terms in a Year
There will be two terms (Spring Term I and Fall Term II) in an academic year.
2.4 Duration of Terms
The duration of each of Term I (spring) and Term II (fall) (maximum 22 weeks) may be as under
Ser Events Durations

1. Classes before Mid Term 7 weeks
2. Mid Term Vacation 1 week
3. Classes after Mid Term 7 weeks
4. Makeup Classes and Preparatory leave 2/3 weeks
7
5. Term Final Examination 2/3 weeks
6. Term End Vacation 1/2 week
2.5 Course Pattern and Credit Structure
The undergraduate program is covered by a set of theoretical courses along with a set of laboratories
(sessional) courses to support them.
2.6 Course Designation System
Each course is designated by a maximum of four letter code identifying the department offering the
course followed by a three-digit number having the following interpretation:
a. The first digit corresponds to the year/level in which the course is normally taken by the
students.
b. The second digit is reserved for departmental use. It usually identifies a specific area/group of
study within the department.
c. The last digit is an odd number for theoretical courses and an even number for sessional
courses.
The course designation system is illustrated as Follows:
NAME – 3 0 1 Ship’s Structure
Course Title
Odd digit designates a theoretical
Course Reserved for departmental use
Signifies 1stYear/ 1stLevel course
Department identification code
NAME - 2 0 8 Ship Design and Drawing II
Course Title
Even digit designates a sessional course
Reserved for departmental use Signifies
2ndYear/ 2nd Level course
Department identification code
8
2.7 Assignment of Credits
The assignment of credits to a theoretical course follows a different rule from that of a sessional
course.
a. Theoretical Courses: One lecture per week per term is equivalent to one credit.
b. Sessional Courses: Credits for sessional courses is half of the class hours per week per term.
c. Project and Thesis Courses: Credits are also assigned to project and thesis work taken by the
students. The amount of credits assigned to such work varies from one discipline to another.
2.8 Types of Courses
The types of courses included in the undergraduate curricula are divided into the following groups:
a. Core Courses: In each discipline, a number of courses are identified as core courses, which
form the nucleus of the respective bachelor‟s degree program. A student has to complete the
entire designated core courses of his/her discipline.
b. Prerequisite Courses: Some of the core courses are identified as prerequisite courses for a
specific subject.
c. Optional Courses: Apart from the core courses, the students can choose from a set of optional
courses. A required number of optional courses from a specified group have to be chosen.
2.9 Course Offering and Instruction
a. The courses to be offered in a particular term are announced and published in the Course
Catalog along with the tentative Term Schedule before the end of the previous term. The
courses to be offered in any term will be decided by Board of Undergraduate Studies (BUGS)
of the respective department.
b. Each course is conducted by a course teacher who is responsible for maintaining the expected
standard of the course and for the assessment of students‟ performance. Depending on the
strength of registered students (i.e. on the number of students) enrolled for the course, the
teacher concerned might have course associates and Teaching Assistants (TA) to aid in teaching
and assessment.
2.10 Teacher Student Interaction
The new course system encourages students to come in close contact with the teachers. For promotion
of a high level of teacher-student interaction, each student is assigned to an adviser and the student is
free to discuss all academic matters with his/her adviser. Students are also encouraged to meet any
time with other teachers for help and guidance in academic matters. However, students are not
allowed to interact with teachers after the moderation of questions.
2.11 Students’ Adviser
One adviser is normally appointed for a group of students by the BUGS of the concerned department.
The adviser advises each student about the courses to be taken in each term by discussing the
academic program of that particular term with the student.
9
a. However, it is also the student‟s responsibility to keep regular contact with his/her adviser who
will review and eventually approve the student‟s specific plan of study and monitor subsequent
progress of the student.
b. For a student of second and subsequent terms, the number and nature of courses for which he/she
can register is decided on the basis of academic performance during the previous term. The
adviser may permit the student to drop one or more courses based on previous academic
performance.
2.12 Course Registration
Any student who uses classroom, laboratory facilities or faculty-time is required to register formally.
Upon admission to the MIST, students are assigned to advisers. These advisers guide the students in
choosing and registering courses.
2.13 Registration Procedure
At the commencement of each term, each student has to register for courses in consultation with and
under the guidance of his/her adviser. The date, time and venue of registration are announced in
advance by the Registrar‟s Office. Counseling and advising are accomplished at this time. It is
absolutely essential that all the students be present for registration at the specified time.
2.14 Pre-conditions for Registration
a. For first year students, department-wise enrollment/admission is mandatory prior to registration.

At the beginning of the first term, an orientation program will be conducted for them where they
are handed over with the registration package on submission of the enrolment slip.
b. Any student, other than the new batch, with outstanding dues to the MIST or a hall of residence
is not permitted to register. Each student must clear their dues and obtain a clearance certificate,
upon production of which, he/she will be given necessary Course Registration Forms to perform
course registration.
c. A student is allowed to register in a particular course subject to the class capacity constraints
and satisfaction of pre-requisite courses. However, even if a student fails in a pre-requisite
course in any term, the concerned department (BUGS) may allow him/her to register for a
course which depends upon the pre-requisite course provided that his/her attendance and
performance in the continuous assessment of the mentioned pre-requisite course is found to be
satisfactory.
2.15 Registration Deadline
Each student must register for the courses to be taken before the commencement of each term. Late
registration is permitted only during the first week of classes. Late registration after this date will not
be accepted unless the student submits a written application to the registrar through the concerned
Head of the department explaining the reasons for delay. Acceptable reasons may be medical
problems with supporting documents from the Medical Officer of MIST or some other academic
10
commitments that prohibit enrollment prior to the last date of registration.
2.16 Penalty for Late Registration
Students who fail to register during the designated dates for registration are charged a late registration
fee of Tk. 100.00 (One hundred only) per credit hours. Penalty for late registration will not be waived.
2.17 Limits on the Credit Hours to be Taken
2.17.1 A student should be enrolled for at least 15 credit hours and is allowed to take a maximum of
24 credit hours. Relaxation on minimum credit hours may be allowed. A student must enroll
for the sessional courses prescribed in a particular term within the allowable credit hour
limits.
2.17.2 In special cases where it is not possible to allot the minimum required 15 credit hours to a
student, the concerned department (BUGS) may permit with the approval of the Comdt, a
lesser number of credit hours to suit individual requirements. Such cases are also applicable to
students of Level 4 requiring less than 15 credit hours for graduation.
2.18 Course Add/Drop
2.18.1 A student has some limited options to add or drop courses from the registration list. Addition
of courses is allowed only within the first two weeks of a regular. Dropping a course is
permitted within the first four weeks of a regular term.
2.18.2 Any student willing to add or drop courses has to fill up a Course Adjustment Form. This also
has to be done in consultation with and under the guidance of the student‟s respective
adviser. The original copy of the Course Adjustment Form has to be submitted to the
Registrar‟s Office, where the required numbers of photocopies are made for distribution to
the concerned adviser, Head, Dean, Controller of Examinations and the student.
2.18.1 All changes must be approved by the adviser and the Head of the concerned department.
The Course Adjustment Form has to be submitted after being signed by the concerned
persons.
2.19 Withdrawal from a Term
If a student is unable to complete the Term Final Examination due to serious illness or serious
accident, he/she may apply to the Head of the degree awarding department for total withdrawal from
the term before commencement of term final examination. However, application may be considered
during term final examination in special case. The application must be supported by a medical
certificate from the Medical Officer of MIST. The concerned student may opt for retaining the sessional
courses of the term. The Academic Council will take the final decision about such applications.
However, the total duration for graduation will not exceed 6 academic years.
2.20 The Grading System
11
The total performance of a student in a given course is based on a scheme of continuous assessment,
for theory courses this continuous assessment is made through a set of quizzes, class tests, class
evaluation, class participation, homework assignment and a term final examination. The assessments
for sessional courses are made by evaluating performance of the student at work during the class, viva-
voce during laboratory hours and quizzes. Besides that, at the end there will be a final lab test. Each
course has a certain number of credits, which describes its corresponding weightages. A student's
performance is measured by the number of credits completed satisfactorily and by the weighted average
of the grade points earned. A minimum grade point average (GPA) is essential for satisfactory
progress. A minimum number of earned credits also have to be acquired in order to qualify for the
degree. Letter grades and corresponding grade points will be given as follows:
Numerical Markings Grade Grade Points

80% and above A+ 4.00
75% to below 80% A 3.75
70% to below 75% A- 3.50
65% to below 70% B+ 3.25
60% to below 65% В 3.00
55% to below 60% B- 2.75
50% to below 55% C+ 2.50
45% to below 50% С 2.25
40% to below 45% D 2.00
below 40% F* 0.00
Incomplete I -
Withdrawal W -
Capstone Project/Thesis continuation X -
* Subject in which the student gets F grade shall not be regarded as earned credit hours for the
calculation of Grade Point Average (GPA)
2.21 Marks Distribution
2.21.1 Theory: Forty percent (40%) marks of a theoretical course shall be allotted for continuous
assessment, i.e. quizzes, home assignments, class tests, observations/ class participation and
class attendance. These marks must be submitted to Office of the Controller of
Examinations before commencement of final exam. The rest of the marks will be allotted to
the Term Final Examination. The duration of final examination will be three (03) hours. The
scheme of continuous assessment that a particular teacher would follow for a course will be
announced on the first day of the classes. Distribution of marks for a given course per credit
is as follows:
Class Performance 5%
Class Test/ Assignment 20%
Mid Term Assessment (Exam / Project) 15%
Final Examination (Section A & B) 60%
Total 100%
12
2.21.2 Sessional/Practical Examinations: Sessional courses are designed and conducted by the
concerned departments. Examination on sessional/practical subjects will be conducted by
the respective department before the commencement of term final examination. The date of
practical examination will be fixed by the respective department. Students will be evaluated
in the sessional courses on the basis of the followings (all or as decided by the Examination
Sub-Committee):
Conduct of Lab Tests/Class Performance 25%

Report Writing/ Programming 15%
Mid-Term Evaluation (exam/project/assignment) 20%
Final Evaluation (exam/project/assignment) 30%
Viva Voce 10%
Total 100%
2.21.3 Sessional Course in English: The distribution will be as under:
Class performance/observation 10%

Written Assignment 15%
Oral Performance 25%
Listening Skill 10%
Group Presentation 30%
Viva Voce
Total 100%
2.21.4 Class Attendance: Class attendance may be considered as a part of continuous assessment.
No mark should be allotted for attending classes.
2.22 Calculation of GPA
Grade Point Average (GPA) is the weighted average of the grade points obtained of all the courses
passed/completed by a student. For example, if a student passes/completes n courses in a term having
credits of C1, C2,……..Cn and his grade points in these courses are G1, G2,…..Gn respectively then
∑
∑
The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) is the weighted average of the GPA obtained in all the
terms passed/completed by a student. For example, if a student passes/ completes terms having total
credits of TC1, TC2,….,TCn and his GPA in these terms are GPA1, GPA2,…..GPAn, respectively then
13
∑
∑
Numerical Example
Suppose a student has completed eight courses in a term and obtained the following grades:
Course Credit Ci Grade Points Gi Ci*Gi

NAME 107 3.00 A+ 4.00 12.00
CHEM 101 3.00 A+ 4.00 12.00
PHY 101 3.00 A+ 4.00 12.00
MATH 101 3.00 A+ 4.00 12.00
GEBS 101 2.00 A 3.75 7.50
LANG 102 1.50 A+ 4.00 6.00
ME 150 1.50 A 3.75 5.625
CHEM 122 1.50 A 3.75 5.625
SHOP 180 1.50 A+ 4.00 6.00
Total 20.00 78.75
GPA = 78.75/20 = 3.9375 ≈ 3.94
Suppose a student has completed four terms and obtained the following GPA.
Earned Credit Hours Earned GPA

Level Term TCi*GPAi
TCi GPAi
1 I 20.00 3.94 78.80
1 II 21.00 3.84 80.64
2 I 20.25 3.92 79.38
2 II 20.25 3.98 80.60
Total 81.50 319.42
CGPA =319.42/81.50=3.92
2.23 Minimum Earned Credit and GPA Requirement for Obtaining Degree
Minimum credit hour requirements for the award of bachelor‟s degree in engineering (B.Sc.
Engineering) and other discipline will be decided as per existing rules. The minimum CGPA
requirement for obtaining a Bachelor‟s degree in engineering and other discipline is 2.20.
2.24 Minimum Earned Credit and GPA Requirement for Obtaining Degree (Additional
Course)
Minimum credit hour requirements for the award of bachelor's degree in engineering (B.Sc.
Engineering) and other discipline will be decided by the respective department (BUGS). However, at
least 157 credit hours for engineering must be earned to be eligible for graduation. This must include
the specified core courses. The minimum GPA requirement for obtaining a Bachelor's degree in
Engineering and Architecture is 2.20. A student may take additional courses with the consent of his
Advisor in order to raise GPA, but he/she may take a maximum of 15 such additional credits beyond
14
respective credit-hours requirements for Bachelor‟s degree during entire period of study.
2.25 Impacts of Grade Earned
The courses in which a student has earned a „D‟ or a higher grade will be counted as credits earned by
him/her. Any course in which a student has obtained an „F‟ grade will not be counted towards his/her
earned credits or GPA calculation. However, the „F‟ grade will remain permanently on the Grade
Sheet and the Transcript.
a. A student who obtains an „F‟ grade in a core course will have to repeat that particular course.
However, if a student gets an „F‟ in an optional course, he/she may choose to repeat that course
or take a substitute course if available. When a student will repeat a course in which he/she has
previously obtained an „F‟, he/she will not be eligible to get a grade better than „B+‟ in that
repeated course.
b. If a student obtains a grade lower than „B+‟ in a particular course he/she will be allowed to
repeat the course only once for the purpose of grade improvement. However, he/she will not be
eligible to get a grade better than „B+‟ for an improvement course.
c. A student will be permitted to repeat for grade improvement purposes a maximum of 6 courses
in BSc. Engineering programs and a maximum of 7 courses in B. Arch. Program.
d. If a student obtains a „B+‟ or a better grade in any course he/she will not be allowed to repeat the
course for the purpose of grade improvement.
2.26 Classification of Students
At MIST, regular students are classified according to the number of credit hours completed/ earned
towards a degree. The following classification applies to all the students:
Level Credit Hours Earned

Engineering Architecture
Level 1 0.0 to 36.0 0.0 to 34.0
Level 2 More than 36.0 to 72.0 More than 34.0 to 72.0
Level 3 More than 72.0 to 108.0 More than 72.0 to 110.0
Level 4 More than 108.0 More than 110.0 to 147.0
Level 5 ----- More than 147.0
2.26.1 However, before the commencement of each term all students other than new batch are
classified into three categories:
a. Category 1: This category consists of students who have passed all the courses described for
the term. A student belonging to this category will be eligible to register for all courses
prescribed for the upcoming term.
b. Category 2: This category consists of students who have earned a minimum of 15 credits
but do not belong to category 1. A student belonging to this category is advised to take at
least one course less since he might have to register for one or more backlog courses as
prescribed by his/her adviser.
c. Category 3: This category consists of students who have failed to earn the minimum required
15 credits in the previous term. A student belonging to this category is advised to take at
15
least two courses less than a category 1 student subject to the constraint of registering at least
15 credits. However, he will also be required to register for backlog courses as prescribed by
the adviser.
2.27 Definition of Graduating Student
Graduating students are those students who will have ≤ 24 credit hour for completing the degree
requirement.
2.28 Performance Evaluation
The performance of a student will be evaluated in terms of two indices, viz. Term Grade Point
Average and Cumulative Grade Point Average which is the grade average for all the terms completed.
2.28.1 Students will be considered to be making normal progress toward a degree if their
Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for all work attempted is 2.20 or higher. Students
who regularly maintain a term GPA of 2.20 or better are making good progress toward the
degrees and are in good standing with MIST. Students who fail to maintain this minimum
rate of progress will not be in good standing. This can happen when any one of the
following conditions exists:
a. The term GPA falls below 2.20.

b. The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) falls below 2.20.
c. The earned number of credits falls below 15 times the number of terms attended.
2.28.2 All such students can make up their deficiencies in GPA and credit requirements by
completing courses in the subsequent term(s) and backlog courses, if there are any, with
better grades. When the minimum GPA and credit requirements are achieved the student is
again returned to good standing.
2.29 Application for Graduation and Award of Degree
A student who has fulfilled all the academic requirements for Bachelor‟s degree will have to apply to
the Controller of Examinations through his/her Adviser for graduation. Provisional Degree will be
awarded by BUP on completion of credit and GPA requirements.
2.30 Time Limits for Completion of Bachelor’s Degree
A student must complete his studies within a maximum period of six years for engineering and seven
years for architecture.
2.31 Attendance, Conduct and Discipline
MIST has strict rules regarding the issues of attendance in class and discipline.
2.31.1 Attendance: All students are expected to attend classes regularly. The university believes
that attendance is necessary for effective learning. The first responsibility of a student is to
16
attend classes regularly and one is required to attend the classes as per MIST rules.
2.31.2 Conduct and Discipline: During their stay in MIST all students are required to abide by
the existing rules, regulations and code of conduct. Students are strictly forbidden to form or
be members of student organization or political party, club, society etc., other than those set
up by MIST authority in order to enhance student‟s physical, intellectual, moral and ethical
development. Zero tolerance in regards of sexual abuse and harassment in any forms and
drug abuse and addiction are strictly observed in the campus.
2.32 Teacher-Student Interaction
The academic system in MIST encourages students to come in close contact with the teachers. For
promotion of high level of teacher-student‟s interaction, a course coordinator (CC) is assigned to each
course. Students are free to discuss with CC about all academic matters. Students are also encouraged
to meet other teachers any time for help and guidance for academic matters. Heads of the
departments, Director of Administration, Director of Students Welfare (DSW), Dean and
Commandant address the students at some intervals. More so, monthly Commandant's Parade is
organized in MIST where all faculty members, staff and students are formed up, thereby increasing
teacher-student interaction.
2.33 Absence during a Term
A student should not be absent from quizzes, tests, etc. during the term. Such absence will naturally lead
to reduction in points/marks, which count towards the final grade. Absence in the Term Final
Examination will result in an F grade in the corresponding course. A student who has been absent for
short periods, up to a maximum of three weeks due to illness, should approach the course teacher(s) or
the course coordinator(s) for make-up quizzes or assignments immediately upon return to classes.
Such request has to be supported by medical certificate from competent authority (e.g. СМH/MIST
Medical Officer).
2.34 Recognition of Performance
As recognition of performance and ensure continued studies MIST awards medals, scholarships and
stipends will be given as per existing rules and practices.
2.35 Types of Different Examinations (Subject to change for different academic session)
Following different types of final Examinations will be conducted in MIST to evaluate the students
of Undergraduate Programs:
a. Term Final Examination: At the end of each normal term (after 22 wk or so), Term Final
Examination will be held. Students will appear in the Term Final Examination for all the theory
courses they have taken in the Term.
b. Supplementary Examination: It will take place twice in a year. Supplementary-I is defined as

provision of giving exam in the first week of Spring Term (Jan-Jun)/ Fall Term(Jul-Dec) end
break and Supplementary-II in the first week of Fall Term (Jul-Dec)/ Spring Term (Jan-Jun) end
17
break respectively. Students will be allowed to register for a maximum of two theory courses
(Failed/Improvement) in Supplementary-I and maximum of one theory course
(Failed/Improvement) in Supplementary-II
c. Improvement Examination: It will be taken during Supplementary-I and Supplementary-II

examination. Questions will be same as the question of the regular examination of that Final
Examination (if any). Student can take two subjects at a time and maximum 6 subjects in the
whole academic duration. If a student obtains a grade lower than „B+‟ in a course, he/she will
be allowed to repeat the course only once for grade improvement. However, he/she will not be
eligible to get a grade better then „B+‟ for an improvement course. Among the previous result
and improvement examination result, best one will be considered as final result for an
individual student. However, performance of all examination i.e previous to improvement
examination shall be reflected in the transcript.
2.36 Rules of Different Examinations (Subject to change for different academic session)
2.36.1 Term Final Examination. Following rules to be followed:
a. Registration to be completed before commencement of the class. A student has to register his
desired courses paying registration, examination fee and other related fees.
b. Late registration will be allowed without penalty within first one week of the term.
c. Within 1st two weeks of a term a student can Add/Drop course/courses. To add a course, in the
3rd week, one has to register the course by paying additional fees. To drop a course, one has
to apply within three weeks and paid fees will be adjusted/ refunded. If anyone wants to drop
a course after three weeks and within 4 weeks, that will be permitted but paid fees will not be
refunded in that case.
d. Registrar office will finalize registration of all courses within 7 (seven) weeks, issue
registration slip and that will be followed by issuing Admit Card.
e. Term Final Examination to be conducted in the 18-20th week of the term as per approved
Academic Calendar.
2.36.2 Supplementary Examination. Following rules to be followed:
a. Supplementary-I is defined as provision of giving exam in the first week of Spring Term (Jan-
Jun)/ Fall Term(Jul-Dec) end break and Supplementary-II in the first week of Fall Term (Jul-
Dec)/ Spring Term (Jan-Jun) end break respectively.
b. Students will be allowed to register for a maximum of two theory courses
(Failed/Improvement) in Supplementary-I and maximum of one theory course
(Failed/Improvement) in Supplementary-II.
c. No class will be conducted.
d. 40% marks on continuous assessment will be considered from previous term.
e. Highest grade of supplementary examination will be „B+‟.
f. No sessional exam will be conducted.
g. Examination will be taken on 60% marks like Term Final examination.
h. If a student fails in a course more than once in regular terms, then best one of all continuous
assessment marks (40%) will be counted.
18
i. If anyone fails in the laboratory/sessional course, that course cannot be taken in the
supplementary.
j. If any student fails in a course, he can clear the course retaking it 2 nd time or, he can clear
the examination appearing at the supplementary examination as well. Any one fails twice in a
course, can only retake it in the regular term appearing third time. But anyone fails 3rd time in
a course consecutively, he has to take approval of Academic Council of MIST for appearing
4th time in a course and need to pay extra financial penalty. If any students fails even 4 th time
in a course, will not be allowed to appear anymore in this same course.
k. Registration of supplementary-I exam to be done within 5th wk after completion of fall term
(July to Dec) and registration of supplementary-II exam to be done during Mid-Term of
spring (Jan to Jun).
l. There will be no provision for add/drop courses after registration.
m. Question setting, Moderation, Result Publication will be done following the same rules of
Term Final Examination as per Examination Policy.
n. Moderation of the questions for supplementary-I will be done in 5th wk after completion of
Fall Term (July to Dec) Final Exam and Supplementary –II with the moderation of the
questions of Spring Term (Jan to Jun).
o. Separate Tabulation sheet to be made.
p. Thesis: If a student cannot complete the thesis in two consecutive terms, with the
recommendation of supervisor, he/she may continue for next one/two term within six
academic years.
2.36.3 Improvement Examination. Following rules to be followed:
a. Improvement examination is to be taken during Supplementary-I and Supplementary-II.

b. For Improvement examination, registration is to be done during the registration of
Supplementary-I and Supplementary-II examination paying fees.
c. Question setting, Moderation and Result publication to be done with courses of
Supplementary-I and Supplementary-II examinations.
d. Any student gets a grading below „B+‟ and desires to improve that course; he will be allowed
to appear the improvement examination for that particular course.
e. Highest grade of Improvement examination will be „B+‟.
f. One student is allowed to appear at Improvement exam in 6 (six) courses in his whole
graduation period taking maximum two courses at a time.
2.37 Irregular Graduation
If any graduating student clears his/her failed course in Term-1 and his graduation requirements are
fulfilled, his graduation will be effective from the result publication date of Term-1 and that student
will be allowed to apply for provisional certificate.
19
CHAPTER 3
DEPARTMENT OF NAVAL ARCHITECTURE AND MARINE ENGINEERING
3.1 Introduction to the program
Our Lord, Almighty, has created human being in a state of weakness, but blessed with extra ordinary
divine intelligence and engineers amongst us who could perceive the need of time. In this regard,
maritime related engineering is one of the important aspects in the history of civilization and ships are
one of the oldest forms of transport used by human being.
Naval architecture has been an inherent part of the evolution of ships or crafts, and naval architecture
and marine engineering is a very interesting branch of study. Graduates in this field of study have
actually duel degrees. In one way these graduates are naval architects, and another way they are
marine engineers. Study in NAME provides insight to design, to build, to operate and to maintain
vessels which move just above, on or under the sea. It can be said that naval architects connect nation
to nation and civilization to civilization through rivers, seas and oceans. Basically, a good naval
architect is he who can acquire required knowledge of designing and building marine vehicles
satisfactorily, and utilize such knowledge for the benefit of mankind.
To be prepared for the professional tasks, students of naval architecture are primarily studying
hydrodynamic theories and concerned computational methods to develop efficient hull form to be
operated at desired movability with minimum energy consumption. Secondly, they have to go through
material science in depth to build better quality ships to be sustainable in unfriendly weather
conditions at sea. As the field of naval architecture is the part and parcel of mechanical engineering, it
is impossible to be a good naval architect without being a good mechanical engineer, and knowledge
on mechanics, theory of machine, heat transfer, diesel engine, gas turbine, nuclear power, fuel cells,
pumps, compressor, refrigeration, air- conditioning etc is absolutely essential. Moreover, machinery
controls, whether it is mechanical, pneumatic or electronic, control engineering expertise for the
marine engineers is also required.
Above all, today‟s technology is computer based and no ship is designed without the use of software.
It is now the demand of the day to have upper hand on computer programming language and
numerical simulations to bring forward what the graduating students are principally learning in the
field of naval architecture and marine engineering. The last but not the least is the humanities and the
management for efficient cost estimation, human resource management and enhancement of
leadership.
3.2 Vision and Mission of the Program
a. Vision: To be national and international centre of excellence offering a study programme of

high quality, innovation and creativity in the field of Naval Architecture and Marine
Engineering.
b. Mission: To produce engineers and researchers with sound knowledge on fundamentals of

traditional, modern and emerging areas of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering
together with innovative design abilities and managerial skills to achieve sustainable national
development.
20
3.3 Faculty Member of NAME
a. Military Faculty Members
• Commodore M Muzibur Rahman, (E), psc, BN

• Captain Kaosar Rashid, (E), psc, BN
• Commander M Golam Mohiuddin, (E) , BN
• Lt Col Muhammad Rabiul Islam, PhD, EME
• Commander M Masum Ul Haque, (E) , BN
• Major Osman M Amin, PhD, Engrs
• Major S M Kamuruzzaman, EME
b. Civil Faculty Members
• Professor M Munir Hassan

• Assistant Professor Dr. S M Ikhtiar Mahmud
• Assistant Professor Md. Touhidul Islam
• Assistant Professor Md. Mezbah Uddin
• Lecturer Md Daluar Hussain
• Lecturer Tasmia Haque
• Lecturer Kazi Rafi Rahaman
• Lecturer Kaniza Islam
• Lecturer Mohammed Jubair Dipto
• Lecturer A S M Araf Raihan
c. Guest Faculty Members
• Former Professor Dr. Md. Sadiqul Baree, NAME department, BUET

• Former Professor Dr. Md. Reaz Hasan Khondoker, NAME department, BUET
• Professor Dr. S Reaz Ahmed, ME department, BUET
• Professor Dr. M. Rafiqul Islam, NAME department, BUET
• Professor Dr. Md. Shahjada Tarafder, NAME department, BUET
• Professor Dr. Goutam Kumar Saha, NAME department, BUET
• Professor Dr. Nayeb Md. Golam Zakaria, NAME department, BUET
• Professor Dr. Md. Mashiur Rahaman, NAME department, BUET
• Associate Professor Dr. Zobair Ibn Awal, NAME department, BUET
3.4 Facilities of the Department
The NAME department endeavors to provide its faculty members and students adequate laboratory,
library and other facilities to undertake undergraduate courses. Since the engineering education is
laboratory intensive, following laboratories are catered for such requirements:
(1) Computer Aided Ship Design Lab

(2) Ships Structure and Fabrication Lab
(3) Marine Machinery Lab
(4) Ship Instrument Lab
(5) Damage Control Fire Fighting and Life Saving Lab
21
(6) Ship Propulsion Lab
(7) Ship Resistance Lab
(8) Machine Tools Lab
(9) Model Fabrications Lab
(10) Towing tank stability Lab
(11) Marine Transportation Lab
(12) Hydrodynamics Lab
(13) Auxiliary Machinery Lab
(14) Marine Electronics Lab
In addition to above laboratories, NAME students have to undertake laboratory courses (sessional) in
Physics, Chemistry, Workshop, Electrical Engineering and Civil Engineering too. If necessary
undergraduate students can have the access to the facilities of other departments and centers during
their project, thesis and research works.
Besides the stated laboratories, NAME department has established “Ship Design and Marine
Structural Solution Center” to take the challenge of professional engineering to an eminent level.
3.5 Program-Specific Criteria
Criteria for Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering or Similar Program according to BAETE
Manual 2 have been described in this paragraph. The program must prepare graduates to apply
probability and statistical methods to naval architecture and marine engineering problems; to have
basic knowledge of fluid mechanics, dynamics, structural mechanics, materials properties,
hydrostatics, and energy/propulsion systems in the context of marine vehicles; and to have familiarity
with instrumentation appropriate to naval architecture and/or marine engineering.
3.6 Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)
No PEO Statement
PEO-1 Graduates of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering will develop a sound
knowledge on mathematical, scientific and engineering fundamentals and advanced
knowledge of understanding in the sector of ship design, ship building and marine
engineering including analysis techniques, design, developments and
implementation methodologies to solve critical technical problems related to this field.
PEO-2 Graduates of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering will acquire technical and
communicative knowledge with professional and industry based education to build up
successful professional careers in shipbuilding and maritime industries, government
organizations and academia.
PEO-3 Graduates of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering will understand sustainable
engineering practice, socio-ethical values and life-long continuous learning to adapt the
innovation and changes in this sector.
PEO-4 Graduates of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering will be capable of working
in the broader area of technology having the capability and responsibility of leadership
and teamwork.
PEO-5 Graduates of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering will be able to positively
contribute in national and global cultural, social, technological, economic and
22
educational development of society through the ethical application of their knowledge
and skills.
3.7 Program Outcomes (POs)
Program Outcomes (POs) represent the knowledge, skills and attitudes the students should have at the
end of a four-year engineering program. Based on the suggestion of Board of Accreditation for
Engineering and Technical Education (BAETE), Bangladesh, the Naval Architecture and Marine
Engineering (NAME) program has following 12 Program Outcomes:
PO-1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals and an engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
PO-2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, research the literature and analyze complex engineering
problems and reach substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, the natural
sciences and the engineering sciences.
PO-3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
design system components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration
for public health and safety as well as cultural, societal and environmental concerns.
PO-4. Investigation: Conduct investigations of complex problems, considering design of

experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to provide valid
conclusions.
PO-5. Modern tool usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources and modern
engineering and IT tools including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an
understanding of the limitations.
PO-6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to
professional engineering practice.
PO-7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions
in societal and environmental contexts and demonstrate the knowledge for sustainable development.
PO-8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics, responsibilities and the
norms of the engineering practice.
PO-9. Individual work and teamwork: Function effectively as an individual and as a member or
leader of diverse teams as well as in multidisciplinary settings.
PO-10. Communication: Communicate effectively about complex engineering activities with the
engineering community and with society at large. Be able to comprehend and write effective reports,
design documentation, make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO-11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the
engineering and management principles and apply these to one‟s own work as a member or a leader of
23
a team to manage projects in multi-disciplinary environments.
PO-12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent, life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
3.8 Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) and Program Outcomes (POs) Matrix
PO PEO-1 PEO-2 PEO-3 PEO-4 PEO-5

PO-1. Engineering knowledge √
PO-2. Problem analysis √ √
PO-3. Design/development of solutions √
PO-4. Investigation √
PO-5. Modern tool usage √
PO-6. The engineer and society √ √
PO-7. Environment and sustainability √ √
PO-8. Ethics √ √
PO-9. Individual work and teamwork √ √
PO-10. Communication √ √
PO-11. Project management and finance √ √ √
PO-12. Life-long learning √
3.9 Course Outcomes (COs)
The Course Outcomes (COs) are the resultant knowledge skills the student acquires at the end of a
course. It defines the cognitive processes a course provides. Chapter five contains the detailed
Learning/course Outcomes for each of the courses under the heading of Course Outcomes (COs).
Faculty members are allowed to modify the Course Outcome (CO) as Continuous Quality
Improvement (CQI) while conducting a course on the basis of requirements consulting with Head of
the department and senior faculty members having expertise and specialization of that respective
course.
3.10 Course Contents
The course contents of all courses have been described in chapter five. Faculty members are allowed
to modify the course contents as a part of Continuous Quality Improvement (CQI) while conducting a
course on the basis of requirements consulting with Head of the department and senior faculty
members having expertise and specialization of that respective course.
3.11 Knowledge Profile, Range of Complex Engineering Problem Solving and Range of
Complex Engineering Activities
Details mapping criteria for Knowledge Profile, Range of Complex Engineering Problem Solving and
Range of Complex Engineering Activities has been attached as Annex-A.
3.12 Generic Skills
The graduates of the NAME program are expected to have the following generic skills:
24
a. Ability to apply the principles and theory of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering
knowledge to the requirements, design and development of different ship and marine systems
with appropriate understanding.
b. Ability to define and use appropriate research methods and modern engineering tools.
c. Ability to apply critical thinking to solve complex engineering problems and design innovative
solutions.
d. Ability to analyze real time problems and justify the appropriate use of technology.
e. Ability to work effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader of a team in diverse
situations and exhibit social responsibility.
3.13 Curriculum/ Skill Mapping
The courses of NAME program are designed in such a way that the corresponding Course Outcomes
(COs) contribute to the 12 Program Outcomes (POs) which eventually achieves the mission and
vision of the program. Chapter five contains the mapping for each of the courses. However, generic
curriculum/ skill mapping is shown in figure 3.1.
Engineering
Knowledge Identify, formulate
Design and and analyze
development engineering
solution for complex problems
engineering
Application of
problems
engineering
problems for
Conduct problem solving
investigation to
provide valid
conclusions
Development and use of modern

engineering tools and design
method
Achieve lifelong learning in the

field of engineering especially in
Naval Architecture and Marine
Engineering and to contribute in
socio- economic development
Figure 3.1: Generic Skills Mapping
25
CHAPTER 4
COURSE CURRICULUM OF BACHELOR IN NAME
4.1 Course Schedule
Keeping the above mentioned program outcomes, the course schedule for the undergraduate students
of the Department of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering is given below.
4.1.1. Summary of Course Curriculum
No of Courses Cr. Hr. Total % of Total

Ser Category
Theory Sessional Theory Sessional Cr. Hr. Cr. Hr.
1 Languages/
Communicative - 2 - 3.0
Language 21.0 13.12
2 General
8 1 16.0 2.0
Education
3 Basic Science 3 2 9.0 3.0
24.0 15.0
4 Mathematics 4 - 12.0 -
5 Interdisciplinary
/Other 3 4 10.0 6.0 16.0 10.0
Engineering
6 Program Core 19 17 57.0 30.0 87.0 54.38
7 Technical
4 - 12.0 - 12.0 7.5
Electives
Total 41 26 116.0 44.0 160.0 100
4.1.2. Contact hours and credit hours’ distribution in eight terms
Level Theory Total Theory Sessional Total

Sessional Cumulative
& Credit Credit Contact Contact Contact
Credit Hours Cr. Hr.
Term Hours Hours Hours Hours Hours
1-I 14.0 6.0 20.0 20.0 14.0 12.0 26.0
1-II 15.0 6.0 21.0 41.0 15.0 12.0 27.0
2-I 15.0 5.0 20.0 61.0 15.0 10.0 25.0
2-II 15.0 4.5 19.5 80.5 15.0 9.0 24.0
3-I 16.0 4.5 20.5 101.0 16.0 9.0 25.0
3-II 14.0 6.5 20.5 121.5 14.0 13.0 27.0
4-I 13.0 6.0 19.0 140.5 13.0 9+4 wks 22+4 wks
4-II 14.0 5.5 19.5 160.0 14.0 11.0 25.0
201.0
Total 116.0 44.0 160.0 116.0 85.0+4 wks
+4 wks
26
4.1.3 Distribution of credit hours for different categories of courses in NAME Dept.
Category
1 2 3 4 5 6
Ser.
Languages/
Level Communicative Basic Science and Interdisciplinary
Program Core Technical Electives Total
Term Language and General Mathematics /Other Engineering
Education
1-I 2.0 10.5 3.0 4.5 - 20.0
1-II 1.5 7.5 4.5 7.5 - 21.0
27
2-I 1.5 3.0 15.5 - 20.0
2-II 2.0 3.0 7.0 7.5 - 19.5
3-I 4.0 - 1.5 15.0 - 20.5
3-II 4.0 - - 13.5 3.0 20.5
4-I 4.0 - - 12.0 3.0 19.0
4-II 2.0 - - 11.5 6.0 19.5

4.2 Term Wise Distribution of Courses
LEVEL-1 TERM-1
Credit Contact
Course No Course Name Remarks
Hours Hours
Theory Courses
NAME 107 Introduction to Naval Architecture and Marine
3.0 3.0 Program Core
Engineering
CHEM 101 Fundamentals of Chemistry 3.0 3.0 Basic Science
MATH 101 Differential Calculus and Integral Calculus 3.0 3.0 Mathematics
PHY 101 Wave Oscillation, Geometrical Optics and Basic Science
3.0 3.0
Modern Physics
GEBS 101 Bangladesh Studies 2.0 2.0 General Education
Sessional Courses
CHEM 102 Chemistry Lab 1.5 3.0 Basic Science
PHY 102 Physics Lab 1.5 3.0 Basic Science
ME 150 Mechanical Engineering Drawing 1.5 3.0 Interdisciplinary
SHOP 180 Workshop Practice Interdisciplinary
1.5 3.0
(Foundry, Welding and Machine Shop)
Total Course (5T+4S) 20.0 26.0
LEVEL-1 TERM-2
Credit Contact
Hours Hours
Theory
NAME 157 Hydrostatics and Stability 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 177 Thermal Engineering 3.0 3.0 Program Core
CSE 115 Computer Programming Language 3.0 3.0 Interdisciplinary
MATH 103 Differential Equation and Matrix 3.0 3.0 Mathematics
PHY 113 Structure of Matter, Electricity and Magnetism 3.0 3.0 Basic Science
Sessional
NAME 158 Basic Ship Design 1.5 3.0 Program Core
NAME 178 Thermal Engineering Lab 1.5 3.0 Program Core
LANG 102 Communicative English-I 1.5 3.0 Language
CSE 116 Computer Programming Lab 1.5 3.0 Interdisciplinary
28
LEVEL-2 TERM-1
Credit Contact
Hours Hours
Theory
NAME 201 Mechanics of Structure 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 205 Shipbuilding Materials and Metallurgy 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 207 Ship Design 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 213 Fluid Mechanics 3.0 3.0 Program Core
MATH 201 Vector Analysis, Laplace and Coordinate 3.0 3.0 Mathematics
Geometry
Sessional
NAME 208 Computer Aided Ship Design 2.0 4.0 Program Core
NAME 214 Fluid Mechanics Lab 1.5 3.0 Program Core
LANG 202 Communicative English-II 1.5 3.0 Language
LEVEL-2 TERM-2
Credit Contact
Hours Hours
Theory
NAME 253 Marine Hydrodynamics 3.0 3.0 Program Core
ME 277 Heat Transfer 3.0 3.0 Interdisciplinary
EECE 281 Marine Electrical and Electronics 4.0 4.0 Interdisciplinary
MATH 219 Statistics, Complex Variable and Fourier 3.0 3.0 Mathematics
Analysis
GELM 275 Leadership & Management 2.0 2.0 General Education
Sessional
NAME 202 Mechanics of Structure Lab 0.75 1.5 Program Core
NAME 206 Shipbuilding Materials and Metallurgy Lab 0.75 1.5 Program Core
NAME 254 Marine Hydrodynamics Lab 1.5 3.0 Program Core
NAME 258 Stability and Machinery Layout Design 1.5 3.0 Program Core
29
LEVEL-3 TERM-1
Credit Contact
Hours Hours
Theory
NAME 301 Ship Structure 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 315 Ship Construction and Welding Technology 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 353 Ship Resistance and Propulsion 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 311 Machine Elements Design 3.0 3.0 Program Core
GEE 303 Fundamentals of Economics 2.0 2.0 General Education
GES 305 Fundamentals of Sociology 2.0 2.0 General Education
Sessional
NAME 300 Ship Design Project 1.5 3.0 Program Core
NAME 308 Application of ship design software 1.5 3.0 Program Core
EECE 382 Marine Electrical and Electronics Lab 1.5 3.0 Interdisciplinary
Total Course (6T+2S+1P) 20.5 25.0
LEVEL-3 TERM-2
Credit Contact
Hours Hours
Theory
NAME 307 Design of Special Ships 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 309 Marine Engineering-I 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 363 Numerical Methods 3.0 3.0 Program Core
GESL 311 Environment, Sustainability and Industrial 2.0 2.0 General Education
Law
NAME 3XX Optional Course 1* 3.0 3.0 Technical Electives
Sessional
NAME 300 Ship Design Project 1.5 3.0 Program Core
NAME 310 Marine Engineering Lab-I 1.5 3.0 Program Core
NAME 354 Ship Resistance and Propulsion Lab 1.5 3.0 Program Core
GERM 352 Fundamentals of Research Methodology 2.0 4.0 General Education
Total Course (5T+3S+1P) 20.5 27.0
* Optional Courses will be offered as required from the subjects mentioned in para 4.5 (i).
30
LEVEL-4 TERM-1
Credit Contact
Hours Hours
Theory
NAME 403 Dynamics of Marine Vehicles 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 409 Marine Engineering -II 3.0 3.0 Program Core
GEA 407 Principles of Accounting 2.0 2.0 General Education
GEPM 471 Project Management and Finance 2.0 2.0 General Education
Sessional
NAME 400 Research Project/ Thesis 3.0 6.0 Program Core
NAME 464 Numerical Methods Lab 1.5 3.0 Program Core
NAME 450 Shipyard Practice/Industrial Training 1.5 4 Weeks Program Core
(4 Weeks)**
Total Course (5T+2S+1RP) 19.0 22.0+4 Weeks
* Optional Courses will be offered as required from the subjects mentioned in para 4.2.2 (ii)
** 04 Weeks Industrial/Shipyard Training course will be conducted as NAME-450 on completion of
level 3 before commencing level 4.
LEVEL-4 TERM-2
Credit Contact
Hours Hours
Theory
NAME 457 Maritime Economics and Management 3.0 3.0 Program Core
NAME 459 Marine Maintenance and Repair Engineering 3.0 3.0 Program Core
GEEM 441 Engineering Ethics and Moral Philosophy 2.0 2.0 General Education
Sessional
NAME 400 Research Project/Thesis 3.0 6.0 Program Core
NAME 410 Marine Engineering Lab-II 1.5 3.0 Program Core
NAME 490 Bangladesh Studies for Naval Architects 1.0 2.0 Program Core
Total Course (5T+2S+1RP) 19.5 25.0
* Optional Courses will be offered as required from the subjects mentioned in para 4.2.2 (ii).
31
4.2 .1 Program Core Courses
Course Type of Credit Level &

Ser. Course Title
Code Course Hour Term
1. NAME 107 Introduction to Naval Architecture and
Theory 3.00 L-1, T-1
Marine Engineering
2. NAME 157 Hydrostatics and Stability Theory 3.00 L-1, T-2
3. NAME 158 Basic Ship Design Sessional 1.50 L-1, T-2
4. NAME 177 Thermal Engineering Theory 3.00 L-1, T-2
5. NAME 178 Thermal Engineering Lab Sessional 1.50 L-1, T-2
6. NAME 201 Mechanics of Structure Theory 3.00 L-2, T-1
7. NAME 202 Mechanics of Structure Lab Sessional 0.75 L-2, T-1
8. NAME 205 Shipbuilding Materials and Metallurgy Theory 3.00 L-2, T-1
9. NAME 206 Shipbuilding Materials and Metallurgy Sessional 0.75 L-2, T-2
Lab
10. NAME 207 Ship Design Theory 3.00 L-2, T-1
11. NAME 208 Computer Aided Ship Design Sessional 2.00 L-2, T-1
12. NAME 213 Fluid Mechanics Theory 3.00 L-2, T-1
13. NAME 214 Fluid Mechanics Lab Sessional 1.50 L-2, T-1
14. NAME 253 Marine Hydrodynamics Theory 3.00 L-2, T-2
15. NAME 254 Marine Hydrodynamics Lab Sessional 1.50 L-2, T-2
16. NAME 258 Stability and Machinery Layout Design Sessional 1.50 L-2, T-2
17. NAME 300 Ship Design Project Sessional 3.00 L-3, T-1
18. NAME 301 Ship Structure Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1
19. NAME 307 Design of Special Ships Theory 3.00 L-3, T-2
20. NAME 308 Application of ship design software Sessional 3.00 L-3, T-1
21. NAME 309 Marine Engineering -I Theory 3.00 L-3, T-2
22. NAME 310 Marine Engineering Lab -I Sessional 1.50 L-3, T-2
23. NAME 311 Machine Elements Design Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1
24. NAME 315 Ship Construction and Welding Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1
Technology
25. NAME 353 Ship Resistance and Propulsion Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1
26. NAME 354 Ship Resistance and Propulsion Lab Sessional 1.50 L-3, T-2
27. NAME 363 Numerical Methods Theory 3.00 L-3, T-2
28. NAME 400 Research Project/ Thesis Sessional 6.00 L-4, T-1
29. NAME 403 Dynamics of Marine Vehicles Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1
30. NAME 409 Marine Engineering -II Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1
31. NAME 410 Marine Engineering Lab -II Sessional 1.50 L-4, T-2
32. NAME 450 Shipyard Practice/Industrial Training Sessional 1.50 L-4, T-1
33. NAME 457 Maritime Economics and Management Theory 3.00 L-4, T-2
34. NAME 459 Marine Maintenance and Repair Theory 3.00 L-4, T-2
Engineering
35. NAME 464 Numerical Methods Lab Sessional 1.50 L-4, T-1
36. NAME 490 Bangladesh Studies for Naval Sessional 1.00 L-4, T-2
Architects
4.2.2 Elective/Optional Courses
i. One theoretical course will be registered for level 3 term 2 as offered from the following list
(Optional 1):
Ser. Course Title
1. NAME 371 Finite Element Method for Ship Structure Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1/2
32
2. NAME 373 Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1/2
3. NAME 375 Composite Materials Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1/2
4. NAME 387 Port and Harbor Engineering Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1/2
5. NAME 389 Marine Production and Planning Theory 3.00 L-3, T-1/2
ii. One theoretical course will be registered at the first term of level four and two courses at the
second term of level four as offered from the following list (Optional 2,3,4):
6. NAME 431 Ship Hull Vibration Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2

7. NAME 435 Computer Aided Ship Production Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
8. NAME 437 Inland Water Transportation System Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
9. NAME 445 Dredger and Dredging Technology Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
10. NAME 447 Maritime Transportation System Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
11. NAME 453 Power and Propulsion System Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
12. NAME 463 Ship Performance Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
13. NAME 465 Navigation and Maritime Regulations Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
14. NAME 477 Control Engineering Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
15. NAME 481 Optimization Method in Ship Design Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
16. NAME 483 Theory of Hydrofoils Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
17. NAME 489 Introduction to Offshore Structure Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
18. NAME 493 Marine Acoustics Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
19. NAME 499 Shipyard Management Theory 3.00 L-4, T-1/2
4.2.3 Interdisciplinary Courses

Ser. Course Title
1. CSE 115 Computer Programming Language Theory 3.00 L-1, T-2
2. CSE 116 Computer Programming Language Lab Sessional 1.50 L-1, T-2
3. EECE 281 Marine Electrical and Electronics Theory 4.00 L-2, T-2
4. EECE 382 Marine Electrical and Electronics Lab Sessional 1.50 L-3, T-1
5. ME 150 Mechanical Engineering Drawing Sessional 1.50 L-1, T-1
6. SHOP 180 Workshop Practice Sessional
1.50 L-1, T-1
(Foundry, Welding and Machine Shop)
7. ME 277 Heat Transfer Theory 3.00 L-2, T-2
4.2.4 Science and Math Courses

Ser. Course Title
1. CHEM 101 Fundamentals of Chemistry Theory 3.00 L-1, T-1
2. CHEM 102 Chemistry Lab Sessional 1.50 L-1, T-1
3. PHY 101 Wave Oscillation, Geometrical Optics
and Modern Physics
4. PHY 102 Physics Lab Sessional 1.50 L-1, T-1
5. PHY 113 Structure of Matter, Electricity and
Magnetism
6. MATH 101 Differential and Integral Calculus Theory 3.00 L-1, T-1
7. MATH 103 Differential Equations and Matrix Theory 3.00 L-1, T-2
8. MATH 201 Vector Analysis, Laplace and
Coordinate Geometry
33
9. MATH 219 Statistics, Complex Variable and
Fourier Transform
4.2.5 Language Courses

Ser. Course Title
1. LANG 102 Communicative English-I Sessional 1.50 L-1, T-2
2. LANG 202 Communicative English-II Sessional 1.50 L-2, T-1
4.2.6 General Education Courses

Ser. Course Title
1. GEBS 101 Bangladesh Studies Theory 2.00 L-1, T-1
2. GELM 275 Leadership & Management Theory 2.00 L-2, T-2
3. GEE 303 Fundamentals of Economics Theory 2.00 L-3, T-1
4. GES 305 Fundamentals of Sociology Theory 2.00 L-3, T-1
5. GESL 311 Environment, Sustainability and Theory 2.00 L-3, T-2
Industrial Law
6. GERM 352 Fundamentals of Research
Sessional 2.00 L-3, T-2
Methodology
7. GEA 407 Principles of Accounting Theory 2.00 L-4, T-1
8. GEEM 441 Engineering Ethics and Moral Theory 2.00 L-4, T-2
Philosophy
9. GEPM 471 Project Management and Finance Theory 2.00 L-4, T-1
34
CHAPTER 5
COURSE DESCRIPTION
PROGRAM CORE COURSES

COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: NAME 107 Credit Hours: 3.0
Course Title: Introduction to Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering Contact Hours: 3.0
Level and Term: Level 1 Term 1
PRE-REQUISITE
None
CURRICULUM STRUCTURE
Outcome Based Education (OBE)
RATIONALE
Introduction to Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering is compulsory theoretical course which
will give a brief overview on basic naval architectural and marine engineering knowledge e.g. naval
architectural terms, ship dimensions and forms, various drawings in ship design. It also enables
students to familiarize themselves with ship propulsion system and machinery.
OBJECTIVES
1. To know ship‟s different terminology and identify them.
2. To make proficient to describe concepts regarding specification of ships dimensions and forms.
3. To enable achieving ability to explain displacement, lightweight, deadweight, capacity and
tonnage.
4. To enable to apply approximation methods to calculate area, centroid & volume.
5. To familiarize with General Arrangement (GA), shell expansion & lines plans.
COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)

On successful completion of this course, students should be able to:
1. Define ship‟s different terminology & identify them.
2. Comprehend basic ideas of specification of ships dimensions and forms, tonnage.
3. Calculate waterplane area, volume & prepare vessel‟s displacement curve.
4. Identify & describe General Arrangement (GA), shell expansion & lines plans.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to the course and naval architecture
2. The shape of a ship, Ship particulars, definition of various ship terms
3. Area, moments and centre of gravity calculations
4. Weight and centre of gravity, displacement and centre of buoyancy, Archimedes law of
floating bodies
5. Light weight, dead weight, capacity and tonnage, Sub-division elements of ship hull
6. Ship‟s form coefficients, their applicability and significance, calculation of form coefficients
35
7. Numerical integration in naval architecture: Simpson‟s rules, trapezoidal rule, five-eight-
minus one rule, application of these rules to find area, moment (first and second) of area,
centre of gravity calculation etc., errors and limitation of these rules
8. Ship geometry definition and representation, lines plan and offset table, sectional area curve
and its uses
9. Ship design procedure, various ship drawings and their content, use of these drawings
10. Introduction to ship propulsion arrangements, ship‟s propulsion system and her machinery;
deck machinery; arrangement of machinery
11. Introduction to ship systems: bilge ballast system, FO bunkering and delivery system, FW
system; fire-fighting system, black and grey water system, power generation and distribution
system etc.
12. Various ship fittings; spares; consumables and stores
MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM OUTCOMES
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (PO)

No. COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Define ship‟s different terminology &
CO1 √
identify them.
Comprehend basic ideas of specification of
CO2 √
ships dimensions and forms, tonnage.
Calculate waterplane area, volume & prepare
CO3 √
vessel‟s displacement curve.
Identify & describe General Arrangement
CO4 √
(GA), shell expansion & lines plans.
COURSE OUTCOMES & GENERIC SKILLS
Bloom’s Assessment
No. COURSE OUTCOMES (COs) CP CA KP
Taxonomy Methods
Define ship‟s different terminology &
CO1 C1 1-4 CT, F
identify them.
Comprehend basic ideas of
CT, Mid
CO2 specification of ships dimensions and C2 1-4
Term, F
forms, tonnage.
Calculate waterplane area, volume &
CO3 C3 1 5 CT/ASG, F
prepare vessel‟s displacement curve.
Identify & describe General
CO4 Arrangement (GA), shell expansion & C1 1-4 Mid Term, F
lines plans.
(C1 – Remember, C2 – Understand, C3 – Apply, C4 – Analyze, C5 – Evaluate, and C6 – Create;
CP- Complex Problems, CA-Complex Activities, KP-Knowledge Profile, T – Test, PR – Project,
Q – Quiz, ASG – Assignment, Pr – Presentation, R – Report, F – Final Exam, MT- Mid Term
Exam)
JUSTIFICATIONS OF CO-PO MAPPAING
36
Mapping Justifications
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to understand ship‟s
different terminology & identify them.
CO2-PO1 Students will be to comprehend basic ideas of specification of ships dimensions and
forms, tonnage with the help of fundamental engineering knowledge of the course.
CO3-PO3 Students will be to estimate waterplane area, volume & prepare vessel‟s
displacement curve to give design solution for ship design.
CO4-PO2 The engineering knowledge of the course will help the students to identify &
describe General Arrangement (GA), shell expansion & lines plans.
TEACHING METHODOLOGY
Lecture and Discussion, Co-operative and Collaborative Method, Problem Based Method
TEACHING LEARING STRATEGY
Engagement
Teaching and Learning Activities
(hours)
Face-to-Face Learning
Lecture 42
Practical / Tutorial / Studio -
Student-Centred Learning -
Self-Directed Learning
Non-face-to-face learning 30
Revision of the previous lecture at home 21
Preparation for final examination 21
Formal Assessment
Continuous Assessment 3
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Contents Assessment

Week 1 Ship’s terms
Class 1 Introduction to NAME
Class 2 Brief discussion on syllabus, Class Test (CT), mid-term and final exam,
mark distribution
Class 3 LOA, LBP, LWL, moulded breadth, moulded depth, moulded draught,
freeboard, air draft, camber, sheer
Week 2 Ship’s terms CT-1, Final
Class 4 Flare, stem, stern; skeg; transom; deck; poop deck; forcastle deck; „tween Exam
deck; deckhouse and superstructure;
Class 5 Ship‟s weight and centre of gravity, longitudinal centre of gravity (LCG);
vertical centre of gravity (VCG); importance of LCG and VCG in ship
design; trim; heel and list;
Class 6 Displacement, longitudinal centre of buoyancy, vertical centre of
buoyancy, Archimedes principle; Six degrees of motion of a ship: surge,
37
sway, heave, roll, pitch and yaw;
Week 3 Ship’s terms
Class 7 Light weight, dead weight, capacity; tonnage: net tonnage and gross
tonnage; International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships,
1969.
Class 8 Bulkhead: longitudinal and transverse, cofferdam, double bottom; double
hull;
Class 9 Miscellaneous terminology related to ship and ocean structure;
Week 4 Hull form coefficients
Class 10 Block coefficient, midship section coefficient, prismatic coefficient, water
plane area coefficient,
Class 11 Problem on form coefficients
Class 12 Assessment 01 (CT-1)
Week 5 Numerical integration in Naval Architecture [part 1] CT-2, Mid
Class 13 Numerical integration in naval architecture; the trapezoidal rule; error of Term, Final
integration in trapezoidal rule; Exam
Class 14 Mathematical problems on trapezoidal integration;
Class 15 Simpon‟s first rule; intermediate ordinate
Week 6 Numerical integration in Naval Architecture [part 2]
Class 16 Simpson‟s second rule; intermediate ordinate;
Class 17 Five-eight-minus one rule, six ordinates rule;
Class 18 Problems of Simpson's first and second rule;
Week 7 Ship geometry
Class 19 Ship coordinate system; ship geometry definition: keel; rise of floor; fall
in side; bilge radius; tumble home; parallel middle body; entrance, run;
angle of entrance; deadrise angle; kunckle; bulbous bow
Class 20 Station; waterline; buttock; diagonal; sectional area curve and its uses;
Week 8 Ship design procedure and main drawings
Class 22 Ship design process; Basic (main) drawings in ship design; Mid Term
Class 23 IACS and its members; mission and vision of IACS; Exam, Final
Class 24 General arrangement (GA) drawing of different types of ships; Exam
Week 9 Main (Basic) drawings in ship design
Class 25 Midship section; lines plan and offset table;
Class 26 Profile and deck plan; shell expansion;
Class 27 Machinery arrangement; accommodation arrangement; fire and safety
plan; mooring arrangement; system diagrams and other drawings;
Week 10 Ship propulsion system & Machinery
Class 28 Introduction to ship propulsion arrangements
Class 29 Machinery & equipment fitted onboard ship,
Machinery & fittings fitted on ship propulsion system
Class 30 Assessment 02(Mid-term exam)
Week 11 Ship propulsion system & Machinery
Class 31 Main propulsion engine, heat engine basics.
Class 32 Classification of engine
Class 33 Cycle of operation of engine
38
Week 12 Ship propulsion system & Machinery CT-3/
Class 34 Parts of engine Assignment,
Difference between diesel & petrol engine Final Exam
Class 35 Basic idea about other power generation machinery
Class 36 Revision of Ship propulsion system & Machinery
Week13 Ship systems
Class 37 Introduction to ship systems: bilge ballast system, FO bunkering and
delivery system,
Class 38 FW system; fire-fighting system, black and grey water system
Class 39 power generation and distribution system etc.
Week 14 Ship propulsion system & machinery
Class 40 Basic idea ship fittings, spares, consumables and stores.
Class 42 Course review
LINKAGE OF CO WITH ASSESSMENT METHODS & THEIR WEIGHTS
Components Grading COs Blooms Taxonomy

CO1 C1, C2
Class Test/
Continuous 20% CO2 C1,C2
Assignment 1-3
Assessment CO3 C3, C4
(40%) Class Participation 5% CO4 C1, A2
Mid term 15% CO2, CO4 C1, C2, C3
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2, C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C1, C3, C4
CO4 C2, C3, C4
Total Marks 100%
(CO = Course Outcome, C = Cognitive Domain, P = Psychomotor Domain, A = Affective Domain)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ship Knowledge, Klan Van Dokkam, Dokmer Publisher.

2. The Principles of Naval Architecture Series, The Geometry of Ships, John S. Letcher Jr.
SNAME
3. Reed‟s Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers, E.A. Stokoe, 2003, Thomas Reed
Publications.
4. Theoretical Naval Architecture, E.L. Attwood & H.S. Pengelly, 1962, Longmans Green &
Co. Ltd.
5. Basic Ship Theory, K.J. Rawson & E. C. Tupper, Vol. 1 & 2., Longman Group Limited.
6. A Textbook of Thermal Engineering, R.S. Khurmi & J.K. Gupta
39
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Hydrostatics and Stability Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This is a compulsory course enables students to learn the principles of equilibrium of forces act on a
floating body, means to asses intact and damage stability of ships and their statutory requirements.
This course also deals with launching of ships once it is built as well as the inclining experiment
which measures the weight and centre of gravity of lightship.
OBJECTIVES
1. To impart knowledge on hydrostatics calculations and hydrostatic curves.
2. To familiarize the students with the principle of intact and damage stability of ships.
3. To make proficient to produce ships‟ docking and launching calculations.
4. To enable to conduct inclining experiment and prepare report for approval or regulatory bodies.

1. Compute hydrostatic properties of ship and construct hydrostatic curves.
2. Comprehend basic ideas of intact and damage stability of ship.
3. Prepare vessel‟s docking and launching calculations.
4. Perform inclining experiment of floating structures.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction; concepts of equilibrium; weight and centre of gravity; displacement and centre of
buoyancy.
2. Initial stability; metacentric height: longitudinal and transverse metacentre; metacentric
diagram.
3. Hydrostatic properties; hydrostatic and Bonjean curves; their uses.
4. Statical stability, righting arm; curves of statical stability and its application; cross curves of
stability and its uses, effect of trim, depth and form on statical stability; significance of curve of
statical stability; dynamical stability and its measurement;
5. Free surface effect; calculation of free surface moments; effect of free surface on righting lever
curves; means to reduce free surface effect.
6. Weight and trim calculations; effect of change of water density; top weight etc.
7. Inclining experiment: purpose; preparation; experiment; calculation and generation of report.
40
8. Intact stability: measurement of stability; IMO code of intact stability: mandatory criteria for all
ships; stability criteria for special purpose ships; weather criterion; wind heeling moment; intact
stability load cases.
9. Subdivision and damage stability: effects of damage of ship hull; SOLAS conventions;
watertight subdivisions, curves of floodable length; permeability; evaluation of damage
stability: added weight and lost buoyancy method; deterministic and probabilistic means to
assess damage stability; sub-division length; factor of subdivision; required subdivision index;
attained subdivision index;
10. Stability during dry-docking; launching calculations.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Compute hydrostatic properties of ship and
CO1 √
construct hydrostatic curves.
Comprehend basic ideas of intact and damage
CO2 √
stability.
Prepare vessel‟s docking and launching
CO3 √
calculations.
Perform inclining experiment of floating
CO4 √
structure.
Taxonomy Methods
Compute hydrostatic properties of ship
CO1 C3 1 1-4 CT, F
and construct hydrostatic curves.
Comprehend basic ideas of intact and
CO2 C2 1 1-4 CT, MT, F
damage stability.
Prepare vessel‟s docking and
launching calculations.
Perform inclining experiment of
CO4 A2 1 8 MT, F
floating structures.
Exam)
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to calculate
hydrostatic parameters and develop the effects of draught change on them.
CO2-PO1 In order to identify the role and extent of hydrostatic parameters on the principles of
intact and damage stability of ships.
CO3-PO3 To analyze vessels‟ hydrostatic and hydrodynamic parameters for docking and
41
CO4-PO4 In order to ascertain the level of stability of the vessel and maintenance of upright
position at lightship/ designated loading conditions.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction, course administration, motivation lecture
Class 2 Concepts of equilibrium: stable, neutral and unstable equilibrium; weight
and centre of gravity; displacement and centre of buoyancy;
Class 3 Interaction between weight and buoyancy; righting moment; overturning
moment; upsetting forces on a ship; submerged equilibrium;
Week 2 Vessels weights, centre of gravity and metacentric height CT 1,
Class 4 Determining vessels weights and centre of gravity; Final Exam
Class 5 Initial stability and metacentric height; Transverse metacentre and
transverse metacentric height; location of transverse metacentric height;
metacentric diagram; Stiff Ship and Tender Ship.
Class 6 Longitudinal metacentre and longitudinal metacentric height; location of
longitudinal metacentric height; application of metacentric height
Week 3 Hydrostatic curves
Class 7 Waterplane area; centre of floatation (LCF); moment of inertia of the
water plane area; displacement; centre of buoyancy (LCB, VCB);
Class 8 TPC; BMT; BML; MCT1cm; KML; KMT; wetted surface area
Class 9 Hydrostatic curves, Bonjean curves and their uses
Week 4 Statical stability at large angles of heel [part-1]
Class 10 Assessment 1
Class 11 Righting arm; curves of statical stability; down-flooding angle;
42
Class 12 Effect of freeboard and metacentric height on righting arm curves; angle
of loll; dynamical stability;
Week 5 Statical stability at large angles of heel [part-2]
Class 13 Cross curves of stability; computation of righting arm curves; effect of
beam and depth on statical stability; CT 2,
Class 14 Effect of changes of from on statical stability; Significance of the statical Final Exam
stability curve.
Class 15 Representation of heeling moment
Week 6 Effect of free liquids
Class 16 Free-surface effect; evaluation of effect of free-surface on metacentric
height;
Class 17 Evaluation of effect of free-surface on righting arm;
Class 18 Reduction of free surface effect;
Week 7 Weight and Trim calculations [part-1]
Class 20 Weight groups; weight and centre of gravity calculations;
Class 21 Draught marks; trim; trimming moment
Week 8 Weight and Trim calculations [part-2]
Class 22 Finding trim and draughts at perpendiculars; Mid Term,
Class 23 Determining draught after change in loading; Final Exam
Class 24 Mid-term exam
Week 9 The inclining experiment
Class 25 Determining displacement and center of gravity from drafts;
Class 26 The inclining experiment; determination of inclining weight;
Class 27 Inclining experiment setup; determination of lightship and centre of
gravity of vessel;
Week 10 IMO code of intact stability [part-1]
Class 28 Watertight and weathertight opening; down-flooding points; deck edge
immersion angle;
Class 29 The IMO code of intact stability; criteria regarding righting lever curve
properties; Mid Term,
Class 30 Wind speed; gust; roll period; severe wind and rolling criterion (weather Final Exam
criterion);
Week 11 IMO code of intact stability [part-2]
Class 31 Special criteria for certain types of ships: passenger ships;
oil tankers (> 5000 tdw); cargo ships carrying grain in bulk;
Class 32 Pontoons; Tugs; Fishing vessels;
Class 33 Intact stability load cases
Week 12 Subdivision and damage stability [part-1]
Class 34 Watertight bulkhead; bulkhead deck; margin line; permeability; floodable
length; symmetrical and unsymmetrical flooding; cross-flooding;
Class 35 Extent of damage; effects of flooding; method of lost buoyancy and
added weight;
Class 36 Final draughts of a ship after damage (sinkage, trim and heel);
Week13 Subdivision and damage stability [part-2]
Class 37 Curve of floodable length and its significance; direct and approximate
43
method to calculate floodable length
Class 38 IMO SOLAS convention, Chapter II-1, Part B-Subdivision and stability; CT 3,
Class 39 Subdivision length; factor of subdivision; required subdivision index; Final Exam
attained subdivision index;
Week 14 Launching calculations
Class 41 Stability during drydocking; launching calculations;

Class Test/ CO1, CO2, CO3 C1, C2, C4
20%
Continuous Assignment 1-3 CO3 C3, C4
Assessment Class CO1, CO2, CO3,
5% C6, A2
(40%) Participation CO4
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. The Principles of Naval Architecture, Vol 1, Stability and Strength, Published by SNAME
2. Ship Hydrostatics and Stability, Adrian Biran
Publications.
4. Theoretical Naval Architecture, E.L. Attwood & H.S. Pengelly, 1962, Longmans Green
& Co. Ltd.
6. Ship Stability for Masters and Mates, D. R Derrett.
44
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Basic Ship Design Contact Hours: 3.00
Level and Term: Level 1, Term 2
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This is a compulsory sessional course designed to teach students about the basic design drawings of
different types of ship. Students will be able to perform necessary calculations related to the basic
design, trim and stability calculations. It is expected that students can develop critical thinking behind
each design features, able to check effects of those features using calculations and finally select the
appropriate feature.
OBJECTIVES
1. To familiarize students with different types of ships, their General Arrangement and enable
them to produce the same.
2. To acquaint students with the Lines Plan and teach them to draw Lines Plan in different scales
including Bonjean curves.
3. To enable students to compute hydrostatic properties and to draw hydrostatic curves of ships.
4. To evaluate trim and stability calculations of ship with respect to statutory requirement.

1. Produce General Arrangement of different types of ships.
2. Develop Lines Plan of ships.
3. Assess the loading on vessel using Bonjean curves.
4. Compute hydrostatic properties of ships to produce hydrostatic curves and prepare trim and
stability calculation on ship design
COURSE CONTENTS
1. General arrangement (GA) plan drawing,
2. Lines plan drawing, Bonjean curves,
3. Hydrostatic calculations, and Stability and cross curves,
4. Trim calculations,
5. Inclining Experiment.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

No. COURSE OUTCOME (COs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO1 Produce general arrangement of ships √
45
and floating structures.
CO2 Develop lines plan of ship. √
Assess the loading on vessel using
CO3 √
Bonjean curves
Compute hydrostatic properties of ships
to produce hydrostatic curves and
CO4 √
prepare trim and stability calculation
on ship design
No. Course Outcome CP CA KP
Taxonomy Methods
Produce general arrangement of
CO1 C3 - - R,Q,T
ships and floating structures.
CO2 Develop lines plan of ship. C3 - - R,Q,T
Assess the loading on vessel
CO3 C3, C3 1 1-4 R,Q,T
using Bonjean curves
Compute hydrostatic properties
of ships to produce hydrostatic
CO4 curves and prepare trim and C3 1 1-4 R,Q,T
stability calculation on ship
design
Exam)
CO1-PO12 In order to develop concept design and general arrangement plan.
CO2-PO12 To link up the general arrangement to lines plan and offset table.
CO3-PO1 In order to assess the loading on vessel using Bonjean curves.
In order to practice hydrostatic calculations, trim and stability criteria at different
CO4-PO1
loading conditions.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
46
Total 120
Lecture followed by hands on drawing session and discussion, co-operative and collaborative method,
project based method
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topics
Week 1 Course introduction, Introduction to general arrangement plan, objectives,
components, different types of GA, etc.
Week 2 Drawing of General Arrangement Plan
Week 3 Review of General Arrangement Plan
Week 4 Introduction to Lines Plan, Drawing of Lines Plan
Week 5 Review of Lines Plan drawing
Week 6 Drawing of Bonjean Curves
Week 7 Mid Viva
Week 8 Hydrostatic Calculation Using Excel
Week 11 Intact stability calculations
Week 12 Cross curve of stability
Week 14 Inclining experiment
Week 13 Final Viva
Components Grading COs Bloom’s Taxonomy

CO 1 C1, C3,A1
Lab participation CO 2 C4, C5, A1
20%
and Report CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
Continuous
CO 1 C1, C3,C4
Assessment
CO 2 C4, C5, P1
(40%) Labtest-1,Labtest-2 30%
CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
Project and
25% CO 1, CO 2, CO 3 A1, A2, A3, A4
Presentation
CO 1 CO 2
CO 2 CO 3
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C3, P6, P7
CO 4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Reed‟s Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers, E.A. Stoked, 2003, Thomas Reed Publications.
47
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Thermal Engineering Contact Hours: 3.0
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course will provide the basic knowledge of thermal engineering, which will function as
foundation in applications in major fields of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering notably in
heat engines, air conditioning, refrigeration, steam turbine and gas turbine system.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce the basic concepts of thermodynamics, laws of thermodynamics and practical
applications of thermodynamics
2. To familiarize with various types of air standard cycles and their applications.
3. To familiarize with various types of non-conventional power generation system

1. Describe the basic concepts of Thermal Engineering.
2. Explain and apply basic thermodynamic principles and laws to analyse and predict
performance of idealized forms of thermodynamic systems.
3. Relate idealized thermodynamic cycles to corresponding real systems.
4. Explain properties of steam
5. Identify components of IC engine, refrigeration system, air conditioning system and steam
boiler and perform calculations of their efficiency.
6. Describe sources of non-conventional energy.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction and Basic Concepts of Thermodynamics and Thermal Engineering

Basic concepts of thermodynamics: introduction, applications, system, surrounding universe,
zeroth law, properties of a system, state, process, path function, cycle, pure substance, control
volume, work interaction and closed system work. Ideal gas equation for various process,
closed system work for various process, open system work for various process.
2. First Law and its application (Non Flow Process)
Concept of heat and specific heat, first law of thermodynamics. Energy of an isolated system,
PMM-I, concept of internal energy and enthalpy. Heat transfer for various process for closed
system. Meyer‟s Equation, important thermodynamic relations and cycle concepts, polytrophic
48
and adiabatic process.
3. Second Law of Thermodynamics and Entropy
Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statement, Equivalence of Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statement.
Carnot Cycle, Carnot theorem, corollary of Carnot theorem and efficiency and COP of
reversible cycle, Clausius inequality, numerical problem based on 2 nd law of thermodynamics.
4. Gas Power Cycles and Application
Basic consideration in the analysis of power cycle, air standard assumptions, an overview of
reciprocating engine, Otto Cycle, Diesel Cycle, Brayton Cycle, Dual Combustion Cycle.
5. Properties of pure substance and Mixture of Gas and Vapor
Formation and Properties of Steam and Entropy of Steam, Properties of T-H diagram, T-V
diagram, P-V diagram, T-S and H-S diagram for water and steam, Mollier Diagram,
terminologies for steam, Advantages of Superheated steam, Entropy of water, dry steam,
superheated steam.
6. Internal Combustion Engine Basics
Concept on Heat Engine and classifications, IC engine basic components, Working Principle of
a two stroke/ four stroke Engine, Advantages & Disadvantages.
7. Refrigeration, Air Conditioning System and Phychrometry
Basic concepts on Refrigeration and Air Conditioning, Type of Refrigeration Process,
Schematic and T-S Diagram Refrigeration cycle, Air Conditioning Types, Study of
psychrometric chart
8. Steam Boiler and Steam Turbine
Classification of boilers by mentioning the bases, Different types of boiler with their schematic
and salient features, four accessories of Boiler: function and uses, Use of air-preheater, super-
heater, fusible plug and safety valve for a boiler. Steam turbine cycle, Schematic and T-S
diagram, Turbine Staging; Pressure and velocity profile of turbine, Combined Cycle Power
Plant (CCPP).
9. Non-Conventional Power Generation
Basic concepts on non-conventional/ renewable energy sources, thermal power plants, Solar
Energy, Geothermal Energy, Energies from Sea, Nuclear Energy and Nuclear Power Plant.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe the basic concepts of Thermal
CO1 Engineering. √
Explain and apply basic thermodynamic
principles and laws to analyse and predict
CO2 √
performance of idealized forms of
thermodynamic systems.
Relate idealized thermodynamic cycles to √
CO3
corresponding real systems.
CO4 Explain properties of steam √
Identify components of IC engine,
refrigeration system, air conditioning system
CO5 √
and steam boiler and perform calculations of
their efficiency.
CO6 Describe sources of non-conventional energy. √
49
Taxonomy Methods
Describe the basic concepts of Thermal
CO1 C1 1 CT
Engineering.
Explain and apply basic
thermodynamic principles and laws to
CO2 analyse and predict performance of C2,C3 1 1-4 CT/ASG, F
idealized forms of thermodynamic
systems.
Relate idealized thermodynamic cycles
CO3 C3 1-4 MT, F
to corresponding real systems.
CO4 Explain properties of steam C2 1
Identify components of IC engine,
refrigeration system, air conditioning
CO5 C1, A2 1 2-4 CT, F
system and steam boiler and perform
calculations of their efficiency.
Describe sources of non-conventional
CO6 C1 1 Pr, MT, F
energy.
CP- Complex Problems, CA-Complex Activities, KP-Knowledge Profile, T – Test, PR – Project, Q
– Quiz, ASG – Assignment, Pr – Presentation, R – Report, F – Final Exam, MT- Mid Term Exam)
CO1-PO1 Students will be able to understand and describe the basic concepts of thermal
engineering with the help of the basic fundamental knowledge of the course.
CO2-PO2 Students will gain knowledge on basic thermodynamic principles, laws and
formulation. With the help of this knowledge, they will be able to analysis the
problems related to thermodynamic systems and predict performances applying
mathematics.
CO3-PO1 Applying basic knowledge of the thermodynamic cycles, students will be able to
relate the idealized form of cycle with corresponding real systems.
CO4-PO1 Gaining fundamental knowledge on properties of steam, students will be able to
explain properties of steam.
CO5-PO2 Students will gain the ability to identify the components of IC engine, refrigeration
system, air conditioning system and steam boiler and they will be able to perform
calculations of efficiency of mentioned systems applying the knowledge of
mathematical formulation.
CO6-PO1 Students will be able to describe sources of non-conventional energy with the basic
knowledge of natural science.
50
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction and Basic Concepts of Thermodynamics and Thermal
Engineering
Class 1 Basic concepts of thermodynamics: introduction, applications, system,
surrounding universe
Class 2 Basic concepts of thermodynamics: zeroth law, properties of a system,
state, process, cycle, pure substance, control volume
Class 3 Work interaction and closed system work (Work is related to a system and CT 1
surrounding closed system work = ∫ )
Engineering (Contd.)
Class 4 a) Ideal gas equation for various process
b) Closed system work for various process
Class 5 a) Key note (observation of thermodynamic process)
b) open system work
Class 6 Numerical problems based on
a) Thermodynamic work done concepts
b) Thermodynamic work done and cycle concept
c) Tutorial
Engineering (Contd.)
c) Tutorial
51
c) Tutorial
First Law and its application (Non Flow Process)
Class 9 a) Concept of heat and specific heat
b) First law of thermodynamics, first law for a cycle and sign
convention
c) Heat is a path function and energy or internal energy is a property.
Week 4 First Law and its application (Non Flow Process) (Contd.)
Class 10 a) Energy of an isolated system, PMM-I CT 2,
b) Concept of internal energy and enthalpy. Final Exam
c) Heat transfer for various process for closed system.
Class 11 a) Meyer‟s Equation,
b) Important thermodynamic relations and air standard values
c) Specific heat for polytrophic process
Class 12 a) Adiabatic process
b) Numerical based of 1st law of thermodynamics
Week 5 Second Law of Thermodynamics and Entropy
Class 13 a) Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statement
b) Equivalence of Kelvin-Planck and Clausius statement.
c) Carnot Cycle
Class 14 a) Carnot theorem
b) Corollary of Carnot theorem and efficiency and COP of reversible
cycle,
c) Clausius inequality
Class 15 Numerical based on 2nd law of thermodynamics
Week 6 Gas Power Cycles and Application
Class 16 a) Basic consideration in the analysis of power cycle
b) Air standard assumptions
c) An overview of reciprocating engine
Class 17 Application – I:
Otto Cycles: The ideal cycle for spark ignition engine Mid Term,
Class 18 Application – II: Final Exam,
Diesel Cycles: The ideal cycle for compression ignition engine Presentatio
Week 7 Gas Power Cycles and Application (Contd.) n
Class 19 Application – III:
Brayton Cycles: The ideal cycle for gas turbine engine
Class 20 Numerical on Gas Cycle
Class 21 Numerical on Gas Cycle
Week 8 Non-Conventional Power Generation
Class 22 Non-Conventional Power Generation
Class 23 Review Class
Week 9 Properties of pure substance and Mixture of Gas and Vapor
Class 25 Formation and Properties of Steam and Entropy of Steam, Properties of T-H
diagram, T-V diagram, P-V diagram, T-S and H-S diagram for water and
steam
Class 26 Mollier Diagram, terminologies for steam, Advantages of Superheated
steam, Entropy of water, dry steam, superheated steam Final Exam
52
Class 27 Numerical Problems on steam properties
Week 10 Internal Combustion Engine Basics
Class 28 Concept on Heat Engine and classifications, IC engine basic components
Class 29 IC engine basic components
Class 30 Working principle of a two stroke/ four stroke Engine
Week 11 Refrigeration, Air Conditioning System and Phychrometry
Class 31 Basic concepts on refrigeration and air conditioning, type of refrigeration
Process
Class 32 Schematic and T-S diagram refrigeration cycle, COP
Class 33 Numerical problems on refrigeration system
Week 12 Refrigeration, Air Conditioning System and Phychrometry (Contd.) and
Steam Turbine CT 3,
Class 34 Air Conditioning types, study of psychrometric chart Final Exam
Class 35 Steam turbine cycle, Schematic and T-S diagram
Class 36 Turbine Staging; Pressure and velocity profile of turbine, Combined Cycle
Power Plant (CCPP)
Week13 Steam Turbine and Steam Boiler (Contd.)
Class 37 Numerical on steam turbine
Class 38 Classification of boilers by mentioning the bases, Different types of boiler
with their schematic and salient features,
Class 39 Four accessories of Boiler: function and uses, Use of air-preheater, super-
heater, fusible plug and safety valve for a boiler.
Week 14

Class Test/ CO1, CO2, CO5 C1,C2,C3
Continuous 20%
Assignment 1-3 CO2 C2,C3
Assessment
Class Participation 5% CO1-CO6 C1, C2, C3, A2
(40%)
Mid term 15% CO3, CO6 C1, C3
CO2 C2,C3
CO3 C3
Final Exam 60% CO4 C2
CO5 C1,A2
CO6 C1
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach-Yunus A. Cengel,Michael A. Boles
2. Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics- Michael J. Moran &Howard N. Shapiro.
3. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics – R E Sonntag, C. Borgnakke, G J. Van Wylen.
53
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: NAME 178 Contact Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Thermal Engineering Lab Credit Hours: 1.50
RE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The course aims to equip students with basic tools and methodologies for carrying out thermodynamic
analyses of engineering systems. With the completion of each experiments, student will gradually
develop the ability to compare and apply the theories of thermodynamic principles in the real life
applications of thermal engineering notably in properties of fuels, heat engine, refrigeration and
conditioning system, steam generation etc.
OBJECTIVES
1. To expose the students to the basic knowledge of thermal equipment and help them to develop
experimental skills.
2. To familiarize equipment used for measuring viscosity, flash and fire point and Calorific value
of fuels/lubricates used in IC Engines.
3. To familiarize with various types IC engines and their components.
4. To introduce with the models of refrigeration, air conditioning, steam turbine and gas turbine to
know about their operating principles.

1. Conduct experiments for the determination of viscosity, calorific value, flash point etc. of
fuel/Lubricates oil.
2. Identify various components of IC engine.
3. Perform energy analysis of refrigeration and air conditioning system.
4. Describe the operation and compute performance of a steam turbine and gas turbine.
5. Use modern experimental tools to conduct the experiments related to thermodynamic system.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Viscosity Test of a Lubricant Oil
2. Determination of Flash Point of Liquid Fuel
3. Calorific value of Gaseous Fuel by Gas Calorimeter
4. Proximate Analysis of Coal
5. Determination of Carbon Residue of a Given Fuel
6. Study of Various Components of an I.C Engine
7. Study of a Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Unit
8. Study of Sling Psychrometer
54
9. Study of a Gas Turbine.
10. Study the working and function of mountings and accessories in boilers.
11. Study of a steam turbine.

No. Course Outcomes (COs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Conduct experiments for the
determination of viscosity, calorific
CO1 √
value, flash point etc. of fuel/Lubricates
oil.
Identify various components of IC
CO2 √
engine.
Perform energy analysis of refrigeration
CO3 √
and air conditioning system.
Describe the operation and compute
CO4 performance of a steam turbine and gas √
turbine.
Use modern experimental tools to
CO5 conduct the experiments related to √
thermodynamic system.
Taxonomy Methods
Conduct experiments for the
determination of viscosity,
CO1 C3 1 1-4 R,Q,T
calorific value, flash point etc. of
fuel/Lubricates oil.
Identify various components of IC
CO2 C1 1,2 R,Q,T
engine.
Perform energy analysis of
CO3 refrigeration and air conditioning A2 1 1-4 R,Q,T
system.
Describe the operation and
CO4 compute performance of a steam C1,C3 1-4 R,Q,T
turbine and gas turbine.
Use modern experimental tools to
CO5 conduct the experiments related to C3 6 PR, Pr, T
thermodynamic system.
55
Fundamental knowledge of mathematics and physics is required conduct
CO1-PO1 experiments for the determination of viscosity, calorific value, flash point etc. of
fuel/Lubricates oil
After familiarization with various components of IC engine, the students should be
CO2-PO1
able to identify these components and describe their functions.
The students should be able to analyze the energy and performance of refrigeration
CO3-PO2
and air conditioning process.
Fundamental knowledge on steam turbine and steam boiler will help the students to
CO4-PO1
understand the basic operating principle of them.
The students will acquire knowledge in modern tools that has been used to carry
CO5-PO5
out various experiments of thermodynamic system.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Preparation of Lab Reports 24
Preparation of Lab-test 9
Preparation of Quiz 9
Preparation of Presentation 5
Engagement in Group Projects 20
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
Lecture followed by practical experiments and discussion, Co-operative and Collaborative Method,
Project Based Method
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topics
Week 1 Course introduction
Week 2 a) Viscosity Test of Liquid Substance
b) Study of Different Speed Measuring Devices
Week 3 Determination of Flash Point of Liquid Fuel
Week 4 Calorific value of Gaseous Fuel by Gas Calorimeter
Week 5 Proximate Analysis of Coal
Week 6 a) Determination of Carbon Residue of a Given Fuel
b) Concept of pressure and pressure sensor Behavior
56
Week 7 Lab Test-1
Week 8 a) Study of Various Components of an I.C Engine
b) I.C engine valve timing diagram
Week 9 a) Study of a Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Unit.
b) Study of Sling Psychrometer
Week 10 Study of a Gas Turbine.
Week 11 a) Study the working and function of mountings and accessories in boilers
b) Study of a steam turbine
Week 12 Lab Test-2
Week 13 Viva
Week 14 Final Quiz
Bloom’s
Components Grading COs
Taxonomy
CO1 C3
Lab participation CO2 C1
20%
and Report CO3 A2
CO4 C1,C3
Continuous CO1 C3
Assessment CO2 C1
Labtest-1,Labtest-
(40%) 30% CO3 A2
2
CO4 C1,C3
CO5 C3
Project and
25% CO5 C3
Presentation
CO1 C3
CO2 C1
Lab Quiz 25%
CO3 A2
CO4 C1,C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Thermodynamics: An Engineering Approach-Yunus A. Cengel,Michael A. Boles
2. Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics- Michael J. Moran &Howard N. Shapiro.
3. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics – R E Sonntag, C. Borgnakke, G J. Van Wylen.
57
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Mechanics of Structure Contact Hours: 3.00
Level and Term: Level 2 Term I
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course is intended to provide students with a thorough understanding of the theory and
application of structural analysis as it applies to columns, beams and frames. Emphasis is
placed on developing the student's ability to calculate the deflection of beam, shear force and
bending moment.
OBJECTIVES
1. To evaluate stress and deformation of simple deformable structural under shear, flexure and
torsional loadings.
2. To analyze statically indeterminate structure.
3. To analyze deflection of beam and shaft.
4. To establish the stress transformation equations and determine the absolute maximum normal
and shear stress.
5. To analyze various situations involving structural members subjected to combined stresses by
application of Mohr‟s circle of stress.

1. Explain the concepts and principles of structural stability and mechanical components.
2. Perform calculation and drawing of shear force and bending moment at different loading
conditions.
3. Analyze various situations involving structural members subjected to combined stresses by
application of Mohr‟s circle of stress.
4. Evaluate the deflection of a beam and buckling of a column subjected to loads.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Mechanics of Structure: Basic Concept of Mechanics, Importance of
Mechanics of Structure in Ship Design, History of Structural Failure of Ships. Centroids of
Plane Areas, Centroids of Composite Areas, Moments of Inertia of Plane Areas, Parallel-Axis
Theorem for Moments of Inertia, Polar Moments of Inertia, Products of Inertia, Rotation of
Axes, Principal Axes and Principal Moments of Inertia.
2. Tension, Compression, and Shear: Normal Stress and Strain, Mechanical Properties of
Materials, Elasticity, Plasticity, and Creep, Linear Elasticity, Hooke‟s Law, and Poisson‟s Ratio,
Shear Stress and Strain, Allowable Stresses and Allowable Loads, Design for Axial Loads and
58
Direct Shear, Problems.
3. Axially Loaded Members: Changes in Lengths of Axially Loaded Members, Changes in
Lengths Under Non uniform Conditions, Statically Indeterminate Structures, Thermal Effects,
Misfits, and Prestrains, Stresses on Inclined Sections, Strain Energy, Impact Loading, Repeated
Loading and Fatigue, Stress Concentrations, Nonlinear Behavior, Elastoplastic Analysis,
Problems.
4. Torsion: Torsional Deformations of a Circular Bar, Circular Bars of Linearly Elastic Materials,
Non-uniform Torsion, Stresses and Strains in Pure Shear, Relationship Between Moduli of
Elasticity E and G, Transmission of Power by Circular Shafts, Statically Indeterminate Torsional
Members, Strain Energy in Torsion and Pure Shear, Thin-Walled Tubes, Stress Concentrations
in Torsion, Problems.
5. Shear Forces and Bending Moments: Types of Beams, Loads, and Reactions, Shear Forces
and Bending Moments, Relationships Between Loads, Shear Forces, and Bending Moments,
Shear-Force and Bending-Moment Diagrams, Problems.
6. Stresses in Beams: Pure Bending and Non-Uniform Bending, Curvature of a Beam,
Longitudinal Strains in Beams, Normal Stresses in Beams, Design of Beams for Bending
Stresses, Non-prismatic Beams, Shear Stresses in Beams of Rectangular Cross Section, Shear
Stresses in Beams of Circular Cross Section, Shear Stresses in the Webs of Beams with Flanges,
Built-Up Beams and Shear Flow, Beams with Axial Loads, Stress Concentrations in Bending,
Problems.
7. Analysis of Stress and Strain: Plane Stress, Principal Stresses and Maximum Shear Stresses,
Mohr‟s Circle for Plane Stress, Hooke‟s Law for Plane Stress, Triaxial Stress, Plane Strain,
Problems.
8. Applications of Plane Stress: Spherical Pressure Vessels, Cylindrical Pressure Vessels,
Maximum Stresses in Beams, Combined Loadings, Problems.
9. Deflections of Beams: Differential Equations of the Deflection Curve, Deflections by
Integration of the Bending-Moment Equation, Deflections by Integration of the Shear-Force and
Load Equations, Method of Superposition, Moment-Area Method, Non-prismatic Beams, Strain
Energy of Bending, Castigliano‟s Theorem, Deflections Produced by Impact, Discontinuity
Functions, Use of Discontinuity Functions in Determining Beam Deflections, Temperature
Effects, Problems.
10. Statically Indeterminate Beams: Types of Statically Indeterminate Beams, Analysis by the
Differential Equations of the Deflection Curve, Method of Superposition, Temperature Effects,
Longitudinal Displacements at the Ends of a Beam, Problems.
11. Columns: Buckling and Stability, Columns with Pinned Ends, Columns with Other Support
Conditions, Columns with Eccentric Axial Load, The Secant Formula for Columns, Elastic and
Inelastic Column Behavior, Inelastic Buckling, Design Formulas for Columns, Problems.
12. Various Theories of Failure: Maximum Principal Stress theory also known as Rankine‟s
Theory, Maximum Shear Stress theory or Guest And Tresca‟s Theory, Maximum Principal
Strain theory also known as St.Venant‟s Theory, Total Strain Energy Theory or Haigh‟s Theory,
Maximum Distortion Energy theory or Vonmises and Hencky‟s Theory.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
59
Explain the concepts and principles of
CO1 structural stability and mechanical √
components.
Perform calculation and drawing of shear
CO2 force and bending moment diagrams at √
different loading conditions.
Analyze various situations involving
structural members subjected to combined
CO3 √
stresses by application of Mohr‟s circle of
stress.
Evaluate the deflection of a beam and
CO4 √
buckling of a column subjected to loads.
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the concepts and principles of
CO1 structural stability and mechanical C2 1 1-4 CT, F
components.
Perform calculation and drawing of
shear force and bending moment
CO2 A2 1 1-4 CT, MT, F
diagrams at different loading
conditions.
Analyze various situations involving
structural members subjected to
combined stresses by application of
Mohr‟s circle of stress.
Evaluate the deflection of a beam and
CO4 C5 1 1-4 MT, F
buckling of a column subjected to loads.
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to calculate stress-strain
of mechanical components.
CO2-PO1 In order to apply the mathematics knowledge on load, shear force and bending
moment equations to draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams.
CO3-PO3 To design structural members subjected to combined stresses to solve by using
Mohr‟s circle of stress.
CO4-PO2 In order to analyze the deflection and buckling equations to solve the beam and
column related problems at different loading conditions.
60
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week 1 Introduction to Mechanics of Structure

Class 1 Basic Concept of Mechanics, Importance of Mechanics of Structure in
Ship Design, History of Structural Failure of Ships.
Class 2 Centroids of Plane Areas, Moments of Inertia of Plane Areas, Parallel-
Axis Theorem for Moments of Inertia.
Class 3 Polar Moments of Inertia, Rotation of Axes, Principal Axes and
Principal Moments of Inertia.
Week 2 Tension, Compression, and Shear
Class 4 Normal Stress and Strain, Mechanical Properties of Materials,
Elasticity, Plasticity, and Creep, Linear Elasticity. CT-1
Class 5 Hooke‟s Law, and Poisson‟s Ratio, Shear Stress and Strain, Allowable Final
Stresses and Allowable Loads, Design for Axial Loads and Direct Exam
Shear.
Class 6 Changes in Lengths of Axially Loaded Members, Changes in Lengths
Under Non uniform Conditions.
Week 3 Axially Loaded Members
Class 7 Statically Indeterminate Structures, Thermal Effects, Misfits, and
Prestrains.
Class 8 Stresses on Inclined Sections, Strain Energy, Impact Loading, Repeated
Loading and Fatigue, Stress Concentrations, Nonlinear Behavior
Class 9 Types of bars of varying sections, Stresses in the bars of different
sections.
Week 4 Torsion
CT-2
Class 10 Torsional Deformations of a Circular Bar, Circular Bars of Linearly
Final
Elastic Materials, Non-uniform Torsion.
Exam
Class 12 Stresses and Strains in Pure Shear, Relationship Between Moduli of
61
Elasticity E and G, Transmission of Power by Circular Shafts.
Week 5 Shear Forces and Bending Moments
Class 13 Statically Indeterminate Torsional Members, Strain Energy in Torsion
and Pure Shear, Thin-Walled Tubes, Stress Concentrations in Torsion.
Class 14 Types of Beams, Loads, and Reactions, Shear Forces and Bending
Moments.
Class 15 Relationships Between Loads, Shear Forces, and Bending Moments,
Shear-Force and Bending-Moment Diagrams
Week 6 Stresses in Beams
Class 16 Shear-Force and Bending-Moment Diagrams. (Continue)
Class 17 Pure Bending and Non-uniform Bending, Curvature of a Beam,
Longitudinal Strains in Beams.
Class 18 Normal Stresses in Beams, Design of Beams for Bending Stresses,
Non-prismatic Beams, Shear Stresses in Beams of Rectangular Cross
Section.
Week 7 Stresses in Beams
Class 19 Shear Stresses in Beams of Circular Cross Section, Shear Stresses in
the Webs of Beams with Flanges.
Class 20 Built-Up Beams and Shear Flow, Beams with Axial Loads, Stress
Concentrations in Bending.
Week 8 Mohr’s Circle
Class 22 Plane Stress, Principal Stresses and Maximum Shear Stresses
Class 23 Mohr‟s Circle for Plane Stress
Class 24 Application and Problems Mid
Week 9 Deflections of Beams Term,
Class 25 Differential Equations of the Deflection Curve, Deflections by Final
Integration of the Bending-Moment Equation. Exam
Class 26 Deflections by Integration of the Shear-Force and Load Equations,
Method of Superposition.
Class 27 Moment-Area Method, Non-prismatic Beams, Strain Energy of
Bending, Castigliano‟s Theorem.
Week 10 Statically Indeterminate Beams
Class 28 Types of Statically Indeterminate Beams, Analysis by the Differential
Equations of the Deflection Curve
Class 29 Method of Superposition, Temperature Effects, Longitudinal
Displacements at the Ends of a Beam.
Class 30 Application and Problems.
Week 11 Columns
Class 31 Mid-Term Exam
Class 32 Buckling and Stability, Columns with Pinned Ends. CT 3,
Class 33 Columns with Other Support Conditions, Columns with Eccentric Axial Final
Load. Exam
Week 12 Columns
Class 34 The Secant Formula for Columns, Elastic and Inelastic Column
Behavior.
62
Class 35 Inelastic Buckling, Design Formulas for Columns.
Week13 Various Theories of Failure
Class 37 Maximum Principal Stress theory also known as Rankine‟s Theory,
Maximum Shear Stress theory or Guest And Tresca‟s Theory
Class 38 Maximum Principal Strain theory also known as St.Venant‟s Theory,
Total Strain Energy Theory or Haigh‟s Theory
Week 14 Course review

Class Test/ CO1, CO2, CO3 C1, C2
20%
Assessment Class
5% CO2
(40%) Participation
CO1 C1, C2, , C4
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C5, C4
CO4 C5, C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mechanics of Structure, James M Gere

2. Mechanical Behavior of Materials, Meyers and Chawla
3. Strength of Material, Gupta and Khurmi
4. Mechanics of Material, Russell C Hibbeler
63
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Mechanics of Structure Lab Credit Hours: 0.75
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Mechanics of Structure Sessional course is designed to teach students about the basic concepts of
strength of materials such as analysis of material properties based on tension, compression, hardness,
bending, buckling, impact etc. Students will be able to perform necessary calculations related to the
tensile stress, compressive stress, and shear stress. It is expected that students will develop critical
thinking about to measure characteristics of strength of material precisely, able to check their effects
using calculations and finally chose the appropriate feature of structure.
OBJECTIVES
1. To impart knowledge about the fundamental concepts as stresses and strains, deformations and
displacements, elasticity and inelasticity, strain energy, and load-carrying capacity
2. To enable students to learn and appreciate how structural analysis and materials response are
intricately involved in the engineering product/device design process.
3. To familiarize the students with the effect of different types of stress on materials.
4. To enable students to know about the fundamental concepts of materials failures.

1. Measure tensile and compressive strength of a specimen for applying in a practical design-
based project work.
2. Evaluate hardness, impact strength, fatigue strength to analyze the application of a specific
material for a given design requirement for different loading conditions of structures.
3. Identify bending in beams and calculate the bending stresses which further builds the
foundation of using modern analysis software.
4. Assist in evaluating the capacity of a column to withstand compressive stresses for a safe and
sustainable design of ship‟s hull.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Study and Calibration of a Universal Testing Machine (UTM);
2. Tensile Test of Mild Steel Specimen;
3. Hardness Test of Metal Specimen;
4. Impact Test of Metal Specimen;
5. Column Test of Mild Steel Specimen;
6. Bending of a beam under point load.
64

No. Course Outcome
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Measure tensile and compressive strength
CO1 of a specimen for applying in a practical √
design-based project work.
Evaluate hardness, impact strength to
analyze the application of a specific
CO2 material for a given design requirements √
for different loading conditions of
structures.
Identify bending in beams and calculate
the bending stresses which further builds
CO3 √
the foundation of using modern analysis
software.
Assist in evaluating the capacity of a
column to withstand compressive stresses
CO4 √
for a safe and sustainable design of ship‟s
hull.
Taxonomy Methods
Measure tensile and compressive strength
CO1 of a specimen for applying in a practical P4 R,Q,T
design-based project work.
Evaluate hardness, impact strength to
analyze the application of a specific material
CO2 C5 R,Q,T
for a given design requirements for different
loading conditions of structures.
Identify bending in beams and calculate the
bending stresses which further builds the
CO3 A4 1 1-4 R,Q,T
foundation of using modern analysis
software.
Assist in evaluating the capacity of a column
CO4 to withstand compressive stresses for a safe A2 1 1-4 R,Q,T
and sustainable design of ship‟s hull.
65
The students will acquire knowledge on modern tools that can be used to find out
CO1-PO3
different structural problems.
Students will identify different structural problems and will try to reach the
CO2-PO2
solutions by applying acquired knowledge.
Fundamental knowledge structure failure will help the students to understand the
CO3-PO2
concept of safety factor.
Students will work as a team as well as individually to reach the solution of
CO4-PO9
structural based problems.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 5
Experiment 15
Formal Assessment 02
Total 60
Lecture followed by hands on experiment session and discussion, co-operative and collaborative
method, project-based method.
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topic
Week 1 Course introduction, Study and Calibration of a Universal Testing Machine (UTM)
Week 2 Tensile Test of Mild Steel Specimen
Week 3 Hardness Test of Metal Specimen
Week 4 Impact Test of Metal Specimen
Week 5 Column Test of Mild Steel Specimen
Week 6 Bending of a beam under point load
Week 7 Final Viva and Quiz

CO 1 C1, C3
Lab participation
20% CO 2 C4, A1
and Report
CO 3 C3, C4
66
Continuous CO 4 A2
Assessment CO 1 C1, C3
CO 2 C4, P1
Labtest-1,Labtest-2 30%
CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 A2
Project and
25% CO 1, CO 2, CO 3 A1, A2, A3
Presentation
CO 1 CO 2
CO 2 CO 3
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C3, P7
CO 4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Machine Design – Andrzej Golenko_

2. Theory of Machine and Mechanisms – Joseph E. Shigley, John Joseph Uicker
3. Standard Handbook of Machine Design – Joseph E. Shigley, Charles R. Mischke, Thomas
H.Brown
4. Design of Machine Elements – Sharma, C.S.
5. Theory and Problems of Machine Design –Hall, Holowenco and Laughlin
6. Theory of Machine – R.S. Khurmi and J. K. Gupta.
67
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Shipbuilding Materials and Metallurgy Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The knowledge of Shipbuilding Materials and Metallurgy course is intended to provide an integrated
approach, utilizing the materials science, and structural integrity principles as they apply to offshore
structures and ships. Students will be able to select appropriate materials for ships and marine
structure and components. It is expected that students will develop critical thinking to select optimum
material for marine structure on the basis of engineering and environment point of view.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable explain methods of production of cast iron, steel and nonferrous metals.
2. To enable explain the concepts on material property improvement and heat treatment
technology.
3. To familiarize with different marine engineering materials and essential criteria on different
applications.
4. To introduce the appropriate material depending on application and environment of marine
structure and ship.

1. Select materials for a particular application and different environment.
2. Interpret the design criteria of materials.
3. Apply appropriate technology on different materials, their processing and heat treatments in
suitable application in marine engineering fields.
4. Compare the materials and their properties used in the marine industry
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Metals as materials of construction: What is material Science and Engineering,
Classification of materials; Materials Design and Selection. Industrially significant
properties of metallic materials: Technological Significance; Terminology for Mechanical
Properties; Tensile test: Use of the stress-strain diagram, True Stress and True Strain; The
Bend test for Brittle materials; Hardness of Materials; Strain Rate Effects and Impact
Behavior; Fracture Mechanics; Micro-structural features of fracture in metallic materials,
ceramics, glasses and composites; Fatigue; Results and applications of fatigue test; Creep,
Stress Rupture and Stress Corrosion.
2. Production, properties and uses of Pig Iron, Cast Iron and Carbon Steels: Blast
68
Furnace production of Pig Iron; Bessemer process for the production of steel; The Open
Hearth Process. Phase diagrams, The Fe-Fe3C equilibrium diagram: Equilibrium diagrams,
Phase diagrams for two metals completely soluble in liquid and solid states, Two metals
completely soluble in the liquid state and completely insoluble in the solid state; Two
metals completely soluble in the liquid state but only partly soluble in the solid state; The
Eutectoid Reaction; The Iron-Iron Carbide Diagram
3. Heat treatment of Steel: Full Annealing; Spheroidizing; Stress-relief Annealing; Process
Annealing; Normalizing; Hardening, Austentizing Temperature, Mechanism of heat
removal during Quenching, Quenching medium; Tempering
4. Cast Iron, Alloy, tool, stainless, heat-resisting and creep resisting steels etc.: White Cast
Iron, Malleable Cast Iron, Pearlitic Malleable Iron, Gray Cast Iron, Mechanical properties
and applications of Gray Cast Iron, Silicon in Cast Iron, Alloy Cast Iron; Stainless steel
types.
5. Case hardening of steels: Carburizing; Nitriding; Cyaniding; Flame hardening; Induction
hardening.
6. Nonferrous alloys: Copper alloys, Brass alloys, Bronze alloys, Gun metal, Bearing
Materials, Aluminium alloys, Magnesium alloys, Tin alloys.
7. Protective Coatings. Cement, Timber, Rubber, Glass and Plastic
8. General steel grades and description of IACS requirement for shipbuilding materials.
MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES AND PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Select materials for a particular application and
CO1 √
different environment.
CO2 Interpret the design criteria of materials. √
Apply appropriate technology on different
CO3 materials, their processing and heat treatments in √
suitable application in marine engineering fields.
Compare the materials and their properties used
CO4 √
in the marine industry.
Taxonomy Methods
Select materials for a particular
CO1 C1 3 7 CT, F, ASG
application and different environment.
CO2 Interpret the design criteria of materials. C2 4 1-4 CT, MT, F
Apply appropriate technology on different
materials, their processing and heat
CO3 C3 1 6 CT, F
treatments in suitable application in
marine engineering fields.
Compare the materials and their
CO4 C4 2 8 MT, F
properties used in the marine industry.
69
CO1-PO7 Evaluate the sustainability and impact of professional engineering work in the
solution of complex engineering problems in environmental contexts to select
materials for a particular application and different environment.
CO2-PO1 Apply knowledge of science and engineering fundamentals and an engineering
specialization to interpret the design criteria of materials.
CO3-PO5 To select appropriate techniques with an understanding of the limitations to apply in
different materials, their processing and heat treatments in suitable application in
marine engineering fields.
CO4-PO4 Analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to compare the
materials and their properties used in the marine industry.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 What is material Science and Engineering, Classification of materials
Class 2 Materials Design and Selection.
Class 3 Industrially significant properties of metallic materials:
Week 2 Metals as materials of construction
Class 4 Technological Significance;
Class 5 Terminology for Mechanical Properties; Tensile test: Use of the stress- CT 1,
strain diagram, True Stress and True Strain; Final Exam
Class 6 The Bend test for Brittle materials; Hardness of Materials; Strain Rate
70
Effects and Impact Behavior;
Week 3 Metals as materials of construction
Class 7 Fracture Mechanics; Micro-structural features of fracture in metallic
materials
Class 8 ceramics, glasses and composites
Class 9 Fatigue; Results and applications of fatigue test;
Week 4 Production, properties and uses of Pig Iron, Cast Iron and Carbon
Steels
Class 10 Creep, Stress Rupture and Stress Corrosion.
Class 11 Blast Furnace production of Pig Iron
Class 12 Bessemer process for the production of steel; CT 2,
Week 5 Production, properties and uses of Pig Iron, Cast Iron and Carbon Final Exam
Steels
Class 13 The Open-Hearth Process
Class 14 Phase diagrams
Class 15 Equilibrium diagrams, Phase diagrams for two metals completely soluble
in liquid and solid states,
Steels
Class 16 Two metals completely soluble in the liquid state and completely
insoluble in the solid state;
Class 17 Two metals completely soluble in the liquid state but only partly soluble
in the solid state;
Class 18 The Eutectoid Reaction;
Steels
Class 19 The Iron-Iron Carbide Diagram
Class 20 Full Annealing; Spheroidizing; Stress-relief Annealing; Process Mid Term,
Annealing; Final Exam
Class 21 Normalizing;
Week 8 Heat treatment of Steel
Class 22 Hardening,
Class 23 Austentizing Temperature,
Class 24 Mechanism of heat removal during Quenching, Quenching medium;
Tempering
Week 9 Cast Iron, Alloy, tool, stainless, heat-resisting and creep resisting
steels etc
Class 25 White Cast Iron, Malleable Cast Iron
Class 26 Malleable Cast Iron, Pearlitic Malleable Iron, Gray Cast Iron
Class 27 Silicon in Cast Iron, Alloy Cast Iron; Stainless steel types.
Week 10 Case hardening of steels
Class 28 Carburizing; Nitriding;
Class 29 Cyaniding
Class 30 Flame hardening; Induction hardening.
Week 11 Nonferrous alloys
Class 31 Copper alloys Mid Term,
71
Class 32 Brass alloys, Bronze alloys, Final Exam
Class 33 Gun metal, Bearing Materials
Week 12 Structural Assemble
Class 34 Aluminium alloys
Class 35 Magnesium alloys
Class 36 Tin alloys.
Week13 Structural Assemble
Class 37 Protective Coatings, Cement
Class 38 Glass, Plastic, Rubber
Class 39 Timber CT 3,
Week 14 Shipbuilding Materials Final Exam
Class 40 General steel grades and description of IACS requirement for
shipbuilding materials.
Class 41 Course Revision
Class 42 Course Revision

20%
5% C1
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C5
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C2
CO4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introduction of Physical Metallurgy, S.H. Avner, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill International
Editions, Materials Science and Metallurgy Series, 2000.
2. Essentials of Materials Science and Engineering, D.R. Askeland and P.P. Fulay, 2 nd
edition, Cengage Learning Publishers, Nelson Education Ltd., 2010.
3. Chemistry of Engineering Materials, R.B. Leighou, 1942.
4. Engineering Materials 2: An Introduction to Microstructures, Processing and Design, M.F.
Ashby and D.R.H. Jones, 2nd edition, Butterworth-Heinemann publishers ltd., 1998.
72
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Shipbuilding Materials and Metallurgy Lab Contact Hours: 1.50
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Performance or application of material depends on synthesis, composition and properties of material.
Like the other engineering field, structural performance of a ship is governed by proper selection of
material. This is a compulsory sessional course based on experiment, inspection and composition
analysis of materials for a better understanding of structure-material properties correlation.
Shipbuilding Materials Sessional is designed to introduce the students with metallography and the
influence of metallographic structure on material properties.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce students with metallography and the influence of metallographic structure on
material properties.
2. To teach the students specimen sample preparation.
3. To help students understand phase diagrams in details.
4. To enable the students to study the microstructure of steel and cast iron.
5. To demonstrate the effect of heat treatment on microstructure and material properties.

1. Recognize the structure-material properties correlation;
2. Distinguish the variation in material composition;
3. Relate the theoretical knowledge with the practical experiment results;
4. Select suitable materials in ship construction.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Metallographic and Metallographic Sample Specimen Preparation;
2. Study of Phase Diagrams, Microstudy of steels;
3. Heat treatment of steels;
4. Microstudy of cast irons,
5. Composition analysis of different materials by X-ray;
6. Surface crack detection by Magnetic particle test for NDT.
73
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Recognize the structure-material
CO1 √
properties correlation;
Distinguish the variation in material
CO2 √
composition;
Relate the theoretical knowledge with the
CO3 √
practical experiment results;
Select suitable materials in ship
CO4 √
construction.
No. COURSE OUTCOME (COs) CP CA KP
Taxonomy Methods
Recognize the structure-material
CO1 C1 - 1 1,3,4 R,Q,T
properties correlation;
Distinguish the variation in material
CO2 C2 1 1 6 R,Q,T
composition;
Relate the theoretical knowledge
CO3 with the practical experiment C3 1 1 1,3,4 R,Q,T
results;
Select suitable materials in ship
CO4 C4 1-5 2,3 5 R,Q,Pr
construction.
JUSTIFICATIONS OF CO-PO MAPPING
Students will be able to identify the exact material for efficient ship building by
CO1-PO2
recognizing the structure-material properties correlation.
Selection and application of appropriate techniques, resources and modern
CO2-PO5 engineering tools will be required for distinguishing the variation in material
composition.
Systematic understanding of engineering knowledge by conforming with
CO3-PO1
experimental results.
Knowledge of suitable material selection will support practical ship design in the
CO4-PO3
shipbuilding area.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 06
74
Experiment 15
Preparation of Viva 6
Total 60
Lecture followed by hands on experiment and observation, discussion and report submission
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Name of the Topics

Week-1 Course introduction, Introduction to metallography and sample preparation.
Week-2 Study of Phase Diagrams
Week-3 Micro study of Steel
Week-4 Heat Treatment of Steel
Week-5 Heat Treatment of Steel(continued)
Week-6 Heat treatment of Cast Iron
Week-7 Final Quiz/ Viva

Lab
20% CO 1, CO 2, CO 3 C1, C2,A1
participation
CO 1 C1, C4
Continuous
CO 2 C4, P1
Assessment Lab Report 40%
CO 3 C3, C4
(40%)
CO 4 C3
Presentation/ CO 1, CO 2, CO 3,
15% A1, A2, A4
Viva CO 4
CO 1 CO 2
CO 2 CO 3
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C3, P7
CO 4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introduction of Physical Metallurgy, S.H. Avner, 2nd edition, McGraw-Hill
International Editions, Materials Science and Metallurgy Series, 2000.
2. Essentials of Materials Science and Engineering, D.R. Askeland and P.P. Fulay, 2nd
edition, Cengage Learning Publishers, Nelson Education Ltd., 2010
3. Chemistry of Engineering Materials, R.B. Leighou, 1942.
4. Engineering Materials 2: An Introduction to Microstructures, Processing and Design,
M.F. Ashby and D.R.H. Jones, 2nd edition, Butterworth-Heinemann publishers ltd.,
1998.
75
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Ship Design Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code: NAME 107, NAME 157
Course Title: Introduction to Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering, Hydrostatics and Stability
RATIONALE
The course aims to provide the understanding of the many facets of ship design – function and
appearance and design philosophy. A ship structure must be stable, seaworthy and have adequate
strength in all weathers. This course will help to develop and apply key theories and principles
associated with the design of vessels and also develops fundamental naval architecture knowledge,
including a thorough exploration of its concepts and how they are practically used in applications in
ships.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable in interpreting and applying the design principles of naval architecture
2. To enable in imparting knowledge on applying appropriate calculations and interpret outcomes
in naval architecture tasks.
3. To introduce to the role that the naval architects play in meeting and industry and international
regulatory requirements
4. To enable in preparing a complete design spiral of ship.

1. Estimate the values of design parameters, capacities and performances
2. Apply knowledge in practical ship designs and construction
3. Analyze design philosophy and design aspects of different type of ships
4. Compare characteristics of different design stages
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Ship Design: Engineering design-philosophy: Various design stages: concept
design, basic designs, preliminary designs, contract designs, detailed designs.
2. Ship Design Spiral: cargo routes, estimation of dimensions and hull form and displacement,
preliminary G.A plan, calculation of freeboard, depth, volume, tonnage and capacities,
calculation of longitudinal strength, resistance and powering, selection of machinery and outfit,
checking for trim and stability, estimation of lightweight and cargo deadweight, economic
criteria and evaluation.
76
3. Extensive Use of Design Computer Environment: Given owner‟s requirements, students
individually create and report the conceptual/preliminary design for a displacement ship and
Case studies of typical marine vehicles.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Estimate the values of design parameters,
CO1 √
capacities and performances
Apply knowledge in practical ship designs and
CO2 √
construction
Analyze design philosophy and design aspects
CO3 √
of different type of ships
Compare characteristics of different design
CO4 √
stages
No. COURSE OUTCOMES (COs) Bloom’s CP CA KP Assessment

Taxonomy Methods
Estimate the values of design
CO1 parameters, capacities and C2 6 5 CT, F, ASG
performances
Apply knowledge in practical ship
CO2 C3 8 1-4 CT, MT, F
designs and construction
Analyze design philosophy and design
CO3 C4 4 8 CT, F
aspects of different type of ships
Compare characteristics of different
CO4 C5 7 - MT, F
design stages
CO1-PO3 Design solutions for complex engineering problems that meet specified needs with
appropriate estimate the values of design parameters, capacities and performances.
CO2-PO1 Apply knowledge of science and engineering fundamentals to the solution of
complex engineering problems based on apply the knowledge in practical ship
designs and construction.
CO3-PO4 To conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge to
analyze the design philosophy and design aspects of different type of ships.
CO4-PO9 Function effectively as an individual and as a member or leader in diverse teams to
compare the characteristics of different design stages
77
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction, course administration
Class 2 Engineering design philosophy
Class 3 Design spiral
Week 2 Design of Ship
Class 4 Various design stages
Class 5 Concept design; preliminary design CT 1,
Class 6 Contract design; detailed design Final Exam

Class 7 Basic design
Class 8 Class approval drawings
Class 9 Review of design spiral
Class 10 Routes
Class 11 Determination of principal dimensions
Class 12 Preliminary weight calculation and displacement
Week 5 Design of Ship CT 2,
Class 13 Capacity check of deadweight items Final Exam
Class 14 Preliminary G.A plan
Class 15 Preliminary G.A plan
Class 16 Introduction of LLC 1966
Class 17 Definitions: type A ship, type B ship, tabular freeboard, bow height etc
78
Class 18 Freeboard calculation
Class 19 Tonnage convention 1969
Class 20 Volume, tonnage and capacities
Mid Term,
Class 21 Net tonnage, gross tonnage Final Exam
Class 22 Longitudinal strength; estimation of shear force and bending moment
Class 23 Calculation of longitudinal strength.
Class 24 Section modulus and inertia requirement of midship section.
Class 25 Resistance calculation
Class 26 Power calculation
Class 27 Selection of machinery and outfit
Class 28 Trim calculation
Class 29 Heel calculation
Class 30 Checking for trim and stability
Class 31 Estimation of lightweight Mid Term,
Class 32 Estimation of cargo deadweight Final Exam
Class 33 Economic criteria and evaluation.
Class 34 Extensive use of design computer environment
Class 35 Extensive use of design computer environment.
Class 36 Extensive use of design computer environment.
Week13 Design of Ship
Class 37 Given owner‟s requirements, students individually create and report the
conceptual/preliminary design for a displacement ship.
Class 38 Given owner‟s requirements, students individually create and report the CT 3,
conceptual/preliminary design for a displacement ship. Final Exam
Class 39 Given owner‟s requirements, studentsindividually create and report the
conceptual/preliminary design for a displacement ship.
Class 40 Case studies of typical marine vehicles I
Class 41 Case studies of typical marine vehicles II
Class 42 Case studies of typical marine vehicles III

20%
5% C4
79
CO2 C3, C2,C5
CO3 C4
CO4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Principles of Naval Architecture, Vol. 1, 2 &3,

2. Ship Design and Performance for Master and Mates, Dr C B Barrass
3. Practical Ship Design, D.G.M. Watson, 1998, Elsevier Science Ltd.
4. Ship Design - Methodologies of Preliminary Design, ApostolosPapanikolaou, Springer
5. Ship design for efficiency and economy, H Schneekluth and V Bertram
80
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Computer Aided Ship Design Contact Hours: 4.0
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Computer Aided Ship Design sessional course is designed to teach the students about the basic design
drawings of different types of ships and draw them with the aid of CAD software. Students will also
be able to perform necessary calculations related to the basic structural design and capacity
calculations.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to be familiarized with different types of ships and their basic drawings.
2. To familiarize the students to CAD software for designing of various types of drawings of ship.
3. To enable students to use Rule Books for structural design calculation.

1. Produce general arrangement (GA), Lines Plan, Mid-ship section drawing, longitudinal
construction & shell expansion drawings with the aid of CAD Software.
2. Interpret & use rule books for structural design calculations.
3. Prepare capacity plan of a ship.
4. Use modern CAD programs for ship design drawings
COURSE CONTENTS
1. AutoCAD: Introduction to CAD, drawing unit and scale, 2-D drawing tools, Modification
tools, layers, hatching and dimensioning, working in 3-D space, 3-D coordinate systems,
drawing sheet layout, viewpoints, 3-D drawing tools, 3-D wire frame modelling, Surface
modelling, solid modelling and rendering.
1. General arrangement (GA) plan drawing in CAD software,
2. Lines plan drawing in CAD software,
3. Preliminary structural design calculation of ships using Rule Book,
4. Mid-ship Section Drawing,
5. Longitudinal Construction Drawing,
6. Shell Expansion Drawing,
7. Capacity Plan calculations.
81
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Produce general arrangement (GA),
Lines Plan, Mid-ship section drawing,
CO1 longitudinal construction & shell √
expansion drawings with the aid of CAD
Software.
Interpret & use rule books for structural
CO2 √
design calculations.
CO3 Prepare capacity plan of a ship. √
Use modern CAD programs for ship
CO4 √
design drawings
Taxonomy Methods
Produce general arrangement (GA), lines
plan, mid-ship section drawing, longitudinal
CO1 C3 2 5 3,4 R,Q,T, Pr
construction & shell expansion drawings
with the aid of CAD Software.
Interpret & use rule books for structural
CO2 C2, C3 1 2-4 R,Q
design calculations.
CO3 Prepare capacity plan of a ship. C4 1 5 R,Q,Pr
Use modern CAD programs for ship design
CO4 C3 6 PR, T
drawings
Students will learn various aspects and approaches of ship design drawings such as
general arrangement (GA), lines plan, mid-ship section drawing, longitudinal
CO1-PO3
construction & shell expansion to achieve solutions to real life problems related to
ship design in a systematic way.
Students will gain knowledge on interpreting and using the rule books to carry out
CO2-PO2
the scantling calculation for structural design of ship.
Ability to prepare a capacity plan of ship improves student‟s judgment towards
CO3-PO3
optimal solution from the alternate solutions
The students have to use various modern CAD software that is use of modern
CO4-PO5
engineering tool to draw various ship design drawings in the course.
82
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topics
Week 1 Introduction to CAD, drawing unit and scale, 2-D drawing tools, modification tools
Layers, hatching and dimensioning
Week 2 Working in 3-D space, 3-D coordinate systems, drawing sheet layout, viewpoints,
3-D drawing tools, 3-D wire frame modelling, Surface modelling, Solid modelling
and rendering
Week 3 Introduction to GA, Drawing of General Arrangement Plan in CAD software
Week 4 Presentation and Review of General Arrangement Plan
Week 5 Introduction to Lines Plan, Drawing of Lines Plan in CAD software
Week 6 Presentation and Review of Lines Plan drawing
Week 7 Preliminary structural design calculation of ships using Rule Book
Week 8 Mid Term Assessment
Week 9 Mid-ship Section Drawing
Week 10 Longitudinal Construction Drawing
Week 11 Shell Expansion Drawing
Week 12 Capacity Plan calculations
Week 13 Review Class
Week 14 Final Quiz and Viva

CO 1 C3
Lab participation and
Continuous 25% CO 2 C2, C3
Report
Assessment CO 3 C4
Labtest-1,Labtest-2 10% CO 1 C3
83
CO 4 C3
Project and CO1, CO2, CO3,
35% C2,C3, C4
Presentation CO4
CO 1 C3
Lab Quiz 30% CO 2 C2, C3
CO 3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ships & Naval Architecture, R. Munro-Smith, 1973, Institute of Marine Engineers.
3. Rule Book: Lloyd's Register, DNV-GL, NKK
84
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Fluid Mechanics Contact Hours: 3.0
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This is a compulsory theoretical course to promote the knowledge of the students about basic laws,
principles and phenomena in the area of fluid flow related engineering problems. The course has also
been designed to familiarize the students in the working principles of the design of Hydraulic
Machineries used onboard ships.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable achieving ability to apply the basic applied mathematical tools that support fluid
dynamics.
2. To impart knowledge to identify & explain the physical properties of a fluid, its influence on
fluid flow & fundamental kinematics of a fluid element
3. To make proficient to explain & formulate the conservation principle of mass, linear
momentum and energy for fluid flow. & interpret the working principles of different hydraulic
machineries used on board ship.
4. To enable to design & create models of the prototype to investigate different parameter during
fluid flow over the profiles and shapes

1. Demonstrate the understanding in applying the basic applied mathematical tools that support
fluid dynamics.
2. Explain the knowledge to identify the physical properties of a fluid, its influence on fluid flow
& fundamental kinematics of a fluid element
3. Construct the formulations of the conservation principle of mass, linear momentum and energy
for fluid flow and interpret the working principles of different hydraulic machineries used on
board ship
4. Design & create models of the prototype to investigate different parameter during fluid flow
over the profiles and shapes
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Fluid properties: Classification of Fluid Flows, Density and Specific Gravity, Energy and
specific heats, Compressibility and Bulk Modulus, Viscosity, Surface Tension and Capillary
Effect.
2. Fluid statics and kinematics: Pressure head, Pascal‟s law, Instruments to measure fluid
pressure, Total pressure on horizontally, vertically and inclined immersed surfaces, Pressure on
85
a curved surface, Centre of pressure on an inclined immersed surface, Lagrangian and Eulerian
descriptions of fluid kinematics, Streamlines and Streamtubes, Pathlines, Streaklines,
Timelines, Refractive and surface flow visualization techniques, Plots of fluid flow data, Types
of motion or deformation of fluid elements, The Reynolds Transport Theorem, Bernoulli‟s
equation, Euler‟s equation of motion, Limitations of Bernoulli‟s equations, Practical
Applications of Bernoulli‟s equation, Venturimeter, Discharge through a Venturimeter, Orifice
Meter, Pitot Tube, Discharge over a Rectangular Notch, Discharge over a Triangular Notch.
3. Continuity, energy and momentum principle: Conservation of Mass, Mass and Volume flow
rates, Moving or deforming control volumes, Incompressible flow, General Equation of Energy,
Newton‟s Laws and Conservation of Momentum, The linear Momentum equation.
4. Friction and flow through pipes, impact of jets: Loss of head in pipes, Darcy‟s and Chezy‟s
Formula for loss of head in pipes, Graphical representation of Pressure head and velocity head,
Hydraulic Gradient line, Total Energy Line, Transmission of power through pipes, Time of
emptying a tank through a long pipe, Force of Jet Impinging Normally on fixed, hinged,
inclined and moving plate, Force of jet impinging on a fixed and moving curved vane.
5. Laminar and turbulent flows: Introduction to boundary layers, drags, and wakes, Drag and
Lift, Friction and Pressure Drag, Drag coefficients of common geometries, Parallel flow over
flat plates, Flow over cylinders and Spheres, Lift.
6. Dimensional analysis, principles of similitude and model testing: Fundamental Dimensions,
Dimensional Homogeneity, Uses of the principle of Dimensional Homogeneity, Methods of
Dimensional Analysis, Rayleigh‟s Method, Buckingham‟s Pi-theorem, Selection of Repeating
Variables, Advantages of Model Analysis, Hydraulic Similarity, Procedures for model analysis,
Comparative studies between prototype and undistorted model.
7. Aerofoil and its application: Theory of wings, Cavitation.
8. Hydraulic machines: Reciprocating and Centrifugal pumps, pump efficiency.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Demonstrate the understanding in applying the
CO1 basic applied mathematical tools that support √
fluid dynamics.
Explain the knowledge to identify the physical
CO2 properties of a fluid, its influence on fluid flow √
& fundamental kinematics of a fluid element
Construct the formulations of the conservation
principle of mass, linear momentum and energy
CO3 for fluid flow and interpret the working √
principles of different hydraulic machineries
used on board ship
Design & create models of the prototype to
CO4 investigate different parameter during fluid √
flow over the profiles and shapes
86
Taxonomy Methods
Demonstrate the understanding in
CO1 applying the basic applied mathematical C3 1 1-4 CT, F
tools that support fluid dynamics.
Explain the knowledge to identify the
physical properties of a fluid, its
CO2 C2 1 1-4 CT, MT, F
influence on fluid flow & fundamental
kinematics of a fluid element
Construct the formulations of the
conservation principle of mass, linear
momentum and energy for fluid flow
and interpret the working principles of
different hydraulic machineries used on
board ship
Design & create models of the
prototype to investigate different
CO4 C6 1 5-6 MT, F
parameter during fluid flow over the
profiles and shapes
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to understand physical
properties of a fluid flow & calculate different parameters of fluid dynamics.
CO2-PO2 In order to identify & analyze the fluid flow characteristics & its influence on the
fundamental kinematics of a fluid element.
CO3-PO2 To analyze conservation principle of mass, momentum and energy for fluid flow &
interpret the working principles of different hydraulic machineries used onboard ship
CO4-PO3 The capability to design and create models of prototypes has to be achieved to
investigate different parameter during fluid flow over the profiles and shapes.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
87
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Fluid properties
Class 1 Introduction
Class 2 Classification of Fluid Flows, Density and Specific Gravity, Energy and
specific heats, Compressibility and Bulk Modulus,
Class 3 Viscosity, surface Tension and Capillary Effect.
Week 2 Fluid statics and kinematics
Class 4 Pressure head, Pascal‟s law, Instruments to measure fluid pressure CT-1, Final
Class 5 Total pressure on horizontally, vertically and inclined immersed surfaces Exam
Class 6 Pressure on a curved surface, Centre of pressure on an inclined immersed
surface
Class 7 Lagrangian and Eulerian descriptions of fluid kinematics, Streamlines
and Streamtubes, Pathlines, Streaklines, Timelines,
Class 8 Refractive and surface flow visualization techniques, Plots of fluid flow
data
Class 9 Types of motion or deformation of fluid elements,
Class 10 The Reynolds Transport Theorem
Class 11 Bernoulli‟s equation
Class 13 Euler‟s equation of motion CT-2, Mid
Class 14 Limitations of Bernoulli‟s equations, Practical Applications of Term, Final
Bernoulli‟s equation Exam
Class 15 Venturimeter, Discharge through a Venturimeter
Class 16 Orifice Meter, Pitot Tube
Class 17 Discharge over a Rectangular Notch, Discharge over a Triangular Notch
Class 18 Conservation of Mass, Mass and Volume flow rates
Week 7 Continuity, energy and momentum principle
Class 19 Moving or deforming control volumes, Incompressible flow, General
Equation of Energy
Class 20 Newton‟s Laws and Conservation of Momentum, The linear Momentum
equation.
Class 21 Loss of head in pipes, Darcy‟s and Chezy‟s Formula for loss of head in
88
pipes
Week 8 Friction and flow through pipes, impact of jets Mid Term
Class 22 Graphical representation of Pressure head and velocity head, Hydraulic Exam, Final
Gradient line, Total Energy Line Exam
Class 23 Transmission of power through pipes, Time of emptying a tank through a
long pipe
Week 9 Friction and flow through pipes, impact of jets
Class 25 Force of Jet Impinging Normally on fixed, hinged, inclined and moving
plate,
Class 26 Force of jet impinging on a fixed and moving curved vane.
Class 27 Revision Class
Week 10 Laminar and turbulent flows
Class 28 Introduction to boundary layers, drags, and wakes
Class 29 Drag and Lift, Friction and Pressure Drag, Drag coefficients of common
geometries
Class 30 Parallel flow over flat plates, Flow over cylinders and Spheres, Lift
Week 11 Dimensional analysis, principles of similitude and model testing
Class 31 Fundamental Dimensions, Dimensional Homogeneity
Class 32 Uses of the principle of Dimensional Homogeneity, Methods of CT-3/
Dimensional Analysis Assignment,
Class 33 Rayleigh‟s Method, Buckingham‟s Pi-theorem, Selection of Repeating Final Exam
Variables
Week 12 Dimensional analysis, principles of similitude and model testing
Class 34 Advantages of Model Analysis
Class 35 Hydraulic Similarity, Procedures for model analysis
Class 36 Comparative studies between prototype and undistorted model
Week13 Hydraulic machines
Class 37 Centrifugal pumps.
Class 38 Reciprocating Pumps
Class 39 Pump efficiency
Week 14 Aerofoil and its application
Class 40 Theory of wings, Cavitation
Class 41 Assessment
Components Grading CO Blooms Taxonomy

20%
5% C6, A2
Final Exam 60% CO1 C1, C2
89
CO2 C1, C2,C4
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. A Textbook of Hydraulics, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, R.S. Khurmi, 19 th
Edition, S. Chand & Company Ltd., 2004.
2. Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, Y.A. Cengel and J.M. Cimbala, 1 st edition,
McGraw Hill Publishers Ltd., 2006.
3. A Textbook of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, R.K. Bansal, 2005.
4. Theory and Applications of Ocean Surface Waves, C.C. Mei; M. Stiassnie; D.K.P. Yue, 2005,
World Scientific Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd
90
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Fluid Mechanics Lab Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This sessional course introduces the principles of fluid mechanics of mechanical systems. Students
will be exposed to the experimental methods in the fluid flow systems like flow measurement in
closed/open conduits including friction loss, pump performance, center of pressure and buoyancy. By
the end of this course students should be able to understand the basic principles and analysis of both
static and dynamic fluid systems
OBJECTIVES
1. To familiarize the students with different types of pumps.
2. To impart training to use various flow measuring devices for making engineering judgments.
3. To provide practice in estimating friction losses in fluid flow.
4. To develop understanding about hydrostatic law, principle of buoyancy and stability of a
floating body and application of mass, momentum and energy equation in fluid flow.

1. Explain the basic operating principle of a reciprocating and centrifugal pump.
2. Verify the Bernoulli‟s Theorem and apply it in flow measuring devices.
3. Analyze the head loss due to friction occurring in fluid flow.
4. Apply the knowledge of hydrostatic loading to calculate centre of pressure and buoyancy.
5. Develop collaborative nature by discussing and performing as a group and organize project
tasks maintaining solidarity during the group projects and presentations.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Performance Test of a reciprocating pump
2. Performance test of Centrifugal Pump Connected in Series and Parallel Connections
3. Study of Propeller Turbine Characteristics
4. Verification of Bernoulli‟s Equation
5. a) Study of Flow through Orifice
b) Study of Flow through Venturi Meter
6. a) Calibration of Rectangular Notch
7. b) Calibration of Triangular Notch (V)
8. Determination of the location of the center of pressure for a submerged plane surface
9. Determination of Centre of gravity, Metacenter and Buoyancy of a floating vessel.
91
10. Determination of Head Loss Due to Pipe Friction.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the basic operating principle of a
CO1 √
reciprocating and centrifugal pump.
Verify the Bernoulli‟s Theorem and
CO2 √
apply it in flow measuring devices.
Analyze the head loss due to friction
CO3 √
occurring in fluid flow.
Apply the knowledge of hydrostatic
CO4 loading to calculate centre of pressure and √
buoyancy.
Develop collaborative nature by
discussing and performing as a group
CO5 and organize project tasks maintaining √
solidarity during the group projects and
presentations.
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the basic operating principle of a
CO1 C2 1,2 R,Q,T
reciprocating and centrifugal pump.
Verify the Bernoulli‟s Theorem and apply
CO2 C3 1 1 6 R,Q,T
it in flow measuring devices.
Analyze the head loss due to friction
CO3 C4 2 1 1-4 R,Q,T
occurring in fluid flow.
Apply the knowledge of hydrostatic
CO4 loading to calculate centre of pressure and C3 1-4 R,Q,T
buoyancy.
discussing and performing as a group and
CO5 organize project tasks maintaining A1, A2, 1 7 Pr, PR
solidarity during the group projects and A3, A4
presentations.
Exam)
92
Students will gain the basic experimental knowledge to explain the basic operating
CO1-PO2
principle of a reciprocating and centrifugal pump.
Students will carry out experiment on verification the Bernoulli‟s Theorem and will
be able to apply it to do experiment with modern flow measuring devices like
CO2-PO5 venturimeter, orifice meter and different types of notch. And also they should be
able to interpret and analyze the given flow problem and select the required
instrument used for flow measurement.
If a data regarding the details of the flow of a real fluid is given then the students
CO3-PO2 should be able to interpret the data and applying the correct formula they should be
able to calculate the energy loss
Student will apply the knowledge of hydrostatic loading to calculate centre of
CO4-PO2
pressure and buoyancy to solve engineering problems related to floating bodies.
Students will discuss technical problems and assist each other are required while
working in a team as a team member or a leader to carry out each experiment ,hence
CO5-PO9
develop their function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in
diverse teams and in multi-disciplinary settings
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topics
Week 1 Introduction to Fluid Mechanics Sessional
Week 2 Performance Test of a reciprocating pump
Week 3 Performance test of Centrifugal Pump Connected in Series and Parallel Connections
Week 4 Study of Propeller Turbine Characteristics
Week 5 Verification of Bernoulli‟s Equation
93
Week 6 Mid Term Assessment
Week 7 a. Study of Flow through Orifice
b. Study of Flow through Venturi-Meter
Week 8 a. Calibration of Rectangular Notch
b. Calibration of Triangular Notch (V)
Week 9 Determination of the location of the center of pressure for a submerged
plane surface
Week 10 Determination of Centre of gravity, Metacenter and Buoyancy of a floating vessel
Week 11 Determination of Head Loss Due to Pipe Friction
Week 12 Review of all experiments
Week 13 Final Quiz
Week 14 Final Viva

CO1 C2
Lab participation and CO2 C3
20%
Continuous Report C03 C4
Assessment CO4 C3
(40%) Labtest-1,Labtest-2 30% CO1-CO4 C2,C3,C4
Project and
25% CO5 A1, A2, A3, A4
Presentation
CO1 C2
CO2 C3
Lab Quiz 25%
C03 C4
CO4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, Y.A. Cengel and J.M. Cimbala,
2. Introduction to Fluid Mechanics, Fox, R.W. and Mc Donald, A.T.
3. Mechanics of Fluids - Irving H. Shames
4. Fluid Mechanics - Frank M. White
5. Fluid Mechanics - E. John Finnemore& Joseph B. Franzini
94
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Hydrodynamics Contact Hours: 3.0
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code: NAME 213
Course Title: Fluid Mechanics
RATIONALE
This course is intended to give students the skills to analyse the flow of fluid around shapes commonly
in the design of marine vehicles, such as the vessel‟s hull, hydrofoils, propeller blades, etc. It is a
compulsory theoretical course designed on the basis to understand the characteristics of fluid flow and
its implication in the design of Marine Vehicles.
OBJECTIVES
1. To give brief idea about the flow around bluff and streamlined bodies and discuss the benefits
of streamline,
2. To enable achieving ability to calculate the pressure distribution and wake field around a
submerged body like ship.
3. To impart knowledge assessing the forces applied by the flow to submerged bodies in fluid by
applying the knowledge of fluid flow principles, including conservation of mass, momentum
and energy, Bernoulli‟s principle, the stream and potential functions, and sources and sinks.
4. To enable estimating the wave-induced loads on geometric shapes of floating structures and be
able to apply the knowledge in Ship design.

1. Describe the hydrodynamic flow pattern around ship & calculate flow velocity at different
point on the flow.
2. Compute the pressure distribution and wake field around a submerged body like ship.
3. Assess the forces applied by the flow to submerged bodies in fluid by applying the knowledge
of fluid flow principles,
4. Estimate the wave-induced loads on geometric shapes of floating structures and be able to
apply the knowledge in Ship design.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Flow of an ideal fluid: Equation of continuity, streamlines, streak lines and path lines, two-
dimensional flow patterns, rotational and irrotational flows, vorticity, velocity potential
functions, stream functions, Euler‟s equation of motion, Bernoulli‟s equation, velocity and
pressure distribution.
95
2. Standard Patterns of Flow: Uniform flow, irrotational vortex, circulation, source, sink and
doublet, flow past a half body, cylinder and rankine body, virtual mass and Magnus effect.
3. Conformal transformation: Analytic functions, singularities, Cauchy-Riemann equations,
complex potential, application of conformal transformation to some flow cases, joukowski‟s
hypothesis, lift of an infinite aerofoil. Theorems of Green, Stokes, Cauchy and Blasius and their
application to some hydrodynamic problems.
4. Flow of a real fluid: Navier-Stokes equations, displacement, momentum and energy, thickness
of the boundary layer, Plane progressive waves, Wave energy, Two and three dimensional ship
waves, the method of stationary phase, Energy radiation and wave resistance, Body response in
regular waves, Wave exciting force and moment and characteristics of flow around a ship hull.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe the hydrodynamic flow pattern
CO1 around ship & calculate flow velocity at √
different point on the flow.
Compute the pressure distribution and wake
CO2 √
field around a submerged body like ship.
Assess the forces applied by the flow to
CO3 submerged bodies in fluid by applying the √
knowledge of fluid flow principles,
Estimate the wave-induced loads on geometric
CO4 shapes of floating structures and be able to √
apply the knowledge in Ship design.

Taxonomy Methods
Describe the hydrodynamic flow
CO1 pattern around ship & calculate low C1 1 1-4 CT, F
velocity at different point on the flow.
Compute the pressure distribution and
CO2 wake field around a submerged body C3 1 5 CT, MT, F
like ship.
Assess the forces applied by the flow to
CO3 submerged bodies in fluid by applying C3 3 5 CT/ASG, F
the knowledge of fluid flow principles,
Estimate the wave-induced loads on
geometric shapes of floating structures
CO4 C2 1 1-4 MT, F
and be able to apply the knowledge in
Ship design.
96
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to find out flow pattern,
hydrodynamic characteristics & calculate different properties of fluid flow.
CO2-PO2 In order to identify the role and extent of hydrodynamic parameters to calculate the
pressure distribution and wake field around a ship.
CO3-PO3 To analyze & formulate hydrodynamic forces applied by the fluid flow around
submerge/floating bodies.
CO4-PO4 To estimate the wave-induced loads on geometric shapes of floating structures and be
confident to analyze & interpret data for Ship structure design.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Flow of an ideal fluid
Class 2 Ideal fluid, fluid properties, types of fluid flow
Class 3 Pressure at a point,
Class 4 Equation of continuity,
Class 5 Streamlines, streak lines and path lines, CT-1, Final
Class 6 Two-dimensional flow patterns, Exam
Class 7 Rotational and irrotational flows, vorticity
Class 8 Stream functions
97
Class 9 Properties of stream functions
Class 10 Velocity potential functions, flow nets
Class 11 Euler‟s equation of motion
Class 12 Bernoulli‟s equation, Velocity and pressure distribution.
Week 5 Standard Patterns of Flow
Class 13 Uniform flow, irrotational vortex, circulation, CT-2, Mid
Class 14 Source, sink and doublet, Term, Final
Class 15 Flow past a half body Exam
Week 6 Standard Patterns of Flow
Class 16 Flow past a cylinder and rankine body
Class 17 Virtual mass
Class 18 Magnus effect
Week 7 Conformal transformation
Class 20 Analytic functions, singularities
Class 21 Cauchy-Riemann equations
Class 22 Complex potential, ,
Class 23 Application of conformal transformation to some flow cases
Class 24 Joukowski‟s hypothesis Mid Term
Week 9 Conformal transformation Exam, Final
Class 25 Lift of an infinite aerofoil Exam
Class 26 Theorem of Green,
Class 27 Theorem of Stokes
Class 28 Theorems of Cauchy and Blasius
Class 29 Application of the theorems to some hydrodynamic problems
Class 30 Mid term exam
Week 11 Flow of a real fluid
Class 31 Navier-Stokes equations
Class 32 Displacement, momentum and energy thickness of the boundary layer CT-3/
Class 33 Assessment 02 Assignment,
Week 12 Flow of a real fluid Final Exam
Class 34 Plane progressive waves,
Class 35 Wave energy,
Class 36 Two and three dimensional ship waves
Week13 Flow of a real fluid
Class 37 Method of stationary phase, Energy radiation and wave resistance
Class 38 Body response in regular waves,
Class 39 Wave exciting force and moment
Week 14 Flow of a real fluid
Class 40 Characteristics of flow around a ship hull.
Class 41 Assessment
98

CO1, CO2,
Class Test/ C1, C2, C4
20% CO3
Continuous Assignment 1-3
CO3 C3, C4
Assessment
Class CO1, CO2,
(40%) 5% C6, A2
Participation CO3, CO4
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Applied Hydrodynamics, H.R. Valentine, Newnes-Butterworth; Student international edition,

1969.
2. Newman, John N. (1977), Marine Hydrodynamics, The MIT Press, 432 pp., ISBN: 978-
0262140263
3. Theoretical Hydrodynamics, Milne-Thomson, 4th edition, 1962.
4. Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, Y.A. Cengel and J.M. Cimbala, 1 st edition,
McGraw Hill Publishers Ltd., 2006.
99
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Hydrodynamics Lab Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Marine Hydrodynamics Sessional course is designed to teach students about the hydrodynamic
application is ship and machinery design retrospect, namely types of floating structures, marine
machinery parts etc. Students will be able to perform necessary calculations related to the basic
design, assess performance calculations once the course is completed.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to be familiarized with different flow patterns in application.
2. To familiarize the students with applied and calculative concept of hydrodynamics
3. To enable students to compute different parameters of ships, floating bodies using
hydrodynamics concept.

1. Explain about different hydrodynamic features of various types of fluid flows.
2. Identify different kinds of fluid flow patterns.
3. Demonstrate and Manipulate the flow past different shapes and structure for observing
laminar and turbulent flows.
4. Develop collaborative nature by discussing and performing as a group and organize project
tasks maintaining solidarity during the group projects and presentations.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Determination of the exact section of the Pitot tube
2. Determination of the flow speed profiles in a pitot tube
3. Determination of measure error using the pitot tube
4. Determination of ship stability
5. Demonstration of Cavitation Phenomenon
6. Determination of Impact against a flat, curve and semispherical surface
7. Study of forced vortex without discharge orifice
8. Observation of laminar, transition and turbulent flow and Classification of the different types of
flow depending on Reynolds number
9. Ideal flow around a submersed profile
10. Demonstration the phenomenon associated to the flow in an open channel
100

No. Course Outcome
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain about different hydrodynamic
CO1 √
features of various types of fluid flows
Identify different kinds of fluid flow
CO2 √
patterns
Demonstrate and Manipulate the flow
CO3 past different shapes and structure for √
observing laminar and turbulent flows.
Develop collaborative nature by discussing
and performing as a group and organize
CO4 √
project tasks maintaining solidarity during
the group projects and presentations.
Taxonomy Methods
Explain about the different
CO1 C2 1 1 1-4 R,Q,T
hydrodynamic features
Identify different kinds of flow
CO2 C1 1 2 1-4 R,Q,T
patterns
Demonstrate and Manipulate
CO3 the flow past different shapes and C3 1 2 6 R,Q,T
structure for better results;
discussing and performing as a
CO4 group and organize project tasks A1, A2, A3, 1 7 Pr, PR
maintaining solidarity during the A4
group projects and presentations.
CO1-PO2 In order to develop problem solving skill.
CO2-PO2 To learn modern tools to solve hydrodynamics problems.
In order to assess the analyzing and deconstructing capability of a student to solve a
CO3-PO3
problem related to fluid flow. .
Students will discuss technical problems and assist each other are required while
working in a team as a team member or a leader to carry out each experiment ,hence
CO4-PO9
develop their function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in
diverse teams and in multi-disciplinary settings
101
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
Lecture followed by Experiment demonstration, experiment conduct by students in group, co-
operative and collaborative method, project based method.
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week 1 Course introduction, Introduction to Machineries and equipment.

Week 2 Determination of the exact section of the Pitot tube
Week 3 Determination of the flow speed profiles in a pitot tube
Week 4 Measure error determination using the pitot tube
Week 5 Determination of ship stability
Week 6 Cavitation Phenomenon Demonstration
Week 7 Mid Viva/Mid Quiz
Week 8 Determination of Impact against a flat, curve and semispherical surface
Week 9 Study of forced vortex without discharge orifice
Week 10 Observation of laminar, transition and turbulent flow
Classification of the different types of flow depending on Reynolds number
Week 11 Ideal flow around a submerged flow
Week 12 To demonstrate the phenomenon associated to the flow in an open channel

Week 13 Final Viva
Week 14 Quiz

Continuous Lab CO 1 C2
Assessment participation and 15% CO 2 C1
(40%) Report CO 3 C3
102
Mid-quiz CO 1 C2
or 25% CO 2 C1
Mid Viva CO 3 C3
CO 1 C2
Final Viva 25%
CO 2 C1
Final Quiz 35%
CO 3 C2
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Applied Hydrodynamics, H.R. Valentine, Newnes-Butterworth; Student international
edition, 1969.
2. Marine Hydrodynamics, Newman, John N. (1977), , The MIT Press, 432 pp., ISBN:
978-0262140263
3. Theoretical Hydrodynamics, Milne-Thomson, 4th edition, 1962.
4. Fluid Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, Y.A. Cengel and J.M. Cimbala, 1st
edition, McGraw Hill Publishers Ltd., 2006.
103
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Stability and Machinery Layout Design Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course is the third stage of Ship Design and Drawing which is a compulsory sessional course for
future naval architects. Students will learn design and drawings of the principle propulsion and
steering machineries of a ship which includes rudder, steering, shafting, propeller and main engine
foundation. By understanding the complex propulsion system of a ship from this course, it is expected
that students will be able to design a complete propulsion system along with proper drawings.
OBJECTIVES
1. To impart the knowledge to carry out the calculation of stability of a ship.
2. To familiarize the students with the arrangement and functions of propulsion and steering
system of ships.
3. To design of rudder along with its stock and selection of an appropriate steering gear.
4. To enable selection of proper scantlings by exact calculations to design the engine room
foundation.

1. Prepare and explain the stability booklet of a ship.
2. Demonstrate methodological knowledge and understanding in ship‟s rudder, steering
and shafting system design.
3. Design ship steering and shafting system.
4. Develop critically, independently and creatively design of propulsion system of a ship.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Detail ship stability calculation and stability booklet preparation.
2. Design of a marine rudder
3. Design of ship steering gear system
4. Design of shafting arrangement system and propeller shaft
5. Calculation and drawing of ship engine foundation
No. COURSE OUTCOMES (CO) PROGRAM OUTCOMES (PO)
104
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Prepare and explain the stability booklet
CO1 √
of a ship
Demonstrate methodological knowledge
CO2 and understanding in ship‟s rudder, √
steering and shafting system design
CO3 Design ship steering and shafting system √
Develop critically, independently and
CO4 creatively design of propulsion system of √
a ship
No. COURSE OUTCOMES (CO) CP CA KP
Taxonomy Methods
Prepare and explain the stability booklet
CO1 C2-C4 1 - 1 R,Q
of a ship
Demonstrate methodological knowledge
CO2 and understanding in ship‟s rudder, C3 2 - 4 R,Q
steering and shafting system design
CO3 Design ship steering and shafting system C3, C4 3 - 1-5 R,Q
Develop critically, independently and
CO4 creatively design of propulsion system of C4,C5 3 - 1-6 R,Q
a ship
Students will be able to carry out the detailed ship stability calculation using various
CO1-PO2 tools and criteria. Using the result, they will be able to prepare the stability booklet
of a ship.
By understanding the complex propulsion system of a ship from this course,
CO2-PO2 students will be able to apply knowledge of complete propulsion system in
designing a ship
Students will be able to explain the steering system and machinery arrangement.
CO3-PO3 With the calculation, they will be able to design steering and shafting system for a
ship.
In order to develop critically, independently and creatively design of propulsion
CO4-PO3
system of a ship.
Engagement
(hours)
105
Lecture 12
Demonstration 30
Preparation of Presentation
Formal Assessment
Total 120
Lecture followed by demonstration of engineering drawings and design, discussion and assignment
submission.
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Name of the Experiment

Week-1 Course introduction, Overall discussion of ship stability , ship steering
system, shafting system, propeller and main engine foundation.
Week-2 Ship Stability Calculation
Week-5 Introduction to rudder system, Calculation for rudder system(part 1)
Week-6 Calculation for rudder system(part 2)
Week-7 Mid Viva
Week-8 Introduction to steering system, Calculation for steering system(part 1)
Week-9 Calculation for steering system(part 2 )
Week-10 Introduction to shafting system, Calculation for shafting system
Week-11 Calculation for engine foundation(part 1)
Week-12 Calculation for steering system(part 2 )
Week 13 Final Viva

CO 1 C1, C3,A1
CO 2 C4, C5, A1
Lab participation 20%
CO 3 C3, C4
Continuous CO 4 C3
Assessment CO 1 C1, C3,C4
(40%) CO 2 C4, C5, P1
Lab Report 40%
CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
Viva 15% CO 1, CO 2, CO 3 A1, A2, A3, A4
106
CO 1 CO 2
CO 2 CO 3
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C3, P6, P7
CO 4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. The Principles of Naval Architecture, Vol 1, Stability and Strength, Published by SNAME
2. Ship Hydrostatics and Stability, Adrian Biran
Publications.
5. Ship Design: Methodologies of Preliminary Design by Apostolos Papanikolaou
6. Practical Design of Hull Structures by Masaki Mano
7. Design Principles of Ships and Marine Structures by Suresh Chandra Misra
107
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: NAME 300 Credit Hours: 3.0 (1.5 Cr. Hr. in Each Term)
Course Title: Ship design Project Contact Hours: 6.0
Level and Term: Level 3 Term 1/2
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code: NAME 158, NAME 208, NAME 258
Course Title: Basic Ship Design, Computer Aided Ship Design, Stability and Machinery Layout
Design
RATIONALE
Compulsory Sessional course which is intended to assist the reality of accepting a design brief from a
client/owner, researching the requirements, coming up with the design of a vessel which will meet
those requirements, and preparing the documentation (drawings, calculations and specification of
outfit items) to describe the vessel so that it may be built. These courses also provide a solid
grounding in the overall ship design process.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to design a general arrangement plan and lines plan as required of the design
brief.
2. To enable students to compute hydrostatic properties of ship and able to draw hydrostatic
curves.
3. To enable students to calculate scantlings and make midship section and longitudinal drawings.
4. To enable students to make decision of selecting engine andpropeller.
5. To enable students to make decision of designing a complete vessel.

1. Produce a suitable hull form by using maxsurf and translate to a lines plan and a general
arrangement drawing in Autocad.
2. Evaluate the stability of the vessel and selecting engine and propeller.
3. Perform scantlings calculation and mid ship section drawing of a vessel.
4. Describe new thinking and innovation processes of ship design.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Design of a particular ship: principal particulars,
2. General Arrangement (GA),
3. Lines plan with offset table, Lightship,
4. Preliminary deadweight and displacement calculation,
5. Freeboard Calculation,
6. Scantling, Mid-ship section drawing,
7. Longitudinal Drawing: Profile Deck & Bottom,
108
8. Shell Expansion Drawings,
9. Detailed LWT & DWT calculation,
10. Resistance & Power Calculation, machinery, endurance, outfit,
11. Approximate trim and cross curves, Stability for different loading conditions, Wind heel criteria
for different loading conditions,
12. Engine selection, Engine Foundation,
13. Rudder design & Steering Arrangement,
14. Shafting & Propeller Design.

No. COURSE OUTCOME (CO)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Produce a suitable hull form by using
CO1 maxsurf and translate to a lines plan and a √
general arrangement drawing in autocad.
Evaluate the stability of the vesseland
CO2 √
selecting engine and propeller.
Perform scantlings calculation and mid
CO3 √
ship section drawing of a vessel.
Describe a new thinking and innovation
CO4 √
processes of ship design.
No. COURSE OUTCOME (CO) CP CA KP
Taxonomy Methods
Produce a suitable hull form by using
maxsurf and translate to a lines plan
CO1 C3 R,Pr,Q
and a general arrangement drawing in
AutoCAD.
Evaluate the stability of the vessel
CO2 C3 R,Pr,Q
and selecting engine and propeller.
Perform scantlings calculation and
CO3 A2 1 1-4 R,Pr,Q
mid ship section drawing of a vessel.
Describe a new thinking and
CO4 C3 1 R,Pr,Q
innovation processes of ship design.
Exam)
It is required teamwork as well as individual work in order to develop a suitable
CO1-PO9
hull, lines pan and general arrangement.
It is required to make a effective presentation and clear instructions to evaluate the
CO2-PO10
stability of the vessel and to select engine and propeller of ship.
The knowledge of science has to be applied to perform scantlings calculation and
CO3-PO1
mid ship section drawing of a vessel.
109
CO4-PO1 In order to develop a concept of innovation processes of ship design.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment 1
Total (Each Term) 120
project based method.
COUSRE SCHEDULE
Term-I
Lecture-1 Course administration, instructors, contents, mark distribution, ethics, tools etc.
Project inputs and allotment of projects to the students
Preliminary lightship, deadweight and displacement calculation and
determination of preliminary principal particulars (L, B, D, T, etc.) (Using
empirical formulae).
Lecture-2 Issues with principal particulars
Preliminary GA plan; space allocation for cargo and consumables.
Floodable length calculation, watertight subdivision, Preliminary freeboard
calculations.
Arrangement of propulsion machinery, deck machinery etc., Equipment
number calculation, accommodation arrangement.
Lecture-3 Preliminary GA arrangement (sketch in paper) for review
Issues with General Arrangement
Lecture-4 Submission of Preliminary GA arrangement.
3D surface model generation (in Rhino/ Maxsurf), preliminary displacement
and draft check,
Compartmentation, cargo and consumables capacity check.
Lecture-5 Issues with 3D model in Rhino and Maxsurf.
Lecture-6 Preliminary hydrostatic report, lines and offset table generation from 3D model.
FIRST PRESENTATION
110
Lecture-8 Determination of ship scantling using class rule book Midship section drawing
Lecture-9 Review and problem solving on ship scantling using class rule book
Midship section drawing
Lecture-11 Guidance on shell expansion, profile and deck plan and other ship drawings
Lecture-12 Review of shell expansion, profile and deck plan and other ship drawings.
Lecture-13 Detail lightship calculation (using scantling drawings + GA in Excel) +
Guidance in stability load cases
Lecture-14 Review and advise on the preliminary trim and stability calculation
SECOND PRESENTATION
Term-II
Lecture-1 Resistance & power calculation, main engine selection

Lecture-2 Propeller design, gear box selection and shafting design.
Lecture-3 Rudder design & steering arrangement
Lecture-4 Propulsion arrangement (ME, GB, shafting, propeller and rudder) + ME
foundation.
Lecture-5 Final weight estimation (hull + mach ) including weight margin.
Lecture-6 GA, lines and offset table, hydrostatic, trim & stability updates.
THIRD PRESENTATION
Lecture-8 Propulsion arrangement (ME, GB, shafting, propeller and rudder)
Lecture-9 Final weight estimation (hull + mach ) including weight margin.
Lecture-10 GA, lines and offset table updates
Lecture-11 Hydrostatic, trim & stability updates.
Lecture-12 Review and discussion on report writing
Lecture-13 Quiz & Viva
FINAL PRESENTATION AND REPORT SUBMISSION

CO 1 C1, C3,A1
Lab participation and CO 2 C4, C5, A1
20%
Report CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
Continuous
CO 1 C1, C3,C4
Assessment
(40%) CO 2 C4, C5, P1
CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
Project and
25% CO 1, CO 2, CO 3 A1, A2, A3, A4
Presentation
CO 1 CO 2
CO 2 CO 3
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C3, P6, P7
CO 4 C3
Total Marks 100%
111
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Practical Ship Design by D.G.M. Watson

2. Ship Design for Efficiency and Economy by H. Schneekluth & Bertram
3. Principles of Naval Architecture Series, Vol. I, Stability and Strength, published by SNAME
4. Principles of Naval Architecture Series, Vol. II, Resistance, Propulsion and Vibration,
published by SNAME
5. Resistance and propulsion of ships, Sv Aa Harvald
6. Ship Knowledge, A Modern Encyclopaedia
7. Ship Stability for Master and Mates, Captain D.R Derrett, Butterworth Heineman.
Publications.
9. Theoretical Naval Architecture, E.L. Attwood & H.S. Pengelly, 1962, Longmans Green &
Co.Ltd.
11. Naval Architecture: Examples and Theory, B. Baxter, Second Impression 1977, Charles Griffin
& CompanyLtd.
12. Introduction to marine engineering, D.A.Taylor.
13. Marine Auxiliary Machinery by H. D. McGeorge
112
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Ship Structure Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Mechanics of Structure
RATIONALE
This compulsory theoretical course is intended to provide students with a thorough understanding of
the theory and application of structural analysis as it applies to the ship‟s columns, beams and frames.
Emphasis is placed on developing the student's ability to calculate the deflection, buckling, shear
force and bending moment of ship structural elements.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable to impart knowledge on static and dynamic effect on ship structure.
2. Achieving ability to understand the theory and application of ship structural analysis.
3. To enable to calculate the longitudinal and transverse strength of ship structure.
4. To enable to calculate the buckling and wide plate bending of ship structure.

1. Explain structural elements of ships and crafts.
2. Perform calculation of stress, strain, displacement, shear force, bending moment and light
weight of ship.
3. Analyze the longitudinal and transverse strength of ship structure at different loading conditions.
4. Evaluate the deflection, bending and buckling of ship structure subjected to dynamic loads.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Ship Structure: Structural analysis in Ship Design, steps in ship structural
design process, Flowchart method for ship structural analysis, Classification of ship structures,
Description of forces acting upon a ship at sea, Smith Effect, Slamming, Hogging, Sagging.
Different types of Ship Motion, largest Hogging/Sagging bending moment, Calculation of
buoyancy, shear force and bending moment, Total shear force and total bending moment for a
ship amongst waves, Buoyancy curve in still water and weight curve, shearing force and bending
moment curves, Buoyancy curves amongst waves compared with buoyancy in still water.
Functions of the ship structures, Strength/distortion of ship structures.
2. Longitudinal Strength of Ship Structure: Assumed form of wave system for structural
design, Difference between sinusoidal wave and trochoidal wave, Formation and
necessity of trochoid. Distance between half height of a trochoidal wave and the
113
equivalent still water level, Buoyancy curves for different positions of wave, „Sagging
Condition‟ and „Hogging Condition‟, Plotting the buoyancy curve, Light weight and
dead weight, types of weights, plotting the weight curve.
Sir John. H. Biles approximation method, plotting the load, shearing force and bending
moment curves from buoyancy and weight curves in calculation of longitudinal strength
of a ship. Characteristics of shearing force and bending moment curves of a ship, Sketch
the typical curves of load, shearing force and bending moment for a ship, Influence of
position of wave on bending moment, Murray‟s approximate method for calculating the
bending moment of a ship. Alternative method for calculating the approximate
buoyancy moment, Alternative method for calculating the approximate weight moment,
Equation for maximum bending moment of a ship, Calculation of maximum bending
moment considering the position of maximum is at amidship.
3. Stresses in the Structure and the Calculation of Deflection: Definition of NA, Flexural
rigidity of beam, Section Modulus Strain – Curvature and Moment – Curvature relation for a
curved beam, Flexure Formula, Equation for the location of NA in the inclined condition of a
Ship, Inclination for greatest and least stresses of an inclined Ship, Stress variation with angle of
inclination of a ship, Formulation of the necessary steps for calculation of the deflection of ship
structure, Shear Formula for a Structure. Influence of shear stress on bending theory stress,
Strain energy method for calculating shear deflection, Derivation of equation of shear deflection
and calculation of shear deflection, Maximum normal stresses at a cross section, Stress variation
in a rectangular cross section for positive and negative bending moment, Different strain
energies of a structure.
4. Local strength problems: Expression for Bending Moment and Deflection of a simply
supported beam and its calculation, Expression for Bending Moment and Deflection of a fixed
ended beam and its calculation. Equation for calculating Bending Moment of fixed ended
beams, Procedure to determine the total BM of a fixed ended beam, Expressions of shearing
force, bending moment and deflection for a flooded watertight bulkhead of a ship, Redundant
Structures, Portal frame, Evaluation of the end/corner moment of a portal frame, Influence of
rigidity of surrounding structure, Explanation of the importance of the rigidity of the post and
stay of a derrick.
5. Buckling of Structures: Assumptions need to be considered in the theory of buckling
structures. Different states of equilibrium from the viewpoint of buckling of structures.
Expression for critical load and critical stress for a hinged ended column, Expression for total
maximum stress for a column with initial curvature, Expression for critical stress considering
buckling of a simply supported rectangular plate.
6. Dynamic Effects: Response of ship due to its Heaving Motion in still water considering un-
damped vibration and damped vibration Influences on damping due to heaving motion, Equation
for natural pitching period, Equation for pitching angle amongst waves.
7. Theory of Plates: Bending of wide plates, Bending of panels of plating, Simply supported
rectangular plates, Simply supported plate with uniformly distributed load, Solution of Plate
Problem by strain energy method, Rectangular plate bending, Plates with clamped edges,
Applicatiuon of plane stress theory to ship structural problems, Simple grillage, Multi-stiffener
grillages, Simply supported grillages. Two materials with the same elastic modulus, Two
materials of different elastic moduli, Bending of a composite beam, Superstructure Efficiency,
Crawford‟s Theory.
8. Introduction of FEM
114

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain structural elements of ships and
CO1 √
crafts.
Perform calculation of static and dynamic
CO2 forces, displacement, shear force, bending √
moment and light weight of ship.
Analyze the longitudinal and transverse
CO3 strength of ship structure at different loading √
conditions.
Evaluate the deflection , bending and
CO4 buckling of ship structure subjected to √
dynamic loads.
Taxonomy Methods
Explain structural elements of ships
CO1 C2 1-4 CT, F
and crafts.
Perform calculation of static and
dynamic forces, displacement, shear
CO2 A2 1 1-4 CT, MT, F
force, bending moment and light
weight of ship.
Analyze the longitudinal and transverse
CO3 strength of ship structure at different C4 3 5 CT/ASG, F
loading conditions.
Evaluate the deflection , bending and
CO4 buckling of ship structure subjected to C5 1 1-4 MT, F
dynamic loads.
Exam)
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to calculate stress-
strain and forces of ship‟s structural elements.
CO2-PO1 In order to apply the mathematics knowledge to calculate the static and dynamic
forces, displacement, shear force, bending moment and light weight of ship.
CO3-PO3 To design the longitudinal and transverse strength related problems of ship structure
and solve them.
CO4-PO2 To analyze the deflection, bending and buckling related problems of ship structures
115
and solve them.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Static forces acting upon a ship at sea, Buoyancy curve in still water and
weight curve.
Class 2 Shearing force and bending moment curves of a ship, Buoyancy curves
amongst waves compared with buoyancy in still water, Dynamic forces
acting upon a ship at sea.
Class 3 Degrees of freedom a ship has in a wave system, Possible distortion of the CT 1,
ships structure with sketch, All the functions of the ship‟s structure. Final Exam
Week 2 Longitudinal Bending
Class 4 Difference between sinusoidal wave and trochoidal wave; The formation
and necessity of trochoid.
Class 5 Buoyancy curves for different positions of wave.„Sagging Condition‟ and
„Hogging Condition‟ with sketch.
Class 6 The procedure for getting the ordinates of the buoyancy curve.
Light weight and dead weight. The items of two types of weight.
Class 7 The distribution of weight of continuous material, Sir John H. Biles
approximation, Distribution of dead weight items.
Class 8 Procedure for calculating the shearing force and bending moment of ship‟s
structure, The characteristics of shearing force and bending moment
curves.
Class 9 The typical curves of shearing force and bending moment, The influence
116
of position of wave on bending moment, Influence of weight distribution
on the bending moment.
Class 10 Bending moment due to addition of weight, Approximations to bending
moment and shearing force, Murray‟s approximate method for calculating
the bending moment on a ship.
Class 11 Mandelli‟s approximate method for calculating the bending moment on a
ship, Maximum shear force.
Class 12 Assessment 01 (CT-1) CT 2,
Week 5 Stresses in the Structure and the Calculation of Deflection Final Exam
Class 13 Review of Bending Theory, Calculation of the Section Modulus, Calculate
stresses in the inclined condition.
Class 14 Sketch stresses in corners of section against angle of inclination from
vertical, Calculation of the deflection of the structure
Class 15 Calculation of Shear Stress in the structure, Influence of shear stress on
bending stress.
Week 6 Dynamic Effects
Class 16 Strain energy method for calculating shear deflection, Load line standard
of longitudinal strength.
Class 17 The main two dynamic effects, Influence of the motion of the water
particles on the buoyancy of a ship amongst waves.
Class 18 Influence of ship motions on longitudinal strength, Heaving in still water.
Week 7 Dynamic Effects (Continue)
Class 19 Damped heaving in still water, Heaving amongst regular waves.
Class 20 Influence of heaving amongst waves on longitudinal strength, Natural
pitching period.
Week 8 Theories of Plates
Class 22 Pitching amongst waves, Influence of pitching on longitudinal strength.
Class 23 Bending of wide plates, Bending of panels of plating.
Class 24 Simply supported rectangular plates, Simply supported plate with
uniformly distributed load. Mid Term,
Week 9 Theories of Plates (Continue) Final Exam
Class 25 Solution of Plate Problem by strain energy method, Rectangular plate
bending.
Class 26 Plates with clamped edges, Applicatiuon of plane stress theory to ship
structural problems.
Class 27 Simple grillage, Multi-stiffener grillages, Simply supported grillages.
Week 10 Buckling of Structures
Class 28 Critical Load for a hinged ended column, Columns with initial curvature.
Class 29 Buckling of a wide plate, Buckling of a simply supported rectangular plate.
Week 11 Buckling of Structures (Continue)
Class 31 Assessment 03 (Mid Term Exam)
Class 32 Strain energy method applied to the solution of elastic stability problems,
Influence of longitudinal stiffeners on the buckling strength of plating.
117
Class 33 Influence of transverse stiffeners on the buckling of plating, Buckling of CT 3,
curved panels of plating. Final Exam
Week 12 Local Strength Problems
Class 34 Bending moment and deflection of beams, Fixed ended beams with
arbitrary distribution of loading.
Class 35 Expression for the shearing force, bending moment and deflection of
Bulkhead, Portal frame problem.
Class 36 Watertight bulkheads, Stayed derrick post problem.
Week13 Composite Constructions
Class 37 Two materials with the same elastic modulus, Two materials of different
elastic moduli.
Class 38 Bending of a composite beam, Application and Problems.
Week 14 Structural Discontinuities and Superstructures
Class 40 Superstructure Efficiency, Crawford‟s Theory
Class 41 Introduction to FEM

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C5,C4
CO4 C5, C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Strength of ships‟ structure by W Muckle

2. Ship Structural Analysis and Design by Owen F Huges
3. Buckling of Ship Structure by Shama
4. Design of Ship Hull Structure by Yasuhisa Okumoto
5. Design Principles of Ships and Marine Structures by S C Misra
118
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Design of Special Ships Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Ship Design
RATIONALE
The knowledge of Ship Design – II course is intended to provide the fundamental characteristics of a
ship‟s design and how they affect its behaviour at sea are of crucial importance to many people
involved in the design of all marine vessels. This course will help to develop and apply key theories
and principles associated with the design of various types of vessels also develops fundamental naval
architecture knowledge, including a thorough exploration of its concepts and how they are practically
used in applications in ships.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable to interpret and apply the design and iterative procedure principles of ship.
2. To enable to impart knowledge on appropriate calculations and interpret outcomes in naval
architecture tasks.
3. To make skillful to explain a project that not only will satisfy regulations and requirements, but
also will fit in the marine environment, economic trends and the accelerating advance of
technology.
4. To enable to design different ship efficiently and effectively.

1. Estimate the values of design optimization parameters, capacities and performances
2. Apply knowledge in practical ship designs.
3. Analyze design philosophy and design aspects of different type of ships
4. Compare characteristics of the design features of different ships
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to ship type.
2. Cargo ship: Design, general arrangement, construction, midship section, structures, equipment,
propulsion and other important systems, operations, environmental concerns, special features.
3. Passenger ship: Design, general arrangement, construction, midship section, structures,
equipment, propulsion and other important systems, operations, environmental concerns,
special features.
119
4. Container Ship: - Design, general arrangement, construction, midship section, structures,
special features.
5. Ro-Ro Ship: - Design, general arrangement, construction, midship section, structures,
special features.
6. Tankers: - Design, general arrangement, construction, midship section, structures, equipment,
7. Trawler: Design, general arrangement, construction, midship section, structures, equipment,
8. Tug: Design, general arrangement, construction, midship section, structures, equipment,
9. Dredger: - Design, general arrangement, construction, midship section, structures, equipment,
10. High Speed Ship: - Design and construction including special characteristics. Hydrodynamics
of small high-speed craft including planning hulls, air cushion vehicles, surface effect ships and
catamarans.
11. Submarine and Warship: - Design and construction including special characteristics.
12. Sailing yacht: Forces and moments acting on a sailing yacht, Speed polar diagrams, Two- and
three-dimensional airfoil theory, Application to keel and rudder design, Yacht model testing.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Estimate the values of design optimization
CO1 √
parameters, capacities and performances
CO2 Apply knowledge in practical ship designs. √
CO3 √
aspects of different type of ships.
Compare characteristics of the design
CO4 √
features of different ships.
Taxonomy Methods
Estimate the values of design
CO1 parameters, capacities and C2 6 5 CT, F, ASG
performances
Apply knowledge in practical ship
CO2 C3 8 1-4 CT, MT, F
designs and construction
CO3 C4 4 8 CT, F
aspects of different type of ships
Compare characteristics of different
CO4 C5 7 7 MT, F
design stages
120
Exam)
CO1-PO3 Design solutions for complex engineering problems that meet specified needs with
appropriate estimate the values of design parameters, capacities and performances
CO2-PO1 Apply knowledge of science and engineering fundamentals to the solution of
complex engineering problems based on apply the knowledge in practical ship
designs and construction.
CO3-PO4 To conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge to
analyze the design philosophy and design aspects of different type of ships.
CO4-PO7 Understand and evaluate the sustainability and impact of professional engineering
work to compare the characteristics of different design feature.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Design of General Cargo ship
Class 1 Introduction to various ship types
Class 2 Design, general arrangement, construction and midship section of cargo
ship
Class 3 Structural equipment, propulsion and other important systems of cargo
ship
Week 2 Design of General Cargo ship and Passenger ship CT 1,
Class 4 Environmental concerns and special features of cargo ship, general Final Exam
121
arrangement, construction and midship section of passenger ship.
Class 5 Structures, equipment, propulsion and other important systems of
passenger ship
Class 6 Operations, environmental concerns and special features of passenger
ship
Week 3 Design of Container Ship
Class 7 Design, general arrangement, construction and midship section of
container ships
container ships
Class 9 Operations, environmental concerns and special features of container
ships
Week 4 Design of Ro-Ro Ship
Class 10 Design, general arrangement, construction and midship section of Ro-
Ro ships
Class 11 Structures, equipment, propulsion and other important systems of Ro-
Ro ships
Class 12 Operations, environmental concerns and special features of Ro-Ro ships
Week 5 Design of Oil Tanker CT 2,
Class 13 Design, general arrangement, construction and midship section of Final Exam
tankers
tankers
Class 15 Operations, environmental concerns and special features of tankers
Week 6 Design of Dredger
Class 16 Design, general arrangement, construction and midship section of
dredgers
dredgers
Class 18 Operations, environmental concerns and special features of dredgers
Week 7 Design of Submarine and Warship
Class 19 Design and construction of Submarines
Class 20 Design and construction of Submarines
Class 21 Design and construction of Frigate
Week 8 Design of Submarine and Warship
Class 22 Design and construction of Frigate
Class 23 Design and construction of Corvette Mid Term,
Class 24 Design and construction of Corvette Final Exam
Week 9 Design of Special Type of Ship
Class 25 Design and construction of OPV
Class 26 Design and construction of OPV
Class 27 Design and construction of LPC
Week 10 Design of Special Type of Ship
Class 28 Design and construction of LPC
Class 29 Design and construction of LCT
Class 30 Design and construction of LCVP
Week 11 Design of High Speed Ship
Class 31 Design and construction of High speed crafts including special Mid Term,
characteristics Final Exam
Class 32 Design and construction of High speed crafts including special
characteristics
Class 33 Design and construction of multi-hull vessels including special
characteristics
122
Week 12 Design of High Speed Ship
Class 34 Hydrodynamics of small high-speed craft including planning hulls
Class 35 Hydrodynamics of small high-speed craft including air cushion vehicles
Class 36 Hydrodynamics of small high-speed craft including surface effect ships
Week13 Design of Sailing Yacht
Class 37 Hydrodynamics of small high-speed craft including catamarans
Class 38 Forces and moments acting on a sailing yacht
Class 39 Speed polar diagrams CT 3,
Week 14 Design of Sailing Yacht Final Exam
Class 40 Two- and three-dimensional airfoil theory
Class 41 Application to keel and rudder design
Class 42 Yacht model testing

20%
5% C4
CO1 C2
CO2 C3, C2,C5
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Hydrodynamics of High Speed Marine Vehicles, O.M. Faltinsen, 2005, Cambridge University
Press.
2. Practical Ship Design, D.G.M. Watson, 1998, Elsevier Science Ltd. Fiber Glass Boats, Hugo
Du Plessis, 3rdE dition, 1996, McGraw-Hill Book Company.
3. Reeds Naval Architecture For Marine Engineers, E A Stoke
4. Modern Warship: Design and Development, Norman Friedman
123
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Application of ship design software Credit Hours: 1.50
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Application of ship design software course is designed to teach students about the basic design
drawings of different types of ship and floating structures by using AutoCAD, Maxsurf and
Rhinoceros software. Students will be able to perform necessary calculations related to the basic
design of ship, hydrostatic, trim and stability, resistance and required power calculations. It is
expected that students will develop critical thinking about measuring characteristics of different
parameters precisely, able to check their effects using calculations and finally chose the appropriate
feature.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to be familiarized and produce lines plan of ship in 2-D and transform 2-D
lines plan into 3-D lines plan.
2. To enable students to generate ship‟s hull from 3-D lines plan.
3. To enable students to draw different types of ship from preliminary particulars and perform
different types of analysis on the designed ship.
4. To apply trim, stability and resistance calculation on designed ship.

1. Produce 2-D and 3-D lines plan from offset table.
2. Develop hull from 3-D lines plan using modern ship design software.
3. Evaluate and assess principal particulars and design ship from those data.
4. Compute and analysis hydrostatic properties of ships to produce hydrostatic curves and
prepare trim, stability and resistance calculation of the designed ship.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Rhinoceros: Introduction about the Rhinoceros software. Use of surface and solids. Use of 3-D
lines generated in AutoCAD into Rhinoceros and develop hull surface.
2. MAXSURF: Introduction about the Maxsurf software. Use of generated hull in Rhinoceros into
the Maxsurf and analysis of hydrostatics, stability parameters.
No. COURSE OUTCOMES (COs) PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)
124
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Produce 2-D and 3-D lines plan from
CO1 √
offset table.
Develop hull from 3-D lines plan using
CO2 √
modern ship design software.
Evaluate and assess principal particulars
CO3 √
and design ship from those data.
Compute and analysis hydrostatic
properties of ships to produce hydrostatic
CO4 √
curves and prepare trim, stability and
resistance calculation of the designed ship.
Taxonomy Methods
Produce 2-D and 3-D lines plan
CO1 C3 R,T,PR
from offset table.
Develop hull from 3-D lines plan
CO2 C3 R,T,PR
using modern ship design software.
Evaluate and assess principal
CO3 particulars and design ship from C3, C3 1 1-4 R,T,PR
those data.
Compute and analysis hydrostatic
properties of ships to produce
CO4 hydrostatic curves and prepare C3 1 1-4 R,T,PR
trim, stability and resistance
calculation of the designed ship.
CO1-PO1 Students will apply their knowledge to develop concept of 3-D lines plan.
Students will acquire knowledge on modern software to draw 3-D lines plan, offset
CO2-PO5
table and 3-D hull.
Students will apply their knowledge to assess the requirement and estimation of
CO3-PO1
principal particulars to design a ship.
Students will acquire knowledge to evaluate the hydrostatic parameters, trim,
CO4-PO12 stability and resistance of the designed ship at different loading conditions which
will help them in life long term.
125
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Practice at CAD Lab 30
Preparation of Assignment 24
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
Lecture followed by CAD session and discussion, co-operative and collaborative method, project-
based method
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topics
Week 1 Course introduction, generation of 2-D lines plan from offset table.
Week 2 Generation of 3-D lines plan from 2-D lines plan.
Week 3 Generation of 3-D lines plan from 2-D lines plan.
Week 4 Introduction to Rhinoceros software, basic command and drawings in Rhinoceros
Week 5 Hull generation on 3-D lines plan.
Week 6 Hull generation on 3-D lines plan.
Week 7 Introduction to Maxsurf software
Week 8 Hull generation in Maxsurf from principal particulars
Week 9 Hull generation and hull fairing
Week 10 Generation of hydrostatic curves in Maxsurf and perform stability calculation
Week 11 Stability criteria and different loading conditions
Week 12 Calculation of resistance in Maxsurf
Week 13 Review of the course contents
Week 14 Final Quiz and Viva

CO 1 C1, C3
Lab participation and CO 2 C4, A1
Continuous 20%
Report CO 3 C3, C4
Assessment
CO 4 C3
Labtest-1,Labtest-2 30% CO 1 C1, C3
126
CO 2 C4, C5
CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
Project and
25% CO 1, CO 2, CO 4 A1, A2, A4
Presentation
CO 1 CO 2
CO 2 CO 3
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C3, P7
CO 4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manuals of Maxsurf
2. Manuals of Rhinoceros
3. Ship Design and Performance for Masters and Mates
4. Ship Stability for Masters and Mates
5. Theoretical Naval Architecture
127
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Engineering-I Contact Hours: 3.0
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Thermal Engineering
SYNOPSIS/RATIONALE
Compulsory Theoretical Course
Marine Engineering-I course is designed to teach students about the basic concepts of Engines, details
of components, operation, combustion of Internal Combustion Engine, components & operation of
Gas Turbine used in ships, Marine fuels & properties and components and details of Ships Shafting
system. Students will be able to select the suitable marine engine, fuels and lubricants and shafting
system for the ships including necessary calculations related with them. It is expected that students
will be able to analyze critically for the selection of correct machinery and propulsion system for the
designed ship. Students will also be able to analyze the defects of machinery and ships shafting
system while working as Marine engineer on board.
OBJECTIVE
1. To provide basic concepts of Various Engine
2. To learn the details of Marine Engines and Gas Turbine.
3. To analyze the various defects and problems related to IC Engine.
4. To analyze and learn about different marine fuels.
5. To provide the concepts of Various shafting equipment and System
COURSE OUTCOMES (COS)

1. Describe the components and working aspects of different types of Internal Combustion engine
and gas turbine
2. Evaluate the different types of special features of various types of marine engine and gas
turbine
3. Explain the characteristics of different types of marine fuels
4. Describe the shafting system of a ship and the various components of shafting system
COURSE CONTENT
1. Marine Engines
a. Diesel Engine/ CI Engine: Related terminology and definitions, Valve timing diagram, CI
engine: Basic parts of CI engines, Types, Combustion including phases, Fuel pump
128
mechanism and operation, governor mechanism and operation.
b. SI engine: Combustion of SI engine, Carburettor, Supercharging, scavenging, low load

running, lube oil testing etc, Engine operation, testing and Fuel metering.
c. Gas Turbine: Description of major components of GT, Working principle, Practical session
on GT propulsion, Construction of compressor and combustion chamber of GT, Various
system of GT, Advantage and disadvantage.
d. Engine diagnosis and fault finding: Crankcase explosion, Crankshaft deflection, Load trials.
Selection criteria of marine engine.
2. Marine Fuels
Types (Petrol, Diesel, Octane, Biofuels etc.), Octane No, Centane No, Gravity and testing,
Description and characteristics of HSDO, LHSDO, IFO
3. Power Transmission
a. Principle and mechanism of Gear box: Coupling and clutch, solid drive coupling, Fluid drive
coupling, and other couplings.
b. Description of ship‟s shafting system, Description of components, Construction and
operation: Thrust block, Plummer block, Bulkhead gland, Stern tube, loose coupling.
c. Shafting alignment requirements and various methods

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe the components and working
CO1 aspects of different types of Internal √
Combustion engine and gas turbine
Evaluate the different types of special features
CO2 of various types of marine engine and gas √
turbine
Explain the characteristics of different types
CO3 √
of marine fuels
Describe the shafting system of a ship and the
CO4 √
various components of shafting system
Taxonomy Methods
Describe the components and
working aspects of different types
CO1 C1 1 1 1-4 CT, F
of Internal Combustion engine and
gas turbine
CO2 Evaluate the different types of C3 1 1 1-4 CT/ASG, MT,
129
special features of various types of F
marine engine and gas turbine
Explain the characteristics of CT/ASG, MT,
CO3 A3 3 3 5
different types of marine fuels F
Describe the shafting system of a
CO4 ship and the various components A2 4 2 1-4 F
of shafting system
Exam)
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of components and working principle of different types of Internal
Combustion engine and gas turbine
CO2-PO2 To Evaluate the different types of special features of various types of marine engine
and gas turbine
CO3-PO4 To be able to explain the characteristics of different types of marine fuels
CO4-PO3 This is required in order to describe the propulsion and shafting system of a ship
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introductory class
130
Class 2 Marine Engines : Study of ICE, Related terminology
Class 3 Marine Engines : Types of ICE, Operation of ICE
Week 2 Basics of IC Engine
Class 4 Study of CI engine: Basic parts of CI & SI engine
Class 5 Study of CI engine: Descriptions of components of CI engine CT 1,
Class 6 Study of CI engine: Descriptions of components of CI engine Final Exam
Week 3 Two stroke and four stroke IC engine
Class 7 Study of CI engine: Two Stroke and Four Stroke ICE
Class 8 Study of operation of Four stroke IC engine
Class 9 Study of operation of Two stroke IC engine
Week 4 Combustion of CI &SI Engine
Class 10 Study of CI engine: Combustion of CI engine
Class 12 Study of CI engine: Combustion of SI engine
Week 5 Important Clearance and Fuel Injection System CT 2,
Class 13 Study of IC engine: Important Clearances of IC engine Final Exam
Class 14 Fuel Injection System, requirement and Types
Class 15 Fuel Injection System, Types
Week 6 Governor
Class 16 Governor, Types of Governor
Class 17 Basic operation of Governor
Class 18 Components and working principle of a governor
Week 7 Low Load Running and Supercharging
Class 19 Low Load Running, Effects of Low load running, Methods to overcome
Low Load Running Effects
Class 20 Supercharging, Turbo Charging Mid Term,
Class 21 Assessment 02 Final Exam
Week 8 STC, Scavenging, Crank case Explosion
Class 22 Description and operation of Sequential Turbocharging
Class 23 Scavenging
Class 24 Crank case explosion, causes and remedies
Week 9 Fuel Timing and Tuning
Class 25 Crank shaft deflection, reasons & remedies
Class 26 Phasing, Calibration and Timing
Class 27 Tuning of ICE
Week 10 Problems related to ICE
Class 28 Problems Related to ICE
Class 29 Problems Related to ICE
Week 11 Gas Turbine
Class 31 Problems Related to ICE Mid Term,
Class 32 Gas Turbine: Classifications, Advantage & disadvantage Final Exam
Class 33 Gas Turbine: Description of major components
Week 12 Gas Turbine
Class 34 Gas Turbine: Working principle of GT
Class 35 Gas Turbine: Practical session on GT propulsion & working principle
131
Class 36 Gas Turbine: Description of Compressor and combustion chamber of GT
Week13 Ship’s Shafting System
Class 37 Gas Turbine: Practical session on GT
Class 38 Power transmission: Description of ship‟s shafting system & description
of components CT 3,
Class 39 Power transmission: Construction & Operation of Thrust block, Plummer Final Exam
block, Bulkhead gland ,Stern tube, Loose coupling
Week 14 Shaft Alignment Methods
Class 40 Power transmission : Rough methods Shaft alignment
Class 41 Power transmission : Precision methods of Shaft alignment
Class 42 Assessment

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering Fundamentals of the internal combustion Engine - Willard W. Pulkrabek

2. Maine Internal Combustion Engine – A. B. Kane.
3. Marine Diesel Engine- Divehi Arana.
4. Pounder‟s Maine Diesel Engine and as Turbine- Doug woodland
132
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Engineering Lab-I Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Marine Engineering Sessional – I course is designed to familiarized the students with various types of
marine machineries and give an overview about their construction and working principles. The
students will be able to relate their theoretical knowledge with the experiments performed in this
course and comprehend those with industrial training.
OBJECTIVES
1. To give an overview and idea about the machineries used in marine vessels and
shipbuilding industries
2. To enable students to be familiarized with the construction (assembling and disassembling),
functions and performance test of different engine and its associated components.
3. The course will also be comprehended with an industrial visit to a reputed shipyard and
shipbuilding industry.

1. Outline different kinds of marine machineries and knows their working principle and
construction.
2. Predict the workability of the engines by interpretation of performance tests.
3. Comprehend the theoretical knowledge of transmission system with its practical functioning
4. Infer methods to develop efficient operation of machineries.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Study of SI and CI engine
2. Dismantling and assembling of Diesel Engine
3. Study of valve timing and diagram
4. Study of tappet adjustment and bumping adjustment
5. Performance test of a high speed diesel engine
6. Study of automotive transmission system
7. Study of diesel power plant of MIST
8. Study of steam boiler and steam turbine unit
9. Study of Gas turbine
10. Study of air compressor and refrigeration system
133
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Outline different kinds of marine
CO1 machineries and knows their working √
principle and construction.
Predict the workability of the engines by
CO2 √
interpretation of performance tests.
Conform the theoretical knowledge of
CO3 transmission system with its practical √
functioning
Infer methods to develop efficient
CO4 √
operation of the machineries.
Taxonomy Methods
Outline different kinds of marine
machineries and knows their
CO1 C1 1-4 R,Pr
working principle and
construction.
Predict the workability of the
CO2 engines by interpretation of C2 1-4 R, Q, Pr
performance tests of the engines.
Conform the theoretical
CO3 knowledge of transmission system A2 1-4 R,Q,Pr
with its practical functioning.
Infer methods to develop efficient
CO4 C4 1-4 R, Q, Pr
operation of the machineries.
Exam)
The students will be able to identify the distinguishing features of marine
CO1-PO1
machineries by utilizing the fundamental operating principle of them.
By interpreting the experimental data, students will predict the operating life and
CO2-PO4
efficiency of engines.
Experiments performed on transmission system can help the students to recall and
CO3-PO1
reproduces the theoretical knowledge.
Students will be able to perform and guide to ensure the effective measures to
CO4-PO9
operate the machineries efficiently.
134
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
Lecture followed by experiments and discussion, co-operative and collaborative method, project
based method.
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Name of the Experiment

Week-1 Course introduction, Introduction to different types of engines existed and
auxiliary machineries in marine application.
Week-2 Study of SI and CI engine
Week-3 Dismantling and assembling of a Diesel Engine
Week-4 Study of valve timing and diagram
Week-5 Study of tappet adjustment and bumping adjustment
Week-6 Performance test of a high speed diesel engine
Week-7 Study of automotive transmission system
Week-8 Mid Term Assessment (Viva / Quiz)
Week-9 Study of diesel power plant of MIST
Week-10 Study of steam turbine unit and steam boiler
Week-11 Study of Gas turbine
Week-12 Study of air compressor and refrigeration system
Week-13 Review Class
Week-14 Final Assessment (Viva & Quiz)

Continuous CO 1 C2, C4
Lab participation
Assessment 20% CO 2 A2
and Report
(40%) CO 3 C3, C4
135
CO 4 C3, A3
CO 1 C1, C4
CO 2 C4
CO 3 C3, A2
CO 4 C3
Project and
25% CO 1, CO 2, CO 3 A2, A3, A4
Presentation
CO 1 C1
CO 2 C3, A2
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C3,C4
CO 4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Marine Auxiliary Machinery- H.D Mc George

2. Marine Auxiliary Machinery and System – M. Khetagurov
3. General Engineering Knowledge for Marine Engineers – L. Jackson and T. D. Morton
4. Marine Auxiliary Machinery – H.D. McGeorge
136
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Machine Elements Design Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE- REQUISITE
RATIONALE
Compulsory Theoretical course based on machine functions and mechanism to design machine
elements for efficient operations.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable to design considering stresses, stress concentration, failure theories and types of fits.
2. To achieve ability to familiarize the students with fracture mechanics, fatigue strength and
strength of materials.
3. To teach students the design of screws, belt and chain drives, spring, welded and riveted
connections.
4. To enable the students to design various types of gears.

1. Analyze stress, stress concentration and suitable types of fits.
2. Understand and analyze fatigue strength and strength of material.
3. Design screws, springs, welded and riveted joints and belt & chain drives.
4. Design various types of gears.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Fundamental Principles of Machine Design: Working Stresses and Failure Theories;
Stresses in curved members; Deflection and stiffness considerations; Column design;
Statistical considerations; Types of fits.
2. Design parameters: analysis with isotropic and anisotropic materials. Design for static
strength; Fracture mechanics in design; Design for fatigue strength. Design of screws, fasteners
and connections; Keys and couplings, welded and brazed joints; Shafts, keys and couplings,
Power screws and bolted connections, Belt and chain drives, Brakes and clutches, Welded and
Riveted Connections, rope, belt and chain drives. Springs,
3. Shaft Piston
4. Gears and Gearing systems: spur, helical, worm and bevel gears, Toothed gearing, Gear
trains. Design of marine shafts, stern tube and associated bearings
5. Shock and vibration: Properties and design for damping and arresting of vibration. Bearings:
Friction, Design of Journal, Ball, Needle and Roller bearings.
6. Lubrication of machine elements: Boundary, Hydrostatic and Hydrodynamic lubrication
systems.
137

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Analyze stress, stress concentration and
CO1 √
suitable types of fits.
Understand and analyze fatigue strength
CO2 √
and strength of material.
Design screws, springs, welded and riveted
CO3 √
joints and belt & chain drives.
CO4 Design various types of gears. √
Taxonomy Methods
Analyze stress, stress concentration and
CO1 C3 1 1-4 CT, F
suitable types of fits.
Understand and analyze fatigue CT, Mid
CO2 C2 1 1-4
strength and strength of material. Term, F
Design screws, springs, welded and
riveted joints and belt & chain drives.
CO4 Design various types of gears. C3 2 5 Mid Term, F
The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to calculate stress,
CO1-PO1
stress concentration.
Using engineering science complex issues related to strength of material has to be
CO2-PO2
analyzed.
CO3-PO3 To design solutions and system components using engineering science.
CO4-PO3 To design solutions and system components using engineering science.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
138
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 2 Fundamental Principles of Machine Design
Class 3 Working Stresses and Failure Theories
Week 2 Stress and Deflection Analysis
Class 4 Stresses in curved members
Class 5 Deflection and stiffness considerations CT 1,
Class 6 Column design; Statistical considerations Final Exam
Week 3 Design parameters
Class 7 Analysis with isotropic and anisotropic materials
Class 8 Design for static strength; Fracture mechanics in design
Class 9 Design for fatigue strength
Class 10 Design of screws
Class 11 Design of Fasteners and Connections
Class 12 Design of keys and couplings
Week 5 Design parameters CT 2,
Class 13 Design of welded and brazed joints Final Exam
Class 14 Design of Power screws and bolted connections
Class 15 Design of welded and Riveted Connections
Class 16 Design of belt and chain drives
Class 17 Design analysis of Brakes and clutches
Class 18 Design and strength of rope, belt and chain drives.
Class 19 Design parameters of spring
Class 20 Analysis of shock and vibration
Class 21 Properties and design for damping and arresting of vibration Mid Term,
Week 8 Bearings Final Exam
Class 22 Analysis of friction
Class 23 Design of Journal and ball bearing
Class 24 Needle and Roller bearings
Week 9 Gears and Gearing systems
Class 25 Design of Spur and Helical gear
139
Class 26 Design of worm and bevel gear
Class 27 Toothed gearing, Gear trains.
Week 10 Shaft and Tubes
Class 28 Design of Marine Shafts
Class 29 Design of stern tubes
Class 30 Design of bearings associated with shafts and tubes
Week 11 Lubrication
Class 31 Lubrication of machine elements Mid Term,
Class 32 Hydrostatic Lubrication Final Exam
Class 33 Hydrodynamic lubrication
Week 12 Fittings
Class 34 Analysis of various types of fits
Class 35 Close fit and loose fit
Class 36 Design of various types of fits and strengths
Week13 Design parameters
Class 37 Design od belt and chain
Class 38 Analysis of pulley , tension and strength
Class 39 Design criteria of a cam, profile of a cam CT 3,
Week 14 Revision Final Exam
Class 40 Design of gears
Class 41 Design of spring
Class 42 Design of shafts

20%
Assessment Class
5% CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4 C6, A2
(40%) Participation
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Machine Design – Andrzej Golenko_
2. Theory of Machine – R.S. Khurmi and J. K. Gupta.
3. Theory of Machine and Mechanisms – Joseph E. Shigley, John Joseph Uicker
4. Standard Handbook of Machine Design – Joseph E. Shigley, Charles R. Mischke, Thomas
H.Brown
5. Design of Machine Elements – Sharma, C.S.
6. Theory and Problems of Machine Design –Hall, Holowenco and Laughlin
140
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Ship Construction and Welding Technology Contact Hours: 3.00
RE-REQUISITE
Course Code:NAME 107, NAME 207
Course Title: Introduction to Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering, Ship Design
RATIONALE
Ship construction and welding course based on construction procedure of a ship from start to finish to
get quality product. All the latest classification society based international regulations and
technological developments of standard welding procedure and fabrication of different structural
arrangement are applied to the building procedure of a structure.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable to identify, diagnose and rectify of common welding defects.
2. To enable toimpart knowledge on how consistent weld quality is achieved in practice, through
classification society rules, welding procedure specification and weld monitoring and control.
3. To make skillful toexplain the main activities involve in ship construction.
4. Toenable to prepare a complete flow chart of ship construction process.

1. States common welding codes and standards in the welding industry, the quality of welds and
welded fabrications and detailed inspection documentation and reports on findings including
corrective actions.
2. Interpret standard construction procedure thorough knowledge of ship design.
3. Evaluate of welding for welding of different units and blocks of the ship.
4. Apply rules and regulations related to shipbuilding during construction of vessel.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Welding: Welding details: Different types of welding and their equipment.
2. Welding Principle and Methods: MMAW, GMAW, SAW, Electro slag welding, TIG and SS
welding, MIG and aluminum welding.
3. Welding Sequences and Defects: Welding symbols, welding sequence in shipbuilding, Types
of welding joints, Types of welding and defect, Common defects in ship welding: welding
distortion monitoring and control, inspection and testing of welded specimen.
4. Nondestructive Testing (NDT) Methods and Techniques: Difference Between Destructive
and Non-Destructive Testing, Advantages of using NDT, Application of NDT, Major Six
141
Methods: eddy-current, magnetic-particle, liquid penetrant, radiographic, ultrasonic, and visual
testing.
5. Details of Ship Structural Member: Bottom structure, Keel, Single Bottom structure, Single
Bottom structure, Double bottom Structure, Shell Plating, Framing, Tank side Bracket, Bilge
keel, Bulkhead, Water tight doors, Deep Tank, Topside Tank, Pillars, Deck, Hatches, Bulwark,
Superstructure and Deck house, Stem, Bulbous Bows, Chain Locker, Hawse pipe, Rudder,
Shafting, Plate and section preparation, Frame Bending.
6. Defects in Ship Structure: structural discontinuity, stress concentration, remedial measures,
Cathodic protection, surface preparation and painting.
7. Shipyard Facilities: various shops and production facilities and their layout, Process of ship
construction, Numerical control.
8. Boat building by materials other than steel, conventional ship construction and block
construction method.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
States common welding codes and standards
in the welding industry, the quality of welds
CO1 and welded fabrications and detailed √
inspection documentation and reports on
findings including corrective actions.
Interpret standard construction procedure
CO2 √
thorough knowledge of ship design.
Apply rules and regulations related to
CO3 √
shipbuilding during construction of vessel.
Evaluate of welding for welding of different
CO4 √
units and blocks of the ship.

Taxonomy Methods
CO1 States common welding codes and C1 1 1-4 CT, F, ASG
standards in the welding industry, the
quality of welds and welded fabrications
and detailed inspection documentation
and reports on findings including
corrective actions.
CO2 Interpret standard construction C2 1 8 CT, MT, F
procedure thorough knowledge of ship
design.
CO3 Apply rules and regulations related to C3 4 7 CT, F
shipbuilding during construction of
vessel.
CO4 Evaluate of welding for welding of C5 2 MT, F
142
different units and blocks of the ship.
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of science has to be applied to states welding codes and standards,
welded fabrications and detailed inspection documentation and reports on findings
including corrective actions.
CO2-PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge to
understand standard construction procedure thorough knowledge of ship design.
CO3-PO7 To understand and evaluate the sustainability and impact of professional engineering
work, rules and regulations related to shipbuilding during construction of vessel are
to be applied.
CO4-PO12 Ability to engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of
technological change for welding of different units and blocks of the ship.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Types of Welding
Class 2 Different types of welding and their equipment. Welding principle
Class 3 Methods of Welding
Week 2 Different welding process
143
Class 4 MMAW (Manual Metal Arc Welding), GMAW(Gas Metal Arc
Welding), SAW (Submerged Arc Welding) CT 1,
Class 5 Electro slag welding, TIG and SS welding, MIG (Metal Inert Gas) Final Exam
Class 6 Aluminum welding.
Week 3 Types and symbol of weeding
Class 7 Overview of welding
Class 8 Types of welding joints.
Class 9 Welding Symbols
Week 4 Defect of Welding
Class 10 Welding sequence in shipbuilding
Class 11 Common defects in ship welding
Class 12 Welding distortion monitoring and control
Week 5 NDT CT 2,
Class 13 Inspection and testing of welded specimen. Final Exam
Class 14 Non-destructive type
Class 15 Non-destructive testing Procedure, type, equipment and fault
Week 6 NDT
Class 16 Non-destructive equipment and fault
Class 17 Overview of Welding joint and NDT
Class 18 Structural discontinuity, stress concentration, remedial measures
Class 19 Bottom structure, Keel
Class 20 Single Bottom structure and Double bottom Structure
Class 21 Shell Plating, Framing Mid Term,
Week 8 Structural Assemble Final Exam
Class 22 Tank side Bracket, Bilge keel
Class 23 Bulkhead, Water tight doors, Deep Tank, Topside Tank
Class 24
Class 25 Pillars, Deck, Hatches,
Class 26 Bulwark, Superstructure and Deck house, Stem
Class 27
Class 28 Bulbous Bows
Class 29 Chain Locker, Hawse pipe
Class 30 Rudder
Class 31 Shafting Mid Term,
Class 32 Overview of welding structure Final Exam
Class 33 Shipyard Layout
Week 12 Defects in Ship Structure
Class 34 Structural discontinuity, stress concentration
Class 35 Remedial measures, Cathodic protection
Class 36 Surface preparation and painting
Week13 Ship Construction
Class 37 Process of ship construction, Conventional ship construction
144
Class 38 Block construction method
Class 39 Boat building by materials other than steel CT 3,
Week 14 Shipyard Facilities Final Exam
Class 40 Frame Bending, Numerical control.
Class 41 Various shops and production facilities and their layout Plate and section
preparation
Class 42 Launching

20%
5% C1
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C5
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C2
CO4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Practical ship design, D. G. M. Watson. Elsevier Ocean Engineering Book Series, Volume – 1
2. Ship Construction, Fifth edition, D. J. Eyres
3. Merchant Ship Construction, D. A. Taylor
145
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Ship Resistance and Propulsion Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Introduction to Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering, Hydrostatics and Stability
RATIONALE
This course discusses the selection and evaluation of commercial and naval ship power and
propulsion systems. It provides the fundamental aspects as well as practical considerations for ship
resistance and associated powering requirements, propeller design and engine selection.
OBJECTIVES
1. To demonstrate knowledge and understanding on components and estimation methods of
the resistance of a ship or marine vehicle.
2. To familiarize the students with the principles of propeller design and figure out the
delivered power of a ship or marine vehicle.
3. To induce the ability among students to analyse the powering requirements and to select
engine for fulfilling service requirements of a ship or marine vehicle.
4. To be able to calculate cavitation related problems for propulsion systems.

1. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding on components and estimation methods of
the resistance of a ship or marine vehicle.
2. Apply the principles of propeller design in developing suitable propulsion system for a
marine vehicle.
3. Analyze the powering requirements to select engine for fulfilling service requirements
of a marine vehicle.
4. Evaluate cavitation related problems and minimization of it for propulsion systems.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Theory of Resistance
a. Resistance of a ship and its component, Towrope or effective power, Effective Horse
Power.
b. Dimensional Analysis of Ship Resistance, Total Resistance Coefficient. Wake, Eddy.
c. Different Resistance at different part of Vessel. Definition of Powers and Efficiencies,
Forces, velocities, powers and resistances at different locations of vessel
d. Overall Concept for Powering a Vessel. Definitions of various power, Parts of estimates of
power, Ship power estimate flowchart.
e. Ship resistance determination with model test, Description of Towing Tank with different
146
facilities required for a standard ship model testing facility, Ship model test Purposes.
f. Laws of Comparison: Geometrical Similarity, Kinematic Similarity, Dynamic Similarity.
Dynamic Similarity in case of Incompressible. Frictionless Fluid and No Free Fluid
Surface.
g. Froude experiment on friction, Work of towing tank conference on frictional resistance,
three dimensional viscous resistance formulation, the work of ITTC on Three Dimensional
Viscous Resistance Formulation.
h. Calculation of resistance and effective power by three- dimension extrapolation procedure,
Corresponding Speeds, Relation of Residuary Resistance with Displacement, Calculation
of resistance and effective power by two-dimension extrapolation procedure
i. Air & Wind Resistance Calculation, Shallow water effect, Shallow Water Effect with
narrow channel effect.
2. Theory of Propulsion
a. Types of modern propulsion systems and characteristics.
b. Propeller Geometry, Manufacturing, Generator & Rake, Skew, Propeller Sections, face and
back of the blade, face or geometrical pitch, Typical Blade Sections, the pitch angle,
representative mean pitch, relation between pitch and pitch angle, velocity diagram of a
section. Wake fraction, Thrust deduction factor.
c. The Axial Momentum Theory of Propeller Action, The Momentum Theory including
Angular Motion, Derivation of Blade Element Theory of Screw Propeller, Math on Blade
Element Theory, Math on Momentum Theory
d. Slip, Slip Angle, Real Slip Ratio, Slip ratio, PPR face, back, leading edge, trailing edge,
angle of attack, Skew, Rake, Disk area, projected area, developed area, expanded area.
e. Cavitation, Cavitation Number, Local Cavitation Number, Use of standard series data, Math
on Cavitation.
f. Open Water Characteristics, Propeller Hull Interaction (Wake gain, thrust deduction,
relative rotative efficiency) Propulsive Efficiency and Propulsion Factor, Standard series
and Wageningen B PPR series, , Math on Power & Efficiency
g. Overview of main engine selection considerations, Introduction to ship power train
components. Stern tubes, shafts, bearings, Propeller engine matching.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Demonstrate knowledge and understanding
CO1 on components and estimation methods of the √
resistance of a ship or marine vehicle.
Apply the principles of propeller design in
CO2 developing suitable propulsion system for a √
marine vehicle.
Analyze the powering requirements to select
CO3 engine for fulfilling service requirements of a √
marine vehicle.
CO4 Evaluate cavitation related problems and √
minimization of it for propulsion systems
147
Taxonomy Methods
Demonstrate knowledge and
understanding on components and
CO1 C3 1 1-4 CT, F
estimation methods of the resistance of
a ship or marine vehicle.
Apply the principles of propeller
CO2 design in developing suitable C3 1 1-4 CT, MT, F
propulsion system for a marine vehicle.
Analyze the powering requirements to
CO3 select engine for fulfilling service C4 3 5 CT/ASG, F
requirements of a marine vehicle.
Evaluate cavitation related problems
CO4 and minimization of it for propulsion C5 2 1-4 MT, F
systems
Exam)
The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to identify and calculate
CO1-PO1
the frictional and residuary resistances of a marine vehicle.
In order to figure out the efficiency and effective design of the propulsion system for a
CO2-PO3
marine vehicle.
To analyze the power requirements for the selection of suitable engine in fulfilling
CO3-PO2
service requirements of a ship.
In order to evaluate cavitation related problems and minimization of it propulsion
CO4-PO2
systems.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
148
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Components of Resistance & Total Resistance
Class 1 Resistance of a ship and its component
Class 2 Different Resistance at different part of Vessel, Dimensional
Analysis of Ship Resistance,
Class 3 Total Resistance Coefficient. CT 1,
Week 2 Concept of Powering of Vessel Final Exam
Class 4 Wake, Eddy, Definition of Powers and Efficiencies,
Class 5 Forces, velocities, powers and resistances at different locations of
vessel
Class 6 Overall Concept for Powering a Vessel
Week 3 Determination of Resistance using Model test
Class 7 Ship power estimate flowchart
Class 8 Ship resistance determination with model test
Class 9 Description of Towing Tank with different facilities required for a
standard ship model testing facility, Ship model test Purposes.
Week 4 Laws of Comparison
Laws of Comparison: Geometrical Similarity, Kinematic Similarity,
Class 10 Dynamic Similarity, Dynamic Similarity in case of Incompressible
Frictionless Fluid and No Free Fluid Surface
CT 2,
Froude experiment on friction, Work of towing tank conference on Final Exam
Class 12 frictional resistance
Week 5 Viscous Resistance Formulation
Class 13 Three dimensional viscous resistance formulation
The work of ITTC on Three Dimensional Viscous Resistance
Class 14 Formulation
Calculation of resistance and effective power by three-dimension
Class 15 extrapolation procedure, Corresponding Speeds, Relation of Residuary
Resistance with Displacement
Week 6 Calculation of Resistance and Effective Power
Class 16 Calculation of resistance and effective power by two-dimension
extrapolation procedure
Class 17 Air & Wind Resistance Calculation
Class 18 Shallow water effect, Shallow Water Effect with narrow channel
effect
Week 7 Propeller Geometry
Class 19 Manufacturing, Generator & Rake, Skew, Propeller Sections, face Mid Term,
and back of the blade, face or geometrical pitch Final Exam
Class 20 Typical Blade Sections, the pitch angle, representative mean pitch,
relation between pitch and pitch angle, velocity diagram of a section,
Week 8 Propeller related coefficients and characteristics
Class 22 The slip, slip ratio. Wake fraction, Thrust deduction factor
Class 23 Propeller face, back, leading edge, trailing edge, different pitch and
pitch angle, angle of attack, skew
149
Class 24 Rake, Disk area, projected area, developed area, expanded area
Week 9 Theory of Screw Propeller
Class 25 The Axial Momentum Theory of Propeller Action
Class 26 The Momentum Theory including Angular Motion
Class 27 Derivation of Blade Element Theory of Screw Propeller
Week 10 Propeller Hull Interaction
Class 28 The analysis of wake, wake gain, thrust deduction, relative rotative
efficiency, Propulsive Efficiency and Propulsion Factor
Class 29 Self-Propulsion Test
Week 11 Propeller Design
Class 31 Propeller Open Water Characteristics
Class 32 Standard series and Wageningen B PPR series
Class 33 Use of standard series data
Week 12 Math related to Propeller Design Theories
Class 34 Math on Blade Element Theory
Class 35 Math on Momentum Theory
Class 36 Math on Power & Efficiency. CT 3,
Week13 Cavitation Final Exam
Class 37 Cavitation : Outline of origin and effects
Class 38 Preliminary Cavitation Criterion and choice of blade area ratio
Class 39 Minimization of Cavitation
Week 14 Main Engine Selection Considerations
Class 40 Overview of main engine selection considerations, Introduction to ship
power train components. Stern tubes, shafts, bearings, Propeller engine
matching
Class 41 Assessment

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ship Resistance and Propulsion by Anthony F Molland
2. Basic Ship Propulsion by J P Ghose
3. Marine Propellers and Propulsion by John Carlton
150
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Ship Resistance and Propulsion Lab Contact Hours: 3.0
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Resistance and Propulsion Sessional course is designed to teach students how to calculate the different
components of ship resistances. Students will be able to perform necessary calculations related to
propulsion power and cavitation. It is expected that students can develop critical thinking behind
propeller design features, able to check their effects using calculations and finally chose the
appropriate feature.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to be familiarized with resistance and power calculations of ships.
2. To familiarize the students with the design of screw propeller.
3. To enable students to compute wake of a ship.
4. To apply cavitation calculation on ship design.

1. Identify the components of ship resistance.
2. Calculate the frictional and residual resistance.
3. Perform 2D and 3D extrapolation using ITTC methods.
4. Identify geometric parameters of a propeller.
5. Calculate cavitation and relevant characteristics.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Calculation of residual resistance and frictional resistance
2. Calculation of wind resistance, Calculation of total resistance & effective power.
3. Propulsion & powering calculation.
4. Determination of the geometry of blade sections for B-series propeller and its design.
5. Calculation wake of a ship.
6. Resistance & power calculation of high speed planning hull using Savisky‟s method
7. Resistance & power calculation of high speed planning hull using Holtrop and Mennen‟s
method.
8. Design of a screw propeller using circulation theory.
9. Calculation of 2D and 3D extrapolation using ITTC methods.
10. Calculation of cavitation.
151

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Identify the components of ship
CO1 √
resistance
Calculate the frictional and residual
CO2 √
resistance.
Perform 2D and 3D extrapolation using
CO3 √
ITTC methods
Identify geometric parameters of a
CO4 √
propeller
Calculate cavitation and relevant
CO5 √
characteristics
Taxonomy Methods
Identify the components of ship
CO1 C1 1 R,Q
resistance
Calculate the frictional and residual
CO2 C3 1-4 R,Q
resistance.
Perform 2D and 3D extrapolation
CO3 C3 1-4 R,Q
using ITTC methods
Identify geometric parameters of a
CO4 C1 1-4 R,Q
propeller
Calculate cavitation and relevant
CO5 C3 1-4 R,Q
characteristics
Exam)
Fundamental knowledge of resistance will help students to identify the components
CO1-PO1
of ship resistance.
CO2-PO2 Students will formulate how to calculate the frictional and residual resistance.
Students will acquire knowledge to perform 2D and 3D extrapolation using ITTC
CO3-PO1
methods.
Knowledge gained from this course will be used to identify geometric parameters of
CO4-PO2
a propeller.
CO5-PO1 Students will acquire knowledge to calculate cavitation and relevant characteristics.
152
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Practice at CAD Lab 30
Preparation of Assignment 24
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
Lecture followed by co-operative and collaborative method, project based method
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topic/Experiments
Week 1 Course introduction and basic concepts on ship resistance prediction methods
Week 2 Calculation of residual resistance and frictional resistance.
Week 3 Calculation of wind resistance, Calculation of total resistance & effective power
Week 4 Propulsion & powering calculation
Week Resistance & power calculation of ship using Holtrop and Mennen‟s method
Week 6 Resistance & power calculation of high speed planning hull using Savisky‟s
method
Week 7 Calculation of 2D and 3D extrapolation using ITTC methods,
Week 8 Mid Term Assessment (Quiz/ Viva)
Week 9 Calculation wake of a ship
Week 10 Calculation of cavitation
Week 11 Determination of the geometry of blade sections for B-series propeller
Week 12 Design of the geometry of blade sections for B-series propeller.
Week 13 To design screw propeller using circulation theory
Week 14 Final Assessment (Quiz/ Viva)

Class Attendance and Lab
10% CO 1-CO 5 C1-C4
Participation
Report Writing 50% CO 1-CO 5 C1
Viva Voce 10% CO 1- CO 5 C1
Lab Quiz 30% CO 1 C1, C2
153
CO 2 C3
CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C2, C3
CO 5 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Principle of Naval Architecture: Volume-II- Resistance, Propulsion and Vibration

2. Ship Resistance and Propulsion by Anthony F Molland.
3. Basic Ship Propulsion by J P Ghose.
4. Marine Propellers and Propulsion by John Carlton
154
155
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code:NAME 363 Credit Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Numerical Methods Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Compulsory Theoretical Course based on different numerical methods applied to solve various
problems in the fields of engineering.
OBJECTIVES
1. To explain the consequences of finite precision and the inherent limits of the numerical methods
considered,
2. To select appropriate numerical methods to apply to various types of problems in engineering
and science considering the mathematical operations involved accuracy requirements and
available computational resources.
3. To enable to demonstrate understanding and implementation of the mathematical concepts and
algorithms underlying the numerical methods considered.

1. Explain the consequences of finite precision and the inherent limits of the numerical methods
considered.
2. Select appropriate numerical methods to apply to various types of problems in engineering
and science considering the mathematical operations involved, accuracy requirements and
3. Demonstrate understanding and implementation of the mathematical concepts and
algorithms underlying the numerical methods considered.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Errors in Numerical Calculations, Vector and Matrix Objects,
2. Solution of System of Linear and Nonlinear Equations: Gaussian Elimination with Back-
substitution, LU Decomposition, Tridiagonal and Band-Diagonal Systems of equations,
Singular Value Decomposition, Sparse Linear Systems, Newton-Raphson Method for
Nonlinear Systems of Equations, Globally Convergent Methods for Nonlinear Systems of
Equations.
3. Interpolation and Extrapolation: Polynomial Interpolation and Extrapolation, Cubic Spline
Interpolation, Rational Function Interpolation and Extrapolation, Interpolation on Scattered
Data in Multi-dimensions, Laplace Interpolation.
4. Integration of Functions: Improper Integrals, Romberg Integration, Quadrature by Variable
Transformation, Gaussian Quadratures and Orthogonal Polynomials, Multi-dimensional
156
Integrals.
5. Evaluation of Functions: Polynomials and Rational Functions, Evaluation of Continued
Fractions, Series and their Convergence, Recurrence Relations, Chebyshev Approximation,
Polynomial Approximation from Chebyshev Coefficients, Pade Approximations, Evaluation of
Functions by Path Integration.
6. Sorting and Selection: Straight Insertion, Shell‟s Method, Quicksort, Heapsort, Indexing and
Ranking, Determination of Equivalence Classes.
7. Root Finding: Secant Method, Bisection, False Position Method, Ridder‟s Method, Newton-
Raphson Method using Derivative, Roots of Polynomials.
8. Minimization and Maximization of Functions: Golden Section Search in One dimension,
Downhill Simplex Method in Multi-Dimensions, Powell‟s Method, Conjugate Gradient
Method, Quasi-Newton Method, Linear Programming: Simplex and Interior-Point Method,
Simulated Annealing Methods, Dynamic Programming.
9. Eigen Systems: Jacobi Transformations of a Symmetric Matrix, Eigenvlaues and Eigenvectors
of a Tridiagonal Matrix, Hermitian Matrices, QR algorithm for Real HessenbergMatrices,
10. Least Squares, B-splines and Fast Fourier Transform: Least-squares curve fitting,
weighted Least-squares approximation, Method of Least-squares for Continuous Functions,
Cubic B- splines, Fast Fourier Transform.
11. Numerical solution of Ordinary differential equations: Solution by Taylor‟s Series, Euler‟s
Method, Runge - Kutta Methods, Predictor-Corrector Methods, The Cubic Spline Method,
12. Numerical solution of Partial differential equations: Finite Difference Approximations to
Derivatives, Laplace‟s Equation, Parabolic Equations, Iterative Methods for the Solution of
Equations, Hyperbolic Equations.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the consequences of finite precision
CO1 and the inherent limits of the numerical √
methods considered.
Select appropriate numerical methods to apply
to various types of problems in engineering and
CO2 science considering the mathematical √
operations involved, accuracy requirements and
Demonstrate understanding and implementation
CO3 of the mathematical concepts and algorithms √
underlying the numerical methods considered.
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the consequences of finite
CO1 precision and the inherent limits of the C3 1 1-4 CT, F
numerical methods considered.
Select appropriate numerical methods to
CT, Mid
CO2 apply to various types of problems in C2 1 1-4
Term, F
engineering and science considering the
157
mathematical operations involved,
accuracy requirements and available
computational resources.
Demonstrate understanding and
implementation of the mathematical
concepts and algorithms underlying the
numerical methods considered.
Exam)
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to calculate hydrostatic
parameters and develop the effects of draught change on them.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Errors in Computations
Class 2 Errors in Numerical Calculations
158
Class 3 Vector and Matrix Objects
Week 2 Roots of equation-bracketing method
Class 4 Gaussian Elimination with Back- substitution
Class 5 LU Decomposition, Tridiagonal and Band-Diagonal Systems of CT 1,
equations Final Exam
Class 6 Singular Value Decomposition, Sparse Linear Systems, Newton-
Raphson Method for Nonlinear Systems of Equations
Week 3 Roots of equation-open method
Class 7 Globally Convergent Methods for Nonlinear Systems of
Equations.
Class 8 Polynomial Interpolation and Extrapolation
Class 9 Cubic Spline Interpolation
Week 4 Equilibrium conditions
Class 10 Equilibrium conditions for floating body and submerged body
Class 12 Metacentric height, Transverse metacenter, Moment of inertia
Week 5 Systems of linear algebra equation-open method CT 2,
Class 13 Rational Function Interpolation and Extrapolation, Interpolation on Final Exam
Scattered Data in Multi-dimensions
Class 14 Laplace Interpolation
Class 15 Improper Integrals, Romberg Integration
Week 6 Systems of linear algebra equation-iterative method
Class 16 Quadrature by Variable Transformation
Class 17 Gaussian Quadratures and Orthogonal Polynomials
Class 18 Multi-dimensional Integrals.
Week 7 Curve fitting
Class 19 Polynomials and Rational Functions
Class 20 Evaluation of Continued Fractions
Class 21 Series and their Convergence, Recurrence Relations Mid Term,
Week 8 Interpolation Final Exam
Class 22 Chebyshev Approximation
Class 23 Polynomial Approximation from Chebyshev Coefficients, Pade
Approximations
Class 24 Evaluation of Functions by Path Integration.
Week 9 Numerical Differentiation
Class 25 Straight Insertion, Shell‟s Method, Quicksort
Class 26 Heapsort, Indexing and Ranking
Class 27 Determination of Equivalence Classes
Week 10 Numerical Integration of equal segments
Class 28 Secant Method, Bisection, False Position Method
Class 29 Ridder‟s Method, Newton- Raphson Method using Derivative
Week 11 Numerical integration of unequal segments
Class 31 Roots of Polynomials Mid Term,
Class 32 Golden Section Search in One dimension Final Exam
Class 33 Downhill Simplex Method in Multi-Dimensions, Powell‟s Method
159
Week 12 Ordinary differential equation-Initial value problems
Class 34 Conjugate Gradient Method, Quasi-Newton Method
Class 35 Definition and development of weather criterion
Class 36 Linear Programming: Simplex and Interior-Point Method, Simulated
Annealing Methods
Week13 Ordinary differential equation-boundary value problems
Class 37 Dynamic Programming length
Class 38 Jacobi Transformations of a Symmetric Matrix, Eigenvlaues and
Eigenvectors of a Tridiagonal Matrix, Hermitian Matrices CT 3,
Class 39 QR algorithm for Real HessenbergMatrices, Final Exam
Week 14 Stiffness and multistep method
Class 40 Least-squares curve fitting, weighted Least-squares approximation,
Method of Least-squares for Continuous Functions
Class 41 Cubic B- splines, Fast Fourier Transform.
Class 42 Solution by Taylor‟s Series, Euler‟s Method, Runge - Kutta Methods,
Predictor-Corrector Methods, The Cubic Spline Method

20%
Assessment Class
5% CO1, CO2, CO3, C6, A2
(40%) Participation
Mid term 15% CO2 C1, C2, C4
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, Sastry, S.S., 4 th edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2006.
2. Numerical Recipes: The Art of Scientific Computing, Press, W.H., Teukolsky, S.A.,
Vetterling, W.T., Flannery, B.P., 3rd edition, Cambridge University Press,2007.
3. Numerical Methods for Engineers, Chapra andCanale.
160
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: NAME 400 Contact Hours: 12.0 (6.0 credit each term)
Course Title: Research Project/ Thesis Credit Hours: 6.0 (3.0 credit each term)
Level and Term: Level 4 Term 1 & 2
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course is designed to form a basic understanding of research methodology that is what are the
important components to look for while conducting a research, how to conduct a research and what
to expect from the done work in the process. This course will expose the students to the promising
career in various research fields and make them understand the importance of research
methodologies in science and engineering.
OBJECTIVES
1. To identify and create the key components of a research proposal
2. To be able to demonstrate the ability to conduct literature reviews and gather the critical
scientific information related to the research proposal
3. To develop the skills to objectively review and write a scientific critique of a colleague‟s
proposal
4. To describe the important concepts related to engineering subjects in scientific research
5. To be aware of the underlying concepts and principles of scientific misconduct and plagiarism.
6. To be able to demonstrate writing skills by writing, a clear, concise Thesis Paper with
scientifically defensible aims, methods and conclusions

1. Describe quantitative, qualitative and mixed methods approaches to research;
2. Identify the components of a literature review process;
3. Appraise the reliability and validity of experiments;
4. Comprehend the ethical principles of research, ethical challenges and approval processes;
5. Use parametric and non-parametric hypothesis tests and write good thesis paper;
6. Apply writing skill of research report/ paper.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Foundations of Research: Meaning, Objectives, Motivation, Utility. Concept of theory,
empiricism, deductive and inductive theory. Characteristics of scientific method –
Understanding the language of research – Concept, Construct, Definition, Variable. Research
Process.
2. Problem Identification & Formulation – Research Question – Investigation Question –
Measurement Issues – Hypothesis – Qualities of a good Hypothesis –Null Hypothesis &
161
Alternative Hypothesis. Hypothesis Testing – Logic & Importance.
3. Research Design: Concept and Importance in Research – Features of a good research Design-
Exploratory Research Design – concept, types and uses, Descriptive Research Designs –
concept, types and uses. Experimental Design: Concept of Independent & Dependent
variables.
4. Qualitative and Quantitative Research: Qualitative research – Quantitative research –
Concept of measurement, causality, generalization, replication. Merging the two approaches.
5. Use of tools / techniques for Research and Interpretation of Data
6. Report Writing – Layout of a Research Paper
7. Ethical issues related to publishing, Plagiarism and Self-Plagiarism.

No. COURSE OUTCOME
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe quantitative, qualitative and
CO1 √
mixed methods approaches to research
Identify the components of a literature
CO2 √
review process
Appraise the reliability and validity of
CO3 √
Experiments
Comprehend the ethical principles of
research, ethical challenges and
CO4 √
approval processes
Use parametric and non-parametric
CO5 hypothesis tests and write good thesis
√
paper
Apply writing skill of research
CO6 √
report/paper.
No. COURSE OUTCOME CP CA KP
Taxonomy Methods
Describe quantitative, qualitative and
C1 1 1-4 R,Pr
CO1 mixed methods approaches to research
CO2 Identify the components of a literature
C1 3 1-4 R,Pr
review process
CO3 Appraise the reliability and validity of
C5 - 1 6 R,Pr
experiments
CO4 Comprehend the ethical
principles of research, ethical C1 1 7 R,Pr
challenges and approval processes
Use parametric and non- parametric
CO5 hypothesis tests and write good thesis C3 - 3 - R,Pr
paper
CO6 Apply writing skill of research report
/paper.
162
CO1-PO1 In order to investigate and identify the key components of a research proposal.
CO2-PO2 In order to describe the important concepts related to relevant engineering subjects in
scientific research
CO3-PO4 In order to carry out well planned experiment and investigation using state of the art
experimental systems and assess the results.
CO4-PO8 To be aware of the underlying concepts and principles of scientific misconduct and
plagiarism.
CO5-PO9 To be able to demonstrate writing skills by writing, a clear, concise Thesis Paper with
scientifically defensible aims, methods and conclusions as a team
CO6-PO10 To be able to demonstrate article producing capability through publications in
renowned conference/seminar/ journal.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 27
Consultation with Supervisor + Experiment/Quantitative
75
Research Work
Preparation of Research Proposal 6
Preparation of Progress Presentation 6
Preparation of Final Presentation 6
Formal Assessment
Total (Each Term) 120
Lecture followed by consultation with respective supervisors, co-operative and collaborative method,
COURSE SCHEDULE
Term – I
Week 1 Foundations of Research: Meaning, Objectives, Motivation, Utility.
Concept of theory, empiricism, deductive and inductive theory.
Characteristics of scientific method – Understanding the language of
research – Concept, Construct,
Definition, Variable. Research Process. + Consultation with Supervisor
Week 2 Problem Identification & Formulation – Research Question – Investigation
Question – Measurement Issues – Hypothesis – Qualities of a good
Hypothesis – Null Hypothesis & Alternative Hypothesis. Hypothesis Testing
– Logic &
Importance+ Consultation with Supervisor
Week 3 Written Proposal
Week 4 Proposal Presentation
Week 5 Proposal Presentation
163
Week 6 Research Design: Concept and Importance in Research – Features of a
good research design – Exploratory Research Design – concept, types
and uses +
Consultation with Supervisor
Week 7 Descriptive Research Designs – concept, types and uses + Consultation with
Supervisor
Week 8 Experimental Design: Concept of Independent & Dependent variables +
Week 9 Qualitative and Quantitative Research: Qualitative research – Quantitative
research – Concept of measurement, causality, generalization, replication.
Merging the two approaches + Consultation with Supervisor
Week 10 Progress Presentation – I
Week 11 Progress Presentation – I
Week 12 Use of tools / techniques for Research and Interpretation of Data + Consultation
with Supervisor
Week 13 Report Writing – Layout of a Research Paper + Consultation with Supervisor
Week 14 Ethical issues related to publishing, Plagiarism and Self-Plagiarism +
Term – II
Week 1 Consultation with Supervisor.
Week 2 Consultation with Supervisor
Week 3 Consultation with Supervisor + Preparation for Progress Presentation
Week 4 Consultation with Supervisor + Preparation for Progress Presentation
Week 5 Progress Presentation – II
Week 6 Progress Presentation – II
Week 11 Consultation with Supervisor + Preparation for Final Presentation
Week 12 Consultation with Supervisor + Preparation for Final Presentation
Week 13 Final Thesis Presentation
Week 14 Final Thesis Presentation
LINKAGE OF CO WITH ASSESSMENT METHODS AND THEIR WEIGHTS
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
CO 1 C1, C3,A1
CO 2 C4, C5, A1
Written Proposal and 10% CO 3 C3, C4
Proposal CO 4 C3
Presentation CO 5
CO 6
CO 1 C1, C3,C4
CO 2 C4, C5, P1
Progress Presentation 10% CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
CO 5
164
CO 6
CO 1 CO 2
CO 2 CO 3
Final Thesis Presentation and Final 40% CO 3 C3, P6, P7
Thesis Report Submission CO 4 C3
CO 5
CO 6
CO 1
CO 2
Continuous Assessment (Supervisor) 40% CO 3
CO 4
CO 5
CO 6
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Research Methodology – C.R.Kothari
2. Research design: Qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods approaches – Creswell
3. Practical Research: Planning and Design – Leedy
165
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Dynamics of Marine Vehicles Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Fluid Mechanics, Marine Hydrodynamics
RATIONALE
The course presents a unified approach to two seemingly different fields of Ship Theory; that is the
manoeuvring and the seakeeping. Motion dynamics of a ship regarded as a rigid body in a general
motion with six-degree-of-freedom is considered. The effects of non-linearities of the applied sub-
models on the physical phenomena associated with the ship behaviour are discussed
OBJECTIVES
1. To demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the underlying principle of linear wave
theory and its induced motions and loads on a ship.
2. To be able to apply techniques to predict the roll, pitch and heave motion of a vessel
Travelling in regular waves and irregular waves and assess vessel motions against
seakeeping criteria
3. To describe the concepts of dynamic stability, motion reduction devices, added resistance
in waves and methods to predict the likelihood of seasickness.
4. To enable to predict and assess the manoeuvring behaviour of a vessel.

1. Describe the underlying principle of linear wave theory and it‟s induced motions and
Loads on a ship.
2. Demonstrate the application of analytical methods for calculating ship motion in the regular
and irregular seaways.
3. Describe the concepts of dynamic stability, motion reduction devices, added resistance in
waves and methods to predict the likelihood of seasickness.
4. Apply techniques to predict and assess the manoeuvring behaviour of a vessel.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to sea keeping.
2. Recapitulation of gravity waves, Wave record analysis, Rayleigh distribution, Gaussian
distribution, Spectral representation of the seaway, Directional spectra.
3. Ship motion in regular waves-Response amplitude operators, Motions in irregular sea,
Short-time and long-time statistics of waves.
4. Rigid body motion of a floating body in waves extended to several degrees of freedom and
166
coupled motions.
5. Roll motions and coupled motions of floaters.
6. Slamming and deck wetness.
7. Introduction to manoeuvrability, Motion stability criterion, ITTC manoeuvring standards,
8. Design of control surface-Rudder design.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe the underlying principle of
CO1 linear wave theory and it‟s induced √
motions and loads on a ship.
Demonstrate the application of
analytical methods for calculating ship
CO2 √
motion in the regular and irregular
seaways.
Describe the concepts of dynamic
stability, motion reduction devices,
CO3 √
added resistance in waves and methods
to predict the likelihood of seasickness.
Apply techniques to predict and assess
CO4 √
the manoeuvring behaviour of a vessel.
Taxonomy Methods
Describe the underlying principle of
CO1 linear wave theory and it‟s induced C1 1 1-4 CT, F
motions and loads on a ship.
CO2 Demonstrate the application of
analytical methods for calculating
C3 3 5 CT, MT, F
ship motion in the regular and
irregular seaways.
CO3 Describe the concepts of dynamic
stability, motion reduction devices,
added resistance in waves and C1 3 1-4 CT/ASG, F
methods to predict the likelihood of
seasickness.
CO4 Apply techniques to predict and
assess the manoeuvring behaviour of C3 1 5 MT, F
a vessel.
167
The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to understand the
CO1-PO1 underlying principle of linear wave theory and it‟s induced motions and loads on a
ship.
In order to figure out motion response of marine vessels, analytical techniques to
CO2-PO2 predict roll, pitch and heave motion of a vessel travelling in regular and irregular
waves have been used.
To describe the concepts of dynamic stability, motion reduction devices, added
CO3-PO3
resistance in waves and methods to predict the likelihood of seasickness.
In order to apply mathematical modeling techniques to assess the manoeuvring
CO4-PO5
behavior of a marine vessel.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction to Seakeeping
Class 2 Introduction to Seakeeping
Class 3 Sinusoidal Water Waves
Week 2 Water Waves CT 1,
Class 4 Mathematical Foundation of the wave motion; Boundary conditions; Final Exam
Solution for a monochromatic progressive wave
Progressive wave; sinusoidal wave; velocity, length and period of
Class 5 waves
Class 6 Math related to water wave problems
168
Week 3 Water Waves
Class 7 Effect of depth on water waves
Class 8 Energy in waves
Class 9 Path of particles in deep water and in canal of finite depth
Week 4 Water Waves
Class 10 A ship in waves
Class 12 Math related to ship in waves
Week 5 Uncoupled Heave, Pitch and Roll Motion
Class 13 Heaving Motion
Class 14 Math related to Heaving Motion CT 2, Final
Class 15 Pitching Motion Exam
Week 6 Uncoupled Heave, Pitch and Roll Motion
Class 16 Math related to Pitching Motion
Class 17 Rolling Motion
Class 18 Math related to Rolling Motion
Week 7 Irregular Seaway
Class 19 Classification of seas
Class 20 Math related to Classification of seas
Class 22 Irregularity of the seaway and the Histogram Mid Term,
Class 23 Math related to Irregularity of seaway and histogram Final Exam
Class 24 Wave Spectrum
Class 25 Math related to Wave Spectrum
Class 26 Prediction of an Irregular Seaway; Standard Wave Spectrum
Class 27 Math related to Prediction of Irregular Seaway
Week 10 Ship Motion in Irregular Seaway
Class 28 Response in an Irregular Seaway,
Class 29 Math, Prediction of Motion in an Irregular Seaway
Class 30 Mid Term Exam
Week 11 Non-linear Motion
Class 31 Dynamics Effects
Class 32 Vertical Bow motion, Vertical Velocity, Vertical Acceleration
Relative Bow motion, Relative bow velocity, Relative Bow motion in
Class 33 an irregular seaway
Week 12 Deck Wetness & Slamming
Deck Wetness, Effect of static and dynamics swell up of water at the CT 3, Final
Class 34 bow, probability of deck wetness Exam
Slamming; Kinematic conditions to be investigated in study of
Class 35 slamming; probability of slamming
Class 36 Motion of a V-shape wedge section
Week 13 Ship Manoeuvring
Introduction to Maneuverability, Motion Stability Criterion, ITTC,
Class 37 maneuvering standards
169
Various kinds of motion stability, Mathematical Model for
Class 38 Manoeuvring Motions,
Class 39 Zigzag Manoeuvre, Analysis of Turning ability
Week 14 Rudder Design
Class 40 Design of control surface (rudder design)

Continuous Assignment 1-3 20% CO3 C3, C4
Assessment CO1, CO2, CO3,
Class Participation 5% C6, A2
(40%) CO4
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam
CO3 C4
60% CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Dynamics of Marine Vehicles - by R. Bhattacharyya.

2. Principles of Naval Architecture, Vol.3 – Motions in Waves and Controllability.
3. Sea Loads on ship and offshore structure – O.M. Faltinsen
170
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Engineering -II Contact Hours: 3.0
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Thermal Engineering, Heat Transfer, Marine Engineering-I
RATIONALE
Compulsory Theoretical Course
Marine Engineering-II course is designed to teach students about the basic concepts of ships
auxiliaries used in ship like Pump, Blower & Compressor, Refrigeration & Air conditioning System,
Deck Fittings, Centrifuge, Lifesaving Apparatus and Firefighting equipment etc. Students will be able
to select the suitable marine auxiliaries, Refrigeration & AC plant, and Lifesaving apparatus including
firefighting appliances. It is expected that students will be able to analyze critically for the selection of
correct auxiliary machinery and system for the designed ship. Students will also be able to analyze the
defects of different systems while working as Marine engineer on board.
OBJECTIVE
1. To analyze the characteristics of all ship fitted auxiliary machineries;
2. To compare the characteristics of construction of different auxiliary machinery;
3. To evaluate different design parameters and performance to select auxiliary machineries;
4. To apply the knowledge of firefighting and lifesaving equipment;
5. To make decision about suitable auxiliary machineries for different vessel as a naval
architect;

1. Describe the characteristics of all ship fitted auxiliary machineries
2. Evaluate different design parameters and performance to select auxiliary machineries
3. Compare the characteristics of construction of different auxiliary machinery
4. Apply the knowledge of firefighting and lifesaving equipment and to decide about suitable
auxiliary machineries for different vessel as a naval architect
COURSE CONTENT
1. Pumps: Applications of pumps onboard, Types of pump, Characteristics of different pump,

NPSH, Head calculation.
2. Blowers and compressors: Applications of compressors onboard, Single stage and
multistage compressors, Compressor instability, safety etc.,
3. Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Thermodynamics, Principles, Load calculation,
171
Construction details of different types of refrigeration and air-conditioning systems,
Refrigerants and their characteristics, Maintenance and repair of units and plants.
4. Deck fittings: Windlasses, Capstan, Winches, Cranes, Cargo access equipment for dry,
unitized, liquid and cryogenic cargoes.
5. Steering gear Systems: Various types of steering system, Characteristics of different steering
system, Construction details.
6. Stabilizer: Types of stabilizer, Description of different stabilizer used in marine vessels.
7. Pipe: Pipe materials, Piping systems and valves, Steam traps, anchors, anchor hawse, chains,
etc.
8. Life Saving Apparatus: Types of life saving apparatus, Operation and use of life saving
apparatus.
9. Fire Fighting arrangement: Types of firefighting equipment, Location of installation,
description of fixed firefighting equipment.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe the characteristics of all ship fitted √
CO1
auxiliary machineries
Evaluate different design parameters and √
CO2
performance to select auxiliary machineries
Compare the characteristics of construction √
CO3
of different auxiliary machinery
Apply the knowledge of firefighting and √
lifesaving equipment and to decide about
CO4
suitable auxiliary machineries for different
vessel as a naval architect;
Taxonomy Methods
Describe the components and
working aspects of different types of
CO1 C1 1 1 1-4 CT, F
Internal Combustion engine and gas
turbine
Evaluate the different types of
CT/ASG, Mid
CO2 special features of various types of C3 1 1 1-4
Term, F
marine engine and gas turbine
Explain the characteristics of CT/ASG, Mid
CO3 A3 3 3 5
different types of marine fuels Term, F
Describe the shafting system of a
CO4 ship and the various components of A2 4 2 1-4 F
shafting system
172
The knowledge is required to analyze the characteristics of all ship fitted auxiliary
CO1-PO1
machineries;
The knowledge is required to compare the characteristics of construction of different
CO2-PO2
auxiliary machinery;
To be able to to evaluate different design parameters and performance to select
CO3-PO1
auxiliary machineries
Able to Apply the knowledge of firefighting and lifesaving equipment and to decide
CO4-PO6
about suitable auxiliary machineries for different vessel as a naval architect
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 2 Pumps: Types of pump
Class 3 Pumps: Types of different pump
Week 2 Pumps
Class 4 Pumps: Characteristics of different pump
Class 5 Pumps: Characteristics of different pump CT 1,
Class 6 Pumps: NPSH Final Exam
Week 3 Pumps and Compressors
173
Class 7 Pumps: Head calculation
Class 8 Pumps: Head calculation
Class 9 Blowers and compressors
Week 4 Blowers and compressors
Class 10 Single stage and multistage compressors
Class 11 Single stage and multistage compressors
Class 12 Compressor instability, safety etc
Week 5 Refrigeration and air-conditioning CT 2,
Class 13 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Thermodynamics Final Exam
Class 14 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Thermodynamics
Class 15 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Principles
Week 6 Refrigeration and air-conditioning
Class 16 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Load calculation
Class 19 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Construction details of different types
of refrigeration and air-conditioning systems
Class 20 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Construction details of different types Mid Term,
of refrigeration and air-conditioning systems Final Exam
Class 22 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Refrigerants and their characteristics
Class 23 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Maintenance and repair of units and
plants.
Class 24 Refrigeration and air-conditioning: Maintenance and repair of units and
plants.
Week 9 Deck fittings
Class 25 Deck fittings: Windlasses, Capstan, Winches
Class 26 Deck fittings: Cranes
Class 27 Deck fittings: Cargo access equipment for dry, unitized, liquid and
cryogenic cargoes.
Week 10 Steering gear
Class 28 Steering gear: Systems
Class 29 Steering gear: Types, Characteristics
Week 11 Steering gear and Stabilizer Mid Term,
Class 31 Steering gear: Construction details Final Exam
Class 32 Stabilizer: Types and working Principles
Class 33 Stabilizer: Description of Operation
Week 12 Pipe Materials
Class 34 Pipe: Pipe materials, Piping systems and valves, Steam traps,
Class 35 Pipe: Piping systems
Class 36 Pipe: valves, Steam traps
Week13 Life Saving and Fire Fighting Equipment
Class 37 Life Saving Apparatus: Types
174
Class 38 Life Saving Apparatus: Operation and use
Class 39 Fire Fighting arrangement: Types of firefighting equipment CT 3,
Week 14 Life Saving and Fire Fighting Equipment Final Exam
Class 40 Fire Fighting arrangement: Location, Fixed firefighting equipment
Class 41 Assessment

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
4. Marine Auxiliary Machinery – D.W. Smith
5. Introduction to Naval Engineering – E. F. Gritzen
6. Introduction to Marine Engineering – D. A. Taylor
7. Principles of Naval Engineering – M. A. Carr
175
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Engineering Lab -II Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Marine Engineering Sessional-II course is designed to teach students different kinds of marine engine
& auxiliary components and preparing technical specifications of those components or machineries.
Students will be able to perform necessary calculations related to machines and prepare technical
specifications once the course is completed. It is expected that students will develop critical thinking
about how to calculate various machinery parameters thus prepare technical specifications.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to be familiarized with different types of machineries in application.
2. To familiarize the students with applied and calculative concept of marine machineries and
devices.
3. To enable students to compute different parameters of ships and machines related to shipyard.

1. Explain about the different features of marine machineries.
2. Identify different specifications of a tender.
3. Demonstrate and manipulate the technical specifications of different machineries.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Calculation of engine power and preparation of technical specification for designing a

propulsion system for a specific vessel.
2. Selection and preparation of technical specification and selection of an air compressor for sand
blasting purpose in a ship yard.
3. Study on CNC cutting and bending machine and preparation of technical specification to be
used in a ship yard.
4. Calculations of the capacity of a pump required for a dry dock or floating dock and prepare its
technical specification.
5. Calculation of the cooling load and preparation of technical specification of an air conditioning
plant for a specific vessel.
6. Calculation of the cooling load and preparation of technical specification of a refrigeration plant
for a specific vessel.
7. Preparation of technical specification, selection and design of steering system of a specific
176
vessel.
8. Preparation of technical specification, selection and design of storage unit of a fishing vessel.
9. Calculation of electric load and selection of diesel generator unit to be used for specific vessel
and preparation of its technical specification
10. Preparation of technical specification and selection of engine analyzer unit to be used for
specific vessel.
11. Preparation of comparative statement.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain about the different features of marine
CO1 √
machineries
CO2 Identify different specifications of a tender √
Demonstrate and manipulate the technical
CO3 √
specifications of different machineries
Taxonomy Methods
Explain about the different features of
CO1 C2 1 1 1-4 R,Q,T
marine machineries
Identify different specifications of a
CO2 C1 1 2 1-4 R,Q,T
tender
Demonstrate and manipulate the
CO3 technical specifications of different C3 1 2 1-4 R,Q,T
machineries
(C1 – Remember, C2 – Understand, C3 – Apply, C4 – Analyze, C5 – Evaluate, and C6 – Create; CP-
Complex Problems, CA-Complex Activities, KP-Knowledge Profile, T – Test, PR – Project, Q –
Quiz, ASG – Assignment, Pr – Presentation, R – Report, F – Final Exam, MT- Mid Term Exam)
Basic knowledge about different features and parameters of marine machineries
CO1-PO2
which will enable students to understand the specifications and characteristics.
Through understanding of various tender, terms & condition, code of conduct and
CO2-PO2
specifications for bidding tender.
Students will learn about technical specification, also how to calculate, manipulate
CO3-PO3
and demonstrate those.
Engagement
(hours)
177
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
project based method.
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week TOPIC
Week 1 Course introduction
Week 2 Calculation of engine power and preparation of technical specification for designing
a propulsion system for a specific vessel.
Week 3 Selection and preparation of technical specification and selection of an air
compressor for sand blasting purpose in a ship yard.
Week 4 Study on CNC cutting and bending machine and preparation of technical
specification to be used in a ship yard.
Week 5 Calculation of the capacity of a pump required for a dry dock or floating dock and
prepare its technical specification.
Week 6 Calculation of the cooling load and preparation of technical specification pf an air
conditioning plant for a specific vessel
Week 7 Mid Viva
Week 8 Calculation of the cooling load and preparation of technical specification pf a
refrigeration plant for a specific vessel.
Week 9 Preparation of technical specification, selection and design of steering system of a
specific vessel.
Week 10 Preparation of technical specification, selection and design of storage unit of a
fishing vessel.
Week 11 Calculation of electric load and selection of diesel generator unit to be used for
specific vessel and preparation of its technical specification
Week 12 Preparation of technical specification and selection of engine analyzer unit to be
used for specific vessel.
Week 13 Preparation of comparative statement.
Week 14 Final Viva/ Quiz
178
Lab CO 1 C2
participation 15% CO 2 C1
Continuous
and Report CO 3 C3
Assessment
Mid-quiz CO 1 C2
(40%)
or 25% CO 2 C1
Mid Viva CO 3 C3
CO 1 C2
Final Viva 25%
CO 2 C1
Final Quiz 35%
CO 3 C2
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS

4. Marine Auxiliary Machinery – D.W. Smith
5. Introduction to Naval Engineering – E. F. Gritzen
6. Introduction to Marine Engineering – D. A. Taylor
7. Principles of Naval Engineering – M. A. Carr
179
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Shipyard Practice/Industrial Training Contact Hours: 4 Weeks
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Compulsory sessional course based on practical industrial attachment.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable the students to understand the overall management and operation of a shipyard/
dockyard.
2. To enable the students to see the design and construction works of a ship practically in the
ground level
3. To enable the students to understand the different parameters of shipbuilding i.e. materials,
welding, painting, trial etc.
4. To enable the students to understand the launching, docking and undocking of a ship.

1. Explain the overall management and operation of a shipyard/ dockyard.
2. Identify required skills for shipbuilding industries.
3. Use management tools to handle different categories of work forces.
4. Manage the crisis and resolve the conflicts amongst subordinates.
5. Carry out construction and repair works for a ship.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Industry organogram, office admin of industry, flow of job responsibilities in industry etc.
2. Activities of various department/office in the shipyard
3. Ship construction procedures/methods, phases of construction
4. Various machineries and automation procedure in a shipyard/ dockyard
5. Attachment with various marine workshop/ institutes to see the practical work pattern and
procedures.
 The schedule and detail contents will be fixed by the shipyard/industry according to their
convenience.
180
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the overall management and
CO1 √
operation of a shipyard/ dockyard.
Identify required skills for shipbuilding
CO2 √
industries
Use management tools to handle different
CO3 √
categories of work forces
Manage the crisis and resolve the
CO4 √
conflicts amongst subordinates
Carry out construction and repair works
CO5 √
for a ship
No. COURSE OUTCOME(CO) CP CA KP
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the overall management and
CO1 6 1 4-6 R,Q,T
operation of a shipyard/ dockyard.
Identify required skills for shipbuilding
CO2 4 1 6 R,Q,T
industries
Use management tools to handle different
CO3 4 7 5-6 R,Q,T
categories of work forces
Manage the crisis and resolve the conflicts
CO4 4 7 5-6 R,Q,T
amongst subordinates
Carry out construction and repair works for
CO5 6 1 4-6 R,Q,T
a ship
Exam)
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture -
Experiment -
Preparation of Lab Reports -
Preparation of Lab-test -
Preparation of Quiz -
Preparation of Presentation -
Engagement in Group Projects -
Formal Assessment
Total 28 Days
181
COURSE SCHEDULE
Introduction and Overview of the Shipyard Industry organogram,

Office admin of industry, flow of job responsibilities in industry etc.
Week-1 Design (Preliminary drawing, Production drawing)
Plate classification, storage, shot blasting and priming, Plate bending,
Cranes, Oxygen Plant, CNC cutting operation, CNC milling operation
Welding types (Arc, Gas, TIG, MIG) and methods
Keel Laying
Block preparation, framing and erection
Week-2
Sand Blasting and Painting
Marine machineries and Pump
Engine Room Construction and Engine Selection
Water/ Air tightness test
Piping system design and pipe bending
Outfit installation
Week-3 Warehouse: setting up and operation
Quality Control (Testing and Inspection)
Docking/ undocking
Hull repairing
Launching
Inclination test
Week-4 Sea trial
Quiz Test and Viva Voce
Closing

CO 1 C6
CO 2 C4
Class participation
10% CO 3 A4
and observation
CO4 A4
CO 5 C6
Continuous CO 1 C6
Assessment CO 2 C4
(40%) Assignment 10% CO 3 A4
CO4 A4
CO 5 C6
CO 1 C6
Viva Voce 20% CO 2 C4
CO 3 A4
182
CO4 A4
CO 5 C6
CO 1 C6
60% CO 2 C4
Repot and Presentation (30% + CO 3 A4
30%) CO4 A4
CO 5 C6
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Dockyard Manual
2. Technology of ship repair – Benkovsky, Galver
183
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Maritime Economics and Management Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Introduction to Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering, Hydrostatics and Stability,
Ship Design
RATIONALE
The maritime economics and management is a concept as well as application based theoretical course
which is essential for all undergraduate students in the field of Naval Architecture & Marine
Engineering. This course enhances the competency of students to work and make decision on ship
design and financial estimation in shipyard, dockyard and maritime shipping industries after their
graduation.
OBJECTIVES
1. Be able to impart knowledge on worldwide maritime shipping routes and shipping phenomena.
2. Achieving ability to apply decision tree in selection of size and type of vessels in procurement
and design process of a fleet.
3. Be proficient to design cost effective ships as per owners‟ requirements.
4. Be able to develop new tools for ship design throughout the shipbuilding career.

1. Comprehend the global shipping and maritime management.
2. Analyse consolidate and synthesize knowledge select shipping elements in the global logistics
and maritime management domain.
3. Apply management tools in maritime shipping and related economic activities.
4. Design modern management tools for ship design and construction.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Overview of global maritime domain and its system.
2. Blue economy and its components.
3. Understanding the maritime transportation management.
4. Elements of shipping; Freight market and operating economics; Chartering of ships.
5. Shipbuilding cost estimation; Maritime related tendering and contracts.
6. International payment systems and money flow mechanism.
7. Commercial, marketing, legal and financial aspects of shipbuilding and shipping.
8. Alternative maritime designs. Overall optimization for speed size combinations of ships.
9. Relative importance of technical and economic features of marine vehicle design, Importance
184
and application of ICT in maritime designs.
10. Safety management concept in ships and ports and ISO certifications.
11. Management practices in maritime projects.
12. Goal based design, construction and repair/maintenance of marine vehicles.
13. Role of IACS, class surveyors and other maritime agencies.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Comprehend the global shipping and
CO1 √
maritime management.
Analyse consolidate and synthesize knowledge
CO2 select shipping elements in the global logistics √
Create and Apply appropriate management
CO3 tools in maritime shipping and related √
economic activities.
Design modern management tools for ship
CO4 √
design and construction.
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Comprehend the global shipping and maritime C2 2 A1 1-4 CT, F
management.
CO2 Analyse consolidate and synthesize knowledge C4 3 A1 1-5 CT, MT, F
select shipping elements in the global logistics
CO3 Create and Apply appropriate management C6 3 A2 5-7 CT/ASG, F
tools in maritime shipping and related
economic activities.
CO4 Design modern management tools for ship A3 6 A2 5-7 MT, F
design and construction.
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of science has to be applied to calculate global shipping trends,
construction requirement of new vessels, renovation of middle aged vessels and
costing in maritime management.
CO2-PO2 In order to identify the best ship of the best type for best route and subsequently
carry out cost-benefit analysis based on shipping elements in the global logistics
185
CO3-PO5 Creating and applying appropriate management tools in maritime shipping and
related economic activities, the optimization will be enhanced in terms of resource
and time management in maritime transportation.
CO4-PO6 Designing the modern management tools for ship design and construction will
guide shipping and shipbuilding industries to adapt and implement IMO, IACS and
other international as well as local legislative issues.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 2 General understanding of maritime transportation Management
Class 3 General understanding of maritime transportation Management
Week 2 Elements of shipping
Class 4 Shipping basics
Class 5 Blue economy and its components CT 1,
Class 6 Shipping as a component of blue economy Final Exam
Week 3 Maritime transportation management
Class 7 Understanding the maritime transportation management
Class 8 Freight market and operating economics
Class 9 Chartering of ships
Week 4 Shipping Management
Class 10 Shipping management basics
Class 11 Principles of shipping management
186
Class 12 Bill of lading
Week 5 Shipping Management
Class 13 Shipping agency
Class 14 Ship Chandler
Class 15 Port duties CT 2,
Week 6 Shipbuilding Economics and Finance Final Exam
Class 16 Shipbuilding cost estimation
Class 17 Selection of shipbuilding materials for cost effectiveness
Class 18 Selection of onboard machinery for cost effectiveness
Week 7 Shipbuilding Economics and Finance
Class 19 Shipbuilding capital budgeting
Class 20 Relation of shipbuilding capitals with ship operating costs
Class 21 Decision tree of shipbuilding capital financing criteria
Class 22 Tools on capital investment Mid Term,
Class 23 Use of modern tools and methods on investment assessment Final Exam
Class 24 Self-financing vs credit financing optimization
Class 25 Cost benefit analysis for shipbuilding and shipping sector
Class 26 Cost of propulsion
Class 27 Cost vs size and speed of vessel
Class 28 Internal payment systems and transactions
Class 29 LC procedure
Class 30 SWIFT method
Class 31 Bank charges and financing challenges Mid Term,
Class 32 Spread, float etc in maritime financing Final Exam
Class 33 Working capital handing
Week 12 Maritime Tender and Contracts
Class 34 Tendering basics
Class 35 Maritime specification and offers
Class 36 Relation between tender participation and ship design
Week13 Maritime Tender and Contracts
Class 37 Elements of maritime contracts
Class 38 Formats and execution of maritime contracts
Class 39 Modes of delivery CT 3,
Week 14 Revision Final Exam
Class 40 Revision on shipping management
Class 41 Revision on shipbuilding management
Class 42 Open discussion
187
Class Test/ CO1, CO2 C1, C2, C4
20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering Economics & Ship Design, I.L. Buxton, 3rd Edition, 1987, British Maritime
Technology Ltd.
2. Cost Management in Shipbuilding - Planning, Analyzing and Controlling Product Cost in the
Maritime Industry, Jan O. Fischer, GerdHolbach, GKP Publishing.
3. Economics of Shipping Practice and Management – Alan E. Branch
4. Liner Shipping Economics – J.O. Jansson and D. Shneerson
5. Maritime Economics – Martin Stopford
6. The Blackwell Companion to Maritime Economics – Wayne K. Talley
7. Reeds 21st Century Ship Management – J.K. Shim & J.G. Siegel
8. Elements of Shipping – Alan E. Branch
188
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Maintenance and Repair Engineering Contact Hours: 3.00
Level and Term: Level 4 Term II
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code: NAME 205, NAME 215, NAME 309 and NAME 409
Course Title: Shipbuilding Materials and Metallurgy, Ship Construction and Welding Technology,
Marine Engineering-I, Marine Engineering-II
RATIONALE
This course aims to provide the knowledge of the shipbuilding and ship repair sector. In order to gain
the essential skills and knowledge required, enabling to successfully run and manage the building and
repair process the content of this course is essentially important. An array of challenging topics such
as the docking process, specifications and docking incidents and accidents, ship repair special rules,
contracts and project management is integral part of this course.
OBJECTIVES
1. To identify and rectify of different defects and damage of structure.
2. To impart knowledge on ship repair and maintenance technology with a view to perform shop
floor work at ship building or ship repair industries.
3. To make skillful to explain quality product by providing quality and effective tools.
4. To enable to strike a balance between theoretical and practical skills.

1. States the various methods of corrosion and corrosion prevention.
2. Apply knowledge in machinery maintenance.
3. Demonstrate as a relevant engineer on board and their activities.
4. Analyze the aspects of welding, hull survey and paint scheme.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Maintenance requirements: Corrosion, fatigue, Marine fouling.
2. Failure causes: Fatigue failure of structural members, deformation failures, Failure due to
corrosion. Repairs to failures.
3. Measures for failure of structural members due to deformation, corrosion, fatigue, crack
detection etc.
4. Prevention of marine growth and removal of marine growth both in dry and wet condition.
5. Design considerations with regard to maintenance. Welding repair decision model.
6. Classification requirements of hull survey, identification of defects, plates and welds. Plate
cutting and welding, tolerance requirements, distortion removal.
7. Underwater welding: Dry and wet.
8. Welding inspection.
189
9. NDT tests to survey ship for repair
10. Impact of preventive maintenance and repair techniques on operation.
11. Maintenance Schedule. Machinery Maintenance (Marine Engine and Generator set): Top
overhauling, Major overhauling

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
States the various methods of corrosion and
CO1 √
corrosion prevention.
CO2 Apply knowledge in machinery maintenance. √
Demonstrate as a relevant engineer on board
CO3 √
and their activities.
Analyse the aspects of welding, hull survey
CO4 √
and paint scheme
Taxonomy Methods
States the various methods of corrosion and
CO1 C1 1 1-4 CT, F, ASG
corrosion prevention.
Apply knowledge in machinery
CO2 C2 3 1-4 CT, MT, F
maintenance.
Demonstrate as a relevant engineer on
CO3 C3 6 7 CT, F
board and their activities.
Analyse the aspects of welding, hull survey
CO4 C4 7 7 MT, F
and paint scheme
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of science has to be applied to states the various methods of
corrosion and corrosion prevention.
CO2-PO2 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge to
apply knowledge in machinery maintenance.
CO3-PO6 Contextual knowledge to assess health, safety and legal issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice and solutions to
complex engineering problems to demonstrate as a relevent engineer on board and
their activities.
CO4-PO7 Understand and evaluate the sustainability and impact of professional engineering
work to analyse the aspects of welding, hull survey and paint scheme.
190
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Maintenance requirements – corrosion
Class 2 Maintenance requirements – fatigue
Class 3 Marine fouling
Week 2 Fatigue, Crack and Corrosion
Class 4 Failure causes
Class 5 fatigue failure of structural members CT 1,
Class 6 fatigue failure of structural members, Ship Final Exam
Week 3 Fatigue, Crack and Corrosion

Class 7 failure due to corrosion
Class 8 Deformation failures
Class 9 Repairs to failures
Week 4 Structural Failure
Class 10 Measures for failure of structural members due to deformation
Class 11 Measures for failure of structural members due to corrosion
Class 12 Measures for failure of structural members due to fatigue
Week 5 Structural Failure
Class 13 Measures for failure of structural members due to crack detection etc.
Class 14 Measures for failure of structural members due to crack detection etc. CT 2,
Class 15 Prevention of marine growth Final Exam
Week 6 Prevention of Corrosion
Class 16 Prevention of marine growth
Class 17 Removal of marine growth
Class 18 Removal of marine growth in dry condition
191
Class 19 Removal of marine growth in wet condition.
Class 20 Removal of marine growth both in dry and wet condition.
Class 21 Design considerations with regard to maintenance.
Class 22 Design considerations with regard to maintenance. Mid Term,
Class 23 Maintenance scheduling. Final Exam
Class 24 Maintenance scheduling.

Week 9 Maintenance scheduling
Class 25 Maintenance based on IACS 47
Class 28 Welding repair decision model.
Class 29 Welding repair decision model.
Class 30 Welding inspection and repair
Class 31 Welding inspection and repair Mid Term,
Class 32 Welding inspection and repair Final Exam
Class 33 Classification requirements of hull survey
Class 34 Classification requirements of hull survey
Class 35 Identification of defects
Class 36 Identification of defects
Week13 Structural Assemble
Class 37 Plates and welds.
Class 38 In situ plate cutting and welding
Class 39 Tolerance requirements CT 3,
Week 14 Launching Procedure Final Exam
Class 40 Distortion removal.
Class 41 Underwater welding – dry and wet.
Class 42 Impact of preventive maintenance and repair techniques on operation.

Class Test/ CO2, CO3 C1, C2
20%
5% C1
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C2
CO4 C3
Total Marks 100%
192
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Inspection, Repair and Maintenance of Ship Structures by Piero Caridis

2. Ship Construction, D.J. Eyres, 5th Edition 2001, Butterworth-Heinemann.
3. Commercial Ship Surveying, Harry Alexander
4. Technology of Ship Repairing, Benkovsky
5. Ship repair and maintenance handbook 2005 by Dieter Mergner
193
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Numerical Methods Lab Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Numerical Methods Sessional course is designed to teach students the basics of programming in
general and programming MATLAB in particular using the knowledge gained in Numerical Methods
theory course. Students will be able to solve programming problems & perform computation, apply
numerical methods in problem solving and analyse ideas to solve problem. It is expected that students
can develop critical thinking behind developing codes and able to check their calculations.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to be familiarized and implement different programming concept in
application.
2. To familiarize the students with applied and calculative concept of MATLAB.
3. To enable students to compute different parameters of ships using programming concept of
MATLAB using numerical methods.

1. Solve programming problems and Perform computations with the aid of MATLAB.
2. Apply numerical methods in problem solving and assignments.
3. Analyse and Contrast ideas to solve complicated problems.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to MATLAB; Errors in Numerical Techniques: Calculation of Truncation Error in
a Series, Approximation.
2. Solution of nonlinear equation by numerical method: method of false position.
3. Finding roots of a equation by Newton Raphson method.
4. Interpolating a table of data by Newton‟s forward and backward difference interpolation
formula, Lagrange‟s Interpolation formula and Inverse Lagrange‟s Interpolation formula
5. Numerical differentiation for equidistant x by Newton‟s and Stirling‟s Interpolating Formulae
6. Numerical Integration Formulae (Trapezoidal and Simpson‟s 1/3 rule) for Equidistant x co-
ordinates
7. An Application of Numerical Integration in Fourier Series
8. Solution of Simultaneous Equation of a Linear System by Gauss-Jordan (direct) Method
9. Solution of Simultaneous Equation of a Linear System by Gauss-Seidal (Iterative) Method
10. Fitting Linear and Nonlinear curves from experimental data by Least Square Method
194

No. COURSE OUTCOME
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Solve programming problems and
CO1 Perform computations with the aid of √
MATLAB
Apply numerical methods in problem
CO2 √
solving and assignments
Analyse and Contrast ideas to solve
CO3 √
complicated problems
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Perform computations with the aid A5 1 1 1-4 R,Q,T
of MATLAB
Apply numerical methods in problem
CO2 C3 1 2 6 R,Q,T
CO3 C4 1 2 5 R,Q,T
Exam)
Primary but practical idea about MATLAB, knowing programming problems and
CO1-PO2
learn how to compute & solve those problems using MATLAB.
Detail and critical discussion about numerical methods of programming and apply
CO2-PO5
those for different problem solving, demonstration, calculation and assignments.
Know about few complicated and exceptional problems, analyze those problems
CO3-PO3
critically thus contrast ideas to solve the problems,
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
195
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
project based method, lab work.
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week TOPIC
Week 1 Course introduction.
Week 2 Errors in Numerical Techniques: Calculation of Truncation Error in a Series
Approximation.
Week 3 Solution of nonlinear equation by numerical method: method of false position.
Week 4 Finding roots of a equation by Newton Raphson method.
Week 5 Interpolating a table of data by Newton‟s forward and backward difference
interpolation formula, Lagrange‟s Interpolation formula and Inverse Lagrange‟s
Interpolation formula.
Week 6 Numerical differentiation for equidistant x by Newton‟s and Stirling‟s Interpolating
Formulae.
Week 7 Mid Viva/lab test
Week 8 Numerical Integration Formulae (Trapezoidal and Simpson‟s 1/3 rule) for
Equidistant x co-ordinates.
Week 9 An Application of Numerical Integration in Fourier Series.
Week 10 Solution of Simultaneous Equation of a Linear System by Gauss-Jordan (direct)
Method.
Week 11 Solution of Simultaneous Equation of a Linear System by Gauss-Seidal (Iterative)
Method.
Week 12 Fitting Linear and Nonlinear curves from experimental data by Least Square
Method.
Week 13 Final Viva/lab test

Continuous Lab CO 1 A5
Assessment participation 15% CO 2 C3
(40%) and Report CO 3 C4
196
Mid-quiz CO 1 A5
or 25% CO 2 C3
Mid Viva CO 3 C4
CO 1 A5
Final Viva 25%
CO 2 C3
Final Quiz 35%
CO 3 A5
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Numerical Recipes: The Art of Scientific Computing, Press, W.H., Teukolsky, S.A., Vetterling,
W.T., Flannery, B.P., 3rd edition, Cambridge University Press, 2007.
2. Numerical Methods for Engineers, Chapra and Canale.
3. Introductory Methods of Numerical Analysis, Sastry, S.S., 4th edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2006.
197
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Bangladesh Studies for Naval Architect Contact Hours: 2.0
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course has been designed to help the students in obtaining comprehensive idea about the history,
culture and heritage of Bangladesh. It will introduce students with economy, society, politics,
diplomacy and foreign policy of Bangladesh. Students will learn about the challenges and potentials
of Bangladesh in shaping its peaceful and sustainable future. It will also assist the students in
assessing roles and contribution of Bangladesh in the regional and international bodies which are
dedicated to establish world peace.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce students with maritime and shipbuilding heritage of Bangladesh.
2. To provide in-depth knowledge on prospects and challenges in shipbuilding in Bangladesh.
3. To provide brief idea about inland waterways and sea route of Bangladesh.
4. To impart knowledge about different organisations related to ship design, building, recycling
and different sea borne trade and commerce.

1. Describe maritime and shipbuilding heritage of Bangladesh.

2. Evaluate the prospects and challenges in shipbuilding in Bangladesh.
3. Explain about inland waterways and sea route of Bangladesh.
4. Organize different organisations related to ship design, building, recycling and different sea
borne trade and commerce.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Maritime and shipbuilding heritage of Bangladesh

2. Shipbuilding vise a vise nation building and civilization
3. Dimensions, prospects and challenges in shipbuilding in Bangladesh
4. Sea routes of Bangladesh
5. Inland waterways of Bangladesh
6. Organizations of Seafarers, Naval Architects, Marine Engineers, etc in Bangladesh
7. Notable personalities in maritime arena
8. Operation jackpot and preparations for national requirements in future.
9. Implication of maritime zone act
198

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe maritime and shipbuilding
CO1 √
heritage of Bangladesh.
Evaluate the prospects and challenges in
CO2 √
shipbuilding in Bangladesh.
Explain about inland waterways and sea
CO3 √
route of Bangladesh.
Organize different organisations related to
CO4 ship design, building, recycling and √
different sea borne trade and commerce
No. COURSE OUTCOME (CO) CP CA KP
Taxonomy Methods
Describe maritime and shipbuilding
CO1 C2, C5, C6 R,Q,Pr
heritage of Bangladesh.
Evaluate the prospects and challenges in
CO2 A4 R,Q,Pr
shipbuilding in Bangladesh.
Explain about inland waterways and sea C1, C4, P1,
CO3 1-4 R,Q,Pr
route of Bangladesh. A4
Organize different organisations related
C1, C4, P1,
CO4 to ship design, building, recycling and 1-4 R,Q,Pr
A4
different sea borne trade and commerce
CO1-PO12 In order to develop concept of historical and socio-economic aspects of Bangladesh.
CO2-PO6 To link up the customs and traditions of Bangladesh.
In order to assess the episodes and events those lead to the independence of our
CO3-PO12
motherland.
In order to describe issues of national challenges and ways to overcome and thus
CO4-PO10
contribute to national building program.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 16
199
Discussion 10
Preparation of Viva 6
Total 60
Lecture followed by open discussion, presentation and report submission.
COURSE SCHEDULE
WEEK TOPIC
Week 1 Maritime and shipbuilding heritage of Bangladesh
Week 2 Shipbuilding vise a vise nation building and civilization
Week 3 Presentation
Week 4 Dimensions, prospects and challenges in shipbuilding in Bangladesh
Week 5 Sea routes of Bangladesh and Inland waterways of Bangladesh
Week 6 Presentation
Week 7 Organizations of Seafarers, Naval Architects, Marine Engineers, etc in Bangladesh
Week 8 Notable personalities in maritime arena and their contributions to the nation.
Week 9 Presentation
Week 10 Operation jackpot and preparations for national requirements in future
Week 11 Implication of maritime zone act
Week 12 Presentation
Week 13 Final Viva
Week 14 Final Quiz

CO 1 C2, C5
Participation and CO 2 A4
20%
Report CO 3 C1, C4
CO 4 C1, C4
Continuous CO 1 C2, C5
Assessment CO 2 A4
Presentation 30%
CO 3 C1, C4
CO 4 C1, C4
Case Study/ Viva 25% CO 1, CO 2, CO 3 C2, C5, A4, C1
CO 1 C2, C5
CO 2 A4
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C1, C4
CO 4 C1, C4
Total Marks 100%
200
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Shipbuilding Industry of Bangladesh in the Light of Global Trend by Md. Ruhul Amin
2. Bengal Industries and the British Industrial Revolution (1757-1857) by Indrajit Ray
3. World Bank reports
1. Bangladesh Studies – Shamsul Kabir Khan
2. Habits of Highly Effective People – Stephen R Covey
3. India Wins Freedom – Maulana Abul Kalam Azad
4. The History of Bengal – Charles Stewart
5. A History of Bangladesh – Willem van Schendel
6. History of Bangladesh: A Sub-continental Civilisation – Abul Maal A. Muhith
7. Bangla bhasha o oitihasik bhasha andolan – Mohammad Matiur Rahman
8. Breakup of Pakistan: Background & Prospects of Bangladesh – Kabir Uddin Ahmed
9. Bangladesh: Quest for Freedom and Justice – Kamal Hossain
201
ELECTIVE/OPTIONAL COURSES
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Composite Materials Contact Hours: 3.00
Level and Term: Level 3 Term I/II
PRE-REQUISITE
RATIONALE
This optional theoretical course will provide students a fundamental concept of modern composite
materials which are being used in an ever-increasing range of applications and industries. Basic
knowledge of composite materials will allow students to understand the issues associated with using
these materials, as well as gain insight into how their usage differs from conventional materials such
as metals, and ultimately be able to use composites to their fullest potential. At the end of the course
students will develop critical thinking & skills needed for the design, manufacture and analysis of
composite materials from a material scientist‟s viewpoint.
OBJECTIVES
1. To impart knowledge on characteristics, classifications and applications of composite materials.
2. To achieve ability to differentiate of micro-mechanics and macro-mechanics of composite
materials.
3. To understand the composite structural analysis.
4. To calculate the laminate stress-strain, buckling, bending, deflection etc.

1. Explain the types of composite materials and their characteristic features.
2. Perform calculation the elastic and strength properties of unidirectional laminates using
micromechanics and macro-mechanics theory.
3. Analyze the most appropriate manufacturing process for fabricating composite materials.
4. Evaluate the fracture, fatigue, impact performance, the non-destructive inspection (NDT) and
structural health monitoring of composite materials.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to composite materials

a. Basic concepts, characteristics, advantages and drawbacks of composites over monolithic
materials
b. Classifications, common types of fibers and matrices, mechanical properties
c. Applications of composite material
202
d. Manufacturing methods and processes
2. Macromechanics analysis of lamina
a. Review of definitions of stress, strain, elastic moduli
b. Strain energy stress-strain relationships for different types of materials
c. Stress-strain relationships for a unidirectional/bidirectional lamina
d. The engineering constants of a unidirectional/bidirectional lamina in terms of the stiffness
and compliance.
3. Elastic properties of the unidirectional lamina

a. Engineering constants, Stress-strain relationship of a thin lamina
b. Transformation of stress and strain and elastic constants
c. typical elastic properties of a unidirectional lamina
d. Relationship of Compliance and Stiffness Matrix
e. Hooke‟s Law for a Two-Dimensional Angle Lamina.
4. Micromechanical analysis of a lamina

a. Assumptions and limitations, Longitudinal strength and stiffness
b. In-plane shear modulus and Poisson‟s ratio
c. Concepts of volume and weight fraction of fiber and matrix, density and void fraction in
composites
d. Four elastic moduli, two coefficients of thermal expansion and two coefficients of
moisture expansion of a unidirectional.
5. Analysis of laminated composites

a. Basic assumptions, Strain-displacement relationship
b. Laminate stiffness, Laminate strength, determination of lamina stress and strain
c. Types of laminate configuration, Layered laminate
d. In-plane stiffness of symmetric laminates
e. Flexural stiffness of symmetric sandwich laminates
f. Behaviour of general laminates.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the types of composite materials and
CO1 √
their characteristic features.
Perform calculation the elastic and strength
CO2 properties of unidirectional laminates using √
micromechanics and macro-mechanics theory.
Analyze the most appropriate manufacturing
CO3 √
process for fabricating composite materials.
Evaluate the fracture, fatigue, impact
performance, the non-destructive inspection
CO4 √
(NDT) and structural health monitoring of
composite materials.
203
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Explain the types of composite materials C2 1 1-4 CT, F
and their characteristic features.
CO2 Perform calculation the elastic and strength A2 1 1-4 CT, Mid
properties of unidirectional laminates using Term, F
micromechanics and macro-mechanics
theory.
CO3 Analyze the most appropriate C4 3 1-4 CT/ASG, F
manufacturing process for fabricating
CO4 Evaluate the fracture, fatigue, impact C5 1 5 Mid Term, F
performance, the non-destructive inspection
(NDT) and structural health monitoring of
To apply the knowledge of science to explain the types of composite materials and
CO1-PO1 their characteristic features.
The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to calculate the elastic
CO2-PO1 and strength properties of unidirectional laminates using micromechanics and macro-
mechanics theory.
To analyze the most appropriate manufacturing process for fabricating composite
CO3-PO2 materials.
To design the composite material structures and analyzes them by different
CO4-PO3
numerical techniques.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
204
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction to composites
Class 1 Introduction, Background.
Class 2 Characteristics, classifications and uses.
Class 3 classifications and uses (Continue)
Week 2 Introduction to composites (Continue)
Class 4 Polymer Matrix Composites, Metal Matrix Composites
Class 5 Ceramic Matrix Composites, Carbon–Carbon Composites CT 1,
Class 6 Recycling Fiber-Reinforced Composites Final Exam
Week 3 Introduction to composites (Continue)
Class 7 Mechanics Terminology
Class 8 Manufacturing processes
Class 9 Applications and Problems
Week 4 Macro-mechanical Analysis of a Lamina
Class 10 Review of Definitions (Strain, Stress, Elastic Moduli, Strain Energy)
Class 12 Hooke‟s Law for Different Types of Materials.
Week 5 Macro-mechanical Analysis of a Lamina (Continue)
Class 13 Relationship of Compliance and Stiffness Matrix
Class 14 Hooke‟s Law for a Two-Dimensional Angle Lamina CT 2,
Class 15 Strength Failure Theories of an Angle Lamina Final Exam
Week 6 Macro-mechanical Analysis of a Lamina (Continue)
Class 16 Strength Failure Theories of an Angle Lamina(Continue)
Class 17 Hygrothermal Stresses and Strains in a Lamina
Week 7 Micro-mechanical Analysis of a Lamina
Class 19 Volume and Mass Fractions, Density, and Void Content
Class 20 Strength of Materials Approach
Week 8 Micromechanical Analysis of a Lamina (Continue)
Class 22 Semi-Empirical Models
Class 23 Elasticity Approach
Class 24 Elastic Moduli of Lamina with Transversely Isotropic Fibers
Week 9 Micromechanical Analysis of a Lamina (Continue)
Class 25 Ultimate Strengths of a Unidirectional Lamina.
Class 26 Coefficients of Thermal Expansion. Mid Term,
Class 27 Coefficients of Moisture Expansion. Final Exam
Week 10 Macromechanical Analysis of Laminates
Class 29 Stress–Strain Relations for a Laminate.
Week 11 Macromechanical Analysis of Laminates (Continue)
Class 31 Stress–Strain Relations for a Laminate (Continue).
Class 32 In-Plane and Flexural Modulus of a Laminate.
Class 33 Hygrothermal Effects in a Laminate
Week 12 Failure, Analysis, and Design of Laminates
Class 35 Special Cases of Laminates.
Class 36 Failure Criterion for a Laminate. CT 3,
Week 13 Failure, Analysis, and Design of Laminates (Continue) Final Exam
205
Class 37 Design of a Laminated Composite
Class 38 Design of a Laminated Composite (Continue).
Week 14 Failure, Analysis, and Design of Laminates (Continue)
Class 40 Mechanical Design Issues

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C5, C4
CO4 C5, C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mechanics of Composite Materials – Auter Kaw
2. Mechanics of Composite Materials – R Jones
3. Principles of Composite Material Mechanics – Ronald F Gibson
4. Mechanics of Composite Materials with MATLAB – George Z. Voyiadjis & Peter I. Kattan
5. Composite Materials: Science and Engineering – Krishan K. Chawla
206
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Port and Harbor Engineering Contact Hours: 3.0
Level and Term: Level 3 Term1
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Design of Special Ships
RATIONALE
Port and Harbor Engineering theoretical optional course aims to impart knowledge on port and
harbour infrastructure, analyses how ports are organized, managed and planned and related with
transport chain. Students specializing in this program must understand the significance and challenges
related to ports and harbours.
OBJECTIVES
1. To ensure a thorough knowledge and understanding of port and harbour types, characteristics,
planning and cargo handling.
2. To enable to find out design solution for various types of environmental and operational
challenges.
3. To give an overview about ports of Bangladesh.

1. Analyze and evaluate the types, design philosophy, design aspects and construction, of port
and harbor.
2. Explain and estimate different types of environmental and operational loads encountered by
port and harbor.
3. Design and plan to integrate port and harbour infrastructure.
4. Demonstrate the basic design of port and terminal layout.
5. Apply the knowledge in different port structure design which will help to select a suitable port
in Bangladesh.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Introduction to Port and Harbor, Port and Harbor characteristics, Ship
characteristics and tonnage calculation, Port and Harbor planning, Access channel, Wharf,
Quay, Pier and Jetty
2. Berthing and Mooring: Structure, Requirement, Berthing Area and Anchorage area, Mooring,
Mooring system layout, Anchor, The Rode System, The Mooring Buoy, Pennants, Dolphin
Berthing environment and energy calculation, Fender selection and fender system design
3. Cargo Handling in ports (Container, Container Cranes, Bulk Cargo)
4. Natural Phenomenon and Loads: Wind, Wave, Tide, Current loads, Operational loads and
207
other Environmental loads.
5. Breakwater: Concept on breakwater, Arrangement of breakwater, Design Process of
breakwater, Types of breakwater, Wave Structure Interactions, Rubble mound breakwater,
Vertical breakwater: types and construction, Floating breakwater: Classification of floating
breakwaters and their details, Advantage and Disadvantage, Floating breakwater design
6. Port Functions, Organisation and Planning Methodology: Port Functions, Transport chain,
Organisation of seaports, Types of planning, planning process, Planning tasks, functional
requirements and planning elements, Layout development, evaluation techniques, Economic
and financial analysis
7. Port Terminals and Container Terminals: Planning and Design: Terminal components,
types of terminals, Terminal capacity: maximum or optimum, terminal dimensions, Container
transport and terminal operations, Lay-out development of container terminals
8. IMO and Marine Pollution from Ships: UNCLOS, GESAMP, Sources of pollution, Existing
IMO instrument, Management of ballast water: BWM, General Obligations Under the BWM
Convention, BWM plan and standard
9. Sea and River Ports of Bangladesh: Chittagong Port Authority, Mongla Port Authority, Payra
Port Authority: facilities, strength and weakness, River Ports of Bangladesh and their
Assessment.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Analyze and Evaluate the types, design
CO1 philosophy, design aspects and √
construction, of port and harbor.
Explain and Estimate different types of
CO2 environmental and operational loads √
encountered by port and harbor.
Design and Plan to integrate port and
CO3 √
harbour infrastructure.
Demonstrate the basic design of port and
CO4 √
terminal layout.
CO5 Apply the knowledge in different port
structure design which will help to select a √
suitable port in Bangladesh.
Taxonomy Methods
Analyze and Evaluate the types, design
CO1 philosophy, design aspects and C4, C5 1-4 CT,F
construction, of port and harbor.
Explain and Estimate different types of
CO2 environmental and operational loads C2 2 7 CT, F MT
encountered by port and harbor.
208
Design and Plan to integrate port and
CO3 C6 1 3 4 MT, F
harbour infrastructure.
Demonstrate the basic design of port and
CO4 C3 1-4 F, ASG
terminal layout.
CO5 Apply the knowledge in different port
structure design which will help to select a C6 1 7 CT/ASG, F
suitable port in Bangladesh.
CO1-PO2 The learners will be able to analyze and evaluate the types, design philosophy, design
aspects and construction, of port and harbor with substantiated conclusions using
fundamental engineering principle of this course.
CO2-PO7 Considering the sustainability of port and harbor infrastructure design in point of view
of environmental contexts, achieving ability to explain and estimate different types of
environmental and operational loads encountered by port and harbor.
CO3-PO3 Student will achieve the ability to design and plan to integrate port and harbor
infrastructure to give solution of specific needs with appropriate criteria.
CO4-PO2 Applying the literature knowledge on design of port and terminal layout., students will
be able to demonstrate to actual design layout of port and terminal.
CO5-PO6 Students will be able to apply the knowledge in different port structure design which
will help to select a suitable port in Bangladesh which is application of contextual
knowledge to assess societal, safety and the consequent responsibilities relevant to
professional engineering practice.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
209
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction to Port and Harbour course, Definition of Harbour and
Port, Harbour components, Classifications of Port and Harbour
Class 2 Port and Harbor characteristics, Differences between ports and
Terminals, Review on Ship Characteristics: Displacement Tonnage,
standard Displacement Tonnage, Lightweight and Deadweight,
Deadweight Tonnage, Gross and Net Registered Tonnage CT-1, Final
Class 3 Port and Harbor planning, Access channel, Wharf, Quay, Pier and Jetty Exam
Week 2 Berthing and Mooring
Class 4 Structure, Requirement, Berthing area and Anchorage area
Class 5 Mooring and ship motion inside the port
Class 6 Anchor, The Rode System, The Mooring Buoy, Pennants,
Week 3 Berthing and Mooring (Contd.)
Class 7 Mooring System Layout, Mediterranean Mooring of Ships
Class 8 Dolphin and Case Study
Class 9 Assessment -1 (CT-1)
Week 4 Berthing and Mooring (Contd.)
Class 10 Berthing environment and energy calculation
Class 11 Fender selection and fender system design,
Class 12 Fender accessories and other design criteria, Review on Berthing and
Mooring
Week 5 Natural Phenomenon and Loads CT-2, Mid
Class 13 Wind, Wave, Tide, Current loads Term, Final
Class 14 Wind, Wave, Tide, Current loads Exam
Class 15 Morison Equation to calculate wave and current load
Week 6 Natural Phenomenon and Loads (Contd.)
Class 16 Operational Load: Cargo load, pallet, container, Light Commercial or
Fishing vessel
Class 17 Operational Load: Vehicular Load, Rail-mounted and Material
Handling equipment, Heavy load transporter in use at shipbuilding
yard¸ Port buildings and superstructure
Class 18 Operational load: Port buildings and superstructure and Review
Week 7 Breakwater
Class 19 Concept on breakwater, Arrangement of breakwater, Design Process of
breakwater
Class 20 Types of breakwater
Class 21 Wave Structure Interactions
Week 8 Breakwater (Contd.)
Class 22 Structural design of rubble mound breakwater
Class 23 Vertical breakwater: types and construction Mid Term
Class 24 Floating breakwater, Classification of floating breakwaters and their Exam, Final
210
details, Floating breakwaters: Advantage and Disadvantage, Floating Exam
breakwater design
Week 9 Port Functions, Organisation and Methodology
Class 25 Port Functions, Transport chain, Organisation of seaports
Class 26 Types of planning, planning process
Class 27 Planning tasks, functional requirements and planning elements
Week 10 Port Functions, Organisation and Methodology (Contd.)
Class 28 Layout development, evaluation techniques
Class 29 Economic and financial analysis and general observations
Class 30 Assessment 3 (Mid Term Exam)
Week 11 Port Terminals and Container Terminals: Planning and Design
Class 31 Terminal components, types of terminals
Class 32 Terminal capacity: maximum or optimum, terminal dimensions
Class 33 Container transport and terminal operations,
Week 12 Port Terminals and Container Terminals: Planning and Design CT-3/
Class 34 Lay-out development of container terminals Assignment,
IMO and Marine Pollution from Ships Final Exam
Class 35 UNCLOS, GESAMP, Sources of pollution, Existing IMO instrument
Class 36 Management of ballast water: BWM, General Obligations Under the
BWM Convention, BWM plan and standard
Week13 Sea and River Ports of Bangladesh
Class 37 Chittagong Port Authority: Facilities, strength and weakness
Mongla Port Authority: Facilities, strength and weakness
Class 38
Payra Port Authority: Facilities, strength and weakness
Class 39 Assessment- 4 (CT-3/Assignment)
Week 14 Sea and River Ports of Bangladesh (Contd.)
Class 40 River Ports of Bangladesh and their Assessment
Class 41 Review Class and Open Discussion
Class 42 Review Class and Open Discussion

Class Test/ CO1, CO2 C2,C4,C5
20%
Continuous Assignment 1-3 CO5 C6
Assessment Class
5% CO1- CO5
(40%) Participation
Mid term 15% CO2, CO3 C2, C6, A2
CO1 C4, C5, P1
CO2 C2, C4
Final Exam 60% CO3 C6,A4
CO4 C3, A3
CO5 C6,
Total Marks 100%
211
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Port Engineering by Zhou Liu & Hans F. Burcharth

2. Port Engineering: Planning, Construction, Maintenance, and Security by G. P. Tsinker
3. Ports and Terminals, Prof. I. H. Ligteringen, September 2000, Delft University of Technology.
4. Design and Construction of Ports and Marine Structures, A. D. Quinn, McGraw-Hill Book
Company Ltd.
5. Port Management, Hercules
6. Dock and Harbour Engineering, Ozha & Ozha, 1 st Edition, Charotar Books, Anand., 1990
212
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Finite Element Method for Ship Structure Contact Hours: 3.00
Level and Term: Level 3, Term 1/2
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Mechanics of Structure, Ship Structure
RATIONALE
This optional theoretical course is intended to provide students with the necessary fundamental
knowledge about the implementation of Finite Element Method for Engineering Analysis. The
students should be able to Understand the fundamentals of Finite Element Method and stiffness
method to solve engineering problems. Furthermore, after successful completion of this course
students will develop skills to solve ship structure problems using finite element analysis.
OBJECTIVES
1. To acquire knowledge about the fundamentals of finite element analysis.
2. To be proficient in finite element formulations of ship structural problems.
3. Be aware of limitations of finite elements and source of errors both in modeling and
computation.
4. Be able to solve ship structure problems using finite element methods.

1. Comprehend the fundamentals of finite element analysis and finite element formulations.
2. Solve ship structure problems using finite element analysis.
3. Interpret results obtained from a finite element analysis.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Introduction to Finite Element Method, Elements and Nodes, Problem modeling
using FEM and result checking, discretization and other approximations, responsibility of the
user, Elementary matrix algebra.
2. Bar and Beams. Linear Static Analysis: Introduction, Stiffness Matrix Formulation: Bar
Element, Stiffness Matrix Formulation: Beam element, Properties of k and K. Avoiding
Singularity, Mechanical Loads, Thermal Loads, An Application.
3. Plane Problems: Introduction, Constant Strain Triangle (CST), Linear Strain Triangle (LST),
Bilinear Quadrilateral (Q4), Quadratic Quadrilateral (Q8), Improved Bilinear Quadrilateral
(Q6), Elements with "Drilling" d.o.f., Elements of More General Shape, Loads, Stress
Calculation, Application examples
4. Two-Dimensional Isoparametric Elements and Solution Techniques: Node Numbering and
Matrix Sparsity, Equation Solving, Transformations, Isoperimetric Elements: Formulation,
213
5. Numerical Integration: Gauss Quadrature and Isoparametric Elements, Choice of Quadrature
Rule. Instabilities, Stress Calculation and Gauss Points, Nature of Finite Element Solution,
Convergence Requirements. Patch Test, Infinite Media and Infinite Elements, Substructures,
Symmetry, Constraints, Examples
6. Modeling, Errors, and Accuracy in Linear Analysis: Modeling in General, Structure
Behavior and Element Behavior, Element Tests and Element Shapes, Test Cases and Pilot
Studies, Material Properties, Loads, Connections, Boundary Conditions, Planning the Analysis,
Numerical Error: Sources and Detection, Common Mistakes, Checking the Model, Critique of
FE Results, Stress Concentrations. Sub-modeling, Convergence with Mesh Refinement, Error
Measures and Adaptivity
7. Plate and Shells: Assumption and application of thin and thick plate theories, Finite elements
for plates: Kirchhoff and R-M plate elements and related DoF, Finite Element for shells and
DoF.
8. Finite Element Idealization of Ship Structures: Beam element idealization of ships' primary
structural members, Hybrid modelling approach of ship structures using bar, beam and shell
finite elements.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Comprehend the fundamentals of finite
CO1 element analysis and finite element √
formulations.
Solve ship structure problems using finite
CO2 √
element analysis.
Interpret results obtained from a finite
CO3 √
element analysis.
Taxonomy Methods
Comprehend the fundamentals of finite element
CO1 C2 1 1-4 CT, F
analysis and finite element formulations.
Solve ship structure problems using finite
CO2 C3 3 6 CT, MT, F
element analysis.
Interpret results obtained from a finite element
analysis.
The knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals has to be
CO1-PO1
applied to understand the fundamentals of finite element analysis.
214
Appropriate finite elements shall be used to model the physical behaviour of the
CO2-PO5
structure using software in order to obtain an approximate solution.
Results obtained from finite element analysis shall be critically examined and
CO3-PO4
verified.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction, course administration, motivation lecture
Class 2 Introduction to the Finite Element Method (FEM), stress-strain curve
of steel, Hooke‟s law; Poisson‟s ratio.
Class 3 Assumptions for a linear-elastic finite element analysis, FEM
formulation, Equilibrium, Compatibility and Material Law, Rigid body
motion in 1D, 2D and 3D space and its significance. CT 1,
Week 2 Elementary matrix algebra Final Exam
Class 4 Vector & Matrix , Matrix addition, multiplication and its significance,
inversion of [2 x 2], [3 x 3] and [4 x 4] matrices,
Class 5 Gaussian elimination, singular matrix, Eigen value & Eigen vector of a
matrix.
Class 6 Element, node and DOF, DoF of 1D Bar and 2D beam elements.
Week 3 1D Bar Element
Class 7 Stiffness matrix formulation of a 1D bar, Applications and Limitations
Class 8 Problem solving using 1D bar element
Class 9 Class Test-1
Week 4 2D Beam Element
Class 10 Stiffness matrix formulation of a 2D beam element
215
Class 11 Applications and Limitations of a 2D beam element
Class 12 Problem solving using 2D beam element
Week 5 Plane Stress Element
Class 13 Plane problems, plane stress and plain strain element
Class 14 CST element, strain-displacement matrix CT 2,
Class 15 LST element, strain-displacement matrix Final Exam
Class 16 Q4 element, strain-displacement matrix
Class 17 Q8 element, strain-displacement matrix
Class 18 Class Test -2
Class 19 Q6 element, shear locking and remedy
Class 20 Loads and Boundary Conditions (BC) in plane problems
Week 8 Software Application
Class 22 Guidance on uses of finite element software
Mid Term,
Class 23 Software application for solving 2D beam problem Final Exam
Class 24 Software application for solving 2D plane stress problem.
Week 9 Isoparametric Elements and Solution Techniques
Class 25 Isoparametric Elements: Formulation
Class 26 Jacobian and stiffness matrix of isoparemetric elements,
Class 27 Problems on coordinate and displacement interpolations of
isoperimetric elements
Week 10 Numerical Integration
Class 28 Gauss Quadrature and Isoparametric Elements
Class 29 Stress Calculation and Gauss Points
Class 30 Nature of FE solutions, Convergence requirements
Week 11 Modeling, Errors, and Accuracy in Linear Analysis Mid Term,
Class 31 Sources of errors in FEA, common mistakes in FEA, A case study on Final Exam
errors in FEA
Class 32 Element tests (Patch test) and their shapes, Numerical errors: ILL-
conditioning.
Class 33 Means to improve FE solutions.
Week 12 Plate and Shells
Class 34 Assumption and application of thin and thick plate theories
Class 35 Finite elements for plates: Kirchhoff and R-M plate elements and
related DoF
Class 36 Finite Element for shells and DoF
Week13 Finite Element Idealization of Ship Structures
Class 37 Substructures, symmetry, anti-symmetry and constraints
Class 38 Beam element idealization of ships' primary structural members
Class 39 Hybrid modeling approach of ship structures using finite elements CT 3,
Week 14 Course Review Final Exam
216

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Finite Element Modelling for Stress Analysis by Robert D. Cook
2. Fundamentals Finite Element Analysis by David Huttons.
3. The Finite Element Method It's Basis & Fundamentals by O.C. Zienkiewicz, R.L. Taylor &
J.Z. Zhu
4. Finite Element Procedures by Klaus-Jürgen Bathe
217
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Computational Fluid Dynamics Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Fluid Mechanics, Marine Hydrodynamics
RATIONALE
This course introduces the beginning graduate and advanced undergraduate students to finite
difference methods as a means of solving different type of differential equations that arise in fluid
dynamics. Fundamentals of numerical analysis, ordinary differential equations and partial
differential equations related to fluid mechanics and heat transfer will be reviewed. Error control and
stability considerations are discussed and demonstrated. The Navier-Stokes equations will be solved
using a commercial software.
OBJECTIVES
1. To demonstrate knowledge and understanding on flow computations using current best
practices for numerical model and method selection and assessment of the quality of results
obtained.
2. To familiarize the students with the physically justified assumptions to simplify and carry out
feasible analysis of real-life fluid flow and heat transfer problems.
3. To induce the ability among students to use powerful computational tools to analyse fluid
dynamics and heat transfer related problems.
4. To be able to simulate the resistance and propulsion related flow phenomena in the field of
ship hydrodynamics.

1. Comprehend different flow computations using current best practices for numerical model and
method selection and assessment of the quality of results obtained.
2. Make physically justified assumptions to simplify and carry out feasible analysis of real-life
fluid flow and heat transfer problems.
3. Use powerful computational tools to analyse fluid dynamics and heat transfer related problems.
4. Apply these methods and tools to simulate the resistance and propulsion related flow
phenomena in the field of ship hydrodynamics.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Governing equations of fluid flow: Finite Control Volume, Substantial Derivative, Physical
meaning of gradient of velocity, Conservation and non-conservation form of continuity
equation, Conservation and non-conservation form of Navier-Stokes equation, Energy equation.
218
2. Boundary integral methods: Discretisation and Interpolation, Boundary Element Method,
Green‟s theorem, Application of Boundary Integral Method to radiation and diffraction
problems,
3. Discretization schemes: finite difference methods, finite volume methods, finite element
methods, spectral methods etc.
4. Finite Volume Method: Diffusion problem, Convection – Diffusion problem, Discretization
Schemes, Pressure – Velocity coupling, Solution of Discretized Equations, Unsteady flows,
Implementation of Boundary Conditions, Errors and Uncertainty in CFD modeling.
5. Turbulence modeling: Characteristics of turbulent flow, Transition from laminar to turbulent
flow, Reynolds Averaged Navier Stokes Equation (RANS), Turbulence Models, i.e., k-epsilon
model, k-omega model, Spalart Almaras model, LES, DES, DNS etc.
6. Grid generation: Body-fitted coordinate grids for complex geometries, Cartesian vs curvilinear
grids, Block-structured grids, Unstructured grids, Discretization in unstructured grids,
Staggered vs co-located grid arrangements.
7. Free surface flow: free surface computation with linear and fully nonlinear boundary
conditions, Numerical treatment of fluid-body interface, CFD application to free surface flow
past ship shape objects using Reynolds Averaged Navier Stokes Equation (RANS).
8. Errors and Uncertainty in CFD modelling: Errors and Uncertainty in CFD, Numerical
Errors, Input Uncertainty, Physical Model Uncertainty, Verification and Validation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Comprehend different flow computations
using current best practices for numerical
CO1 √
model and method selection and assessment of
the quality of results obtained
Make physically justified assumptions to
simplify and carry out feasible analysis of
CO2 √
real- life fluid flow and heat transfer
problems.
Use powerful computational tools to analyse
CO3 fluid dynamics and heat transfer related √
problems.
Apply these methods and tools to simulate the
CO4 resistance and propulsion related flow √
phenomena in the field of ship hydrodynamics
Taxonomy Methods
Comprehend different flow
computations using current best
CO1 practices for numerical model and C3 1 1-4 CT, F
method selection and assessment of the
quality of results obtained
Make physically justified
CO2 C3 3 5 CT, MT, F
assumptions to simplify and carry out
219
feasible analysis of real- life fluid flow
and heat transfer problems.
Use powerful computational tools to
CO3 analyse fluid dynamics and heat C4 3 1-4 CT/ASG, F
transfer related problems.
Apply these methods and tools to
simulate the resistance and
CO4 C5 1 1-4 MT, F
propulsion related flow phenomena
in the field of ship hydrodynamics
The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be acquired to figure out current
CO1-PO1 best practices for numerical model and method selection and assessment of the uality
of results obtained
In order to simplify and solve real life fluid flow and heat related problems, physically
CO2-PO2
justified assumptions need to be made.
To analyze the fluid dynamics and heat transfer related problems modern tools like
CO3-PO5
flow and heat transfer simulation software like fluent will be used.
In order to implement CFD techniques and tools to simulate real world resistance and
CO4-PO9
propulsion related flow phenomena in the field of ship hydrodynamics
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction and Governing Equations of Fluid Flow
Class 1 Introduction, Finite Control Volume
Class 2 Substantial Derivative
Class 3 Physical meaning of gradient of velocity
Week 2 Governing Equations of Fluid Flow
Class 4 Conservation and non-conservation form of continuity equation
CT 1,
Class 5 Conservation and non-conservation form of Navier-Stokes equation
Final Exam
Class 6 Energy equation
Week 3 Boundary Integral Method
Class 7 Discretisation and Interpolation
Class 8 Boundary Element Method
Class 9 Green‟s theorem, Application of Boundary Integral Method to radiation
and diffraction problems
Week 4 Discretization schemes
Class 10 finite difference methods, finite volume methods,
Class 12 finite element methods, spectral methods
Week 5 Finite Volume Method CT 2,
Class 13 Diffusion problem Final Exam
220
Class 14 Convection – Diffusion problem,
Class 15 Discretization Schemes,
Week 6 Finite Volume Method
Class 16 Pressure – Velocity coupling,
Class 17 Solution of Discretized Equations,
Class 18 Unsteady flows
Week 7 Finite Volume Method
Class 19 Implementation of Boundary Conditions,
Class 20 Errors and Uncertainty in CFD modeling
Week 8 Turbulence Modelling
Class 22 Characteristics of turbulent flow,
Class 23 Transition from laminar to turbulent flow,
Class 24 Reynolds Averaged Navier Stokes Equation (RANS),
Week 9 Turbulence Modelling
Class 25 Turbulence Models, i.e., k-epsilon model Mid Term,
Class 26 k-omega model, Spalart Almaras model, Final Exam
Class 27 LES, DES, DNS models
Week 10 Grid generation
Class 28 Body-fitted coordinate grids for complex geometries
Class 29 Cartesian vs curvilinear grids,
Week 11 Grid Generation
Class 31 Block-structured grids, Unstructured grids,
Class 32 Discretization in unstructured grids,
Class 33 Staggered vs co-located grid arrangements
Week 12 Free Surface Flow
free surface computation with linear and fully nonlinear boundary
Class 34
conditions,
CFD application to free surface flow past ship shape objects using CT-3, Final
Class 36
Reynolds Averaged Navier Stokes Equation (RANS).
Exam
Week13 Error and Uncertainty Analysis in CFD
Class 37 Errors and Uncertainty in CFD
Class 38 Numerical Errors
Class 39 Input Uncertainty, Physical Model Uncertainty
Week 14 Error and Uncertainty Analysis in CFD
Class 40 Verification and Validation
Class 41 Assessment

Continuous Assignment 1-3 20% CO3 C3, C4
(40%) Participation 5% CO4
221
CO2 C1, C2,C4
CO3 C2, C4
CO4 C2,C3,C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics: The Finite Volume Method, H.K. Versteeg
and W Malalasekera, 2nd edition, Pearson Prentice Hall Editions, 2007.
2. Computational Methods for Fluid Dynamics, Ferziger, J.H. and Peric, M., 3 rd edition, Springer-
Verlag publishing group, 2002.
3. The Boundary Element Method with Programming for Engineers and Scientists, Beer, G.,
Smith, I., Duenser, C., Springer-Verlag/Wien publisher, 2008.
4. Computational Fluid Dynamics: An Introduction, John F. Wendt, 3rd edition, Springer Verlag
Berlin Heidelberg, 2009.
222
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Production and Planning Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Marine Production and Planning is a theoretical course designed to teach students about detail process
and production planning of Marine vessels, shipyard and offshore platforms. In this course students
will be acknowledged about the programming concept and network analysis. Thus, they will develop
the necessary knowledge and skills for product standardization, scheduling and resource allocation
involved in production of marine structures.
OBJECTIVES
1. To familiarize with ship production system.
2. To able to organize the design, material management in hull and outfit processing.
3. To make proficient in resource allocation, cost estimation for standardized production.
4. To understand various programming concept, database management and network analysis.

1. Perform the Production Planning and control.
2. Analyse ship production methods, shipyard layout & productivity;
3. Apply linear programming, Network analysis and DBMS in shipbuilding
4. Evaluate production, scheduling and resource allocation;
5. Build and lead effective production teams and shipbuilding projects;
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Overview of ship production system; Shipbuilding Process, Shipyard Layout and Shipyard
productivity.
2. Production Planning and Control; Introduction, Forecasting, Inventory, MRP, CPM, PERT, etc.
3. Design Process, Shipbuilding Process & Methods and Material Management in hull outfit
and steel processing.
4. Shipbuilding production, scheduling, resource allocation and cost estimation.
5. Product standardization, work simplification, work breakdown and integrated zone engineering.
6. Linear programming concepts; introduction, requirement, formulations, solutions, etc.
7. Network analysis; Critical Path Analysis- introduction, advantage, fundamentals, logical
sequencing, scheduling computations, etc.
8. Data Base Management System (DBMS) in production planning and control; overview,
architecture, data models, schemas, independence, rules, generalization, specialization &
223
normalization, etc.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO1 Perform the production planning and control. √
CO Analyze ship production methods, shipyard
√
2 layout & productivity;
CO Apply linear programming, Network analysis
√
3 and DBMS in shipbuilding
CO Evaluate production, scheduling and resource
√
4 allocation.
CO Build and lead effective production teams and
√
5 shipbuilding projects
Taxonomy Methods
Perform the production, planning and
CO1 A2 1 1-4 CT, F
control.
Analyze ship production methods,
CO2 C4 4 1-4 CT, ASG, F
shipyard layout & productivity;
Apply linear programming, Network CT, Mid
CO3 C3 1 3 5
analysis and DBMS in shipbuilding Term, F
Evaluate production, scheduling and
CO4 C5 3 5 1-4 Mid Term, F
resource allocation.
Build and lead effective production
CO5 P5 2 2 ASG, Pr
teams and shipbuilding projects
CO1-PO2 Students will be able to take identify and undertake the necessary steps for planning
and control during production.
CO2-PO2 By analyzing various methods of productions and layout, students will be capable of
decision making for higher productivity.
CO3-PO3 Upon taking into consideration of database management system and network
analysis, students will develop the skill of choosing appropriate planning and
production design,
CO4-PO10 Students will be able to use programming tools and network so that they can
evaluate and schedule the production with allotted resources.
CO5-PO11 Students will be developed with the knowledge of how to lead a production process
including the decision making capability in individual projects.
224

Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Overview of ship production system, stages and evolution
Class 2 Shipbuilding layout and influencing factors
Class 3 Layout of shipyard with respect to different generation of shipbuilding.
Week 2 Production Planning and Control
Class 4 Production system, classification and function
Class 5 Forecasting, their types, approaches and function CT 1,
Class 6 Inventory and their models Final Exam
Week 3 Production Planning and Control
Class 7 MRP, Inputs and outputs of MRP models
Class 8 Network Technique of project management
Class 9 Calculation models and steps in calculations in a Network Analysis
Week 4 Design Process
Class 10 Shipbuilding Process & Methods
Class 11 Material Management in hull outfit and steel processing.
Week 5 Product Work Breakdown
Class 13 Work simplification
Class 14 Characteristics of WBS CT 2,
Class 15 Work breakdown and integrated zone engineering. Final Exam
Week 6 Layout Strategy of Production System
Class 16 Layout Strategy of Production System
Class 17 Requirements and strategies of good layout
Class 18 Procedure for line balancing
Week 7 Hull Production
225
Class 19 Material handling method and process in shipyard
Class 20 Welding and weld defects
Week 8 Outfitting
Class 22 Outfitting pattern and characteristics Mid Term,
Class 23 Outfitting works in various spaces of ship Final Exam
Class 24 Inspection before commissioning of ships
Week 9 Cost Assessment in Ship Production
Class 25 Different approaches of cost assessment in ship building.
Class 26 Salient features of various method
Class 27 Advantage and disadvantage of various methods
Week 10 Network Analysis
Class 28 Projects and its salient features
Class 29 Working methodology of critical path analysis
Class 30 Activities and events in CPA
Week 11 Network Analysis
Class 31 Dependency rule and logical sequencing Mid Term,
Class 32 Forward Pass Computation and Backward Pass Computation Final Exam
Week 12 Database Management System
Class 34 DBMS and it‟s characteristics
Class 35 The 3-tier architecture of DBMS.
Class 36 Entity-Relationship Model and Relational Model
Week13 Database Management System
Class 37 Generalization, Specialization and Inheritance in DBMS
Class 38 Codd‟s 12 rules in a DBMS
Class 39 Relational algebra CT 3,
Week 14 Database Management System Final Exam
Class 40 The mapping process of Entities and Relationships available to
convert E-R diagram into relational scheme
Class 41 Assessment
Gradin
Components COs Blooms Taxonomy
g
Class Test/ CO1, CO2, CO3 A2, A5, C1
20%
Continuous Assignment 1-3 CO2, CO5 C2, C4
5% C3, A4
(40%) Participation CO4, CO5
Mid term 15% CO3, CO4 C1, C6, P1
CO1 C1, C6
CO2 A3, C4,C5
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C3, A4
CO4 C5
226
CO5 A4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering for Ship Production, Lambs
2. Ship Production, Hammon and Moore
227
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Ship Hull Vibration Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course is designed to provide knowledge on Ship Vibration which covers the basic ship
vibration, types of vibration, mathematical basis of ship vibration, transverse vibration of beams,
hydrodynamic inertial coefficients, virtual weights, torsional vibration of ships and mounting of
engines that are essential for understanding the vibration problems in ship and offshore structures.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce the students with the types, causes and reduction of ship vibration
2. To enable the students proper understanding and interpretation of the results of hull vibration.

1. Explain the types and causes of ship vibration
2. Interpret the consequences of vibration, the limits and predict possibilities of reduction.
3. Analyze the frequencies of vibration for different types of ships/ Floating bodies.
4. Apply analytical and numerical solutions of free and forced global hull-girder vibration for
various degree of freedoms
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction and Mathematical basis of Ship vibration: Definition and types of ship
hull vibration, causes of hull vibration, Modes of vibration, Importance of vibration on
ships, Mathematical basis of ship vibration calculation of ship hull vibration, Natural
vibration and forced vibration, Resonance and Damping, Natural vibration and forced vibration
with damping, Transverse vibration of beams.
2. Hydrodynamic Inertia Coefficients and Added Virtual Weight: Calculation of added mass
Effects of restricted water on added virtual mass, added mass for hull girder vibration (vertical
and horizontal), Added mass moment of inertia in torsional vibration.
3. Natural Frequencies of a Ship’s Hull: Measurement of ship vibration, Two-Node vertical and
horizontal frequencies of a ship hull, Higher flexure frequencies, Torsional frequencies of a
hull, Empirical formulae for calculating hull frequencies: Schlick formula, Todd formula,
Burrill formula, Bunyan formula, Lockwood Taylor formula, Kumai's Formula. Frequencies of
higher modes.
4. Hull Response to Exciting Forces: Allowable limits of vibration in a ship, Calculation of
228
amplitude, Transverse vibration of engines, Sprung masses, Vibration induced in ship structure
due to wave, propeller and machinery, Tensional, flexural and longitudinal vibrations of
propeller shafting system.
5. Consequences and Prevention of Ship Vibration: Consequences of vibration in different
types of vessels. Reduction of resonant vibration, Reduction of exciting forces, Reduction of
existing vibration, Reduction of engine unbalance, Reduction of local vibration, Use of
vibration Neutralizers, Elastic mountings, Reduction of vibration by propeller and machinery
selection, suppression, isolation and insulation.
6. Single degree of freedom systems: Free and forced vibrations, clamping, classification and
damped systems. Energy methods. Vibration isolation and transmissibility. Vibration measuring
instruments such as displacement, velocity, acceleration and frequency measurements,
Dunkerley‟s equation.
7. Two degrees of freedom system: Free, forced, damped and undamped motions matri.x
formulation, matrix method, using of Lagrange‟s equations to determine equations of motion,
Dynamic vibration absorbers, principle of Orthogonality. Semi-definite systems. Combined
rectilinear and angular modes. Torsional systems.
8. Multi degrees of freedom systems: Free and Forced vibrations of longitudinal torsional and
lateral modes. Critical speeds of rotors matrix formulation, stiffness and flexibility influence
coefficients. Eigen value problem Matrix method, Matrix interactions technique for Eigen
values and Eigen vectors. Stodola's method, Hozler's method.
9. Continuous Systems: Axial vibrations of bars, torsional vibrations of shafts, transverse vibrations
of strings and bending vibrations of beams. Free and forced vibration of strings classical and
energy methods.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO1 Explain the types and causes of ship vibration √
Interpret the consequences of vibration, the
CO2 √
limits and predict possibilities of reduction.
Analyze the frequencies of vibration for
CO3 √
different types of ships/ Floating bodies.
Apply analytical and numerical solutions of free
CO4 and forced global hull-girder vibration for √
various degree of freedom..
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the types and causes of ship
CO1 C2 1,2 CT
vibration
Interpret the consequences of
CO2 vibration, the limits and predict C2,C3 1,4 F, Mid Term
possibilities of reduction.
CO3 Analyze the frequencies of vibration for C4 1 1-4 CT, Mid
229
different types of ships/ Floating Term, F
bodies.
Apply analytical and numerical
solutions of free and forced global hull-
CO4 C3 1,2 5 CT/ASG, F
girder vibration for various degree of
freedom..
CO1-PO1 To explain the ship hull vibration with the basic science and mathematical
formulation and
CO2-PO2 In order to identify and interpret the causes and effects of hull vibration and their
allowable limits and based on the consequences to predict the possible solution to
reduce the problems.
CO3-PO2 In order to estimate and analyze various mode of frequency of ship hull vibration
using engineering sciences.
CO4-PO3 To find solutions of various mood vibration applying analytical and numerical
method and use the results to consider dynamics features of hull at an earlier design
stage of the project.
Lecture and Discussion, Co-operative and Collaborative Method, Individual Assignment, Problem
Based Method
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
230
Week Contents/Topics Assessment
Week 1 Introduction and Mathematical basis of Ship vibration
Class 1 Overview to ship vibration Course, Definition and types of ship hull
vibration
Class 2 Causes of hull vibration, Modes of vibration, Importance of vibration
on ships
Class 3 Mathematical basis of ship vibration calculation of ship hull vibration
Week 2 Introduction and Mathematical basis of Ship vibration (Contd.) CT 1
Class 4 Natural vibration and forced vibration
Class 5 Natural vibration and forced vibration, Magnification factor, resonance
and damping
Class 6 Natural vibration and forced vibration with Viscous damping
Week 3 Introduction and Mathematical basis of Ship vibration (Contd.)
Class 7 Natural vibration and forced vibration with Viscous damping
Class 8 Transverse vibration of beams and Review of this chapter
Class 9 Assesment-1
Week 4 Hydrodynamic Inertia Coefficients and Added Virtual Weight
Class 10 Concepts of virtual added mass/weight, Effects of restricted water on
added virtual mass
Class 11 Added mass for vertical and horizontal hull girder vibration
Class 12 Added mass moment of inertia in torsional vibration, Mathematical
Examples and Review of this chapter
Week 5 Natural Frequencies of a Ship’s Hull CT 2,
Class 13 Measurement of ship vibration and vibration generators Final Exam
Class 14 Two-Node vertical and horizontal frequencies of a ship hull
Class 15 Higher flexure frequencies, Torsional frequencies of a hull, Frequencies
of higher modes
Week 6 Natural Frequencies of a Ship’s Hull (Contd.)
Class 16 Empirical formulae for calculating hull frequencies: Schlick formula,
Todd formula
Class 17 Empirical formulae for calculating hull frequencies: Burrill formula,
Bunyan formula, Lockwood Taylor formula, Kumai's Formula
Class 18 Assessment -2
Week 7 Hull Response to Exciting Forces
Class 19 Allowable limits of vibration in a ship, Calculation of amplitude, Sprung
masses
Class 20 Vibration induced in ship structure due to wave, propeller and machinery,
Transverse vibration of engines
Class 21 Tensional, flexural and longitudinal vibrations of propeller shafting
system and Review of this chapter Mid Term &
Week 8 Consequences and Prevention of Ship Vibration:, , Final Exam
Class 22 Consequences of vibration in different types of vessels. Reduction of
resonant vibration, Reduction of exciting forces, Reduction of existing
vibration, Reduction of local vibration, Use of vibration Neutralizers,
Class 23 Reduction of engine unbalance, Elastic mountings, Reduction of vibration
by propeller and machinery selection, suppression, isolation and
insulation
Class 24 Reduction of vibration by propeller and machinery selection, suppression,
isolation and insulation and Review of this chapter
Week 9 Single degree of freedom systems
Class 25 Free and forced vibrations, clamping, classification and damped systems.
Energy methods
Class 26 Vibration isolation and transmissibility. Vibration measuring instruments
231
such as displacement, velocity, acceleration and frequency measurements,
Dunkerley‟s equation.
Week 10 Twodegrees of freedom system
Class 28 Free, forced, damped and undamped motions matrix formulation, matrix
method
Class 29 using of Lagrange‟s equations to determine equations of motion, Dynamic
vibration absorbers, principle of Orthogonality
Class 30 Semi-definite systems. Combined rectilinear and angular modes. Torsional CT-3/ASG,
systems. Mid Term,
Week 11 Multi degrees of freedom systems Final Exam
Class 31 Free and Forced vibrations of longitudinal torsional and lateral modes
Class 32 Critical speeds of rotors matrix formulation, stiffness and flexibility
influence coefficients
Class 33 Critical speeds of rotors matrix formulation, stiffness and flexibility
influence coefficients
Week 12 Multi degrees of freedom systems
Class 34 Eigen value problem, Matrix method, Matrix interactions technique for
Eigen values and Eigen vectors
Class 35 Matrix method, Matrix interactions technique for Eigen values and Eigen
vectors
Class 36 Stodola's method and Hozler's method
Week13 Continuous Systems
Class 37 Axial vibrations of bars and Torsional vibrations of shafts
Class 38 Transverse vibrations of strings and bending vibrations of beams
Class 39 Free and forced vibration of strings classical and energy methods Final Exam
Week 14
Class 40 Revision Class-1
Class 41 Revision Class-2

20%
Continuous Assignment CO4 C3, C4
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ship Hull Vibration - F. H. Todd (1961)
2. Naval Architecture for Marine Engineers - W. Muckle (1975): Vibration Chapter
3. Muckle‟s Naval Architecture - Revised by D. A. Taylor (1987)
4. Guide to Ship Vibration - NKK (1984)
5. Dynamic Analysis of Offshore Structures - C. A. Bravia & S. Walker (1979)
232
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Computer Aided Ship Production Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Introduction to Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering, Ship Design
RATIONALE
Optional Theoretical Course based on in-depth knowledge on Ship Production by using software. The
goal of this course is to provide the basic concepts and tools of computer aid ship design and how to
apply these concepts and tools in practical computer aided ship design problems.
OBJECTIVES
1. Be able to impart knowledge on 3D modelling.
2. Achieving ability to familiarize the students with the industry standard designs.
3. Be proficient to produce ships‟ hull and other critical parts.
4. Be able to determine the effectiveness of CAM in ship designing.

1. Develop 3D hull modelling and fit internal structures
2. Produce a limited set of design drawings to industry standards
3. Develop a concept design based on an appraisal of operational requirements
4. Create an assembly of parts, create a detailed drawing, assemble a manufacturing
environment.
5. Create basic NC sequences necessary for material removal.
6. Perform ship design, production, management and critically assesses their contribution and
effectiveness.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to computer aided manufacture (CAM)
2. Surface modeling, B-spline, non-uniform rational B-spline.
3. physically based deformable surface, sweeps and generalized cylinders
4. offsets, blending and filtering surfaces
5. Mathematical representation of hull form
6. Numerical control (NC) and robotics application in CAM
7. shell plate development
8. Modern ship production methods in a total ship system and concurring engineering context
9. Basic fabrication and material handling processes, process planning and scheduling.
233

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Develop 3D hull modelling and fit internal
CO1 √
structures
Produce a limited set of design drawings to
CO2 √
industry standards
Develop a concept design based on an
CO3 √
appraisal of operational requirements
Create an assembly of parts, create a detailed
CO4 drawing, assemble a manufacturing √
environment.
Create basic NC sequences necessary for
CO5 √
material removal.
Perform ship design, production,
CO6 management and critically assesses their √
contribution and effectiveness.
Taxonomy Methods
Develop 3D hull modelling and fit
CO1 C6 1 1 1-4 CT/ASG, F
internal structures
Produce a limited set of design
CO2 C3 1 3 1-4 CT/ASG,F
drawings to industry standards
Develop a concept design based on an
CO3 C6 1 2 5 CT/ASG,
appraisal of operational requirements
Create an assembly of parts, create a
CT/ASG, F
CO4 detailed drawing, assemble a C6, C6, C6 1 1 1-4
MT
manufacturing environment.
Create basic NC sequences necessary CT/ASG, F
CO5 C6 1 1 3
for material removal. MT
Perform ship design, production,
CO6 management and critically assesses C3, C5 1 2 1-4 CT/ASG, F
their contribution and effectiveness.
CO1-PO3 To develop 3D hull modelling and fit internal structures, by using software.
CO2-PO2 In order to produce a limited set of design drawings to industry standards.
CO3-PO3 To develop a concept design based on an appraisal of operational requirements.
234
To create an assembly of parts, create a detailed drawing, assemble a manufacturing
CO4-PO7
environment.
CO5-PO2 To create basic NC sequences necessary for material removal.
In order to perform ship design, production, management and critically assesses their
CO6-PO5
contribution and effectiveness for complex engineering problems.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction to computer aided manufacture (CAM)
Class 2 Basic Strategies
Class 3 Approaches in Design
Week 2 Surface modelling
Class 4 Defining Surface Parts
Class 5 Combining Surfaces CT 1,
Class 6 Surface vs Solid Modeling Final Exam
Week 3 B-spline
Class 7 Types of B-spline
Class 8 Curves and Surfaces
Class 9 Algorithms of B-spline
Week 4 Non-uniform rational B-spline
Class 10 Usage of Non-uniform rational B-spline
Class 12 Construction of the basis functions
Week 5 Physically based deformable surface
235
Class 13 Modelling of Physically based deformable surface
Class 14 Approach
Class 15 Applications of Physically based deformable surface
Mid Term,
Week 6 Sweeps and generalized cylinders
Final Exam
Class 16 Modelling of Sweeps and generalized cylinders
Class 17 Approach
Class 18 Applications of Sweeps and generalized cylinders
Week 7 Offsets
Class 19 Modelling and Approach
Class 20 Application of Offsets
Week 8 Blending and filtering surfaces
Class 22 Modelling of Blending and filtering surfaces Mid Term,
Class 23 Approach Final Exam
Class 24 Applications of Blending and filtering surfaces
Week 9 Mathematical representation of hull form
Class 25 Hull form and geometry.
Class 26 Methodology for Hull Modeling
Class 27 Guidelines for Work Sequence
Week 10 Numerical control (NC)
Class 28 Fundamentals of NC
Class 29 Advantages and Limitations, Components of NC
Week 11 Robotics application in CAM
Class 31 Advantages of Robotics in CAM CT 2,
Class 32 Limitations of Robotics in CAM Final Exam
Class 33 Applications
Week 12 Shell plate development
Class 34 Methodology of shell plate development
Week13 Modern ship production methods in a total ship system and
concurring engineering context
Class 37 Terms associated
Class 38 Methods CT 3,
Class 39 Methods and their limitations Final Exam
Week 14 Basic fabrication and material handling processes, process planning
and scheduling
Class 40 Handling Processes, Process planning and scheduling
Class 41 Assessment

Continuous Class Test/ 20% CO1 C2, C6
236
Assessment Assignment 1-3 CO2 C3, C3
(40%) CO3 C5, C6
CO4 C6
CO5 C6
CO6 C3, C5
Class
5% CO1
Participation
CO3 C3,C4C6
CO4 A1, C6
CO1 C2, C3, C4 C6
CO2 C3, C4,C5
CO3 C5 C6
Final Exam 60%
CO4 C5, C6, A4,P1
CO5 C6, A2, P1
CO6 C3, C5
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Computer aided applications in ship technology, by C.Kuo, K. J. MacCallum.

2. Computer Aided Ship Design and Numerically Controlled Production of Towing Tank Models
by D.F. Rogers, F. Rodriguez, S.G. Satterfield
3. Ship Production, Hammon and Moore.
237
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Inland Water Transportation System Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code: NA
Course Title: NA
RATIONALE
Optional Theoretical Course which emphasises the Inland Water Transportation System, operations
and efficient movement of freight and passengers. Students are exposed to the processes used for
managing inland waterway operations to managing system-wide operations. . It will benefit students
wishing to pursue engineering employment in waterway industries with a shipping company or
governmental agency or a company providing services to the industry.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable the students to identify the pattern and develop a network for inland water system.
2. To enable for selection suitable vessel for inland water transportation.
3. To make decisions on the mode of inland water transportation.
4. To provide the students with a basic understanding to identify and comply with the rules and
regulations for inland water transportation system

1. Explain the pattern of inland water transportation.
2. Develop network system for inland water.
3. Identify the suitable vessels and their characteristics for inland transportation.
4. Design of the suitable vessels for inland transportation.
5. Make decisions on the modes of inland water transportation
6. Identify special regulations for inland transportations.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Inland Water Transport System: Advantage, limitation, Government strategy, Responsibilities
of different organizations.
2. Inland waterways & their peculiarities, Classification, Development constraint,
Recommendation relating to waterway network.
3. Maintenance of navigational channel: siltation, bank erosion & dredging.
4. Requirements for dredging, dredging technique, disposal of sediments, dredging of fairways.
5. Inter-modal transportation, Specialized inter-modal transportation vessel.
6. Design of inland waterway transportation system, Design & operational aspects of small craft.
238
7. Design of specialized inland vessel, tug-barge system.
8. Different type of tug, barge & connection system, Shallow draft tug, inland passenger vessels,
research vessel, pontoon, hydrofoil, Ro- ro vessel, etc., Marine Salvage.
9. Inter-modalism and multi-modalism, advantage and disadvantage, Intermodal Transport Chain,
10. Intermodal Transport Units, Techniques & Costs, Inter-modality at Inland Water Transport,
11. Intermodal Transportation networks, Transport system & network design, SSCA & MEA
12. Intermodal design process guideline, Framework for intermodal networks design at IWT.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the pattern of inland water
CO1 √
transportation
CO2 Develop network system for inland water √
Identify the suitable vessels and their √
CO3
characteristics for inland transportation
Design of the suitable vessels for inland
CO4 √
transportation
Make decisions on the modes of inland
CO5 √
water transportation
Identify special regulations for inland
CO6 √
transportations
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the pattern of inland water 1, 4-
CO1 C2 1 CT/ ASG, F
transportation 6
Develop network system for inland CT/ ASG,
CO2 C2 1,3 5-6
water MT, F
Identify the suitable vessels and
CO3 their characteristics for inland C4, C5 1,3 5-6 CT/ ASG, F
transportation
Design of the suitable vessels for CT/ ASG,
CO4 C2, C4, C6 1 6
inland transportation MT, F
Make decisions on the modes of
CO5 C2, C5 3 1,5 CT/ ASG, F
inland water transportation
Identify special regulations for CT/ ASG,
CO6 C4, C5 1,3 7
inland transportations MT, F
Exam)
239
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering fundamentals have to be
applied to explain the pattern of inland water transportation.
CO2-PO3 In order to design network system for inland water transportation.
applied to identify the suitable vessel with desired characteristics.
CO4-PO3 In order to design suitable vessel for inland water transportation.
CO5-PO4 In order to provide decision on the mode of inland water transportation by
investigations including experiments, analysis etc.
CO6-PO6 In order to identify special regulation for inland transportations.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction to Inland Water Transport System
Class 2 Advantage and limitation
Class 3 Inland waterways, classification & their peculiarities
Week 2 Inland waterways
CT 1
Class 4 Inland waterways, classification & their peculiarities
Final
Class 5 Government Strategy, Responsibilities of different Organizations
Exam
Class 6 Development Constraint of Inland Waterways
Week 3 Maintenance
Class 7 Maintenance of navigational channel; siltation, bank erosion & dredging
Class 8 Requirements for dredging, disposal of sediments, dredging of fairways
Class 9 Dredging technique
240
Week 4 Inter-modal transportation
Class 10 Recommendation relating to waterway network
Class 11 Inter-modal transportation
Class 12 Specialized inter-modal transportation vessel
Week 5 Design of inland waterway transportation system
CT 2
Class 13 Design of inland waterway transportation system (Contd)
Final
Class 14 Design of inland waterway transportation system
Exam
Class 15 Design & operational aspects of small craft (Contd)
Week 6 Design of small craft and specialized vessel
Class 16 Design & operational aspects of small craft
Class 17 Design of specialized inland vessel (Contd)
Class 18 Design of specialized inland vessel
Week 7 Tug-barge system
Class 19 Tug-barge system
Class 20 Different type of tug, barge & connection system
Class 21 Shallow draft tug, inland passenger vessels, research vessel
Week 8 Other system Mid
Class 22 Pontoon, hydrofoil, Ro- Ro vessel Term
Class 23 Marine Salvage Final
Class 24 Inter-modalism and multi-modalism Exam
Week 9 Inter-modalism and multi-modalism
Class 25 Advantage and disadvantage of Inter-modalism and multi-modalism
Class 26 Intermodal Transport Chain, Intermodal Transport Units
Class 27 Intermodal Transport Techniques
Week 10 Intermodal Transport Costs
Class 28 Intermodal Transport Costs
Class 29 Inter-modality at Inland Water Transport
Class 30 Intermodal Transportation networks
Week 11 Transport system & network design
CT 3
Class 31 Transport system & network design (Contd)
Final
Class 32 Transport system & network design (Contd)
Exam
Class 33 Transport system & network design
Week 12 Intermodal design process guideline
Class 34 SSCA & MEA
Class 35 Intermodal design process guideline (Contd)
Class 36 Intermodal design process guideline
Week13 IWT Framework
Class 37 Framework for intermodal networks design at IWT
Class 38 Organogram of various regulation authorities
Class 39 Differences and similarities of different regulation authorities Final
Week 14 Rules and regulations Exam
Class 40 Rules and regulations of different authorities
Class 41 Analysis of some important accidents in Inland Waterways
Class 42 Future developments in Inland Waterways
241
Continuous 20%
Assignment 1-3 CO4 C2, C4, C6
Assessment
Class Participation 5% CO6
(40%)
Mid term 15% CO1, CO3, CO5 C1, C2, C3
CO1 C1, C2, C3
Final Exam CO2 C1, C2, C3
CO3 C4, C5
60%
CO4 C2, C4, C6
CO5 C2, C3 C5
CO6 C4, C5
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Inland Water Transportation Systems Series, Authors: Dr. Sulaiman Olanrewaju Oladokun
2. Inland Waterway Transport: Challenges and Prospects, edited by Bart Wiegmans, Rob Konings
3. UNECE Resolutions
4. CCNR Regulations
5. Inland Shipping Ordinance, 1976 (Ordinance No. LXXII of 1976)
6. European Policy for the Promotion of Inland Waterway Transport – A Case Study of the
Danube River: By Svetlana Dj. Mihic and Aleksandar Andrejevic
242
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Dredger and Dredging Technology Contact Hours: 1.5
Level and Term: Level 4 Term1
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Design of Special Ships
RATIONALE
Optional Theoretical Course based on existing and advanced logistics and technologies of dredger &
dredging. This course provides an inventory of the dredging equipment and disposal techniques used
in Bangladesh and provide guidance for activities associated with new work and maintenance
projects. This course further provides guidance on the evaluation and selection of equipment and
evaluation of disposal alternatives.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce with concepts of different dredging processes and dredging equipment.
2. To familiarize with the procedures for planning and the design considerations for meeting the
objectives of a dredging project and associated problems.
3. To give an overview about dredging prospects of Bangladesh.

1. Identify and explain about dredging methods, dredging technologies and dredging equipment;
2. Analyze dredging techniques and methods, output and productions;
3. Estimate the performance and output of various types of dredging and dredgers;
4. Make decisions for use of type of dredging equipment for different type of soil conditions;
5. Plan and organize effective dredging teams and dredging projects.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Dredging
a. Definitions of Dredging, requirements of Dredging, Various purpose of dredging, Dredging
requirement areas, Stages of Dredging;
b. Dredging operation layout, Dredging procedure (Pretreatment, Extraction, and Disposal);
c. Selection of Dredging Equipment: Criteria/Boundary Conditions, Factors in Selection.
2. Dredger Classification
a. Mechanical Dredger: application, advantages and limitations, types (Bracket, Grab,
Backhoe with description);
b. General outline of Hydraulic dredger, Suction dredger, Cutter Suction Dredger, Trailing
243
Suction Hopper Dredger, Reclamation Dredger, Barge Unloading Dredger, others (Airlift,
Augur suction, pneumatic, amphibious, water injection);
c. Mechanical vs Hydraulic Dredger
3. Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD)

a. General Description (Area of application, History, Working Method),
b. Design (Production Capacity, Dredging Depth, Max/Min Dredging Depth, Width of the cut,
type of soil, transport distance, access to site),
c. Dredging equipment,
d. The drives,
e. Spud Systems,
f. General Layout
4. Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger

a. General Description (characteristics, application area, history, working method),
b. The design (Productive capacity, main dimensions, dredge installation, propulsive power,
power balance, main layout),
c. Technical Construction,
d. Dredging Calculation (estimating discharge-head, effect of dredge material characteristics,
pump performance characteristics, estimation of output of various types of dredging.
Special features of dredge pump)
5. Type of accessories, pipes and floaters

a. pipeline fittings, rubber hose, ball socket, etc.
b. Pump and pipeline characteristics,
c. Working point, working range,
d. Operation of a pump and pipeline system.
e. Environmental aspects of dredging.
6. Brief review of dredging need

a. dredging operation and dredging process for Bangladesh

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Identify and explain about dredging methods,
CO1 √
dredging technologies and dredging equipment;
Analyze dredging techniques and methods,
CO2 √
output and productions;
Estimate the performance and output of various
CO3 √
types of dredging and dredgers;
Make decisions for use of type of dredging
CO4 √
equipment for different type of soil conditions;
CO5 Plan and organize effective dredging teams and
√
dredging projects;
244
Taxonomy Methods
Identify and explain about dredging C3, C4 1-4 CT
CO1 methods, dredging technologies and
dredging equipment;
Analyze dredging techniques and methods, C3 1-4 CT/ASG, F
CO2
output and productions;
Estimate the performance and output of C2 5 Mid Term
CO3
various types of dredging and dredgers; Exam, F
Make decisions for use of type of dredging P7 3 1
CO4 equipment for different type of soil
conditions;
CO5 Plan and organize effective dredging C6 1 1 7 CT, F
teams and dredging projects;
C1 – Remember, C2 – Understand, C3 – Apply, C4 – Analyze, C5 – Evaluate, and C6 – Create; CP-
CO1-PO2 Identifying various dredging methods, dredging technologies and dredging
equipment, student will be able to explain these.
CO2-PO2 Students will be able to analyze dredging techniques and methods, output and
productions.
CO3-PO2 Based on various operating criteria, students will be able to estimate the
performance and output of various types of dredging and dredgers.
CO4-PO3 Student will be able familiar with the procedures for planning and the design
considerations for meeting the objectives of a dredging project and associated
problems. Hence able to make decision to design solutions of using dredging
equipment and technologies for different type of soil conditions.
CO5-PO6 Students will be able to work as a team and learn about concerns and precautions for
the prevention of adverse effects on the environment and animal habitats and
utilization of dredged material for beneficial disposal are considered. Organizing
skill will help the learner to decide possible solutions which are safer to society
while designing a system.
Engagement
(hours)
245
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction to Dredging
Class 1 Definitions of Dredging, requirements of Dredging,
Class 2 Various purpose of dredging, Dredging requirement areas, Stages of
Dredging
Class 3 Dredging operation layout
Week 2 Introduction to Dredging (Contd.)
Class 4 Dredging procedure (Pretreatment, Extraction, and Disposal) CT 1
Class 5 Selection of Dredging Equipment: Criteria/Boundary Conditions,
Factors in Selection.
Week 3 Dredger Classification
Class 7 Mechanical Dredger: application, advantages and limitations
Class 8 Types of dredging (Bracket, Grab, Backhoe with description)
Class 9 General outline of Hydraulic dredger, Suction dredger, Cutter Suction
Dredger
Week 4 Dredger Classification (Contd.)
Class 10 General outline of Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger, Reclamation
CT 2,
Dredger, Barge Unloading Dredger
Final Exam
Class 11 General outline of other types (Airlift, Augur suction, pneumatic,
amphibious, water injection)
Class 12 Assement-1 (CT-1)
Week 5 Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD)
Class 13 Mechanical vs Hydraulic Dredger
Class 14 General Description (Area of application, History, Working Method)
Class 15 Design (Production Capacity, Dredging Depth, Max/Min Dredging
Depth, Width of the cut, type of soil, transport distance, access to site)
Week 6 Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD) (Contd.)
Class 16 Design (Production Capacity, Dredging Depth, Max/Min Dredging
Depth, Width of the cut, type of soil, transport distance, access to site)
Class 18 Assesment-2 (CT-2)
246
Week 7 Cutter Suction Dredger (CSD) (Contd.) Mid Term,
Class 19 Dredging equipment Final Exam,
Class 20 The drives, Spud Systems Presentation
Class 21 General Layout
Week 8 Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger
Class 22 General Description (characteristics, application area, history, working
method)
Class 23 The design (Productive capacity, main dimensions, dredge installation,
propulsive power, power balance, main layout)
Class 24 The design (Productive capacity, main dimensions, dredge installation,
propulsive power, power balance, main layout)
Week 9 Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger (Contd.)
Class 25 Technical Construction
Class 26 Dredging Calculation (estimating discharge-head, effect of dredge
material characteristics)
Class 27 Dredging Calculation (pump performance characteristics, estimation
of output of various types of dredging. Special features of dredge Final Exam
pump)
Week 10 Trailing Suction Hopper Dredger (Contd.)
Class 30 Assesment-3(Mid Term Exam)
Week 11 Type of accessories, pipes and floaters
Class 31 Pipeline fittings, rubber hose, ball socket, etc.
Class 32 Pump and pipeline characteristics
Class 33 Working point, working range
Week 12
Class 34 Operation of a pump and pipeline system.
Class 35 Special features of dredge pump. Types of floaters. CT 3,
Class 36 Environmental aspects of dredging Final Exam
Week13 Brief review of dredging need in Bangladesh
Class 37 Brief review of dredging need in Bangladesh
Class 38 Dredging operation and dredging process for Bangladesh
Class 39 Visit in an ongoing dredging project
Week 14

Class Test/ CO1, CO2, CO5 C1,C2,C3
Continuous 20%
Assignment 1-3 CO2 C2,C3
Assessmen
Class Participation 5% CO1-CO6
t (40%)
247
CO2 C2,C3
CO3 C3
CO5 C1,A2
CO6 C1
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Designing Dredging Equipment, Prof.Ir. W.J.Vlasblom. Pagina 14 van 79. May 2005
2. Dredging-A handbook for Engineers by R.N. Bray, A. D. Bates J. M. Land December 1995
3. Fundamentals of Hydraulic Dredging Second Edition, Thomas M. Turner, published by ASCE
Press American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive Reston, Virginia 20191-
4400
4. Hydraulic structures, equipment and water data acquisition systems – vol. ii – Dredging
Technology - Rudolf van den Bosch
248
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Transportation System Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The main purpose of this course for its graduates is to develop the competencies and corresponsive
abilities in thinking and applying the major theories and techniques regarding the general science of
transports, in area of maritime transport and port management, in order understand the ship/port
operations, the harbours‟ activity and shipyard industry particularities. The main topics of this course
as introductory module in maritime problems of study are limited to: maritime transport components,
maritime market study and instruments, maritime voyage operations and financing support, contract
operations in shipping, merchandise expeditions, fluvial transports, and containerization procedures.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable to get a clear understanding of the Shipping Market.
2. To enable to evaluate the economics and pattern of the Maritime Trade.
3. To familiarize with the regulatory framework of Maritime Trade.
4. To enable to analyze maritime forecasting and market research.

1. Analyze the working aspects of different types of economic organization of the shipping
market.
2. Evaluate the different types of special features of shipping market.
3. Predict the global pattern of maritime trade and freight rate.
4. Perform maritime forecasting and market research.
5. Make decision regarding ship design to fulfill the demand of ship economics.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. The Economic Organization of the Shipping Market
2. The Shipping Market Cycle, The Shipping Markets
3. Supply, Demand and Freight rates
4. Cost, Revenue and Financial Performance, Financing Ships and Shipping Company
5. The Economic Principles of Maritime Trade, The global pattern of Maritime Trade
6. Bulk cargo and the economics of bulk shipping
7. The general cargo and the economics of liner shipping
8. The economics of ships and ship designs, The regulatory framework of maritime economics
9. The economics of shipbuilding and scrapping, Maritime forecasting and Market research
249

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Analyze the working aspects of different types
CO1 of economic organization of the √
shipping market.
Evaluate the different types of special
CO2 √
features of shipping market.
Predict the global pattern of maritime trade
CO3 √
and freight rate.
Perform maritime forecasting and market
CO4 √
research.
Make decision regarding ship design to fulfill
CO5 √
the demand of ship economics.
Taxonomy Methods
Analyze the working aspects of different
CO1 types of economic organization of the C3 1-4 CT, F
shipping market.
Evaluate the different types of special
CO2 C2 1-4 CT, MT, F
features of shipping market
Predict the global pattern of maritime
CO3 C3 5 CT/ASG, F
trade and freight rate..
Perform maritime forecasting and
CO4 A2 8 MT, F
market research.
Make decision regarding ship design to
CO5 C5 5 CT, MT, F
fulfill the demand of ship economics.
CO1-PO2 In order to analyze the economic aspects of Shipping market.
CO2-PO1 In order to identify the features of the shipping market.
CO3-PO2 In order to study the maritime trade and be able to make a prediction about the
global trade.
CO4-PO2 In order to perform maritime forecasting and research with sufficient research.
CO5-PO3 In order to modify ship designs to cater the demands of the shipping market.
250
Lecture and Discussion, Co-operative and Collaborative Method, Case Studies, Industry Evaluation.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 2 Introduction to the Shipping Market
Class 3 The Economic Organization of the Shipping Market
Week 2 The Shipping Market
Class 4 The Shipping Market Cycle
Class 5 Shipping Market‟s Supply and Demand CT 1,
Class 6 Freight Rates Final Exam
Week 3 Freight Market
Class 7 Cost, Revenue and Financial
Class 8 Financing Ships and Shipping Company
Class 9 Freight Market and Operating Economics
Week 4 Maritime Trade Market
Class 10 The Economic Principles of Maritime Trade
Class 11 The Economic Principles of Maritime Trade(Continued)
Week 5 Global Pattern of Maritime Trade
Class 13 The Global Pattern of Maritime Trade
Class 14 Prediction of Global Pattern of Maritime Trade CT 2,
Class 15 Case Study regarding Maritime Trade Final Exam
Week 6 Bulk Cargo Shipping
Class 16 Bulk Cargo Shipping
Class 17 Bulk Carrier Design Aspects to Meet global demand
Class 18 Economics of Bulk Shipping
251
Week 7 Liner Shipping
Class 19 Global Cargo Shipping
Class 20 The Economics of Liner Shipping
Week 8 Economics of Ship Design
Class 22 Important Technical and Economic Features of Ship Mid Term,
Class 23 The Economics of Ship and Ship Design Final Exam
Class 24 Ship Design to Meet Global Demands
Week 9 Maritime Economics
Class 25 Tendering and Contracts
Class 26 Commercial and Marketing Aspects of Shipbuilding and Shipping
Class 27 Legal and Financial Aspects of Shipbuilding and Shipping
Week 10 Regulatory Framework of Maritime Economics
Class 28 The Regulatory Framework of Maritime Economics
Class 29 The Regulatory Framework of Maritime Economics(continued)
Week 11 Economics of Shipbuilding and Scrapping
Class 31 Management Practices in Shipbuilding Projects Mid Term,
Class 32 Environmental Considerations in Scrapping Trade Final Exam
Class 33 The Economics of Shipbuilding and Scrapping
Week 12 Maritime Trade Forecasting
Class 34 Study of Global Pattern of Maritime Trade for Prediction
Class 35 Perform Maritime Trade Forecasting
Class 36 Case Study Regarding Maritime Trade Forecasting
Week13 Maritime Market Research
Class 37 Market Research Aspects
Class 38 Data Collection
Class 39 Presentation of Results CT 3,
Week 14 Course Review Final Exam

20%
Assessment Class
5% CO4
(40%) Participation
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
252
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Maritime Economics – Martin Stopford
2. Sea Transport - P.M. Alderton
3. The geography of Transport System – Jean-Paul Rodrigue
4. Maritime Logistics – Dong Wook Song
253
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Power and Propulsion System Contact Hours: 3.0
PRE-REQUISITE
None
SYNOPSIS/RATIONALE
Power and Propulsion system course is designed to teach students about the concepts of ships
propulsors that is different types of Engines, details of components & operation, advances in
Diesel engines & Gas Turbine for marine applications, Fuel cells, Nuclear power and Wind
power. This course also provides the idea of Ships Shafting system in details. Students will
be able to select the suitable marine engine, shafting system and propeller for the desired
ships including necessary calculations. It is expected that students will be able to analyze
critically for the selection of correct machinery and propulsion system for the designed ship.
Students will also be able to analyze the defects of machinery and ships shafting system
while working as Marine engineer on board.
OBJECTIVE
1. To introduce and analyze with the working aspects of power and propulsion system of a ship;
2. To enable evaluating the type of ship‟s drive system and their relevant equipment for marine
propulsion;
3. To enable make decision for suitable types of propeller for different ships;
4. To enable the knowledge in ship propulsion and drive system design;

1. Describe the different Power System for ships.
2. Evaluate the type of ship‟s drive system and their relevant equipment for marine propulsion.
3. Decide in selecting suitable types of propeller for different ships.
4. Apply the knowledge in ship propulsion and drive system design.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Sources of Propulsion Power
a. Air dependent and air independent propulsion

b. Advances in Diesel Engines for marine applications
c. Advances in Gas Turbine for marine applications
d. Fuel cells
254
e. Nuclear power and
f. Wind power.
2. Propulsors
a. Types of different propeller (FPP, CPP, Screw propeller, Paddle wheel etc.)
b. Comparative studies of different propulsors, Ship power and propulsion systems
c. Special Propulsive devices, Surface piercing
d. Contra rotating and other special propellers.
3. Ship Drive System
a. Straight drive,
b. Multiple and multistage propulsion drive
c. Universal drive, Diesel electric drive
d. Propulsion engine and propeller matching.
4. Ship’s Shafting System
a. Description of ship‟s shafting system

b. Description and construction of components of shafting system
c. Shaft alignment methods (rough and precision alignment of shaft).
5. Ship Resistance and Power Calculation
a. Frictional, Residuary and total resistance calculation

b. Holtrop-Menon method to calculate the ship resistance.
c. Admiralty Coefficient and fuel coefficient
d. Power Calculation (Total power requirement for a ship)
6. Selection of Propulsor and Propulsion System
a. Criteria for selecting the suitable propulsor.

b. Criteria for selecting the suitable propulsion Sytsem
c. Criteria for selecting the suitable propeller
7. Application of Marine Diesel Engine, Gas Turbine, Steam Turbine, Nuclear Power Plant.
MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOME AND ROGRAM OUTCOME

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe the different Power System for √
CO1
ships
Evaluate the type of ship‟s drive system and √
CO2 their relevant equipment for marine
propulsion
Decision for selecting suitable types of √
CO3
propeller for different ships
255
Apply the knowledge in ship propulsion and √
CO4
drive system design
Taxonomy Methods
Describe the different Power System for
CO1 C1 1 1 1-4 CT, F
ships
Evaluate the type of ship‟s drive system
CT/ASG, MT,
CO2 and their relevant equipment for marine C3 1 1 1-4
F
propulsion
Decision for selecting suitable types of CT/ASG, MT,
CO3 A3 3 3 5
propeller for different ships F
CO4 Apply the knowledge in ship propulsion A2 4 2 1-4 F
and drive system design
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of components to analyze the working aspects of power and
propulsion system of a ship
CO2-PO2 To Evaluate the type of ship‟s drive system and their relevant equipment for marine
propulsion
CO3-PO4 To be able to make decision for suitable types of propeller for different ships
CO4-PO3 This is required in order to apply the knowledge in ship propulsion and drive
system design
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
256
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introductory class
Class 2 Marine Engines: Thermodynamics and Types of ICE
Class 3 Marine Engines: Major components of ICE
Week 2 Combustion of CI &SI Engine
Class 5 Study of CI engine: Combustion of CI engine CT 1,
Class 6 Study of CI engine: Combustion of SI engine Final Exam
Week 3 Low load running & Supercharging
Class 7 Study of engine: Low load running
Class 8 Study of engine: Effects of Low load running and methods to
overcome
Class 9 Study of CI engine: Supercharging, Turbocharging, Sequential
Supercharging
Week 4 Supercharging, Scavenging and Governor
Class 10 Study of CI engine: Supercharging, Turbocharging, Sequential
Supercharging
Class 11 Study of CI engine: Scavenging
Class 12 Study of CI engine: Types of Governor, Basic Operation of Governor CT 2,
Week 5 Gas Turbine Final Exam
Class 13 Study of CI engine: Components & Working principle of Governor
Class 14 Gas Turbine: Classifications, Advantage & disadvantage
Class 15 Gas Turbine: Description of major components
Week 6 Gas Turbine
Class 16 Gas Turbine: Working principle of GT
Class 17 Gas Turbine: Practical session on GT propulsion & working principle
Class 18 Gas Turbine: Description of Compressor and combustion chamber of
GT
Week 7 Fuel Cells and Nuclear Power
Class 19 Description of Fuel cells, Types of Fuel cells
Class 20 Description of Nuclear power, Types of Nuclear power
Class 21 Assessment 02 Mid Term,
Week 8 Nuclear Power and Safety Final Exam
Class 22 Construction and Operation of ship borne nuclear System
Class 23 Application of nuclear system on board ship
Class 24 Safety methods
Week 9 Wind Power
Class 25 Description of Wind power
Class 26 Types of wind power
Week 10 Ship Resistance and Power Calculation
Class 28 Frictional, Residuary and total resistance calculation
Class 29 Holtrop-Menon method to calculate the ship resistance.
Class 30 Admiralty Coefficient and fuel coefficient , Power Calculation (Total
power requirement for a ship)
Week 11 Ship Drive System Mid Term,
Class 31 Construction and operation of Wind power Final Exam
Class 32 Ship Drive System: Straight drive, Multiple and
multistage propulsion drive, Universal drive
Class 33 Ship Drive System: Diesel electric drive, Propulsion
257
engine and propeller matching
Week 12 Propulsor
Class 34 Propulsors: Comparative studies of different propulsors
Class 35 Propulsors: Operation of FPP and CPP
Class 36 Propulsors: Problems related to propeller
Week13 Ship’s Shafting System
Class 37 Power transmission: Description of ship‟s shafting system &
description of components
Class 38 Power transmission: Construction & Operation of Thrust block, CT 3,
Plummer block, Bulkhead gland Final Exam
Class 39 Power transmission : Construction & Operation of Stern tube, Loose
coupling
Week 14 Shaft Alignment Methods
Class 40 Power transmission : Rough methods Shaft alignment
Class 41 Power transmission : Precision methods of Shaft alignment
Class 42 Assessment

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Marine Diesel Engine, (Maintenance, Troubleshooting and Repair), Nigel Calder

2. Pounder‟s Marine Diesel Engines and Gas Turbines, Doug Woodyard
3. Internal Combustion Engine, V Ganesan
4. Marine Internal Combustion Engine, A.B. Kane, MIR Publishers
5. Fundamentals of Ship Resistance and Propulsion, S.A. Harvard, 1983, Wiley Publishers Ltd.
6. Fundamentals of Ship Resistance & Propulsion, A.J.W.Lap & Ir.J.D. Van Manen,
7. Principles of Naval Architecture, Vol. 2
8. Hydrodynamics of Ship Propellers, J.P. Breslin & P. Anderson, First paperback Edition 1996,
Cambridge University Press
258
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Ship Performance Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Marine Hydrodynamics, Dynamics of Marine Vehicles
RATIONALE
Ship Performance course is designed to teach students about the dynamics and performance
application in ship design retrospect, namely types of ship and floating structures. Students will be
able to perform necessary calculations related to the vessel performance, optimization and efficiency
calculations in designing an efficient ship once the course is completed.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable to impart knowledge on vessel performance parameters.
2. Achieving ability to familiarize the students with the principle of hull efficiency optimization
and performance assessment.
3. To enable in being proficient to produce ships‟ efficiency calculations.
4. To enable to conduct experiments and derive parameters.

1. Identify and justify the factors affecting the sea keeping and manoeuvrability of ships in a
seaway.
2. Explain and predict the added resistance applying numerical methods to investigate the
reasons for the speed and efficiency losses.
3. Illustrates the effects of hull and propeller roughness on propulsive performance.
4. Apply numerical approach to predict propeller performance and optimize the propeller design.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Hull Roughness
a. Hull roughness measurement, bottom condition and speed loss, propeller roughness
b. Propeller and hull interaction
c. Various factors for speed loss
d. Methods of predicting resistance increase due to hull and propeller roughness
2. Momentum Analysis of Flow Round Hull

a. Leading to wave pattern, viscous and induced resistance components
b. Wave resistance from wave pattern measurements
c. Methods of wave analysis
259
d. Measurement of resistance due to surface shear stress and measurement of pressure drag
e. Maximizing the propulsive efficiency of ships advances in ship performance
f. control of the fluid flow around the hull creating resistance, interaction of the hull wake with
the propulsor and optimization of the propulsor based on the operational profile of the ship.
g. On-going advances of the International Towing Tank Conference
h. Wake: methods of measurement, detailed wake surveys, mean wake and radial distribution;
wake scale effects. Tangential wake components; influence on blade velocity diagram.
Influence of tangential wake variations on propeller loading.
3. Propeller Design
a. Review of theoretical approaches to propeller design including lifting surface
approaches, panel methods and blade-element-momentum theories
b. Blade-element-momentum theory, Goldstein correction factors, flow curvature effects and
corrections to section design, optimum radial loading.
c. Propeller performance at design and the use of computational fluid
dynamic based approaches
d. Wake adapted propellers
e. Water jet efficiency and design examples using Cavitation Erosion.
f. Added resistance due to ship motion; wave reflection, wind, yawing
and drift; rudder resistance; speed loss of a ship in a seaway.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Identify and Justify the factors affecting the
CO1 sea keeping and manoeuvrability of ships in a √
seaway
Explain and predict the added resistance
CO2 applying numerical methods to investigate the √
reasons for the speed and efficiency losses.
Illustrate the effects of hull and propeller
CO3 √
roughness on propulsive performance
Apply numerical approach to predict
CO4 propeller performance and optimize the √
propeller design
Taxonomy Methods
Identify and Justify the factors
affecting the sea keeping and
CO1 C1, C5 1 1 1-4 CT, F
manoeuvrability of ships in a
seaway
Explain and predict the added
CO2 C3, C5, C6 1 2 1-4 CT, MT, F
resistance applying numerical methods
260
to investigate the reasons for the speed
and efficiency losses.
Illustrate the effects of hull and
CO3 propeller roughness on propulsive C4 3 2 5 CT/ASG, F
performance
Apply numerical approach to predict
CO4 propeller performance and optimize A5 1 1 5 MT, F
the propeller design
Exam)
Identification with formulation of the factors affecting the sea keeping and
CO1-PO2
maneuverability of ships in a seaway will be done for designing an efficient ship.
Students have to apply the research based knowledge to apply the numerical method
CO2-PO4 to predict and explain the added resistance to investigate the reasons for the speed
and efficiency losses.
Knowledge of the effects of hull and propeller roughness on propulsive performance
CO3-PO3
will support practical ship design in the shipbuilding area.
Students will be able to design and optimize an efficient propeller applying
CO4-PO3
numerical technique like CFD approach.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
261
Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction to Course
Class 2 Hull Roughness concept
Class 3 Propeller Hull Interaction concept
Week 2 Hull Roughness
Class 4 Hull roughness measurement concept
Class 5 Bottom criteria CT 1,
Class 6 Speed loss due to hull roughness Final Exam
Week 3 Propeller Roughness
Class 7 Propeller roughness concept
Class 8 Factors for interaction performance
Class 9 Speed loss due to propeller roughness
Week 4 Resistance Prediction
Class 10 Concept of Resistance prediction
Class 12 Speed and power loss calculation due to roughness
Week 5 Flow Around Hull
Class 13 Flow around hull wave and momentum analysis
Class 14 Wave Analysis and pressure drag calculation CT 2,
Class 15 Wave reflection Final Exam
Week 6 Propulsive Efficiency
Class 16 Efficiency maximization concept
Class 17 Hull wake generation
Class 18 Calculation and analysis of wake
Week 7 Propeller Loading
Class 19 Propeller Loading concept
Class 20 Wake radial distribution
Week 8 Blade Velocity Concept
Class 22 Blade velocity diagram Mid Term,
Class 23 Factors affecting blade velocity Final Exam
Class 24 Calculation of blade velocity
Week 9 Propeller Design
Class 25 Theoretical approaches for propeller design
Class 26 Blade design concept
Class 27 Propeller efficiency factors
Week 10 Propeller Theory
Class 28 Panel Method
Class 29 Blade element method
Week 11 Propeller Performance
Class 31 Flow curvature effect Mid Term,
Class 32 Goldstein correction factors Final Exam
Class 33 Optimum loading
262
Week 12 Waterjet Performance
Class 34 Water jet dynamics and concept
Class 35 Water jet efficiency calculation
Week13 Cavitation and Speed loss
Class 37 Speed loss calculation die to cavitation
Class 38 Erosion measurement
Class 39 Performance loss CT 3,
Week 14 Course summarize Final Exam
Class 40 Course Summary
Class 41 Assessment results
Class 42 Course feedback and review from students

Class Test/ CO1, CO2, CO3,
20% C5, C6, C4, A5
Continuous Assignment 1-3 CO4
5% C5, C6, C4, A5
Mid term 15% CO2, CO4 C6, A5
CO1 C5
CO2 C6
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 A5
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ship Performance – C. N. Hughes
2. Ship Performance: Some Technical and Commercial Aspects – C. N. Hughes
3. Ship Design and Performance for Masters and Mates – Bryan Barras
4. Assessment of Ship Performance in a Seaway – Nordforsk
5. The Maritime Engineering Reference Book: A Guide to Ship Design – Anthony F. Molland
263
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Navigation and Maritime Regulations Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Marine Safety and Pollution course is designed to teach students about the maritime regulations,
marine safety rules, pollution regulations theory, namely types of ship and floating structures.
Students will be able to perform necessary calculations related to the basic design, freeboard,
trim and stability calculations using established formulas once the course is completed.
OBJECTIVES
1. To provide basic concepts of maritime boundaries, design and operational safety regulations.
2. To know about various tidal sequences, zones, pollution regulations in the marine industry.
3. To analyze and design various vessels using freeboard and other mandatory regulatory
based calculations.

1. Describe the concept of freeboard calculation and Identify different factors and
navigational aids for safe operation of the vessel.
2. Construct a regulatory database and apply safety regulations in vessel design calculation.
3. Explain tide and tidal formation as well as justify a vessel design in tidal application.
4. Assist marine industry for surveying and registration of ships based on life saving
appliances.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Outline of Navigation, Navaid and Tide

a. Outline of navigation
b. Navigational aids and aids to navigation
c. Tide and tidal theory
2. International Rules and Freeboard:

a. International conventions on loadline
b. Freeboard calculation
c. International Maritime Organizations (IMO)
d. law of the seas,
264
e. The International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL)
f. The International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS)
g. International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea (COLREG)
3. Inland Rules
a. Merchant shipping act
b. inland shipping ordinance 1976
c. Marine fishers‟ ordinance 1983
d. Inland lifesaving rules 2001
4. Marine Pollution
a. Pollution and pollutants
b. MARPOL and legal instrument
c. Ship breaking in Bangladesh
d. Green Ship Technology

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe the concept of freeboard
calculation and Identify different factors √
CO1
and navigational aids for safe operation of
the vessel.
Construct a regulatory database and apply
CO2 safety regulations in vessel design √
calculation.
Explain tide and tidal formation as well as
CO3
Justify a vessel design in tidal application. √
Assist marine industry for surveying and
CO4 registration of ships based on life saving √
appliances.
Taxonomy Methods
Describe the concept of freeboard
calculation and Identify different
CO1 1 1 1-4 CT, F
factors and navigational aids for safe C1
operation of the vessel.
Construct a regulatory database and
CT/ASG,
CO2 apply safety regulations in vessel design 1 1 1-4
C3 F
calculation.
Explain tide and tidal formation as well
CT/ASG,
CO3 as Justify a vessel design in tidal 3 3 5
A3 MT, F
application.
265
Assist marine industry for surveying
CO4 and registration of ships based on life 4 2 1-4 MT, F
A2
saving appliances.
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of binary mathematics and science has to be applied to
understand basic computer programming concepts
CO2-PO1 To construct a pseudocode and apply the knowledge in programming,
understanding of flow chart and algorithm concepts is required.
CO3-PO3 To be able to explain and justify a program, understanding detailed
programming concepts is required.
CO4-PO2 This is required in order to conduct any investigation of complex problems
related to computer programing architecture.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Contents
Week 1 Outline of Navigation, NAVAID CT 1,
Class 1 Introduction to the Course, Assessment Procedure Final
Class 2 General and Basic Outline of Navigation Exam
Class 3 Navigational Aids & Aids to Navigation
Week 2 NAVAID Segment 2
Class 4 Aids to Navigation
266
Class 5 Navigational Math – class 1
Class 6 Navigational Math – class 2
Week 3 Tide and Tidal Theory
Class 7 Tide basic definitions
Class 8 Tidal Theories
Class 9 Assessment 01/Assignment 01
Week 4 International Load Line Rules CT 1,
Class 10 International Conventions on Load line Final
Class 11 Freeboard Regulations and initial concept Exam
Class 12 Guidelines on Freeboard Calculation
Week 5 Freeboard Calculation
Class 13 Freeboard Calculation – Class 1
Class 14 Freeboard Calculation – Class 2
Class 15 Freeboard Calculation – Class 3 (On Class Practice)
Week 6 International Regulatory Bodies
Class 16 International Maritime Organizations (IMO) – Class 1
Class 17 International Maritime Organizations (IMO) – Class 2
Class 18 Law of The Seas – Class 1
Class 19 Law of The Seas – Class 2
Class 20 Midterm Exam
Class 21 MARPOL
Week 8 International Regulatory Bodies Mid
Class 22 SOLAS – Class 1 Term,
Class 23 SOLAS – Class 2 Final
Class 24 COLREG– Class 1 Exam
Class 25 COLREG– Class 2
Class 26 Safe Marine Vessel Operation
Class 27 Summary of International Regulatory Bodies
Week 10 Inland Regulatory Bodies
Class 28 Introduction to Inland Rules
Class 29 Assessment 02/Assignment 02
Class 30 Inland Life Saving Rules 2001
Week 11 Inland Rules
Class 31 Marchant Shipping Act
Class 32 Inland Shipping Ordinance 1976
Class 33 Marine Fishers Ordinance 1983
Week 12 Marine Pollution CT 3,
Class 34 Pollutions Final Exam
Class 35 Pollutants and their effect
Week 13 Ship Breaking and MARPOL
Class 37 MARPOL and Legal Instrument
Class 38 Ship Breaking in Bangladesh
Class 39 Green ship Technology
Week 14 Course Summarization
Class 40 Course summary
Class 41 Assessment Result
267
Class 42 Student Feedback

Class Test/
20% CO1, CO2, CO3 C1, C3, A3
5% C1, C3, A3, A2
Mid term 15% CO2, CO3 A3, A2
CO1 C1
CO2 C3
Final Exam 60%
CO3 A3
CO4 A2
Total Marks 100%
(CO = Course Outcome, C = Cognitive Domain, P = Psychomotor Domain, A = Affective
Domain)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Marine Pollution by R B Clark
2. Marine Pollution by Judith S Weis
3. Prevention of pollution of environment form marine vessel, Saiful Karim
268
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Control Engineering Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code: EECE 281
Course Title: Marine Electrical and Electronics
RATIONALE
This course is designed to provide theoretical as well as conceptual understanding on control systems
with especial attention to on-board machinery and systems for marine environment. Obviously, it will
help the naval architecture and marine engineering graduates to perform the duties properly during
installations and operations of marine equipment and systems at shipyard, dockyard and fleet with
certain level of confidence.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce the students with the basic concepts of control system functions and design.
2. To enable the students in implementing and testing dynamic system models
3. To enable the students to interpret dynamic system models with sufficient mathematical
reasoning.

1. Explain the issues of control engineering as dynamic system models.
2. Apply the concepts of control engineering for ship borne machineries and systems.
3. Select appropriate dynamic control models for different classes of control design problems.
4. Design control modules in line with ship machineries.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to theory of controls
e. Concepts of mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, thermal and electro-mechanical controls
f. Different modes and methods of control systems and their representation by different
equations
g. Laplace transforms, transfer functions and characteristic functions,
h. Stability, Routh‟s criterion for stability.
2. Block diagrams and signal flow graphs

a. Physical systems modelling
b. Root locus analysis
c. Time domain and frequency domain analysis of control systems.
269
3. Useful problem and solution of a simple level control
a. Flow control, pressure control and temperature control of a physical system.
4. Computer solution of system equations

a. System response, control action and system types
b. System compensation, analogues of control system
c. application of servomechanisms on-board systems for steering, stabilizer etc.
d. Introduction to digital computerized control and simple control development using
software.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the issues of control engineering
CO1 √
as dynamic system models.
Apply the concepts of control engineering
CO2 √
for ship borne machineries and systems
Select appropriate dynamic control models
CO3 for different classes of control design √
problems.
Design control modules in line with ship
CO4 √
machineries
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Explain the issues of control C2 2 A1 1-4 CT, F
engineering as dynamic system
models.
CO2 Apply the concepts of control C4 3 A1 1-5 CT, MT, F
engineering for ship borne
machineries and systems
CO3 Select appropriate dynamic control C6 3 A2 5-7 CT/ASG, F
models for different classes of
control design problems.
CO4 Design control modules in line with A3 6 A2 5-7 MT, F
ship machineries
Exam)
270
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of science has to be applied to understand and address the control
phenomena for marine use.
CO2-PO2 In order to identify control and monitoring mechanisms in general and apply it for
the ship borne systems for propulsion, power generation and auxiliary operations.
CO3 –PO5 Creating and applying appropriate mathematical tools for both open and closed loop
control systems.
CO4 –PO6 Designing the controls for steering, stabilizer and fire fire fighting systems on board
ships.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 & 2 Introduction to the Theory of Controls
Class 1 Concepts of mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, thermal and
electro-mechanical controls
Class 2 Different modes and methods of control systems and their
Class 3 representation by different equations
Class 4 Laplace transforms, transfer functions and characteristic functions,
Class 5 stability, Routh‟s criterion for stability CT 1,
Class 6 Final Exam
Week 3 & 4 Block diagrams and signal flow graphs
Class 7 Physical systems modeling, root locus analysis
Class 8
Class 9 Time domain and frequency domain analysis of control systems
Class 10
Class 11 Steady state frequency response and stability margins
Class 12
271
Week 5 & 6 Useful problem and solution of a simple level control
Class 13 Flow control, pressure control and temperature control of a CT 2,
Class 14 physical system Final Exam
Class 15 State feedback pole placement design

Class 16
Class 17 State space modelling of discrete time linear systems
Class 18
Week 7 & 8 Computer solution of system equations
Mid Term,
Class 19 System response, control action and system types
Final Exam
Class 20
Class 21 System compensation, analogues of control system, application of
Class 22 servomechanisms onboard systems for steering, stabilizer etc
Class 23 Transformation of system models with MATLAB
Class 24
Week 9 & 10 Control System Analysis and Design by the
Frequency-Response Method
Class 25 Bode diagrams, polar plots, Nyquist stability criterion
Class 26
Final Exam
Class 27 Log-magnitude-versus-phase plots
Class 28
Class 29 Lead compensation, lag compensation, lead-lag compensation
Class 30
Week 11 & 12 Control System Design in State Space
Class 31 Design of regulator systems with observers
Class 32
Class 33 Quadratic optimal regulator systems
Class 34
Class 35 Robust control systems
Class 36 CT 3,
Week 13 & 14 PID Controllers and Modified PID Controllers Final Exam
Class 37 Ziegler-Nichols rules for tuning PID controllers, design of PID
Class 38 controllers with frequency response approach
Class 39 Design of PID controllers with computational optimization
approach
Class 40 Revision class-1
Class 41 Revision class-2
Class 42 Assessment

Continuous 20%
Assignment 1-3 CO3 C6
Assessment
Class
(40%) 5% CO1-CO4 C2, C4, C6
Participation
272
CO1 C2
CO2 C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C6
CO4 A3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Modern Control Engineering – Ogata, Katsuhiko.

2. Control Engineering: An Introduction with the Use of MATLAB – Derek Atherton
3. Reed's Marine Engineering Series: Volume 10: Instrumentation and Control Systems –
Jackson, Leslie
4. Control Engineering: Theory and Practice – Bandyopadhyay, M N
5. Control Engineering – V U Bakshi and U A Bakshi
273
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Optimization Methods in Ship Design Contact Hours: 3.00
RE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Numerical Methods
RATIONALE
This optional theoretical course will introduce the students to the basic fundamentals of optimization
methods that can be used during a design process. Considering the computational aspect of the subject
especially in higher dimensions, the course will involve significant amount of computational
assignments and a term project in the general area of engineering optimization. At the end of the
course students will develop critical thinking and learn to frame engineering minima maxima
problems in the framework of optimization problems.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable the students to enumerate the fundamental knowledge of Linear Programming and
Dynamic Programming problems.
2. To enable the students to learn classical optimization techniques and numerical methods of
optimization.
3. To enable the students to know the basics of different evolutionary algorithms.
4. To enable the students to explain Integer programming techniques and apply different
optimization techniques to solve various models arising from engineering areas.

1. Explain the fundamental knowledge of Linear Programming and Dynamic Programming
problems.
2. Describe the basics of different evolutionary algorithms.
3. Apply the theoretical concepts and knowledge of optimization method in analysis, design, and
development of ship design.
4. Enumerate fundamentals of Integer programming technique and apply different techniques to
solve various optimization problems arising from various engineering problem as well as ship
design.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to linear programming: construction of the LP model, graphical LP solution,
slack, surplus and unrestricted variables.
2. The simplex method: standard LP form, the simplex algorithm, the M-method, the two-phase
method, special cases in simplex method application.
274
3. Duality and sensitivity analysis: Definition of the dual problem, relationship between the
optimal primal and dual solutions, dual simplex method, Integer linear programming: B & B
algorithm, cutting plane algorithm.
4. Nonlinear Programming: unconstrained problem, constrained problem: Jacobian method,
Lagrangean method, Kuhn-Tucker conditions.
5. Numerical techniques for unconstrained optimization: The Newton-Raphson method, direct
search method, steepest ascent method.
6. Numerical techniques for constrained optimization: sequential linear programming (SLP),
sequential quadratic programming (SQP), sequential unconstrained minimization techniques
(SUMT)
7. Modern methods of optimization: Genetic algorithm, simulated annealing, particle swarm
optimization, ant colony optimization.
8. Project scheduling: project development, critical path method, optimum scheduling by critical
path method.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the fundamental knowledge of
CO1 Linear Programming and Dynamic √
Programming problems.
Describe the basics of different
CO2 √
evolutionary algorithms.
Apply the theoretical concepts and
CO3 knowledge of optimization method in √
analysis, design, and development of ship
design.
Enumerate fundamentals of Integer
programming technique and apply
different techniques to solve various
CO4 √
optimization problems arising from
various engineering problem as well as
ship design.
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the fundamental knowledge
CO1 of Linear Programming and Dynamic C4 1-4 CT, F
Programming problems.
Describe the basics of different
CO2 C2 1-4 CT, MT, F
evolutionary algorithms.
Apply the theoretical concepts and
CO3 knowledge of optimization method in C3,C4 3 5 CT/ASG, F
analysis, design, and development of
ship design.
275
Enumerate fundamentals of Integer
programming technique and apply
different techniques to solve various
CO4 C5 1 3 8 MT, F
optimization problems arising from
various engineering problem as well as
ship design.
C1 – Remember, C2 – Understand, C3 – Apply, C4 – Analyze, C5 – Evaluate, and C6 – Create;
Exam)
CO1-PO2 The knowledge of mathematical principles will help the students to apply the same
to formulate solutions for engineering problems
CO2-PO2 Different computational problems can be identified, formulated, explained, reviewed
and conclusions can be reached.
CO3-PO3 Theoretical concepts and knowledge of optimization method will help the students to
analysis, design, and development of ship design as well as other related engineering
problems.
CO4-PO12 Students will be able to identify the complexity of various design optimization
related problem in their professional lifesup and find out optimization technique to
solve them.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
276
Week 1 & 2 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction to linear programming
Class 2 Construction of the lp model, graphical lp solution,
Class 3
Class 4 Slack, surplus and unrestricted variables.
Class 5
Class 6 CT 1,
Week 3 & 4 The simplex method Final Exam
Class 7 Standard LP form, the simplex algorithm, the M-method
Class 8
Class 9 The two-phase method
Class 10
Class 11 Special cases in simplex method application
Class 12
Week 5 & 6 Duality and sensitivity analysis
Class 13 Definition of the dual problem, relationship between the optimal CT 2,
Class 14 primal and dual solutions Final Exam
Class 15 Dual simplex method, integer linear programming

Class 16
Class 17 B & b algorithm, cutting plane algorithm
Class 18
Week 7 & 8 Nonlinear programming
Mid Term, Final
Class 19 Unconstrained problem
Exam
Class 20
Class 21 Constrained problem: Jacobian method, Lagrangean method,
Class 22 Kuhn-tucker conditions.
Class 23 Lagrangean method, Kuhn-tucker conditions.

Class 24
Week 9 & 10 Numerical techniques for unconstrained optimization
Class 25 The Newton-Raphson method
Class 26
Class 27 Direct search method
Class 28
Class 29 Steepest ascent method.
Class 30
Week 11 & 12 Numerical techniques for constrained optimization
Class 31 Sequential linear programming (slp)
Class 32
Class 33 Sequential quadratic programming (sqp)
Class 34
Class 35 Sequential unconstrained minimization techniques (sumt)
Class 36 CT 3,
Week 7 Modern methods of optimization Final Exam
277
Class 37 Genetic algorithm
Class 38
Class 39 Simulated annealing, particle swarm optimization
Class 40
Class 41 Ant colony optimization.
Class 42 Review

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Hamdy A Taha: Operations Research: An Introduction, Tenth Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2016.
2. P. Venkataraman: Applied Optimization with MATLAB Programming, John Wiley & Sons,
Inc. New York, 2002
3. Singiresu S. Rao: Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice, Fourth Edition, John Wiley
& Sons, Inc. New York, 2009.
4. S. R. Yadav and A. K. Malik: Operations Research, Oxford University Press, 2014.
278
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Theory of Hydrofoils Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Title: Ship Resistance and Propulsion
RATIONALE
Theory of Hydrofoils course is designed to teach students hydrofoil shapes and enrich their pertinent
knowledge. Students will be able to perform necessary calculations related to hydrofoils which will
improve the vessel performance, optimization and efficiency calculations once the course is
completed. It is expected that students will develop critical thinking about how to contrast & justify
speed affecting factor, categorize & relate reasons of speed thus solves efficiency related error
calculation.
OBJECTIVES
1. To impart knowledge on hydrofoils.
2. To familiarize the students with the theory of hydrofoils that enhance the hull efficiency,
optimization and performance.
3. To make proficient to produce ships‟ efficiency calculations.
4. To enable to conduct experiments and derive parameters.

1. Contrast and Justify the factors affecting the speed and efficiencies of ships.
2. Categorize and Relate reasons for the speed and efficiency due to hydrofoils.
3. Illustrates the effects of hydrofoils on propulsive performance.
4. Display and Solve efficiency related error calculations.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Definition and geometry of hydrofoils.
2. Introduction to the fundamentals of lifting surfaces related to the selection, design, experimental
and numerical modelling, as well as optimization of hydrofoils, propellers, and turbines.
3. Analytic investigation of flow past a hydrofoil
4. Theory of thin hydrofoils.
5. Theory of hydrofoils having arbitrary shapes.
6. 2-D and 3- D hydrofoils
7. Design and analysis of hydrofoil sections
8. Cavitating hydrofoils
9. Application of hydrofoils to high-speed craft, control surface and propeller.
279

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Contrast and Justify the factors affecting the
CO1 √
speed and efficiencies of ships
Categorize and Relate reasons for the speed
CO2 √
and efficiency due to hydrofoils
Illustrates the effects of hydrofoils on
CO3 √
propulsive performance
Displays and Solves efficiency related errors
CO4 √
calculation
Taxonomy Methods
Contrast and Justify the factors
CO1 affecting the speed and efficiencies of C5 1 1 1-4 CT, F
ships
Categorize and Relate reasons for the
CO2 C6 1 2 1-4 CT, MT, F
speed and efficiency due to hydrofoils
Illustrates the effects of hydrofoils on
CO3 C4 3 2 5 CT/ASG, F
propulsive performance
Displays and Solves efficiency related
CO4 A5 1 1 5 MT, F
errors calculation
Exam)
CO1-PO1 Details knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to calculate
performance parameters and develop the effects of change related to hydrofoils.
CO2-PO2 Students will learn the reasons of speed and efficiency variance due to hydrofoils and
how to categorize & relate those.
CO3-PO3 Fundamental idea about propulsive performance and the relation & effects of
hydrofoils on this.
CO4-PO3 Know about efficiency errors, and how to calculate, display & solve them.
280
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 2 Definition of hydrofoils
Class 3 Geometry of hydrofoils
Week 2 Fundamentals of lifting surfaces related to the selection of hydrofoils
Class 4 Introduction to the fundamentals of lifting surfaces related to the selection
of hydrofoils CT 1,
Class 5 Fundamentals of lifting surfaces related to the design of hydrofoils Final Exam
Class 6 Fundamentals of lifting surfaces related to the design of hydrofoils
Week 3 Fundamentals of lifting surfaces of hydrofoils
Class 7 Fundamentals of lifting surfaces related to the experimental and numerical
modeling of hydrofoils
Class 8 Fundamentals of lifting surfaces related to the selection, design,
experimental and numerical modeling, as well as optimization of
hydrofoils, propellers, and turbines.
Week 4 Optimization of hydrofoils
Class 11 Analytic investigation of flow past a hydrofoil
Week 5 Analytic investigation of flow past hydrofoil CT 2,
281
Class 14 Analytic investigation of flow past a hydrofoil Final Exam
Class 15 Assessment
Week 6 Analytic investigation of flow past a hydrofoil
Week 7 Theory of thin hydrofoils
Class 19 Review of previous topics
Class 20 Theory of thin hydrofoils
Class 21 Theory of thin hydrofoils
Week 8 Theory of thin hydrofoils
Class 22 Theory of thin hydrofoils Mid Term,
Class 23 Theory of thin hydrofoils Final Exam
Class 24 Assessment
Week 9 Theory of hydrofoils having arbitrary shapes
Class 25 Theory of hydrofoils having arbitrary shapes
Class 26 Theory of hydrofoils having arbitrary shapes.
Class 27 2-D and 3- D hydrofoils
Week 10 2-D and 3- D hydrofoils
Class 28 2-D and 3- D hydrofoils
Class 29 Design of hydrofoil sections
Week 11 Design and analysis of hydrofoil sections
Class 31 Design and analysis of hydrofoil sections Mid Term,
Class 32 Cavitating hydrofoils Final Exam
Class 33 Assessment
Week 12 Cavitating hydrofoils
Class 34 Cavitating hydrofoils
Week13 Application of hydrofoil
Class 37 Review of previous topic
Class 38 Application of hydrofoils to control surface
Class 39 Application of hydrofoils to propeller CT 3,
Week 14 Application of hydrofoil Final Exam
Class 40 Application of hydrofoils to high-speed craft
Class 41 Assessment

Class Test/ CO1, CO2, CO3,
Continuous 20% C5, C6, C4, A5
Assignment 1-3 CO4
Assessment
Class CO1, CO2, CO3,
(40%) 5% C5, C6, C4, A5
Participation CO4
282
CO1 C5
CO2 C6
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 A5
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Hydrofoils, Design, Build, Fly – Ray Vellinga

2. Theory of wing section – Abbott and Doenhoff
3. Hydrofoil without formula series – Hook and Karmode
4. Lift and drag of hydrofoils: Application of theory to experimental results – Korvin-
Kroukovosky
283
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Introduction to Offshore Structure Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code: None
Course Title: None
RATIONALE
The aim of this optional theoretical course is to provide the students with the complete and up-to-date
overview of offshore structure. This course will enable students to gain knowledge of different types
of offshore structures, their design characteristics, environmental loads on them, stationkeeping etc.
This course also deals with the suitability of particular type of offshore platforms in Bangladesh.
OBJECTIVES
1. Enable students to identify different types of offshore structures and their characteristics.
2. To be able to estimate environmental (wind, wave and current) loads on both fixed and floating
type of offshore structures.
3. To be able to design mooring system for floating offshore structures.
4. To select a particular type of offshore structure suitable for offshore areas of Bangladesh.

1. To comprehend and distinguish design characteristics of different types of offshore structures.
2. To be able to compute environmental loads on offshore structures.
3. To design mooring system for floating offshore structures.
4. To appraise safety features of offshore structures.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Challenges in offshore environment, Types of offshore structures, Typical

motion characteristics of offshore structures, important seakeeping and wave load problems.
2. Types of offshore structures Fixed offshore structures: jacket, jackup, TLP and gravity
platforms, Floating offshore platforms: Semi-submersible, drill ships
3. Loads on offshore structure Types of loads on offshore structures, Hydrodynamic
classification of structures.
4. Wave loads on offshore structures Wave theories and their uses, Assumption of linear (Airy)
Wave theory, Difference between linear and non-linear wave theory, Wave particle orbit and
velocity, Horizontal velocity and pressure distribution in linear and non-linear wave theory,
Time domain vs. frequency domain, wave spectrum: P-M, JONSWAP spectrum, Creation of an
irregular wave from a wave spectrum, Assumption of potential flow, dynamic pressure, Wave
284
breaking, Wave excitation loads: Froude-Kriloff and diffraction forces and moments. Added
mass, damping and restoring terms, Morison 's equation and its application for Wave Load
problems.
5. Wind and Current loads on Offshore Structures Wind speed profiles, Turbulence, Wind
spectra, Wind pressure, Effect of current, Types of Current, Current velocity sunniest profile
6. Design of Fixed offshore Structures Introduction to fixed offshore structures: Sizing & layout,
Design of Jacket Structures, Base shear, Over-turning moment and buckling in Jacket
structures, Design of TLP structures: Tension in tethers, restoring forces, Design of spar
platforms.
7. Design of Floating Offshore Structures General Arrangement and sizing of a semi-
submersible platform, Hydrodynamic features of floating offshore platforms, Stability
requirement of floating offshore platforms, Problem solving, General Arrangement and design
characteristics of a drill ship, Hydrodynamic features of a drillship.
8. Fatigue of offshore structures Basic concepts, fatigue in offshore structures, Fatigue damage
assessment, Effect of salinity and temperature on fatigue, S-N Curves.
9. Buoy and Mooring system of Offshore Structures Station keeping: mooring, thruster forces
and dynamic positioning, Assumption and derivation of catenary mooring equation, Problem
solving on minimum length of a catenary mooring.
10. Safety of Offshore Structures Life cycle phases of an offshore structure, causes of structural
failures and risk reduction measures, Accidental experiences and lesson learned.
11. Offshore Structures for Bangladesh Suitability of Offshore Structures for Bangladesh.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
To comprehend and distinguish design
CO1 characteristics of different types of offshore √
structures
To be able to demonstrate environmental
CO2 √
loads on offshore structures
To design mooring system for floating
CO3 √
offshore structures
To appraise safety features of offshore
CO4 √
structures.

Taxonomy Methods
To comprehend and distinguish C2 1 1-4 CT, F
CO1 design characteristics of different types
of offshore structures.
To be able to demonstrate C3 1 8 CT, Mid
CO2 environmental loads on offshore Term, F
structures.
285
To design mooring system for floating C6 2 5 CT/ASG, F
CO3
offshore structures.
To appraise safety features of offshore C5 5 7 Mid Term, F
CO4
structures.
Exam)
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Introduction, course administration and motivation lecture
Class 2 Challenges in offshore environment, Types of offshore structures
286
Class 3 Typical motion characteristics of offshore structures, important
seakeeping and wave load problems
Week 2 Types of offshore structures
Class 4 Fixed offshore structures: jacket, jackup, TLP and gravity platforms. CT 1,
Class 5 Floating offshore platforms: Semi-submersible, drill ships Final Exam
Class 6
Week 3 Loads on offshore structure
Class 7 Types of loads on offshore structures
Class 8 Hydrodynamic classification of structures
Week 4 Wave loads on offshore structures
Class 10 Wave theories and their uses, Assumption of linear (Airy) Wave theory,
Difference between linear and non-linear wave theory.
Class 11 Wave particle orbit and velocity, Horizontal velocity and pressure
distribution in linear and non-linear wave theory
Class 12 Time domain vs. frequency domain, wave spectrum: P-M, JONSWAP
spectrum, Creation of an irregular wave from a wave spectrum
CT 2,
Week 5 Wave loads on offshore structures
Final Exam
Class 13 Assumption of potential flow, dynamic pressure, Wave breaking
Class 14 Wave excitation loads: Froude-Kriloff and diffraction forces and
moments. Added mass, damping and restoring terms.
Class 15 Morison 's equation and its application for Wave Load problems.
Week 6 Wind and Current loads on Offshore Structures
Class 16 Wind speed profiles, Turbulence, Wind spectra, Wind pressure
Class 17 Effect of current, Types of Current, Current velocity sunniest profile
Week 7 Design of Fixed offshore Structures
Class 19 Introduction to fixed offshore structures: Sizing & layout
Class 20 Design of Jacket Structures
Class 21 Base shear, Over-turning moment and buckling in Jacket structures
Week 8 Design of Fixed offshore Structures
Mid Term,
Class 23 Design of TLP structures: Tension in tethers, restoring forces.
Final Exam
Class 24 Design of spar platforms
Week 9 Design of Floating Offshore Structures
Class 25 General Arrangement and sizing of a semi-submersible platform
Class 26 Hydrodynamic features of floating offshore platforms
Class 27 Stability requirement of floating offshore platforms
Week 10 Design of Floating Offshore Structures
Class 28 Problem solving
Class 29 General Arrangement and design characteristics of a drill ship
Class 30 Hydrodynamic features of a drillship
Week 11 Fatigue of offshore structures
Basic concepts, fatigue in offshore structures Mid Term,
Class 31
Final Exam
Class 32 Fatigue damage assessment, Effect of salinity and temperature on fatigue
Class 33 S-N Curves
Week 12 Buoy and Mooring system of Offshore Structures
Class 34 Stationkeeping: mooring, thruster forces and dynamic positioning
Class 35 Assumption and derivation of catenary mooring equation
Class 36 Problem solving on minimum length of a catenary mooring.
Week13 Safety of Offshore Structures
287
Class 38 Life cycle phases of an offshore structure, causes of structural failures
and risk reduction measures CT 3,
Class 39 Accidental experiences and lesson learned. Final Exam
Week 14 Offshore Structures for Bangladesh
Class 40 Suitability of Offshore Structures for Bangladesh
Class 41 Course review (Lec - 01 ~ Lec 21)
Class 42 Course review (Lec - 22 ~ Lec 42)

20%
Assessment Class
5% CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4 C6, A2
(40%) Participation
CO1 C1, C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C4
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Offshore Engineering: An Introduction by Angus Mather
2. Sea Loads on Ships and Offshore Structures by Odd Magnus Faltinsen
3. Construction of marine and offshore structure, Ben C Gerwick Jr.
4. Elements of ocean Engineering. Dr. Ashoke Bhar
5. Introduction to offshore structures, Design, fabrication, Installation, W.J.Geatt
6. Safety of offshore structures by Torgeir Moan
7. DNVGL RP-C205, Environmental conditions and Environmental Loads
288
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Marine Acoustics Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Marine Acoustics is an optional theoretical course which is designed to impart students the
fundamental knowledge about ocean engineering sonar system design with basic acoustic
experiments. Students will understand the mechanism of underwater sound propagation system and
processing unit by which they can gain the skill of solving equations for estimating necessary velocity
parameters.
OBJECTIVES
1. To provide the basic and applied knowledge of underwater sound generation, propagation and
reception.
2. To enable to achieve understanding of the sonar equation and basic signal processing concepts
essential to sonar system design.
3. To familiarize with the design of basic sonar systems and basic ocean acoustic experiments.
4. To familiarize with various sources of ambient noise in the sea.

1. Explain the fundamentals of sound propagation, sound of seismic, ships, wind and rain,
bioacoustics.
2. Identify the effects of sound in ocean dynamics, and imaging and mapping the seafloor.
3. Devise the skill to formulate the combined forward/inverse problem, from tracing ray
4. Estimate sound levels to solve equations for rainfall or current velocity.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Fundamentals: Simple propagation, rays, sources and receivers, radiated sound, bioacoustics,
waveguides, scattering by bubbles, interior fluctuations, and rough surfaces, upper ocean
boundary layer and rain precipitation.
2. Marine Bioacoustics: Introduction to the role of active and passive acoustic technology in
studying organisms in the marine environment, Marine animal hearing, marine animal acoustic
communication, Remote sensing and the impacts of sound on marine animals, Sensing of
plankton and nekton, passive acoustics and marine animals, marine mammals, The use of
acoustics as a tool in oceanographic instrumentation, The use of acoustics in the study of ocean
289
processes.
3. Ocean Dynamics: Tomography, time reversal, turbulence, Noise sources and spectra, Propeller
Noise, Cavitation Noise, Depth dependence and directionality and slope-conversion effects
Theoretical basis for noise modeling, Ambient noise and beam-noise statistics models Volume
and boundary scattering, Cell scattering and point scattering techniques.
4. Propagation: Basic concepts, boundary interactions, attenuation and absorption, Frequency-

domain wave equation formulations including ray theory, normal mode, multipath expansion.
5. Non-linear acoustics and Acoustics in Fluid Media: The propagation of finite amplitude
waveforms, Acoustics streaming, Parametric and stimulated scattering effects in liquids,
Superposition of simple courses, free space Green's functions, Kirchhoff-Helmholtz integral
theorem, Rayleigh integral, radiation from cylinders and spheres Introduction to acoustic finite
elements and acoustic boundary elements.
6. Ocean Bottom: Imaging hydrothermal vents, large scale mapping, mesoscale mapping.
Principles of transduction and sonar transducer design.
7. Other topics: noise from pile driving, ocean energy devices, etc.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the fundamentals of sound
CO1 propagation, sound of seismic, ships, wind and √
rain, bioacoustics.
Identify the effects of sound in ocean
CO2 dynamics, and imaging and mapping the √
seafloor
Devise the skill to formulate the combined
CO3 √
forward/inverse problem, from tracing ray
Estimate sound levels to solve equations for
CO4 √
rainfall or current velocity.
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the fundamentals of sound
CO1 propagation, sound of seismic, ships, C2 1,3 5 1-3 CT, F
wind and rain, bioacoustics
Identify the effects of sound in ocean
CO2 dynamics, and imaging and mapping C1 3 3 2-3 CT, MT, F
the seafloor
CO3 Devise the skill to formulate the C6 2 2 6-8 CT, F
290
combined forward/inverse problem,
from tracing ray
Estimate sound levels to solve
CO4 equations for rainfall or current C5 7 5 2 MT, ASG, F
velocity.
Exam)
Use of theoretical and numerical models will enable the students to understand
CO1-PO1
sound propagation and distinguishing the mechanism of bioacoustics.
By analyzing the ocean dynamics and their effect in acoustic propagation, students
CO2-PO2 will use the fundamental knowledge of sound propagation for imaging and mapping
of seafloor.
Students will develop capability of using the tracing ray method for dealing with
CO3-PO5
forward/inverse problem in acoustic measurement.
Students will formulate mathematical and theoretical model for estimating sound
CO4-PO2
levels to find out rainfall or current velocity.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Fundamentals of Acoustics
291
Class 1 A review of basic vibration theory and acoustic theory
Class 2 The physics of sound propagation, reflection, and absorption phenomena.
Class 3 Introduction to acoustic propagation
Week 2 Marine Bioacoustics
Class 4 Introduction to the role of active and passive acoustic technology in
studying organisms in the marine environment. CT 1,
Class 5 Marine animal hearing, marine animal acoustic communication Final Exam
Class 6 Remote sensing and the impacts of sound on marine animals.
Week 3 Marine Acoustic Remote Sensing
Class 7 The use of acoustics as a tool in oceanographic instrumentation,
Class 8 The use of acoustics in the study of ocean processes
Week 4 Acoustical Oceanography
Class 10 Distribution of physical and chemical properties in the oceans
Class 11 Sound-speed calculation, measurement and distribution
Class 12 Surface and bottom boundary conditions and biological effect
Week 5 Ocean Dynamics CT 2,
Class 13 Noise sources and spectra, Propeller Noise, Cavitation Noise Final Exam
Class 14 Depth dependence and directionality and slope-conversion effects
Class 15 Theoretical basis for noise modeling
Week 6 Ocean Dynamics
Class 16 Ambient noise and beam-noise statistics models
Class 17 Volume and boundary scattering
Class 18 Cell scattering and point scattering techniques
Week 7 Propagation
Class 19 Basic concepts, boundary interactions, attenuation and absorption
Class 20 Frequency-domain wave equation formulations including ray theory,
normal mode, multipath expansion, Mid Term,
Class 21 Assessment 02 Final Exam
Week 8 Acoustic radiation
Class 22 Radiation efficiency- noise level, spectra and bandwith
Class 23 Tomography
Class 24 Prediction uncertainties in complex environments
Week 9 Devices for under water sound production and reception
Class 25 Principles of transduction and sonar transducer design
Class 26 Commercial applications of underwater acoustics
Week 10 Oceanic ray bending
Class 28 Oceanic ray bending reflection of sound waves
Class 29 Transmission loss
Class 30 Bottom reflections
Week 11 Non-linear acoustics
Class 31 The propagation of finite amplitude waveforms Mid Term,
Class 32 Acoustics streaming Final Exam
Class 33 Parametric and stimulated scattering effects in liquids.
Week 12 Acoustics in Fluid Media
292
Class 34 Superposition of simple courses, free space Green's functions
Class 35 Kirchhoff-Helmholtz integral theorem, Rayleigh integral, radiation from
cylinders and spheres
Class 36 Introduction to acoustic finite elements and acoustic boundary elements
Week13 Ocean Bottom
Class 37 Imaging hydrothermal vents
Class 38 large scale mapping, mesoscale mapping
Class 39 Vibration measurements CT 3,
Week 14 Transducer Materials and Devices Final Exam
Class 40 Principles of transduction and sonar transducer design
Class 41 Ocean energy devices

Class Test/ CO1, CO2, CO4 C1, C2, P3
20%
Continuous Assignment 1-3 CO3 P6, C5
5% C6, A4
Mid term 15% CO1, CO4 C1, C4, A3
CO1 C1, C2, C4
CO2 A2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C3, A4
CO4 P1, P5, C5
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sound in the Sea, Medwin, Cambridge University Press, 2005

2. Principles of Sonar Performance Modeling, Ainslie, Springer, 2010
3. Underwater Acoustics: Analysis, Design and Performance of Sonar, Hodges, Wiley,
2010
4. Inverse Problems in Underwater Acoustics, Taroudakis and Makrakis, Springer, 2001
5. Fundamentals of Acoustical Oceanography, Medwin and Clay, Associated Press,
1998
6. Ocean Acoustic Tomography, Munk, Worcester, and Wunsch, Cambridge University
Press, 1995
293
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Shipyard Management Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code: GELM 275
Course Title: Leadership and Management
RATIONALE
Optional theoretical course designed to teach students about the organizational structures of shipyards,
management of a shipyard's workforce and performance evaluation of employees. After taking this
course, students will acquire knowledge of various shipbuilding process and activities such as
tendering, estimation, engineering, procurement, construction and timely delivery. Finally, students
shall be able to make decisions to select alternative design, production process or equipment to
increase shipyard productivity and to reduce risk.
OBJECTIVES
1. To be familiar with the management of various shops and plants at shipyard.
2. Gain knowledge of shipbuilding process at various stages.
3. Be able to plan and manage shipyard‟s daily activities.

1. Comprehend various processes of shipbuilding at different stages.
2. Evaluate design and process alternatives for selection of appropriate one.
3. Plan shipbuilding processes to maximize results.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Shipbuilding: Phase-wise work contents, initial estimation procedures and practice,
information flow, agreements.
2. Handling of material and material flow: Plant location, layout and construction, plant
safety, Designer‟s roles, owner‟s requirements, builder‟s profit and society‟s rules.
3. Material and technological constraints: Alternative designs and acceptance of a compromise
design, Post-production assessment for future guidance.
4. Cost evaluation in shipyard
5. Work flow of ship construction
6. Material procurement and handling
7. Overhead parameters in shipyard
8. Protection against fire and physical accidents
9. Docking & undocking precautions
10. Workers job environment and safety instructions
294
11. Precautions for entering in confined corporation
12. Gas freeness certificate

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Comprehend various processes of
CO1 √
shipbuilding at different stages.
Evaluate design and process alternatives for
CO2 √
selection of the appropriate one.
Plan shipbuilding processes to maximize
CO3 √
results.
Taxonomy Methods
Comprehend various processes of
CO1 C2 1 1-4 CT, F
shipbuilding at different stages.
Evaluate design and process
CT, Mid
CO2 alternatives for selection of the C5 1 8
Term, F
appropriate one.
Plan shipbuilding processes to
CO3 C6 - - CT/ASG, F
maximize results.
Exam)
The knowledge of engineering fundamentals and shipbuilding has to be applied to
CO1-PO1
understand various processes in shipbuilding at different stages.
Design and process alternatives are to be analyzed critically based upon existing
CO2-PO4
facilities at shipyards in order to select the appropriate one.
Various shipbuilding processes and schedule are to be planed after discussion with
CO3-PO11
other departments at shipyard.
Engagement
(hours)
295
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Course introduction, administration and motivation lecture
Class 2 Introduction to shipbuilding, Shipbuilding in Bangladesh.
Class 3 The maritime cluster: Linkage between shipyard, ship owner,
manufacturers, suppliers, service Providers etc.
Week 2 Introduction to Shipbuilding
Class 4 Typical shipbuilding process CT 1,
Class 5 Challenges in shipbuilding. Final Exam
Class 6 Three dimensions of shipbuilding: Functional (what), Spatial (where) and
Temporal (when)
Week 3 Phase-wise work contents
Class 7 Shipbuilding phases
Class 8 Work done in each phase
Class 9 Class Test - 1
Week 4 Cost estimation procedures and practice in shipyards
Class 10 Procedures for initial estimation and required inputs
Class 11 Risks and margin in initial estimation, control, classification using code
(SFI code)
Class 12 Demonstration with examples, sharing of lessons learnt
Week 5 Information flow and Procurement
Class 13 Shipyard Layout, information flows in shipbuilding process CT 2,
Class 14 Procurement, prioritizing resources Final Exam
Class 15 Purchase process, project procurement
Week 6 Agreements
Class 16 Contract agreements and other documentation
Class 17 Discussion on build specification
Class 18 Class Test -2
Week 7 Plant location, layout and construction and plant safety & Handling of
material and material flow
Class 19 Material handling strategy, yard layout, shipyard main store, shop stores
Class 20 Transport, lifting facility
296
Class 21 Time thief and automation ideas
Week 8 Designer’s roles, owner’s requirements, builder’s profit
and society’s rules Mid Term,
Class 22 Owner‟s requirement for project development, designer‟s roles Final Exam
Class 23 Appointing class, class requirement, survey and compliance
Week 9 Alternative designs and acceptance of a compromise design, Post-
production assessment for future guidance
Class 25 Design comparison, assessment criteria among design alternatives,
Class 26 Material and technological constraints, post-production assessment
Class 27 Examples, case study
Week 10 Overhead Parameters in Shipyard
Class 28 Definition of overhead in shipbuilding context.
Class 29 Ways to reduce and control overhead:
Class 30 Case study on overhead
Week 11 Docking and Undocking Precautions
Class 31 Docking-undocking methods; advantage and disadvantages of various Mid Term,
docking-undocking methods Final Exam
Class 32 Capacity of winch, pulley, wire, trolley checking with calibration and
certifications
Class 33 Air bag pressure test, launching way slope check
Week 12 Workers’ Job Environment and Safety Instructions
Class 34 Concept of risk and safety
Class 35 Shipyard safety standard, safety in various shop
Class 36 Risk assessment and compliance with shipyard safety standard
Week13 Precautions for entering in confined compartment
Class 37 Associated risks for working in confined spaces
Class 38 Access, light, ventilation, oxygen level check, attendant requirement.
Class 39 Class Test - 3 CT 3,
Week 14 Gas Free Certificates Final Exam
Class 40 Accident case study in confined space
Class 41 Procedure to obtain gas free certificate

20%
5% C6, A2
CO1 C1, C2
Final Exam 60% CO2 C1, C2,C4
CO3 C4
297
CO4 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Shipyard Project Management Paperback – August 24, 2017, by Fernando Remolina
2. Workshop process, Practice and Materials by Bruce J. Black
3. Shipboard Accident Response By Eric Murdoch BSc, MSc, C. Eng
4. Fisher Maritime Consulting Group Florham Park, New Jersey, USA
5. Cost Management in Shipbuilding, By Fischer, Jan O.; Holbach, Gerd
298
INTERDISCIPLINARY COURSES
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: CSE 115 Credit Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Computer Programming Language Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Computer Programming course is designed to teach students about the basic programming theory in
software and programming, namely types of ship and floating structures. Students will be able to
perform necessary calculations related to the basic design, trim and stability calculations using
computer programming once the course is completed.
OBJECTIVES
1. To provide basic concepts of compilers, interpreters and IDE
2. To know about various syntax, semantics of programming languages.
3. To analyze and design various applications using different library functions of programming
language.

1. Describe the concept of programming language and Identify syntax, semantics of
programming language
2. Construct a computer programming pseudocode and Apply pseudocode in a computer
program.
3. Explain a programming architecture and Justify program design and development.
4. Assist for testing and debugging tools to discover errors
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Programming and OOP: Programing basics, Programming concepts,
Programming and coding; Algorithm, Philosophy of Object Oriented Programming (OOP);
Advantages of OOP over structured programming; Program development stages; Encapsulation,
classes and objects, access specifiers, static and non-static members; Constructors, destructors
and copy constructors; Array of objects, object pointers, and object references; Compilers,
interpreters and IDE; Syntax and semantics; Flow charts.
2. Inheritance and Polymorphism: Single and multiple inheritance; overloading, abstract
classes, virtual functions and overriding; Exceptions; Object Oriented I/O; Template functions
and classes; Multi-threaded Programming.
3. Structured Programming Language: Data types, operators, expressions, control structures.
299
4. Functions and Program Structure: Parameter passing conventions, scope rules and storage
classes, recursion; Header files; Preprocessor; Pointers and arrays; Strings; Multidimensional
array; User defined data types: structures, unions, enumerations; Input and Output: standard
input and output, formatted input and output, file access; Variable length argument list;
Command line parameters; Error Handling; Exception Handling, Graphics; Linking; Library
functions, Type casting.
5. Memory Allocation: Static and Dynamic; Recursive Functions;
6. Introduction to Data Structure: Stack, Queue; File I/O; Graphics

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Describe the concept of programming
CO1 language and Identify syntax, semantics of √
Construct a computer programming
CO2 pseudocode and Apply pseudocode in a √
computer program.
Explain a programming architecture and
CO3 √
Justify program design and development.
Assist for testing and debugging tools to
CO4 √
discover errors
Taxonomy Methods
Describe the concept of programming
CO1 language and Identify syntax, semantics of C1 1-4 CT, F
Construct a computer programming
CT/ASG,
CO2 pseudocode and Apply pseudocode in a C3 1-4
MT, F
computer program.
Explain a programming architecture and CT/ASG,
CO3 A3 5
Justify program design and development. MT, F
Assist for testing and debugging tools to
CO4 A2 1-4 MT, F
discover errors
Exam)
300
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of binary mathematics and science has to be applied to understand
basic computer programming concepts
CO2-PO1 To construct a pseudocode and apply the knowledge in programming, understanding
of flow chart and algorithm concepts is required.
CO3-PO3 To be able to explain and justify a program, understanding detailed programming
concepts is required.
CO4-PO2 This is required in order to conduct any investigation of complex problems related
to computer programing architecture.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 1 Programming Concepts, IDE and Compiler
Class 2 Structured Programming
Class 3 Object-oriented programming
Week 2 Numbering System and Memory Allocation
Class 4 Concept of Number System and Memory Allocation
Class 5 Binary, Octal and Decimal Number System CT 1,
Class 6 Memory allocation in programming Final Exam
Week 3 Introduction to Data Types, Variables and Statement
Class 7 Concept of Header file types, Data types and Keywords
Class 8 Concept of Variables, Constant and their declarations
Class 9 Concept of Statement and Expression
Week 4 Operators and Basic Library functions
Class 10 Operators and their types
Class 11 Basic library functions
Week 5 Flowchart and Algorithm CT 2,
301
Class 13 Introduction to Pseudocode, Algorithm and Flow chart Final Exam
Class 14 Concept of Structure: Sequence, Decision and Repetition
Class 15 Case wise Structure
Week 6 Conditionals Segment 1
Class 16 Concepts of Conditionals, Expression for conditionals and their types.
Class 17 The If else conditional
Class 18 The do-while and while conditional
Week 7 Conditionals Segment 2
Class 19 Switch Case conditional
Class 20 Loop and Nested loop conditionals
Class 21 Operators and Functions in Conditional Mid Term,
Week 8 Loop and Nested Loop Final Exam
Class 22 Detailed concepts and control structures of Loop and Nested loop
Class 24 Application of Loop and Nested Loop
Week 9 Function
Class 25 Concepts of Function and function types
Class 26 Function process, parameter passing and creation
Class 27 Advance recursivity in function
Week 10 Function and loop Combination
Class 28 Concept of Class and Object
Class 29 Allocation and creation of loop and function in program
Class 30 Application of loop and function in class and object
Week 11 Array and pointer
Class 31 Concept of Array, Pointer and String Mid Term,
Class 32 Concept of Multidomain array and pointer Final Exam
Class 33 Dynamic memory allocation
Week 12 Introduction to File System
Class 34 Concept of File input output, user definition and preprocessor
Class 35 User defined data type, union and enumeration
Week13 Error Handling
Class 37 Concept of Bitwise operations and linking
Class 38 Concept of Stack and Que
Class 39 Concept on Error handling CT 3,
Week 14 Course Summarization Final Exam
Class 40 Summarization of the syllabus and course contents
Class 41 Assessment report to Students
Class 42 Course Feedback and review from students

Class Test/
20% CO1, CO2, CO3 C1, C3, A3
5% C1, C3, A3, A2
Mid term 15% CO2, CO3 A3, A2
CO1 C1
CO3 A3
302
CO4 A2
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. You Can Do It! A Beginner‟s Introduction to Computer Programming by Francis Glassborow

2. Computer Programming for Beginners: Fundamentals of Programming Terms and Concepts by
Nathan Clark
3. The Pragmatic Programmer: From Journeyman to Master by Andrew Hunt and David Thomas
4. Teach Yourself C - Herbert Schidlt
5. Programming in Ansi C - E Balagurusam
6. C: The Complete Reference - Herbert Schildt
7. C Programming Language – Dennis M. Ritchel
303
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: CSE 116 Contact Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Computer Programming Lab Credit Hours: 1.50
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code:NAME 115
Course Title: Computer Programming Language
RATIONALE
Computer Programming Lab course is designed to teach students about the basic programming
application is ship design retrospect, namely types of ship and floating structures. Students will be
able to perform necessary calculations related to the basic design, trim and stability calculations using
computer programming once the course is completed. It is expected that students can develop critical
thinking behind developing a computer program and able to check their calculations.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to be familiarized and implement different programming concepts in
application.
2. To familiarize the students with applied and calculative concept of computer programming
3. To enable students to compute different parameters of ships using programming concept.

1. Solve programming problems and Perform computations with the aid of computer develop
lines plan of ship.
2. Apply computer tools in problem solving and assignments.
3. Analyse and Contrast ideas to solve complicated problems.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction, Structured programming language
a. Introduction to C and C++ Programming Language
b. Data types, Variable declaration, Program Statements, Operators, Expressions
c. Problem solving approaches, Basic Input / Output
d. Control Structure: if else, switch case
e. Control Structures: loop (different types), nested Loop
f. Array and its uses, Array Operations, 2D Array
g. Strings, Function, Recursion, Pointer, File Access, Object
2. Oriented Programming:
a. Introduction to C++ (Object Oriented)
b. Class & Object
c. Application of the programming language in solving ship related problems.
304

No. Course Outcome
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Solve programming problems and Perform
CO1 √
computations with the aid of computer
Apply computer tools in problem solving
CO2 √
and assignments
CO3 √
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Perform computations with the aid of A5 1 1 1-4 R,Q,T
computer
Apply computer tools in problem
CO2 C3 1 2 6 R,Q,T
CO3 C4 1 2 5 R,Q,T
CO1-PO2 In order to develop problem solving skill.
CO2-PO5 To learn modern programming tools to solve problems.
CO3-PO3 In order to assess the analysing and deconstructing a problem for solution.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Lab Work 30
Preparation of Lab Assignment 24
305
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topics
Week 1 Course introduction, Introduction to Programming and Object-Oriented
programming
Week 2 IDE and Code blocks, data-type, variables and keywords
Week 3 Basic Library functions and Demonstration
Week 4 Conditionals (If Else) and problem Demonstration
Week 5 Conditionals (while/do-while) and problem Demonstration
Week 6 Loop (for) and problem Demonstration
Week 7 Mid Quiz/Lab test
Week 8 Nested Loop (for/if-else/while/do-while) and problem Demonstration
Week 9 Functions and Problem demonstration
Week 10 Array and Pointer
Week 11 File system
Week 12 Course feedback and Overall Review
Week 13 Final Lab Test
Week 14 Final Quiz

Lab CO 1 A5
Continuou participation 15% CO 2 C3
s and Report CO 3 C4
Assessme Mid-quiz CO 1 A5
nt (40%) or 25% CO 2 C3
lab-test CO 3 C4
CO 1 A5
Final Lab Test 25%
CO 2 C3
Final Quiz 35%
CO 3 A5
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. You Can Do It! A Beginner‟s Introduction to Computer Programming by Francis Glassborow

2. Computer Programming for Beginners: Fundamentals of Programming Terms and Concepts by
Nathan Clark
3. The Pragmatic Programmer: From Journeyman to Master by Andrew Hunt and David Thomas
4. Teach Yourself C - Herbert Schidlt
5. Programming in Ansi C - E Balagurusam
6. C: The Complete Reference - Herbert Schildt
7. C Programming Language – Dennis M. Ritchel
306
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: EECE 281 Credit Hours: 4.00
Course Title: Marine Electrical and Electronics Contact Hours: 4.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Compulsory theoretical course based on application of electrical and electronic technology in marine
field.
OBJECTIVES
1. Be familiarized with electrical technology, able to investigate and analyse electrical circuits and
get introduced with power generation and distribution system, relevant SOLAS regulation
applicable for ship and marine establishments.
2. To develop a basic foundation on electrical machines with a special focus on operating
principle, identification of parts and accessories, constructional features, types, characteristics
features, efficiency and loss measurement, application and maintenance etc.
3. To have a basic understanding on electronic components and its applications in marine
electronics
4. To develop a broad idea on navigational aid equipment such as Radar, Gyro compass, echo
sounder, speed log etc.

On successful completion of this course, students should:
1. Be able to describe basic theories of electric circuits, analyse electrical circuits and its
application in electrical equipment, identify power generation and distribution system with
relevant SOLAS regulation applicable for ship and marine establishments
2. Be capable to describe basic theories of electrical machines and explain principle of operation,
constructional features and evaluate the characteristics and find out their efficiency and losses,
applications and maintenance etc.
3. Be able to explain theories of electronic components and identify its applications in marine
electronics sector.
4. Be capable to explain the principles of navigational aid equipment such as Radar, Gyro
compass, echo sounder, speed log, GPS etc and communication equipment used on board ships.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. DC and AC circuit analysis: Kirchhoff‟s law, Thevenin theorem, Norton theorem, Node Pair
voltage theorem etc.
307
2. Three phase induction motors: Basic Theory, Principle of operation, Types, construction,
Equivalent circuit, Starting, speed control, Maintenance, applications.
3. Single phase induction motors: Basic Theory, Principle of operation, Equivalent circuit, types,
starting, Maintenance, applications.
4. AC generators: Basic Theory, Principle of operation, Construction, excitation system,
generator on load, voltage regulation, synchronization, Maintenance and applications.
5. Synchronous motor: Principle of operation, starting, application, maintenance Steering
system.
6. Electronic Diodes, BJTs, diode and BJT circuits, IC, MOSFET and SCR as power switching
devices.
7. Controlled rectifiers and inverters.
8. Radar and wireless equipment: Principle, block diagram, different parameters, Maintenance.
Navigational and Electronic navigational aids (GPS, Gyro compass. Echo sounder, speed log,
LORAN, RDF and Decca Chain).
9. Power generation and distribution (PGT) system onboard ship

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Be able to describe basic theories of
electric circuits, analyse electrical circuits
and its application in electrical equipment,
CO1 identify power generation and distribution √
system with relevant SOLAS regulation
applicable for ship and marine
establishments
Be capable to describe basic theories of
electrical machines and explain principle
of operation, constructional features and
CO2 √
evaluate the characteristics and find out
their efficiency and losses, applications
and maintenance etc.
Be able to explain theories of electronic
CO3 components and identify its applications √
in marine electronics sector.
Be capable to explain the principles of
navigational aid equipment such as Radar,
CO4 Gyro compass, echo sounder, speed log, √
GPS etc and communication equipment
used on board ships.
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Be able to describe basic theories of C3 1 1-4 CT/ ASG, F
308
electric circuits, analyse electrical circuits
and its application in electrical equipment,
identify power generation and distribution
system with relevant SOLAS regulation
applicable for ship and marine
establishments
Be capable to describe basic theories of
electrical machines and explain principle of
operation, constructional features and CT/ ASG,
CO2 C1 1 1-4
evaluate the characteristics and find out MT, F
their efficiency and losses, applications and
maintenance etc.
Be able to explain theories of electronic
CO3 components and identify its applications in C3 2 5 CT/ ASG, F
marine electronics sector.
Be capable to explain the principles of
navigational aid equipment such as Radar,
CT/ ASG,
CO4 Gyro compass, echo sounder, speed log, C2, C3 1 6
MT, F
GPS etc and communication equipment
used on board ships.
Exam)
applied to calculate the parameters of electrical equipment and circuit in a ship/
marine vessel.
CO2-PO1 In order to identify the parameters of various electrical and electronics
machineries of ships.
CO3-PO3 To design a sophisticated ship with specialized electronic equipment for specific
purpose/ research.
CO4-PO2 The knowledge of mathematics, natural science and engineering science have to
be applied to identify, analyze and solve complex engineering problems.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 56
309
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 160
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 DC Circuit analysis
Class 1 Nodal analysis and examples
Class 2 Super node with examples, Basic circuit theorems
Class 3 Thevenin‟s theorem with examples
Class 4 Norton‟s theorem with examples
Week 2 Alternator
Class 5 Synchronous Generator: Operating principle,
Class 6 Losses in Alternator
CT 1
Class 7 equivalent circuit of synchronous Generator, Excitation systems of
Final Exam
Synchronous Generator
Class 8 Emf equation of synchronous generator, Mathematical problems
Week 3 Alternator (Cont..)
synchronous impedance, synchronous
Class 9 impedance method of predicting voltage regulation and its limitations
Class 10 Vector diagram under different loads
Class 11 factors affecting voltage regulation
Class 12 Load sharing and parallel operation
Week 4 Induction Motor
Class 13 Three phase induction motor: principle
Class 14 Rotating magnetic field
Class 15 Construction of squirrel cage IM, equivalent circuit
Class 16 vector diagram, torque-speed characteristics
Week 5 Induction Motor (Cont..)
Class 17 no-load test, blocked rotor test CT 2
Class 18 starting and braking, speed control Mid Term
Class 19 Single phase induction motor: Types of operation Final Exam
Class 20 starting and torque speed characteristics
Week 6 Synchronous Motor
Class 21 Synchronous motor: Operation
Class 22 Vector diagrams of synchronous motor
Class 23 effect of loading under different excitation condition.
Class 24 Starting method of synchronous motor
310
Week 7 Synchronous Motor (Cont..)
Class 25 effect of changing excitation, Armature reactions
Class 26 Variations of power factor with armature reactions, Mathematical
Problems.
Class 27 Maximum load angle
Class 28 Mathematical Problems
Week 8 Diode
Class 29 Introduction to semiconductor devices and its classifications
Class 30 P-type and N-type materials and doping, Semiconductor diode and its
CT 3
band diagram
Mid Term
Class 31 Biasing of semiconductor diodes, I-V characteristics of diode and
Final Exam
equivalent circuit of diodes
Class 32 Zener diode and related maths of zener diode,
Week 9 Diode (Cont..)
Class 33 Applications of diode, HWR and FWR using diode
Class 34 Diode bridge rectifier and Centre tapped transformer rectifier, Clipper
circuit and
related problems
Class 35 Clamper circuit and related problems
Class 36 Ripple factor and related mathematical problems
Week 10 BJT
Class 37 Introduction to BJT and construction, Principle and operation of BJT
Class 38 Operating regions of BJT and its different configurations
Class 39 CB and CE configurations and characteristics curves
Class 40 Mathematical problems related to CB and CC configurations.
Week 11 MOSFET
Class 41 Introduction to MOSFET, Construction and operating principle of
MOSFET
Class 42 Types of MOSFET, Construction and operating principle of depletion
type and enhancement type MOSFET
Class 43 Biasing of MOSFET and related problems, Characteristics curve
of MOSFET
Class 44 threshold voltage, Body effect, current- voltage characteristics of an CT 4
enhancement MOSFET Final Exam
Week 12 SCR
Class 45 Introduction to power semiconductors witches, Introduction to
triggering devices
Class 46 Introduction to SCR and IGBT, Controlled single phase and three
phase Rectifiers
Class 47 Introduction to AC voltage controllers
Class 48 Introduction to Single and three phase Choppers, Working principle of
Single and three
phase Choppers
Week13 Radar and wireless equipment
Class 49 Principle, block diagram, different parameters
Class 50 Maintenance Navigational and Electronic navigational aids
311
Class 51 GPS, Gyro compass
Class 52 Echo sounder, speed log
Week 14 Radar and wireless equipment (Cont...)
Class 53 Introduction to LORAN
Class 54 RDF and Decca Chain
Class 55 Power generation and distribution (PGT) system
Class 56 Review class

20%
5% C1, C2, C3
Mid term 15% CO1, CO2, CO3 C1, C3
CO1 C3
CO2 C1
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C3
CO4 C2, C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electric Machinery Fundamentals- Stephen J. Chapman;

2. A Text book of Electrical Technology (V-II) - B.L. Theraja and A. K. Theraja;
3. Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory-Robert L. Boylestad.
4. Principles of Electronics: V.K. Mehta
5. Practical Marine Electrical Knowledge by Dennis T. Hall
6. Marine Electrical Practice G. O. Watson
7. Marine Electrical Equipment and Practice by H. D. McGeorge
8. The Marine Electrical and Electronics Bible by John C. Payne
312
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: EECE 382 Credit Hours: 1.50
Course Title: Marine Electrical and Electronics Lab Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
To help the students to explore various DC and AC machines and to teach about the concepts,
principles and working of basic electronic devices and circuits by hand-held experiments. Our mission
is to expose students to the constructions of electrical machines and basic electronic circuit to analyze
their performance. This course is targeted to verify the properties of generator, motor, diode, BJT,
MOSFET and relate them with their theoretical knowledge.
OBJECTIVES
1. To familiarize the students with the basic electrical machines like transformer, dc generator, dc
motor, synchronous machines, induction machines etc.
2. To calculate various parameters of machines like voltage regulation, efficiency etc., observe
their behaviour under various load conditions and compare them.
3. To enable the students to be familiarized and implement different semiconductor diode circuits
(e.g. rectifier, regulator), their output characteristics and their practical implication in real life.
4. To familiarize the students with input and output characteristics of different BJTs, FETs and
also the operation of each device in terms of junction bias voltage and charge carrier movement.

On successful completion of this course, students should:
1. Be able to compute the voltage regulation and efficiency of electrical machine, like
transformer, alternator, induction motor etc. and justify these characteristics under various
loading condition.
2. Be able to compare the starting and operating characteristics of various induction machines
like squirrel cage induction motor, wound rotor induction motor, capacitor start & run motor.
3. Developing capability to compare the input and output characteristics of different electronic
component obtained by both simulations and hand-held experiments.
4. Becoming proficient in interpreting the behaviour of FET with different configurations and
design electronic circuits adapting to the specified requirements using both simulating tools and
hardware.
5. Developing collaborative nature by discussing and performing as a group and organize
project tasks maintaining solidarity during the group projects and presentations
COURSE CONTENT
313
1. Computing the regulation of the Transformer in Various Loads.
2. Study the properties of Three-Phase Alternator in various loads
3. Study the properties of Three Phase Induction motor.
4. Study the properties of Capacitor-Start & Run Motor.
5. Study the properties of synchronous motor.
6. Study the characteristics of diode.
7. Study of diode rectifier circuits.
8. Study of the characteristics of SCR.
9. Study of common base bipolar junction transistor characteristics.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Be able to compute the voltage
regulation and efficiency of
electrical machine, like transformer,
CO1 √
alternator, induction motor etc. and
justify these characteristics under
various loading condition.
Be able to compare the starting and
operating characteristics of various
induction machines like squirrel
CO2 √
cage induction motor, wound rotor
induction motor, capacitor start &
run motor.
Developing capability to compare
the input and output characteristics
CO3 of different electronic component √
obtained by both simulations and
hand-held experiments.
Becoming proficient in
interpreting the behaviour of FET
with different configurations and
CO4 √
design electronic circuits adapting
to the specified requirements using
both simulating tools and hardware.
Developing collaborative nature
by discussing and performing as a
CO5 group and organize project tasks √
maintaining solidarity during the
group projects and presentations
Taxonomy Methods
314
Be able to compute the voltage
regulation and efficiency of electrical
machine, like transformer, alternator,
CO1 C3, C5 1 2
induction motor etc. and justify these R, Q, T
characteristics under various loading
condition.
Be able to compare the starting and
operating characteristics of various
1,3
CO2 induction machines like squirrel cage C1, P3 1 1 R, Q, T
,6
induction motor, wound rotor induction
motor, capacitor start & run motor.
Developing capability to compare the
2,
input and output characteristics of
3,
CO3 different electronic component obtained C4, C5, P1 1 R,Q,T
5,
by both simulations and hand-held
6
experiments.
Becoming proficient in interpreting the
behaviour of FET with different 2,
configurations and design electronic 3,
CO4 C2, P6, P7 1,2 R,Q,T
circuits adapting to the specified 5,
requirements using both simulating tools 6
and hardware.
Developing collaborative nature by
discussing and performing as a group
A1, A2,
CO5 and organize project tasks maintaining 1 7 PR, Pr
A3, A4
solidarity during the group projects and
presentations.
CO1-PO1 In order to calculate voltage regulation and efficiency, the knowledge of
natural science and mathematics would be required.
CO2-PO2 In order to perform the experiments, the knowledge of engineering
fundamentals is also required.
Ability to design electronic circuits with the perfect values of active and
CO3-PO3 passive components is required in order to achieve input-output
characteristics.
Circuit simulating tools and numerical tools are required for solving large
CO3-PO5
scale complex electronic circuits.
Ability to design electronic circuits with the perfect values of active and
CO4-PO3
passive components is required in order to achieve transfer characteristics.
CO5-PO11 For achieving project management skills and develop decision making
315
qualities, actively participating in group projects is necessary.
TEACHING LEARNING STRATEGY
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week1 Introduction to the lab equipment, rules and norms of the laboratory and safety
guidelines.
Week2 Expt-01: Computing the regulation of the Transformer in Various Loads.
Week3 Expt-02: Study the properties of Three-Phase Alternator in various loads
Week4 Expt-03: Study the properties of Three Phase Induction motor.
Week5 Expt-04: Study the properties of Capacitor-Start & Run Motor.
Week6 Expt-05: Study the properties of synchronous motor.
Week7 Expt-06: Study the characteristics of diode.
Week8 Expt-07: Study of diode rectifier circuits.
Week9 Expt-08: Study of the characteristics of SCR.
Week10 Expt-09: Study of common base bipolar junction transistor characteristics.
Week11 Practice Lab
Week12 Lab Test + Viva
Week13 Quiz test
Week14 Project submission
Components Grading CO Bloom’s Taxonomy

Continuous Lab Participation and CO1 C3, C5
20%
Assessment Report CO2 C1, P3
316
(40%) CO3 C4, C5, P1
CO4 C2, P6, P7
CO1 C3, C5
CO2 C1, P3
Labtest-1, Labtest-2 30%
CO 3 C4, C5, P1
CO4 C2, P6, P7
Project and
25% CO5 A1, A2, A3, A4
Presentation
CO1 C3, C5
CO2 C1, P3
Lab Quiz 25%
CO3 C4, C5, P1
CO4 C2, P6, P7
Total Marks 100%
(CO = Course Outcome, C = Cognitive Domain, P = Psychomotor Domain, A = Affective
Domain)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electric Machinery Fundamentals- Stephen J. Chapman;

2. A Text book of Electrical Technology (V-II) - B.L. Theraja and A. K. Theraja;
3. Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory-Robert L. Boylestad.
4. Principles of Electronics: V.K. Mehta
5. Practical Marine Electrical Knowledge by Dennis T. Hall
6. Marine Electrical Practice G. O. Watson
7. Marine Electrical Equipment and Practice by H. D. McGeorge
8. The Marine Electrical and Electronics Bible by John C. Payne
317
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: ME 150 Contact Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Mechanical Engineering Drawing Credit Hours: 1.50
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The aim of this course is to provide the concept of designing and drawing accurate schematics for
simple blocks, orthographic, auxiliary drawing, sectional drawing and isometric representations,
dimensioning, etc., which will be helpful during project, work in later semesters, as well as
professionally.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce the principles and perspectives of geometric drawing that includes the
standardization, drafting, dimensions and etc.
2. To introduce the technique of engineering graphics as a basis of engineering communication
and expression of idea and thought.
3. To familiarize with the proper and standard technique in lettering, basic geometric
constructions, sketching, dimensioning methods to describe size, shape and position accurately
on an engineering drawing.
4. To introduce orthographic projection auxiliary, sectional views, and apply 3D pictorials to
choose the best view to present the drawings.
5. To expose final drawings during the design process including assembly, machine and working
drawings.

1. Demonstrate use of appropriate standards and conventions in drawing sheet preparation and
layout.
2. Apply the correct methods of referencing relevant specifications in the interpretation of
Mechanical engineering drawings.
3. Perform the correct conventions and techniques in drawing orthographic, sectional and
auxiliary views.
4. Produce isometric and oblique pictorial form from third angle orthogonal drawings.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction, Familiarization with drawing tools and types of projections.
2. Hands on skill on object drawing.
318
3. Drawing orthographic views of simple blocks, drawing orthographic views of objects with
round features, drawing orthographic views of objects with fillets, rounds.
4. Drawing sectional views and Drawing auxiliary views.
5. Drawing isometric views of simple blocks, drawing isometric views with circle, drawing
isometric views with missing lines, drawing isometric views.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Demonstrate use of appropriate
CO1 standards and conventions in drawing √
sheet preparation and layout.
Apply the correct methods of referencing
relevant specifications in the
CO2 √
interpretation of Mechanical engineering
drawings.
Perform the correct conventions and
CO3 techniques in drawing orthographic, √
sectional and auxiliary views.
Produce isometric and oblique pictorial
CO4 form from third angle orthogonal √
drawings.
Taxonomy Methods
Demonstrate use of
appropriate standards and
CO1 C3 R, Q
conventions in drawing sheet
preparation and layout.
Apply the correct methods of
referencing relevant
CO2 specifications in the C3 R,CT,Q
interpretation of Mechanical
engineering drawings.
Perform the correct
conventions and techniques in
CO3 A2 1 1-4 R,CT,Q
drawing orthographic, sectional
and auxiliary views.
Produce isometric and oblique
CO4 pictorial form from third angle C3 1 1-4 R,CT,Q
orthogonal drawings.
Q – Quiz, ASG – Assignment, Pr – Presentation, R – Report, F – Final Exam)
319
In order to develop concept of appropriate standards and conventions in drawing
CO1-PO12
sheet preparation and layout.
In order to develop concept of correct methods on referencing relevant
CO2-PO12
specifications in the interpretation of Mechanical engineering drawings.
The knowledge of science has to be applied to perform the correct conventions
CO3-PO1
and techniques in drawing orthographic, sectional and auxiliary views.
In order to apply the engineering knowledge to develop the isometric and oblique
CO4-PO1
pictorial form from third angle orthogonal drawings.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week 1 Introduction, Familiarization with drawing tools and types of projections.

Week 2 Drawing orthographic views of simple blocks
Week 3 Drawing orthographic views of objects with round features.
Week 4 Drawing orthographic views of objects with fillets, rounds.
Week 5 Class test on orthographic views.
Week 6 Drawing sectional views.
Week 7 Drawing auxiliary views.
Week 8 Class test on sectional and auxiliary views.
Week 9 Drawing isometric views of simple blocks.
Week 10 Drawing isometric views with circle.
Week 11 Drawing isometric views with missing lines.
320
Week 12 Drawing isometric views with view.
Week 13 Class test on isometric views.
Week 14 Final Quiz.
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
CO 1 C1, C3,A1
Lab participation CO 2 C4, C5, A1
20%
and Report CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
Continuous CO 1 C1, C3,C4
Assessment CO 2 C4, C5, P1
CO 3 C3, C4
CO 4 C3
Project and
25% CO 1, CO 2, CO 3 A1, A2, A3, A4
Presentation
CO 1 CO 2
CO 2 CO 3
Lab Quiz 25%
CO 3 C3, P6, P7
CO 4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mechanical Engineering drawing By Dr. Md. Quamrul Islam
2. Textbook of Engineering Drawing By K. Venkata Reddy
321
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: SHOP 180 Credit Hours: 1.5
Course Title: Workshop Practice (Foundry, Welding and Machine Shop) Contact Hours: 3.0
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Foundry, Welding and Machine Shop Sessional course is designed to provide students with the
theoretical and practical skills needed to develop their future professional activity in the areas of
foundry and/or welding, on production management, casting design and product control, areas of
safety, speed and feed calculations, layout equipment, cutting tools, and machine tool equipment.
Attention is given to the methodologies of casting design, as well as to the techniques of
identification, characterization and resolution of product defects. Also introduces and studies the more
technical shop operations of threading, tapping, boring, carbide tooling, and principles of metal
cutting. Principles of metal cutting include the machining ability of metals and how it relates to chip
formation.
OBJECTIVES
1. To provide students with the theoretical and practical skills needed to develop their future
professional activity in the areas of foundry and/or welding, on production management
2. To impart knowledge on casting design and product control
3. To enable to acknowledge the safety precautions required to run an abrasive grinding machine
4. To enable to recognize surface grinder types, grinding wheel care, grinding wheels and
abrasive products, mount a grinding wheel, true and dress a grinding wheel.

1. Design simple patterns and pattern plates for the casting process.
2. Specify and select foundry and welding equipment.
3. Identify and establish correcting measures to eliminate casting and welding defects.
4. Identify the characteristics of an abrasive grinding machine, drilling machine, lathe machine,
shaper machine, milling machine.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Foundry
a. Introduction to foundry, tools and equipment;
b. Patterns: function, pattern making;
c. Molding: molding materials sand preparation, types of mold, procedure;
d. Cores: types, core making materials;
e. Metal melting and casting; Inspection of casting and casting defects.
322
2. Welding
a. Metal joints: riveting, grooving, soldering, welding;
b. Welding practice: electric arc - steel, aluminum; Types of electrode;
c. Welding defects: visual, destructive and non-destructive tests of welding.
d. Gas welding and equipment; Types of flame; Welding of different types of materials;
e. Gas welding defects; Test of gas welding.
3. Tools
a. Common bench and hand tools, marking and layout tools;
b. Measuring tools, cutting tools, machine tools, Bench work on jobs;
c. Practices on machine tools: drilling machine, lathe machine, shaper machine, milling
machine, grinding machine.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Design simple patterns and pattern plates
CO1 √
for the casting process
Specify and select foundry and welding
CO2 √
equipment.
Identify and establish correcting measures
CO3 √
to eliminate casting and welding defects.
Identify the characteristics of an abrasive
grinding machine, drilling machine, lathe √
CO4
machine, shaper machine, milling machine

Taxonomy Methods
Design simple patterns and pattern
CO1 C3 1 1-4 CT, F
plates for the casting process
Specify and select foundry and CT, Mid
CO2 C2 1 1-4
welding equipment. Term, F
Identify and establish correcting
CO3 measures to eliminate casting and C3 3 5 CT/ASG, F
welding defects.
Identify the characteristics of an
abrasive grinding machine, drilling
CO4 A2 1 8 Mid Term, F
machine, lathe machine, shaper
machine, milling machine
323
Lecture and Discussion, Co-operative and Collaborative Method, Problem Based Method, Practical
use of tools and Production

Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Contents
Week 1-3 Foundry
Class 1 Preparation for moulding
Class 2 Casting
Class 3 Final Product
Week 4-6 Welding
Class 4 Basic concepts
Class 5 Preparation
Class 6 Formation of a welded joint
Week 7-9 Lathe Operation
Class 7 Orientation with a lathe
Class 8 Setting measurement
Class 9 Making a threaded screw
324
Week 10 -11 Milling machine
Class 10 Operation of a Milling Machine
Class 11 Hands on experiment
Week 12-13 Shaper Machine
Class 12 Operation of a Shaper Machine
Class 13 Hands on experiment
Week 14 Quiz/Viva

Lab participation CO1, CO2, CO3,
20%
and Report CO4
Continuous
CO1, CO2, CO3,
Assessment Labtest-1,Labtest-2 30%
CO4
(40%)
Project and
25% CO1, CO3
Presentation
CO1 C1,,C3
CO2 C1,C2
Lab Quiz 25%
CO3 C3, A2
CO4 C1,C2, C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manufacturing Technology Volume 1 (Foundry, Forming & Welding) (3rd Edition) PN RAO
2. Machining Fundamentals-John R Walker
3. Principles of Foundry Technology- P. L. Jain.
4. Machine Tool Practices-Richard R Kibbe.
325
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code:ME 277 Credit Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Heat Transfer Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
Course Code:NAME 177
Course Title: Thermal Engineering
RATIONALE
Compulsory Theoretical course based on heat related equipment design and problem to solve
effectively and efficiently.
OBJECTIVES
1. Compare why certain materials are better than others for transferring heat.
2. Apply to real-world problems regarding heat transfer and materials.
3. Apply heat transfer principles to design and to evaluate performance of thermal systems.
4. Develop the design of heat exchangers.
5. Evaluate the impacts of initial and boundary conditions on the solutions of a particular heat
transfer problem.
6. Evaluate the relative contributions of different modes of heat transfer.

1. Measure rate of heat transfer under various condition through solid, liquid and gas.
2. Analyze temperature distribution while heat transfer takes place.
3. Analyze performance of a heat exchanger.
4. Design insulation and heat exchanger devices.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Heat Transfer: Conduction Heat Transfer, Thermal Conductivity, Convection
Heat Transfer, Radiation Heat Transfer.
2. Steady-State Conduction—One Dimension: The Plane Wall Insulation and R Values, Radial
Systems, Heat-Transfer Coefficient, Critical Thickness of Insulation, Heat-Source Systems,
Cylinder with Heat Sources, Conduction-Convection Systems, Fins, Thermal Contact
Resistance.
3. Steady-State Conduction—Multiple Dimensions: Mathematical Analysis of Two-
Dimensional, Heat Conduction, Graphical Analysis, The Conduction Shape Factor, Numerical
Method of Analysis, Numerical Formulation in Terms of Resistance Elements, Gauss-Seidel
Iteration, Accuracy Considerations, Electrical Analogy for Two-Dimensional Conduction.
326
5. Unsteady-State Conduction: Lumped-Heat-Capacity System, Transient Heat Flow in a Semi-
Infinite Solid, Convection Boundary Conditions, Multidimensional Systems, Transient
Numerical Method, Thermal Resistance and Capacity Formulation.
6. Principles of Convection: Introduction, Viscous Flow, Inviscid Flow, Laminar Boundary
Layer on a Flat Plate, Energy Equation of the Boundary Layer, The Thermal Boundary Layer,
The Relation Between Fluid Friction and Heat Transfer, Turbulent-Boundary-Layer Heat
Transfer, Turbulent-Boundary-Layer Thickness, Heat Transfer in Laminar Tube Flow,
Turbulent Flow in a Tube, Heat Transfer in High-SpeedFlow.
7. Empirical and Practical Relations for Forced-Convection Heat Transfer: Introduction,
Empirical Relations for Pipe and Tube Flow, Flow Across Cylinders and Spheres, Flow Across
Tube Banks, Liquid-Metal Heat Transfer.
8. Natural Convection Systems: Free-Convection Heat Transfer on a
Vertical Flat Plate, Empirical Relations for Free Convection, Free Convection from Vertical
Planes and Cylinders, Free Convection from Horizontal Cylinders, Free Convection from
Horizontal Plates, Free Convection from Inclined Surfaces, Non-Newtonian Fluids, Simplified
Equations for Air, Free Convection from Spheres, Free Convection in Enclosed Spaces,
Combined Free and ForcedConvection.
9. Radiation Heat Transfer: Physical Mechanism, Radiation Properties, Radiation Shape Factor,
Relations Between Shape Factors, Heat Exchange Between Non-black bodies, Infinite Parallel
Surfaces, Radiation Shields, Gas Radiation, Radiation Network for an Absorbing and
Transmitting Medium, Radiation Exchange with Specular Surfaces, Radiation Exchangewith
Transmitting, Reflecting, and Absorbing Media, Formulation for Numerical Solution, Solar
Radiation, Radiation Properties of the Environment, Effect of Radiation on Temperature
Measurement, The Radiation Heat-Transfer Coefficient.
10. Condensation and Boiling Heat Transfer: Introduction, Condensation Heat-Transfer
Phenomena, The Condensation Number, Film Condensation Inside Horizontal Tubes, Boiling
Heat Transfer, Simplified Relations for Boiling Heat Transfer with Water, The Heat Pipe.
11. Heat Exchangers: Introduction, The Overall Heat-Transfer Coefficient, Fouling Factors, Types
of Heat Exchangers, The Log Mean Temperature Difference, Effectiveness-NTU Method,
Compact Heat Exchangers, Analysis for Variable Properties, Heat-Exchanger Design
Considerations.
12. Heat transfer cases in ship design: Insulation in bulkheads, refrigerated spaces, fish holds in
trawlers.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Measure rate of heat transfer under various
CO1 √
condition through solid, liquid and gas
Analyze temperature distribution while heat
CO2 √
transfer takes place.
CO3 Analyze performance of a heat exchanger. √
CO4 Design insulation and heat exchanger devices. √
327
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Measure rate of heat transfer under C3 1 1-4 CT, F
various condition through solid, liquid
and gas
CO2 Analyze temperature distribution while C2 1 1-4 CT, MT, F
heat transfer takes place.
CO3 Analyze performance of a heat C3 3 5 CT/ASG, F
exchanger.
CO4 Design insulation and heat exchanger A2 1 8 MT, F
devices
Exam)
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics and science has to be applied to measure the rate of
heat transfer for any mode of heat transfer.
CO2-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering has to be applied to
analyze the temperature distribution.
CO3-PO2 To analyze and evaluate the performance of a heat exchanger
CO4-PO3 Design of insulation and heat exchanger.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
328
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction
Class 2 Revision of Thermodynamics
Class 3 Control mass and control volume approach
Week 2 Fundamental Laws
CT 1,
Class 4 Definition of fundamental law and subsidiary Law
Final Exam
Class 5 Fundamental laws that governs heat transfer issues
Class 6 Subsidiary laws for heat transfer problems
Week 3 Conditions and Mode of Heat Transfer
Class 7 Steady state condition and isentropic, isobaric condition
Class 8 Heat conduction mechanism and convection mechanism
Class 9 Heat radiation mechanism
Week 4 Equations
Class 10 Equations for control mass and control volume applying law of
conservation of mass
Class 11 Equations for control mass and control volume applying Newton‟s second
law of motion CT 2,
Class 12 Equations for control mass and control volume applying 1st law of Final Exam
thermodynamics
Week 5 Subsidiary Laws
Class 13 Fourier‟s law of heat conduction and thermal conductivity
Class 14 Newton‟s law of cooling and heat transfer coefficient
Class 15 Stephan-Boltzman law
Week 6 Heat Conduction
Class 16 Heat conduction equation through a infinite solid
Class 17 Heat conduction equation through infinite long hollow cylinder
Class 18 Thermal resistance.
Week 7 Equations
Class 19 General heat conduction equation for an infinite slab in unsteady state
Class 20 General heat conduction equation for a long hollow cylinder
Class 21 Problems Mid Term,
Week 8 Thermal Radiation Final Exam
Class 22 Basic concepts
Class 23 Laws of black body radiation
Class 24 Subsidiary laws that governs thermal radiation
Week 9 Thermal Radiation
Class 25 Emissive Power of a black surface
Class 26 Value of wavelength for emissive power
Class 27 Planks law and Stephan-Boltzman law
Week 10 Thermal Radiation
Class 28 Directional nature of thermal radiation
329
Class 29 Heat exchange by radiation between two finite black surfaces
Class 30 Rate of radiate heat exchange in an enclosure consisting of number of
black surfaces
Week 11 Fluid Mechanics Mid Term,
Class 31 Review of fluid mechanics Final Exam
Class 32 Review of fluid mechanics
Class 33 Forced convection
Week 12 Forced Convection
Class 34 Forced convection relation with fluid flow
Class 35 Heating with constant wall heat flux
Class 36 Heating with constant wall temperature
Week13 Natural Convection
Class 37 Natural convection heat transfer
Class 38 General equation
Class 39 Various conditions CT 3,
Week 14 Boiling and Condensation Final Exam
Class 40 Heat exchangers
Class 41 Boiling and Condensation
Class 42 Mass Transfer

CO1CO3 C1, C2
Class Test/
20% CO2 C2, C4
CO3 C3, C4
Assessment
Class
(40%) 5% CO4
Participation
CO1 C1, C2,C3
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C3, C4
CO4 C3, C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Heat Transfer: JackHolman
2. Principles of Heat Transfer by Frank Kreith, Raj M. Manglik , Mark S.Bohn
3. Engineering Thermodynamics: Work and Heat Transfer, G.F.C. Rogers & Y. R. Mathew,
1967, English Language Book Society & Longmans Green & Co.Ltd.
4. Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer: C. P.Kothandaraman
5. Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer: Incropera
330
BASIC SCIENCE AND MATHEMATICS COURSES
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: CHEM 101 Credit Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Fundamentals of Chemistry Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
To learn the basic concepts of inorganic, organic and physical chemistry
OBJECTIVES
1. To define the different parameter and concepts of inorganic chemistry
2. To apply different chemical theory to evaluate structure of molecules.
3. To explain the basic concepts of physical chemistry
4. To describe basic reaction mechanism of selective organic reactions.

1. Define the different parameter and concepts regarding atomic structure, periodic table, chemical
bonding, acids and bases.
2. Apply different theory on chemical bonding and hybridization to evaluate structure of
molecules.
3. Classify hydrocarbon and explain the mechanism of selective organic reactions
4. Explain chemical equilibrium, thermo-chemistry, chemical and ionic equilibria, electro-
chemical cells.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Atomic Structure: Atomic structure & quantum theory, Different atom models, Heisenberg's
uncertainty principle
2. Periodic Table: Electronic configurations, Periodic classification of elements, Periodic
properties of elements, Properties and uses of noble gases
3. Alkali metals: Chemical properties and uses
4. Chemical Bonding: Types and properties, Lewis theory, VBT, MOT, Hybridization and shapes
of molecules
5. Basic concepts of organic chemistry: History, Physical and chemical properties, Classification
6. Hydrocarbon: Chemistry of hydrocarbon, Nomenclature, Properties
7. Selective organic reactions: Oxidation-reduction, Substitution, Addition, Polymerization,
Alkylation reactions
8. Acids-Bases/Buffer Solution: Different concepts of acids-bases, Buffer solution, Mechanism
331
of buffer solution, Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, Water chemistry and pH of water
9. Solutions: Solutions and their classification, Unit expressing concentration, Colloid and
colloidal solution, Colligative properties and dilute solutions, Raoult‟s law, Van‟t Hoff isotherm
10. Thermochemistry: Laws of thermochemistry, Enthalpy, Hess's law, Heat of formation, Heat of
neutralization, Heat of reaction
11. Electrochemistry: Electrolytic conduction and its mechanism, Faraday's law, Kohlrausch Law,
Debye-Huckel-Onsagar theory, Conductrometric titrations, Different types of cells
12. Chemical Equilibria: Equilibrium law/constant, Kp and Kc, Homogeneous and heterogeneous
equilibria, Le Chatelier's principle
13. Phase Rule: Basic terms and phase rule derivation, Phase Diagram of water and carbon dioxide
14. Chemical Kinetics: Pseudo and zero order reaction, Half-life, Determination and factors
affecting the rate of a reaction, First order reaction, Second order reaction, Collision theory,
Transition state theory

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Define the different parameter and concepts
CO1 regarding atomic structure, periodic table, √
chemical bonding, acids and bases.
Apply different theory on chemical bonding
CO2 and hybridization to evaluate structure of √
molecules.
Classify hydrocarbon and explain the √
CO3
mechanism of selective organic reactions
Explain chemical equilibrium, thermo-
CO4 chemistry, chemical and ionic equilibria, √
electro-chemical cells.
Bloom’s C Assessment
No. COURSE OUTCOMES (COs) CP KP
Taxonomy A Methods
CO1 Define the different parameter and concepts CT, F,
regarding atomic structure, periodic table, ASG
chemical bonding, acids and bases.
CO2 Apply different theory on chemical CT, MT, F
bonding and hybridization to evaluate
structure of molecules.
CO3 Classify hydrocarbon and explain the MT, F,
mechanism of selective organic reactions ASG
CO4 Explain chemical equilibrium, thermo-
chemistry, chemical and ionic equilibria,
electro-chemical cells.
332
Exam)
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Atomic Structure
Class 1 Concepts of atomic structure, Different atom models
Class 2 Concepts of atomic structure, Different atom models
Class 3 Hydrogen spectral lines, Quantum numbers
Week 2 Atomic Structure/Periodic Table
Class 4 Heisenberg's uncertainty principle
Class 5 Electronic configuration, periodic classification of elements CT 1,
Class 6 Electronic configuration, periodic classification of elements Final Exam
Week 3 Periodic Table/Alkali Metals/Chemical Bonding
Class 7 Periodic properties of elements, Properties and
uses of noble gases
Class 8 Alkali metals: Chemical properties and uses
Class 9 Chemical bonding (types, properties, Lewis theory, VBT)
Week 4 Chemical Bonding
Class 10 Molecular Orbital Theory (MOT)
Class 11 Molecular orbital theory (MOT)
Class 12 Hybridization and shapes of molecules
Week 5 Chemical Bonding/Organic Chemistry CT 2,
Class 13 Hybridization and Shapes of Molecules Final Exam
Class 14 Hybridization and Shapes of Molecules
Class 15 Basic concepts of organic chemistry: History, physical and chemical
333
properties, classification
Week 6 Organic Chemistry
Class 16 Chemistry of hydrocarbon, nomenclature and properties
Class 17 Selective organic reactions: oxidation-reduction, substitution
Class 18 Selective organic reactions: addition, polymerization, alkylation
Week 7 Acids-Bases
Class 19 Different concepts of acids-bases
Class 20 Buffer solution, mechanism of buffer solution
Class 21 Henderson-Hasselbach equation Mid Term,
Week 8 Acids-Bases/Solutions Final Exam
Class 22 Water chemistry and pH of water
Class 23 Solutions and their classification, unit expressing concentration
Class 24 Colloid and colloidal solution
Week 9 Solutions/Thermochemistry
Class 25 Colligative properties and dilute solutions
Class 26 Raoult‟s law, Van‟t Hoff isotherm
Class 27 Thermochemistry: Laws of thermochemistry
Week 10 Thermochemistry/Electrochemistry
Class 28 Enthalpy, Hess‟s law
Class 29 Heat of formation, heat of neutralization, heat of reaction
Class 30 Electrolytic conduction and its mechanism
Week 11 Electrochemistry
Class 31 Faraday‟s law, Kohlrausch law, Debye-Huckel-Onsagar theory Mid Term,
Class 32 Conductrometric titrations Final Exam
Class 33 Different types of cells
Week 12 Chemical Equilibrium
Class 34 Equilibrium law/constant, Kp and Kc
Class 35 Homogeneous and heterogeneous equilibria
Class 36 Le Chatelier‟s principle
Week13 Phase Rule/Chemical Kinetics
Class 37 Phase rule: Basic terms and phase rule derivation
Class 38 Phase diagram of water and carbon dioxide
Class 39 Pseudo and zero order reaction, Half-life CT 3,
Week 14 Chemical Kinetics Final Exam
Class 40 Determination and factors affecting the rate of a reaction
Class 41 First order reaction, Second order reaction
Class 42 Collision theory, transition state theory

Continuous 20%
Assignment 1-3 CO2 C3
Assessment
Class
(40%) 5% CO3 C3
Participation
334
Mid term 15% CO2, CO3 C3
CO1 C1, C2
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Modern Inorganic Chemistry- S. Z. Haider
2. Concise Inorganic Chemistry- J. D. Lee
3. A Textbook of Organic Chemistry-Arun Bahl and B. S. Bahl
4. Organic Chemistry-Morrison and Boyd
5. Principles of Physical Chemistry-Haque and Nawab
6. Essentials of Physical Chemistry-Bahl and Tuli
7. Physical Chemistry-Atkins
335
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: CHEM 102 Credit Hours: 1.5
Course Title: Chemistry Lab Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
To learn the basic concepts of inorganic and physical chemistry.
OBJECTIVES
To learn inorganic and physical chemistry quantitative analysis techniques.

1. Define the different parameters regarding acid and base neutralization, titration and quantitative
analysis of metals etc. and others key words like primary standard substances, secondary
standard substances, molarity, normality, indicator, equivalent weights and so on.
2. Explain the different phenomena regarding iodimetric and iodometric method, complexometric
titration etc.
3. Estimate zinc, ferrous content in water sample by using various titrimetric methods.
4. Summarize a report of any project work and apply in real life
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Standardization of Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH) Solution with Standard Oxalic Acid dihydrate
(C2H2O4.2H2O) Solution.
2. Standardization of Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) Solution with Standard Sodium Hydroxide
(NaOH) Solution.
3. Standardization of Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) Solution with Standard Sodium Carbonate
(Na2CO3) Solution.
4. Determination of Calcium (Ca) Content in a Calcium Chloride dihydrate (CaCl2.2H2O)
Solution with Standard Di-Sodium Ethylene Diamine Tetra Acetic acid (Na2-EDTA) Solution.
5. Standardization of Sodium Thiosulphate Pentahydrate (Na2S2O3.5H2O) Solution with
Standard Potassium Dichromate ( K2Cr2O7 ) Solution.
6. Estimation of Copper (Cu) Content in a Copper Sulphate Pentahydrate (CuSO4.5H2O) (Blue
Vitriol) Solutions by Iodometric Method with Standard Sodium Thiosulphate Pentahydrate
(Na2S2O3.5H2O) Solution.
7. Standardization of Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4) Solution with Standard Oxalic Acid
dihydrate (C2H2O4.2H2O) Solution.
8. Determination of Ferrous (Fe) Content in a Ammonium Ferrous Sulphate (Mohr`s Salt)
[FeSO4.(NH4)2SO4.6H2O] Solution with Standard Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4)
336
Solution.
9. Determination of Zinc (Zn) Content in a Zinc Sulphate Heptahydrate (ZnSO4.7H2O) Solution
with Standard Di-Sodium EthyleneDiamineTetraAcetic acid (Na2-EDTA) Solution by using
Eriochrome black T indicator.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Define the different parameters regarding acid
and base neutralization, titration and
quantitative analysis of metals etc. and others
CO1 key words like primary standard substances, √
secondary standard substances, molarity,
normality, indicator, equivalent weights and so
on.
Explain the different phenomena regarding
CO2 iodimetric and iodometric method, √
complexometric titration etc.
Estimate zinc, ferrous content in water sample √
CO3
by using various titrimetric methods.
Summarize a report of any project work and √
CO 4
apply in real life
Taxonomy Methods
Define the different parameters
regarding acid and base neutralization,
Class
titration and quantitative analysis of
Performance,
metals etc. and others key words like
CO1 C1-C2 1 3 Experimental
primary standard substances, secondary
Exam, Viva,
standard substances, molarity,
Quiz
normality, indicator, equivalent weights
and so on.
Explain the different phenomena Class
regarding iodimetric and iodometric Performance,
CO2 C3 1 3
method, complexometric titration etc. Experimental
Exam, Viva
Estimate zinc, ferrous content in water Class
sample by using various titrimetric Performance,
CO3 C3 1 3
methods. Experimental
Exam
Summarize a report of any project work Report
CO4
and apply in real life Writing
337
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Contents
Week 1
Week 2
Class 2 Standardization of Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH) Solution with Standard Oxalic Acid
dihydrate (C2H2O4.2H2O) Solution.
Week 3
Class 3 Standardization of Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) Solution with Standard Sodium
Hydroxide (NaOH) Solution.
Week 4
Class 4 Standardization of Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) Solution with Standard Sodium
Carbonate (Na2CO3) Solution.
Week 5
Class 5 Determination of Calcium (Ca) Content in a Calcium Chloride dihydrate
(CaCl2.2H2O) Solution with Standard Di-Sodium Ethylene
DiamineTetraAceticAcid (Na2-EDTA) Solution.
Week 6
Class 6 Standardization of Sodium Thiosulfate Pentahydrate (Na2S2O3.5H2O) Solution
with Standard Potassium Dichromate ((K2Cr2O7) Solution.
Week 7
Class 7 Estimation of Copper (Cu) Content in a Copper Sulfate Pentahydrate
(CuSO4.5H2O) (Blue Vitriol) Solutions by Iodometric Method
with Standard Sodium Thiosulphate Pentahydrate (Na2S2O3.5H2O Solution.
Week 8
338
Class 8 Standardization of Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4) Solution with
Standard Oxalic Acid dihydrate (C2H2O4.2H2O) Solution.
Week 9
Class 9 Determination of Ferrous (Fe) Content in a Ammonium Ferrous
Sulphate (Mohr`s Salt) [FeSO4.(NH4)2SO4.6H2O] Solution with
Standard Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4) Solution.
Week 10
Class 10 Determination of Zinc (Zn) Content in a Zinc Sulphate Heptahydrate
(ZnSO4.7H2O) Solution with Standard Di-Sodium EthyleneDiamineTetraAcetic
acid (Na2-EDTA) (Na -EDTA) Solution by using Eriochrome black T indicator.
Week 11
Class 11 Practice lab
Week 12
Class 12 Lab test
Week 13
Class 13 Quiz test
Week 14
Class 14 Viva

Continuous Class
10% CO1, CO2,CO3 C1, C2
Assessment performance
(40%) Report writing 30% CO4 C3
CO1 C1, C2
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Practical Chemistry-A Jabbar & M Haque
2. Quantitative Chemical Analysis-A I Vogel
3. Analytical Chemistry-Gary D. Christian
339
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: PHY 101 Credit Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Wave Oscillation, Geometrical Optics and Modern Physics Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
To learn the basic concepts of Waves and Oscillations, Optics and Modern physics
OBJECTIVES
1. To define the different parameter and concepts of Waves and Oscillations, Optics and Modern
physics.
2. To explain the basic concepts of Waves and Oscillations, Optics and Modern physics.
3. To solve analytical problems regarding Waves and Oscillations, Optics and Modern physics

1. Define the different parameters such as periodic motion, simple harmonic motion, undamped
oscillations, interference, diffraction, polarization and prism, photoelectric effect, Compton
effect, matter wave, atomic model, radioactive decay, fusion, fission etc.
2. Explain the wave motion for different systems along with energy, the techniques to derive
different formula for interference, diffraction, polarization and prism, different theory
regarding modern physics such as special theory of relativity, Compton theory, materials
according to magnetic properties, nuclear transformation, and nuclear reaction etc.
3. Solve quantitative problems in the field of Waves and Oscillations, Optics and Modern physics
such as energy of wave motion, wavelength, diffraction pattern, relativistic energy, photon
energy, Compton shift, nuclear binding energy etc.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Waves and Oscillations

Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM) and its properties, Differential equation of a SHM and its
solution, total energy of a body executing SHM, average kinetic and potential energy of a
body executing SHM, LC oscillatory circuit, Pendulum: simple, compound and torsional
pendulum, spring-mass system, two body oscillation and reduced mass, damped harmonic
motion and its different condition, forced oscillation and its different condition, resonance,
equation of a progressive wave, differential equation of a progressive wave, energy density of
wave motion, average kinetic and potential energy of a body executing SHM, Stationary wave
340
2. Optics
Lens, equivalent lens and power, defects of images and different aberrations, Interference of
light, Young‟s double slit experiment, Interference in thin film and Newton's ring method,
diffraction of light, diffraction by single slit, diffraction by double slits, Fraunhofer and
Fresnel bi-prism, diffraction gratings, polarization of light, Brewster‟s law, Malus law,
polarization by double refraction Nicole prism, optical activity and polarimeters, optical
instruments, resolving power of optical instrument, Laser: spontaneous and stimulated
emission
3. Modern Physics
Galilean relativity & Reference frame, Special theory of relativity postulates, Galilean
transformation, Lorentz Transformation, Length contraction, Time dilation, Velocity addition,
relativity of mass, mass energy relation, Momentum energy relation, Photoelectric effect,
Compton effect, de Broglie matter wave, Bohr atom model and explanation, atomic orbital
and energy equation, classification of nucleus, nuclear binding energy, radioactivity,
radioactive decay law, half-life, mean life, nuclear reaction, introduction to nuclear reactor

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Define the different parameters such as
periodic motion, simple harmonic motion,
undamped oscillations, interference,
CO1 diffraction, polarization and prism, √
photoelectric effect, Compton effect, matter
wave, atomic model, radioactive decay, fusion,
fission etc.
Explain the wave motion for different systems
along with energy, the techniques to derive
different formula for interference, diffraction,
polarization and prism, different theories
CO2 √
regarding modern physics such as special
theory of relativity, Compton theory, materials
according to magnetic properties, nuclear
transformation and nuclear reaction etc.
Solve quantitative problems in the field of √
Waves and Oscillations, Optics and Modern
physics such as energy of wave motion,
CO3
wavelength, diffraction pattern, relativistic
energy, photon energy, Compton shift, nuclear
binding energy etc.
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Define the different parameters such as C1-C2 1 3 CT, F,
341
periodic motion, simple harmonic motion, ASG
undamped oscillations, interference,
diffraction, polarization and prism,
photoelectric effect, Compton effect,
matter wave, atomic model, radioactive
decay, fusion, fission etc.
Explain the wave motion for different
systems along with energy, the techniques
to derive different formula for
interference, diffraction, polarization and
CO2 prism, different theories regarding modern C3 1 3 CT, MT, F
physics such as special theory of relativity,
Compton theory, materials according to
magnetic properties, nuclear
transformation and nuclear reaction etc.
Solve quantitative problems in the field of
Waves and Oscillations, Optics and
Modern physics such as energy of wave
CO3 C3 1 3 MT, F, ASG
motion, wavelength, diffraction pattern,
relativistic energy, photon energy,
Compton shift, nuclear binding energy etc.
Exam)
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
342
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1
Class 1 Introductory class: Brief discussion on total syllabus, basic
requirements of the course, assessment of the course
Class 2 Simple harmonic motion (SHM) and its differential equations,
graphical representation of SHM
Class 3 Average K.E and total energy
Week 2 CT 1,
Class 4 Spring-mass system , electric oscillatory circuit Final Exam
Class 5 Simple, compound and torsional pendulum
Class 6 Combination of two SHM
Week 3
Class 7 Combination of two SHM
Class 8 Two body oscillations, reduced mass
Class 9 Damped oscillations and its differential equation
Week 4
Class 10 Displacement equation of damped oscillation, electric damped
oscillatory circuit
Class 11 Forced oscillation and its differential equation
Class 12 Displacement equation of forced oscillation, resonance CT 2,
Week 5 Final Exam
Class 13 Plane progressive wave, energy density of wave
Class 14 Stationary wave
Class 15 Lens and combination of lenses, power of lens
Week 6
Class 16 Defects of images and different aberrations
Class 17 Defects of images and different aberrations
Class 18 Interference of light, young‟s double slit experiment
Week 7
Class 19 Interference in Thin films, Newton‟s ring
Class 20 Diffraction : Fresnel & Fraunhofer diffraction
Class 21 Diffraction by single slit Mid Term,
Week 8 Final Exam
Class 22 Diffraction by double slit, Diffraction gratings
Class 23 Polarization and Production and analysis of polarized light
Class 24 Optics of crystals, Nicole prism
Week 9
Class 25 Brewster's and Malus law
Class 26 Optical activity and polarimeter
Class 27 Laser & its applications
Week 10
Class 28 Theory of relativity: Frame of Reference, Postulates of special
relativity, Galilean Transformation
Class 29 Theory of relativity: Lorentz Transformations, Length Contraction and
Time dilation
Class 30 Velocity addition, Relativistic mass: Concept of relativistic mass and Mid Term,
its expression Final Exam
Week 11
Class 31 Theory of relativity: Mass and Energy equivalence equation and
concept of Massless particle and its expression. Related numerical
problems
343
Class 32 Photoelectric Effect, photocurrent and work function, kinetic energy,
stopping potential
Class 33 photoelectric equation, characteristics of photoelectric effect
Week 12
Class 34 Compton effect: Definition, Compton wavelength shift, limitation
Class 35 De Broglie Concept, Condition for wave and particle behavior, Bohr
atomic model
Class 36 Expression for Bohr radii and orbital energy for hydrogen atom
Week13
Class 37 Classification of Nucleus, nuclear binding energy
Class 38 Radioactivity and its transformation, Radioactive Decay Law
Class 39 Half- life, Mean life, nuclear reaction CT 3,
Week 14 Final Exam
Class 40 Concept of Fusion, Fission and nuclear chain reaction
Class 41 General idea on nuclear reactor and nuclear power plant
Class 42 Follow up of the course

20%
Assessment Class
5% CO3 C3
(40%) Participation
CO1 C1, C2
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Physics : Halliday, Resnick and Walker
2. Physics for Scientists and Engineers: Serway and Jewett
3. Concept of Modern Physics: Arthur Beiser
4. University Physics with Modern Physics: Hugh D. Young and Roger A. Freedman
5. Modern Physics for Science and Engineering: Marshall L. Burns
6. Waves and Oscillations: Walter Fox Smith
7. The Physics of Vibrations and Waves: H. J. Pain
8. Waves and Oscillations : BrijLal and Subramannyam
9. Fundamental of Optics: Francis A. Jenkins and Harvey E.White
10. Introduction to Modern Optics: Grant R. Fowles
11. Fundamental Optical Design: Michael J. Kidger
344
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Physics Lab Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
To learn the basic concepts of Waves and Oscillations, Optics and Modern physics
OBJECTIVES
To develop basic engineering knowledge practically.

1. Define the different parameters regarding waves and oscillations, optics, mechanics, electricity,
modern physics and thermal physics etc.
2. Describe different phenomena regarding waves and oscillations, optics, mechanics, electricity,
3. Construct experiments by an individual or by a group to determine different phenomena
regarding waves and oscillations, optics, mechanics, electricity, modern physics and thermal
physics etc.
4. Prepare a report for an experimental work.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Determination of specific resistance of materials of a wire by using Meter Bridge,

2. Determination of a high resistance by the method of deflection,
3. Determination of ECE of copper by using copper voltameter,
4. Determination of the wavelength of light by using diffraction grating,
5. Determination of the focal length of a plano-convex lens by Newton‟s ring method,
6. Determination of the specific rotation of sugar by poralimeter
7. Determination of the conductivity of a bad conductor by Lee‟s method,
8. Determination of the acceleration due to gravity by means of compound pendulum,
9. Determination of the spring constant and the rigidity modulus of a spiral spring,
10. Verification of the law of conservation of linear momentum,
11. Determination of the Young‟s modulus of bar by bending method,
12. Determination of the Planck‟s constant using photoelectric effect,
13. Determination of focal length of a concave lens by auxiliary lens method,
14. Determination of specific heat of a liquid by the method of cooling
345
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Define the different parameters regarding
waves and oscillations, optics, mechanics,
CO1 √
electricity, modern physics and thermal
physics etc.
Describe different phenomena regarding
waves and oscillations, optics, mechanics,
CO2 √
electricity, modern physics and thermal
physics etc.
Construct experiments by an individual or √
by a group to determine different
CO3 phenomena regarding waves and
oscillations, optics, mechanics, electricity,
Prepare a report for an experimental √
CO 4
work.
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Define the different parameters Class
regarding waves and oscillations, Performance,
optics, mechanics, electricity, modern C1-C2 1 3 Experimental
physics and thermal physics etc. Exam, Viva,
Quiz
CO2 Describe different phenomena Class
regarding waves and oscillations, Performance,
C3 1 3
optics, mechanics, electricity, modern Experimental
physics and thermal physics etc. Exam, Viva
CO3 Construct experiments by an
individual or by a group to determine Class
different phenomena regarding waves Performance,
C3 1 3
and oscillations, optics, mechanics, Experimental
electricity, modern physics and Exam
thermal physics etc.
CO4 Prepare a report for an experimental Report
C4
work. Writing
346
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 12
Experiment 30
Formal Assessment
Final Quiz 1
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Contents
Week 1
Class 1 Introductory class: Brief discussion on total syllabus, basic requirements of the
course, evaluation system of the course, grouping, visit different section of the
laboratory, introduction to different basic equipment‟s
Week 2
Class 2 Determination of specific resistance of materials of a wire by using Meter Bridge /
Determination of focal length of a concave lens by auxiliary lens method.
Week 3
Class 3 Determination of a high resistance by the method of deflection/ Determination of
specific heat of a liquid by the method of cooling
Week 4
Class 4 Determination of ECE of copper by using copper voltameter / Determination
of the Young‟s modulus of bar by bending method
Week 5
Class 5 Determination of the wavelength of light by using diffraction grating
Week 6
Class 6 Determination of the focal length of a plano-convex lens by Newton‟s ring method
Week 7
Class 7 Determination of the specific rotation of sugar by poralimeter
Week 8
Class 8 Determination of the conductivity of a bad conductor by Lee‟s method /
Verification of the law of conservation of linear momentum
Week 9
Class 9 Determination of the acceleration due to gravity by means of compound pendulum
Week 10
Class 10 Determination of the spring constant and the rigidity modulus of a spiral spring
Week 11
Class 11 Determination of the Planck‟s constant using photoelectric effect
347
Week 12
Class 12 Viva & experimental exam
Continuous Class
10% CO1, CO2,CO3 C1, C2
Assessment performance
(40%) Report writing 30% CO4 C3
CO1 C1, C2
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Practical Physics: G. L. Squires
2. Practical Physics: Dr Giasuddin and Md. Sahabuddin.
3. B.Sc. Practical Physics: C. L Arora
4. Practical Physics: S.L. Gupta and V. Kumar
348
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Structure of Matter, Electricity and Magnetism Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course is one of the basic physics in the field of Solid State Physics and Electricity &
Magnetism. The course will be emphasized the basic concepts, theories and solve quantitative
problems which can be applicable in a wide spectrum of engineering disciplines.
OBJECTIVES
1. To define the different parameters and concepts of Structure of Matter and Electricity &
Magnetism.
2. To explain the basic theories of Structure of Matter and Electricity & Magnetism.
3. To solve numerical problems regarding Structure of Matter and Electricity & Magnetism.

1. Define different basic parameters and laws in the field of Structure of Matter and Electricity &
Magnetism such as lattice, crystal structure, bonds in solids, non-crystalline solids, alloys,
Bragg‟s law, Coulomb‟s law, Gauss‟ law, dielectrics, capacitance, resistance etc.
2. Explain different basic theories in the field of Structure of Matter and Electricity & Magnetism
such as band theory of solids, Inter atomic distances and forces of equilibrium, resistivity-an
atomic view, atomic view of dielectrics, magnetization curves etc.
3. Solve quantitative problems in the field of Structure of Matter and Electricity & Magnetism
such as energy of packing factor in solids; inter atomic distances, Calculation of electric
potential, capacitance for different capacitors, energy store in a capacitor, inductance of
solenoid etc.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Structure of Matter:
a. States of matter: solid, liquid, and gas
b. Classification of solids: amorphous, crystalline, ceramic and polymers
c. Atomic arrangement in solid & Crystal systems, lattice parameters, different crystal structure,
packing factor in solids, Miller indices,
d. Zinc blend structure, diamond structure
e. Allotropy and polymorphism
349
f. Bragg‟s law, X-ray diffraction
g. different types of bonds in solids, Inter atomic distances and forces of equilibrium
h. Defects in solids, band theory of solids,
i. Distinction between metal, insulator and semiconductor
j. Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor, plasmons, polariotons, polarons, exitons, phonons, non-
crystalline solids, alloys
k. Extensive and Intensive properties of matter, some techniques for materials characterization.
2. Electricity & Magnetism:

a. Electric charges and Coulomb‟s law, quantization of charge, electric field, electric field due to
point charge, dipole, charged rod and charged ring
b. electric flux and calculation of flux, Gauss‟ law, application of Gauss‟ law for point charge
and infinite charged rod
c. electric potential energy and electric potential, Calculation of electric potential due to point
charge, dipole, charged rod, charged ring and charged disc, capacitors, capacitance for
different capacitors, energy store in a capacitor, dielectrics and atomic view of dielectrics and
Gauss‟ law with dielectrics
d. Current density, drift speed, resistances, ohm‟s law and resistivity-an atomic view, Ampere‟s
law, solenoid, toroid.
e. Faraday‟s law, self-inductance and mutual inductance, inductance of solenoid, magnetic field
intensity, permeability, susceptibility
f. Magnetization, classification of magnetic materials, magnetization curves, M-H hysteresis
loop, soft and hard magnetic materials, Super paramagentism, Maxwell equations.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Define different basic parameters and laws in
the field of Structure of Matter and Electricity
& Magnetism such as lattice, crystal structure,
CO1 √
bonds in solids, non-crystalline solids, alloys,
Bragg‟s law, Coulomb‟s law, Gauss‟ law,
dielectrics, capacitance, resistance etc.
Explain different basic theories in the field of
Structure of Matter and Electricity &
Magnetism such as band theory of solids,
CO2 √
Inter atomic distances and forces of
equilibrium, resistivity-an atomic view, atomic
view of dielectrics, magnetization curves etc.
Solve quantitative problems in the field of √
Structure of Matter and Electricity &
Magnetism such as energy of packing factor
CO3 in solids, Inter atomic distances, Calculation
of electric potential, capacitance for different
capacitors, energy store in a capacitor,
inductance of solenoid etc.
350
Taxonomy Methods
Define different basic parameters and
laws in the field of Structure of Matter
and Electricity & Magnetism such as
CO1 lattice, crystal structure, bonds in solids, C1 - - 1 CT, F, MT
non-crystalline solids, alloys, Bragg‟s
law, Coulomb‟s law, Gauss‟ law,
dielectrics, capacitance, resistance etc.
Explain different basic theories in the
field of Structure of Matter and
Electricity & Magnetism such as band
CO2 theory of solids, Inter atomic distances C1 - - 1 F, MT
and forces of equilibrium, resistivity-an
atomic view, atomic view of dielectrics,
magnetization curves etc.
Solve quantitative problems in the field
of Structure of Matter and Electricity &
Magnetism such as energy of packing
factor in solids, Inter atomic distances, CT, F, MT,
CO3 C2 - - 2
Calculation of electric potential, ASG
capacitance for different capacitors,
energy store in a capacitor, inductance
of solenoid etc.
Exam)
CO1-PO1 The conceptual knowledge of the natural sciences applicable to the engineering
discipline
CO2-PO1 The theory-based knowledge of the natural sciences applicable to the engineering
discipline
CO3-PO1 The numerical analysis based knowledge of the natural sciences applicable to the
engineering
Teaching and Learning Activities Engagement
351
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1
Class 1 Introduction of course and elementary discussion
Class 2 States of matter: solid, liquid, and gas, classification of solids: amorphous,
crystalline, ceramic and polymers
Class 3 atomic arrangement in solid & Crystal systems
Week 2
Class 4 atomic arrangement in solid & Crystal systems CT 1,
Class 5 lattice parameters, different crystal structure Final Exam
Class 6 packing factor in solids
Week 3
Class 7 packing factor in solids
Class 8 Miller indices
Class 9 Zinc blend structure, diamond structure, allotropy and polymorphism,
Week 4
Class 10 Bragg‟s law, X-ray diffraction
Class 11 different types of bonds in solids
Class 12 different types of bonds in solids
Week 5 CT 2,
Class 13 Inter atomic distances and forces of equilibrium Final Exam
Class 14 Defects in solids
Class 15 Defects in solids
Week 6
Class 16 Band theory of solids, Distinction between metal, insulator and
semiconductor
Class 17 Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor
Class 18 Plasmons, polariotons, polarons, exitons, phonons
Week 7
Class 19 Non-crystalline solids, alloys
Class 20 Extensive and Intensive properties of matter, some techniques for
materials characterization Mid Term,
Class 21 Some techniques for materials characterization Final Exam
Week 8
Class 22 Electric charges and Coulomb‟s law, quantization of charge
Class 23 Electric field, electric field due to point charge
352
Class 24 Electric field due to dipole, charged rod and charged ring
Week 9
Class 25 Electric flux and calculation of flux
Class 26 Gauss‟ law, Gauss‟ law and Coulomb‟s law for a point charge
Class 27 Application of Gauss‟ law for infinite charged rod
Week 10
Class 28 electric potential energy and electric potential, Calculation of electric
potential from field and vice versa
Class 29 Calculation of electric potential due to point charge, dipole
Class 30 Calculation of electric potential due to charged rod, charged ring and
charged disc Mid Term,
Week 11 Final Exam
Class 31 capacitors, capacitance for different capacitors
Class 32 energy store in a capacitor, dielectrics and atomic view of dielectrics and
Gauss‟ law with dielectrics
Class 33 Current density, drift speed, resistances
Week 12
Class 34 ohm‟s law and resistivity-an atomic view, Biot-Severt law
Class 35 Ampere‟s law, solenoid, toroid
Class 36 Faraday‟s law, self-inductance and mutual inductance, inductance of
solenoid
Week13
Class 37 magnetic field intensity, permeability, susceptibility, magnetization
Class 38 classification of magnetic materials
Class 39 magnetization curves, susceptibility curves CT 3,
Week 14 Final Exam
Class 40 M-H hysteresis loop, soft and hard magnetic materials
Class 41 Superparamagentism, Maxwell equations

Class Test/
20% CO1, CO3 C1, C2
Assessment Class
5% CO1, CO2 C1, C2
(40%) Participation
Mid term 15% CO1,CO2, CO3 C1, C2
Final Exam 60% CO1,CO2, CO3 CO1, CO2, CO3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Physics : Halliday, Resnick and Walker
2. Physics for Scientists and Engineers: Serway and Jewett
3. University Physics with Modern Physics: Hugh D. Young and Roger A. Freedman
4. Introduction to Solid State Physics: Charles Kittle
5. Solid State Physics: S. O. Pillai
6. Solid State Physics: Ali Omar
353
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: MATH 101 Credit Hours: 3.00
Course Title: Differential and Integral Calculus Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Purpose of this course is to introduce basic knowledge of Differential and Integral Calculus and use it
to engineering study.
OBJECTIVES
1. To impart basic knowledge on differential and integral Calculus to solve engineering problems
and other applied problems.
2. Developing understanding some of the important aspects of rate of change, area, tangent,
normal and volume.
3. To make proficient in imparting in depth knowledge of functional analysis such as increasing,
decreasing, maximum and minimum values of a function

1. Compute different engineering calculations based on differential and integral calculus.
2. Comprehend basic ideas of rate of change, area, tangent, normal and volume.
3. Prepare necessary calculations based on differential and integral calculus.
4. Perform functional analysis calculations such as increasing, decreasing, maximum and
minimum values of a function.
COURSE CONTENTS
a. Differential Calculus: Introduction, Differential Calculus for Engineering, Function and

Limit, Continuity and Differentiability, Successive Differentiation, Leibnittz's Theorem, Rolle's
Theorem, Mean Value Theorem, Taylor's theorem, Expansion of Finite and Infinite forms,
Lagrange's form of remainder, Cauchy's form of remainder, Expansion of functions
differentiation and integration, Indeterminate form, Cartesian differentiation, Euler's theorem,
Tangent, sub tangent and Normal, sub normal, Maxima and Minima, Curvature, Asymptotes,
Partial differentiation.
b. Integral Calculus: Definition of Integration, Importance of Integration in Eng., Integration by
substitution, Integration by parts, Standard integrals, Integration by successive reduction,
Definite integrals and its use, Integration as a limit of sum, summing series, Walli's formula,
Improper Integrals, beta and gamma function, multiple integral and its application, Area,
volume of solid revolution, Area under a plain curve, Area of the region enclosed by two
354
curves, Arc lengths of curves.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Define the limit, continuity and
differentiability of functions, identify the rate
of change of a function with respect to
CO1 √
independent variables and describe the
different techniques of evaluating indefinite
and definite integrals
Apply the concepts or techniques of
CO2 differentiation and integration to solve the √
problems related to engineering study.
Calculate the length, area, volume, center of
CO3 gravity and average value related to √
engineering study

Taxonomy Methods
CO1 Define the limit, continuity and C1-C2 1 3 CT, F,
differentiability of functions, identify ASG
the rate of change of a function with
respect to independent variables and
describe the different techniques of
evaluating indefinite and definite
integrals.
CO2 Apply the concepts or techniques of C3 1 3 CT, MT, F
differentiation and integration to solve
the problems related to engineering
study.
CO3 Calculate the length, area, volume, C3 1 3 MT, F, ASG
center of gravity and average value
related to engineering study
Exam)
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering sciences has to be applied
to describe the complete concept of differential and integral calculus.
355
CO2-PO1 To apply proper and improper integral in the field of engineering study, the
knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering sciences is required.
CO3-PO1 In order to calculate volume, average, center of gravity and area of any solid
revolution object, the knowledge of mathematics and engineering sciences is needed.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1
Class 1 Introduction to Differential Calculus for Engineering study, Limit of a
function and its properties.
Class 2 Basic limit theorems with proofs, Limit of infinity and infinite limit,
Sandwich (Squeezing) theorem with problems.
Class 3 Concept of Differentiation, definition, classification of discontinuity and
solving problems CT 1,
Week 2 Final Exam
Class 4 Basic concept of Differentiability, definition, derivative of a function,
differentiable function.
Class 5 Differentiability – one sided derivatives (R.H.D and L.H.D), solving
problems
Class 6 Successive differentiation – Concept and problem solving
Week 3
Class 7 Leibnitz‟s theorem and its applications
Class 8 Determination of
Class 9 Mean Value theorem, Taylor theorem
Week 4
356
Class 10 Expansion of finite and infinite forms, Lagrange‟s and Cauchy‟s form of
remainder.
Class 11 Indeterminate forms – concept and problem solving
Class 12 L‟Hospital‟s rules with application CT 2,
Week 5 Final Exam
Class 13 Partial differentiation - partial derivatives of a function of two variables
and problems
Class 14 Partial differentiation - partial derivatives of a homogeneous function of

two variables, Euler‟s theorem for two variables and problems
Class 15 Partial differentiation - partial derivatives of a homogeneous function of
several variables, Euler‟s theorem for several (three and m) variables and
problem solving
Week 6
Class 16 Tangents and Normals – Tangents and Normals in Cartesian, equation of
tangent at the origin, equation of normal of functions of explicit and
implicit forms, Angle between two intersection of two curves; problem
solving
Class 17 Tangents and Normals – Tangents and Normals in polar, Angle between
two intersection of two curves; problem solving
Class 18 Tangents and Normals – Subtangent and subnormals in Cartesian and
polar coordinate; problem solving.
Week 7
Class 19 maxima and minima of functions of single variables – concept, Increasing
and decreasing function, Concave up and down with problems
Class 20 Curvature Mid Term,
Class 21 Asymptotes Final Exam
Week 8
Class 22 Introduction to integral calculus
Class 23 Standard integrals – concept of definite and indefinite integrals,
applications.
Class 24 Indefinite integrals – Method of substitution, Techniques of integration
Week 9
Class 25 Indefinite integrals – Integration by parts, Special types of integration,
integration by partial fraction
Class 26 Integration by the method of successive reduction

Class 27 Definite integrals – definite integrals with properties and problems
Week 10
Class 28 Definite integrals – Reduction formula, Walli‟s formula
Class 29 Definite integrals – definite integral as the limit of the sum
Class 30 Beta function – concept and problem solving
Week 11
Class 31 Gamma function - concept and problem solving Mid Term,
Class 32 Relation between beta and gamma function, Legendre duplication Final Exam
formula, problems and applications
Class 33 Multiple integrals – double integrals
357
Week 12
Class 34 Multiple integrals – triple integrals
Class 35 Multiple integrals – successive integration for two and three variables
Class 36 Area in Cartesian
Week13
Class 37 Area in polar
Class 38 Volume of solid revolution
Class 39 Area under a plain curve in Cartesian and polar coordinates CT 3,
Week 14 Final Exam
Class 40 Area of a region enclosed by two curves in Cartesian and polar
coordinates
Class 41 Arc lengths of curves in Cartesian coordinates
Class 42 Arc lengths of curves in polar coordinates

20%
Assessment Class
5% CO3 C3
(40%) Participation
CO1 C1, C2
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Calculus (9th Edition) by Howard Anton (Author), Irl C. Bivens (Author),

Stephen Davis.
2. Calculus: An Intuitive and Physical Approach by Morris Kline.
358
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Ordinary and Partial Differential Equations & Matrix Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Purpose of this course is to introduce basic knowledge of ordinary and partial differential equations
and use it to engineering study.
OBJECTIVES
1. To impart basic knowledge on ordinary and partial differential equations to solve engineering
problems and other applied problems.
2. To develop understanding of some of the important aspects of ordinary and partial differential
equations.
3. To provide knowledge on using concept of differential equations in engineering problems and
solve other applied problems.

1. Compute different engineering calculations based on differential equations.
2. Comprehend basic ideas of differential equations and related theories.
3. Prepare necessary calculations based on ordinary and partial differential equations.
4. Perform differential equations calculations based on heat flow, fluid flow, temperature
distribution etc.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Differential Equations: Introduction & Formulation of DE in Eng, Degree and order of ODE,
solution of first order but higher degree DE by various methods, solution of general DEs of
second and higher order, Solution of Euler's homogeneous linear DEs, Solution of DEs by
methods based on factorization, Frobenious methods, Bessel's functions, Legendre's
polynomial, linear first order PDE, Non-linear first order PDE, Standard form DEs of higher
order and wave equation, particular solutions with boundary and initial condition, Non-linear
PDE of order one, Charpit's method, Linear PDE with constant coefficients, Applications of
DE.
2. Matrix: Definition of matrix, different types of matrices, algebra of matrices, transpose and
adjoint of a matrix and inverse matrix, rank and elementary transformation, solution of linear
equation or system of linear equation, matrix polynomials determination characteristic roots and
vectors, characteristic subspace of matrix and Eigen values and Eigen vectors, Cayley Hamilton
theorem.
359

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Define various types of differential equations,
CO1 and identify the classifications of ordinary and √
partial differential equations.
Apply the knowledge to identify and solve
CO2 ordinary and partial differential equations. √
Apply the techniques to obtain solutions for √

CO3 problems based on heat flow, fluid flow,
temperature distribution etc.
Taxonomy Methods
Define various types of differential
equations, and identify the T, F,
CO1 C1, C2 1 3
classifications of ordinary and partial ASG
differential equations.
Apply the knowledge to identify and
CO2 solve ordinary and partial differential C3 1 3 T, MT, F
equations.
Apply the technique to obtain the
CO3 inverse matrix that solve the system of C3 1 3 MT, F, ASG
linear equations
Exam)
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering sciences has to be applied
to describe for the physical explanation of differential equations.
CO2-PO1 The application of differential equations need the knowledge of mathematics,
science and engineering for describing exponential growth and decay, the
population growth of species or change in investment return over time.
CO3-PO1 The solution of different real world phenomena like heat flow, fluid flow,
temperature distribution, loading calculations etc require the concept of ordinary and
partial differential equations.
360
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1
Class 1 Introduction & Formulation of DE in Eng, Degree and order of ODE
Week 2
Class 4 Solution of first order but higher degree DE by various methods
Class 5 Solution of first order but higher degree DE by various methods CT 1,
Class 6 Solution of first order but higher degree DE by various methods Final Exam
Week 3
Class 7 Solution of general DEs of second and higher order, Solution of Euler's
homogeneous linear DEs
Week 4
Class 10 Solution of DEs by methods based on factorization, Frobenious
methods, Bessel's functions, Legendre's polynomial
Class 11 Solution of DEs by methods based on factorization, Frobenious
methods, Bessel's functions, Legendre's polynomial CT 2,
Class 12 Solution of DEs by methods based on factorization, Frobenious Final Exam
methods, Bessel's functions, Legendre's polynomial
Week 5
Class 13 Linear first order PDE, Non linear first order PDE
Class 14 Standard form DEs of higher order and wave equation
361
Class 15 Standard form DEs of higher order and wave equation
Week 6
Class 16 Particular solutions with boundary and initial condition, Non-linear
PDE of order one: Charpit's method
Week 7
Class 19 Linear PDE with constant coefficients, Applications of DE
Class 20 Linear PDE with constant coefficients, Applications of DE
Class 21 Linear PDE with constant coefficients, Applications of DE Mid Term,
Week 8 Final Exam
Class 22 Wave equations
Class 23 Particular solutions with boundary and initial conditions
Class 24 Particular solutions with boundary and initial conditions
Week 9
Class 25 Second order PDE and classifications to canonical (standard)-
parabolic, elliptic, hyperbolic solution by separation of variables
Week 10
Class 28 Application of OD and PDE in Eng study
Class 29 Solving nonhomogeneous PDEs
Class 30 Boundary conditions associated with the wave equation
Week 11 Mid Term,
Class 31 The finite vibrating string (Standing waves) Final Exam
Class 32 The vibrating beam (Fourth order PDE)
Class 33 First order equations (Method of characteristics)
Week 12
Class 34 Systems of PDEs
Class 35 General nature of boundary value problems
Class 36 The Dirichlet problem for a circle and annulus
Week13
Class 37 Explicit finite difference method
Class 38 Monte Carlo methods
Class 39 Monte Carlo Solutions of PDEs CT 3,
Week 14 Final Exam
Class 40 Calculus of variations (Euler-Lagrange equations)
Class 41 Duhamel‟s Principle
Class 42 Revision
362
20%
Assessment Class
5% CO3 C3
(40%) Participation
CO1 C1, C2
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. An Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations (Author: Earl A. Coddington)

2. A Textbook on Ordinary Differential Equations (Author: Antonio Ambrosetti, Shair Ahmad)
3. Partial Differential Equations for Scientists and Engineers (Author: Stanley J. Farlow)
4. Ordinary and Partial Differential Equations By Dr. M.D. Raisinghania , S. Chand Publishing
363
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Vector Analysis, Laplace Transform & Co-ordinate Geometry Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
Purpose of this course is to introduce basic knowledge to identify and solve vector mathematical
problems, to demonstrate practical applications of Laplace Transform and analyze co-ordinate
geometry.
OBJECTIVES
1. To impart basic knowledge on the vector analysis, laplace transform and geometry.
2. To familiarize the students with straight lines, pair of straight lines, circles, conics in 2D and 3D
co-ordinate systems.
3. To enable to find the length, volume and area of objects related to engineering study by using
vector, application of Laplace transform to ordinary differential equations and also solve the
problems of the pair of straight lines, circles, system of circles, parabola, ellipse etc.

1. Compute different engineering calculations based on Laplace transform, Vector analysis and
Co-ordinate geometry.
2. Comprehend basic ideas of vector analysis, laplace transform and co-ordinate geometry.
3. Prepare necessary calculations based on vector analysis, laplace transform and co-ordinate
geometry.
4. Perform real case studies calculations based on vector analysis, laplace transform and co-
ordinate geometry.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Vector Analysis: Definition of Vector and scalers & vector algebra, Scaler and vector products
of two vectors and their geometrical interpretation, Triple products and multiple products,
Linear dependence and independence of vectors, Differentiation of vectors, Gradient of scaler
functions, Divergence and curl of point functions, physical significance of gradient, divergence
and curl, Definition of line, surface and volume integral, Integration of Vectors, Green's
theorem and its application, Stoke's theorem and its application, Gauss theorem and its
application in Engineering.
2. Laplace Transform: Definition of LT and Application of LT for Engineering , LT of some
364
elementary functions and properties of LT, Sufficient condition for existence of LT, Inverse LT,
LT of derivatives, Unit step function, Periodic function, Some special theorems on LT, Partial
fraction, Solution of DEs by LT, Heaviside expansion formula, Convolution theorem,
Evaluation of improper integral, Application of LT.
3. Co-ordinate Geometry: Introduction to geometry for Engineering and Rectangular co-

ordinates, Transformation of co-ordinates, changes of axes, pair of straight lines, general
equation of second degree and reduction to its standard forms and properties, circles
(tangents, normal, chord of contact, pole and polar), Equation of conics, homogeneous
equations of second degree, angle between straight lines, pair of lines joining the origin to the
point of intersection of two given curves, equations of parabola, ellipse in Cartesian and polar
coordinates, system of circles (radical axes, coaxial circles, limiting points), Three
dimensional co-ordinate system, direction cosines, projections, the plane (angle between two
planes, parallel & perpendicular plane, distance of a point from a plane) and the straight line
(coplanar lines, shortest distance between two given straight lines), standard equation of
sphere, ellipsoid, hyperboloid straight lines, standard equation of coincides, sphere and
ellipsoid.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Know the physical explanation of different
vector notation and Define Laplace transform,
CO1 √
inverse Laplace transform, different types of
matrices, and their properties.
Explain the characteristics of conics and
familiarize with straight lines, pair of straight
CO2 √
lines, circles, radical axis and center in 2D and
3D co-ordinate systems.
Calculate length, volume and area of objects
related to engineering study by using vector,
Apply Laplace transform to ODE and PDEs
CO3 and the knowledge of geometry in engineering √
study. Solve the problems of the pair of
straight lines, circles, system of circles,
parabola, ellipse etc.
Taxonomy Methods
Know the physical explanation of
different vector notation and Define
CT, F,
CO1 Laplace transform, inverse Laplace C1, C2 1 3
ASG
transform, different types of matrices,
and their properties.
365
Explain the characteristics of conics
and familiarize with straight lines, pair CT, Mid
CO2 of straight lines, circles, radical axis and C3 1 3 Term Exam,
center in 2D and 3D co-ordinate F
systems.
Calculate length, volume and area of
objects related to engineering study by
using vector, Apply Laplace transform
Mid Term
to ODE and PDEs and the knowledge of
CO3 C3 1 3 Exam, F,
geometry in engineering study. Solve
ASG
the problems of the pair of straight
lines, circles, system of circles,
parabola, ellipse etc.
Exam)
The knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering has to be applied to
describe the operation of being able to identify the physical explanation of
CO1-PO1
different vector notation, explain the complete concept about Laplace transform,
2D and 3D geometry.
To explain the differentiation and integration of a vector valued functions in
Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical geometry and to solve the problems of the pair
CO2-PO1
of straight lines, circles, system of circles, parabola, ellipse etc. the concept of
mathematics and engineering Is required.
In order to construct and calculate the area and volume of objects related to
CO3-PO1 engineering study by using vector, solve the differential equations by Laplace
transform is needed the concept of mathematics, physics and engineering.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
366
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1
Class 1 Definition of Vector and scalers & vector algebra, Scaler and vector
products of two vectors and their geometrical interpretation
products of two vectors and their geometrical interpretation
products of two vectors and their geometrical interpretation CT 1,
Week 2 Final Exam
Class 4 Triple products and multiple products, Linear dependence and
independence of vectors, Differentiation of vectors
Class 5 Gradient of scaler functions, Divergence and curl of point functions
Class 6 Physical significance of gradient, divergence and curl
Week 3
Class 7 Definition of line, surface and volume integral, Integration of Vectors,
Green's theorem and application
Class 8 Definition of line, surface and volume integral, Integration of Vectors,
Green's theorem and application
Class 9 Green‟s theorem and it‟s application
Week 4
Class 10 Gauss theorem and application in Engineering
Class 11 Stoke's theorem and it‟s application.
Class 12 Introduction to geometry for Engineering and Rectangular co-ordinates,
Transformation of co-ordinates CT 2,
Week 5 Final Exam
Class 13 Introduction to geometry for Engineering and Rectangular co-ordinates,
Transformation of co-ordinates, changes of axes, pair of straight lines,
general equation of second degree and reduction to its standard forms and
properties
Class 14 Changes of axes, pair of straight lines, general equation of second degree
and reduction to its standard forms and properties
Class 15 Changes of axes, pair of straight lines, general equation of second degree
and reduction to its standard forms and properties
Week 6
Class 16 Circles (tangents, normal, chord of contact, pole and polar), Equation of
conics, homogeneous equations of second degree, angle between straight
lines, pair of lines joining the origin to the point of intersection of two
given curves
367
given curves
given curves
Week 7
lines, pair of lines joining the origin to the point of intersection of two Mid Term,
given curves Final Exam
Class 20 Equations of parabola, ellipse in Cartesian and polar coordinates, system
of circles (radical axes, coaxial circles, limiting points
Week 8
Week 9
Class 25 Three dimensional co-ordinate system, direction cosines, projections, the
plane (angle between two planes, parallel & perpendicular plane, distance
of a point from a plane) and the straight line (coplanar lines, shortest
distance between two given straight lines), standard equation of sphere,
ellipsoid, hyperboloid
Week 10
Class 28 Three dimensional co-ordinate system, direction cosines, projections, the Mid Term,
plane (angle between two planes, parallel & perpendicular plane, distance Final Exam
Class 29 Definition of LT and Application of LT for Engineering, LT of some
368
elementary functions and properties of LT
Class 30 Definition of LT and Application of LT for Engineering, LT of some
elementary functions and properties of LT
Week 11
Class 31 Sufficient condition for existence of LT
Class 32 LT of derivatives and it‟s application
Class 33 LT of Integration with application, LT of sine and cosine integral
Week 12
Class 34 Unit step function and it‟s application
Class 35 Periodic function with examples, LT of some special function.
Class 36 Definition of inverse Laplace Transform and it‟s properties
Week 13
Class 37 Partial fraction and it‟s application in inverse Laplace Transform
Class 38 Heaviside formula and it‟s application
Class 39 Convolution theorem, Evaluation of improper integral, Application of LT CT 3,
Week 14 Final Exam
Class 40 Solve ODE s by Laplace transform
Class 41 Solve PDE s by Laplace transform
Class 42 Application of LT in Eng study

20%
Assessment Class
5% CO3 C3
(40%) Participation
CO1 C1, C2
CO3 C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Vector Analysis, 2nd Edition 2nd Edition by Murray Spiegel, Seymour Lipschutz, Dennis
Spellman
2. Schaum's Outline of Laplace Transforms by Murray R. Spiegel.
3. Engineering Mathematics, Volume Two 2 II: Containing Coordinate Geometry of Two
Dimensions, Co-ordinate Geometry of Three Dimensions, Matrices.
4. Theory of Equations and Vector Calculus by K. Kandasamy, P.; Thilagavathy, K.; Gunavathy
5. A Text Book on Co-ordinate Geometry with Vector Analysis - Rahman & Bhattacharjee.
369
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Title: Statistics, Complex Variable and Fourier Analysis Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
To teach the students the concepts, principles and working field of Complex Variable, Statistics and
Fourier analysis of different types of function. It is targeted to provide a basic foundation and
applications of Fourier series, Fourier Integrals, orthogonal functions, and collection of numerical data
systematically, complex analysis and observing data to give statistical assumption and probability.
Finally, this course is designed to demonstrate practical applications of Complex Variable, Fourier
analysis and Statistics and their methods of solution.
OBJECTIVE
1. To impart basic knowledge about Complex Variable, Statistics, Fourier analysis for different
types of functions.
2. To familiarize the students with the characteristics of Complex Variable, Fourier series, Fourier
Integrals and orthogonal functions.
3. To make proficient to familiarize with basic methods of statistics and their application.
4. To impart knowledge on Statistics, Complex Variable, Fourier analysis and thereby students
able to solve engineering problems and to give physical interpretation.
COURSE OUTCOME
1. Recall the basic idea about Complex Variable and Statistics.
2. Explain the complex functions by line integrals, Cauchy‟s integral formulae and Cauchy‟s
residue theorem.
3. Apply sampling theory and different tests in which giving concept about practical situation.
4. Solve complex engineering boundary value problems by Fourier analysis and probability
distribution in engineering fields.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Complex Variable: Complex number system, General functions of a complex variable,

Limits and continuity of a function of complex variable and related theorems, Differentiation
and the Cauchy-Riemann equations, Mapping by elementary functions, Line integral of a
complex function, Cauchy's Integral formula, Complex function, Convergence and Uniform
convergence, Liouville's theorem, Taylor's and Laurent‟s theorem, Singular residues,
370
Cauchy's residue theorem.
2. Fourier Analysis: Real and Complex form of Fourier Series, Definition and expansion of a
function of x in a Fourier Series, Physical application of Fourier Series, Finite Fourier
Transform, Fourier Integral Inverse Fourier transform, Fourier transform and their uses in
solving boundary value problems, Diffusion, wave, Laplace Equation.
3. Statistics: Measures of central tendency, Frequency distribution, Graphical representation of
data including stem, Leaf and Box Plot, Chebyshev‟s theorem, z-scores, standard deviation,
moments, skewness and kurtosis, elementary probability theory, discontinuous probability
distribution, Continuous probability distribution, Binomial, Multinomial, Negative binomial,
Poisson, Exponential, Elementary sampling theory, Estimation, Sets and probability, Random
variable and its probability distribution, Treatment of grouped sampled data, Normal
distribution, Tests of hypothesis, regression and correlation, Analysis of variance, Chi-square
distributions, Conditional probability, Bayes‟s Theorem.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Recall the basic idea about
CO1 √
Complex Variable and Statistics.
Explain the complex functions by
line integrals, Cauchy‟s integral
CO2 √
formulae and Cauchy‟s residue
theorem.
Apply sampling theory and
CO3 different tests in which giving √
concept about practical situation.
Solve complex engineering
boundary value problems by
CO4 √
Fourier Analysis and probability
distribution in engineering fields.
Bloom‟s Assessment
Taxonomy Methods
Recall the basic idea about Complex T, F
CO1 C1 1 1
Variable and Statistics.
Explain the complex functions by line T, MT, F
CO2 integrals, Cauchy‟s integral formulae and C2 1 2
Cauchy‟s residue theorem.
Apply sampling theory and different tests T, MT, F
CO3 in which giving concept about practical C3 1,3 2
situation.
Solve complex engineering boundary value ASG
CO4 problems by Fourier Analysis and C3 1 5
probability distribution in engineering
371
fields.

JUSTIFICATION FOR CO-PO MAPPING
CO1-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics has to be applied to Statistics and Complex
Variable in the field of engineering study.
CO2-PO1 In order to explain the characteristics of various components of NAME, the
knowledge of mathematics regarding Complex Variable is needed
CO3-PO1 In order to identify and describe statistical phenomena and probability
distribution, using the knowledge of mathematics and sciences is required.
CO4-PO1 The concept of Mathematics and sciences is required to calculate Fourier integral
for various types of function and analysis probability distribution in engineering
study.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 42
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 120
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week 1 COMPLEX VARIABLE

Class-1 Complex number system
Class-2 General functions of a complex variable
Class-3 Limits and continuity of a function of complex variable and related
theorems
372
Class-4 Differentiation and the Cauchy Riemann equations CT-1
Class-5 Mapping by elementary functions
Class-6 Line integral of a complex function
Class-7 Cauchy's Integral formula
Class-8 Complex function
Class-9 Convergence and Uniform convergence
Class-10 Liouville's theorem
Class-11 Taylor's and Laurents theorem
Class-12 Singular residues, Cauchy's residue theorem
Week 5 FOURIER ANALYSIS
Class-13 Real and Complex form of Fourier Series
Class-14 Definition and expansion of a function of x in a Fourier Series
Class-15 Physical application of Fourier Seires
Week 6 FOURIER ANALYSIS CT-2
Class-16 Finite Fourier Transform
Class-17 Infinite Fourier Transform
Class-18 Fourier Integral
Week 7 FOURIER ANALYSIS
Class-19 Inverse Fourier transform
Class-20 Fourier transform
Class-21 Solving boundary value problems, Diffusion, wave , Laplace
Equation.
Week 8 STATISTICS
Class-22 Measures of central tendency
Class-23 Frequency distribution, Graphical representation of data including
stem
Class-24 Leaf and Box Plot
Week 9 STATISTICS
Class-25 Chebyshev‟s theorem, z-scores
Class-26 Standard deviation, moments
Class-27 Skewness and kurtosis
Mid
Week 10 STATISTICS Term
Class-28 Elementary probability theory Exam
Class-29 Discontinuous probability distribution, Continuous probability
distribution
Class-30 Binomial, Multinomial distribution
Week 11 STATISTICS
Class-31 Negative binomial, Poisson, Exponential distribution
Class-32 Uniform, Gamma distribution
Class-33 Elementary sampling theory, Estimation
Week 12 STATISTICS
Class-34 Sets and probability, Random variable and its probability distribution
Class-35 Treatment of grouped sampled data
Class-36 Normal distribution
373
Week 13 STATISTICS
Class-37 Tests of hypothesis CT-4
Class-38 regression and correlation
Class-39 Analysis of variance
Week 14 STATISTICS
Class-40 Chi-square distributions
Class-41 Conditional probability, Bayes‟s Theorem
Class-42 Counting techniques

20%
Assessment Class
5% CO4 C3
(40%) Participation
Mid term 15% CO2, CO3 C2,C3
CO 1, CO 2 C1,C2
CO4 C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Complex Variables by - Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum‟s Outline Series.
2. Theory and functions of complex variables, Shanti Narayan.
3. Fourier series, Schaum‟s outlines series, Murray R. Spiegel.
4. Statistics and probability - Spiegel (Schaum Series).
5. Probability and it‟s Applications – H. C. Saxena.
374
COMMUNICATIVE LANGUAGE COURSES
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: LANG 102 Credit Hours: 1.50
Course Title: Communicative English I Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course has mainly been designed to improve speaking and oral communication skills of the
students. The course includes instructions and experience in speech preparation and speech delivery
within various real life situations, formal and informal. Emphasis will be given on various speeches,
such as informative, persuasive and interactive. This course will help students progress in real life
both personally and professionally. Students will be able to understand class lectures and can
comfortably continue the Engineering course, and also to compete in the global job market and
increase career skills.
OBJECTIVES
1. To develop the four basics skills of English language, i.e. listening, speaking, reading and
writing.
2. To develop students‟ interpersonal skills engaging them in various group interactions and
activities.
3. To improve students‟ pronunciation in order to improve their level of comprehensibility
in both speaking and listening.
4. To give the students exposure to different types of texts in English in order to make them
informed using different techniques of reading.
5. To gain an understanding of the underlying writing well-organized paragraphs and also to
teach how to edit and revise their own as well as peer‟s writing.

1. Listen, understand, and learn the techniques of note taking and answering questions
2. Understand and speak English quickly and smartly using the techniques learnt in the class.
3. Communicate effectively within the shortest possible time to present their ideas and
opinions.
4. Develop competency in oral, written communication/presentation
5. Understand the techniques of academic reading and summarizing any book article/literature
for review
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Speaking: Introduction to Language: Introducing basic skills of language, English for
375
Science and Technology, Self-introduction and introducing others: How a speaker should
introduce himself to any stranger / unknown person / a crowd, Name, family background,
education, experience, any special quality/interest, likings/disliking, etc. Asking and
answering questions, expressing likings and disliking; (food, fashion etc.) Asking and giving
directions, Discussing everyday routines and habits, Making requests /offers
/invitations/excuses /apologies/complaints, Describing personality, discussing and making
plans(for a holiday or an outing to the cinema), Describing pictures / any incident / event,
Practicing storytelling, Narrating personal experiences/Anecdotes, Telephone conversations
(role play in group or pair), Situational talks / dialogues: Practicing different professional
conversation (role play of doctor-patient conversation, teacher –student conversation)
2. Listening: Listening and understanding: Listening, note taking and answering questions;
Students will listen to recorded text, note down important information and later on will
answer to some questions, Difference between different accents: British and American
accents; Documentaries from BBC and CNN will be shown and students will try to
understand, Listening to short conversations between two persons/more than two.
3. Reading: Reading techniques: scanning, skimming, predicting, inference; Reading
Techniques: analysis, summarizing and interpretation of texts
4. Writing: Introductory discussion on writing, prewriting, drafting; Topic sentence, paragraph
development, paragraph structure, describing a person/scene/picture, narrating an event;
Paragraph writing, Compare-contrast and cause- effect paragraph

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Listen, understand and speak English
CO1 quickly and smartly using the techniques √
learnt in the class.
Understand the techniques of
CO2 academic reading and academic √
writing
Communicate effectively within the
CO3 Shortest possible time to present ideas and √
opinions.
Develop competency in oral, written
CO4 √
communication/presentation
Taxonomy Methods
Listen, understand and speak English C1, C2 ASG
CO1 quickly and smartly using the techniques
learnt in the class.
Understand the techniques of C2 ASG, Pr
CO2 academic reading and academic
writing
376
Communicate effectively within the C2 Pr
CO3 shortest possible time to present ideas and
opinions.
Develop competency in oral, written C3 Q, ASG, Pr
CO 4
Exam)
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 14
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 75
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Class Topic

Introduction to Language: Introducing basic skills of language.
Class 1
English for Science and Technology
Self-introduction and introducing others: How a speaker should
introduce himself to any stranger/ unknown person/ a crowd.
Class 2
Name, family background, education, experience, any special quality/
Week 1
interest, likings/ disliking etc.
Self-introduction and introducing others: How a speaker should
introduce himself to any stranger/ unknown person/ a crowd. Name,
Class 3
family background, education, experience, any special quality/
interest, likings/ disliking etc.
Asking and answering questions, Expressing likings and disliking;
Class 4
(food, fashion etc.) Asking and giving directions
Week 2 Class 5
Class 6
377
Discussing everyday routines and habits, Making requests /offers
Class 7
/invitations/excuses /apologies/complaints
Week 3 Class 8
Class 9
Describing personality, discussing and making plans(for a holiday or
Class 10
an outing to the cinema), Describing pictures / any incident / event
Week 4 Class 11
Class 12
Class 13 Practicing storytelling, Narrating personal experiences/Anecdotes
Week 5 Class 14 Practicing storytelling, Narrating personal experiences/Anecdotes
Class 15 Practicing storytelling, Narrating personal experiences/Anecdotes
Telephone conversations (role play in group or pair), Situational talks
Class 16 / dialogues: Practicing different professional conversation (role play of
doctor-patient conversation, teacher –student conversation)
Week 6 Class 17 / dialogues: Practicing different professional conversation (role play of
Class 18 / dialogues: Practicing different professional conversation (role play of
Listening and understanding: Listening, note taking and answering
questions;
Class 19
Students will listen to recorded text, note down important information
and later on will answer to some questions
questions;
Week 7 Class 20
questions;
Class 21
Difference between different accents: British and American accents;
Class 22 Documentaries from BBC and CNN will be shown and students will
try to understand
Week 8 Class 23 Documentaries from BBC and CNN will be shown and students will
try to understand
Class 24 Documentaries from BBC and CNN will be shown and students will
try to understand
Class 25 Listening to short conversations between two persons/more than two
Week 9 Class 26 Listening to short conversations between two persons/more than two
Class 27 Listening to short conversations between two persons/more than two
Class 28 Reading techniques: scanning, skimming, predicting, inference
Week 10 Class 29 Reading techniques: scanning, skimming, predicting, inference
Class 30 Reading techniques: scanning, skimming, predicting, inference
Class 31 Reading techniques: analysis, summarizing and interpretation of texts
Week 11 Class 32 Reading techniques: analysis, summarizing and interpretation of texts
Class 33 Reading techniques: analysis, summarizing and interpretation of texts
378
Class 34 Introductory discussion on writing, prewriting & drafting
Week 12 Class 35 Introductory discussion on writing, prewriting & drafting
Class 36 Introductory discussion on writing, prewriting & drafting
Topic sentence, paragraph development, paragraph structure,
Class 37
describing a person/scene/picture, narrating an event
Week 13 Class 38
Class 39
Class 40 Paragraph writing, compare contrast and cause-effect paragraph
Week 14 Class 41 Paragraph writing, compare contrast and cause-effect paragraph
Class 42 Paragraph writing, compare contrast and cause-effect paragraph
Assessment Criteria CO Blooms Taxonomy

Components Grading
Assignment I 20% CO1, CO2 C1, C2, C3
Assignment II 50% CO1, CO2 C1, C2, C3
Continuous Assessment 30% CO3, CO4 C1, C2, C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Langan, J. (2005). College Writing Skills with Readings (6th Ed). McGraw-Hill Publication
2. Interactions 1 (Reading), John Langan, Latest edition, McGraw-Hill Publication
3. Jones, L.(1981). Functions of English. (Student‟s Book, 2nd Ed.) Melbourne, Australia:
Cambridge University Press.
4. Dixon, R.J. (1987). Complete course in English. (Book 4). New Delhi, India: Prentice Hall
of India. (For book presentation)
5. From Paragraph to Essay - Maurice Imhoof and Herman Hudson
6. Headway Series – Advanced Level (2 parts with CDs): Oxford University Press Ltd.
7. Speak like Churchill stand like Lincoln - James C. Humes
8. Cambridge IELTS Practice Book
9. Selected Sample Reports and Selected Research Articles
379
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: LANG 202 Credit Hours: 1.50
Course Title: Communicative English II Contact Hours: 3.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The English language course is designed for the students to develop their competence in
communication skills for academic purposes especially in reading and writing. The approach will be
communicative and interactive and will involve individual, pair and group work. Students will be
exposed to different types of texts to develop efficient reading skill. Reading will also involve
activities and discussions leading to effective writing. The course incorporates a wide range of reading
texts to develop students‟ critical thinking which is one of the most essential elements required to
write a good piece of academic writing. Emphasis is particularly put on the various forms of essay
writing such as descriptive, narrative, cause-effect, compare-contrast, and argumentative. Upon
completion of this course, students are expected to be able to communicate at various situations,
participate in group activities and prepare formal speech for academic, professional and social
purposes. This course also incorporates classroom instructions to provide guidelines on presentations
and communication skills. In addition, the course emphasizes on providing constructive feedback on
students‟ oral performances.
OBJECTIVES
1. To develop English language skills to communicate effectively and professionally.
2. To strengthen students‟ presentation skills.
3. To develop competency in academic reading and writing.

1. Understand the techniques of academic reading and become familiar with technical terms
2. Develop competency in academic reading, preparing report written
3. Analyze any problem critically, interpret data and synthesize information to provide valid
conclusions
4. Communicate effectively within the shortest possible time to present their reports and
academic writings
5. Apply the techniques to find out the main points of any long article within a very limited
time as well as know the techniques of any effective writing. In short, with consistent practice
they will be able to overcome the language barrier.
380
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Reading: Reading comprehension: Practice using different techniques; Academic reading:

comprehension from department or subject related passages; Vocabulary for engineers (some
common engineering terms for both general and department specific); Reading subject specific
text to develop vocabulary
2. Writing: Writing semi-formal, formal/official letters, official Email; Applying for a job:
writing cover letter and curriculum vitae; Essay writing: writing steps, principles and
techniques, outlining, revising, editing, proofreading; Narrative and descriptive writing:
comparison-contrast and cause-effect, argumentative and opinion expression, assignment
writing; Analyzing and describing graphs or charts; Practicing analytical and argumentative
writing.
3. Speaking: Public speaking: Basic elements and qualities of a good public speaker; Set speech
and extempore speech: how to get ready for any speech – set or extempore; Individual/Group
presentation: how to be ready for presentation, prepare script for good speech, preparing power
point slides etc., selected books/selected stories for presentation.
4. Listening: Listening to long lecture on some topics; Listening and understanding
speeches/lectures of different accent.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Understand the techniques of academic
CO1 reading and become acquainted with √
technical vocabularies
Understand the techniques of effective
CO2 academic writing such as research article/ √
report writing
Communicate effectively within the shortest
CO3 possible time to present any report and √
research work
Analyze any problem critically, analyse and
CO4 interpret data and synthesize information to √
provide valid conclusions
Taxonomy Methods
CO1 academic reading and become C2 ASG
acquainted with technical vocabularies
CO2 effective academic writing such as C2 ASG, Pr
research article/ report writing
CO3 Communicate effectively within the C3 Pr
381
shortest possible time to present any
report and research work
Analyze any problem critically,
analyze and interpret data and
CO 4 C4 Q, ASG, Pr
synthesize information to provide valid
conclusions
Exam)
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 14
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
Total 75
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Class Topic

Class 1 Reading comprehension: Practice using different techniques
Week 1 Class 2 Reading comprehension: Practice using different techniques
Class 3 Reading comprehension: Practice using different techniques
Academic reading: comprehension from department or subject related
Class 4
passages
Week 2 Class 5
passages
Class 6
passages
Vocabulary for engineers (some common engineering terms for both
Class 7 general and department specific)
Reading subject specific text to develop vocabulary
Week 3
382
Class 10 Writing semi-formal, formal/official letters, official Email
Week 4 Class 11 Writing semi-formal, formal/official letters, official Email
Class 12 Writing semi-formal, formal/official letters, official Email
Class 13 Applying for a job: writing cover letter and curriculum vitae
Week 5 Class 14 Applying for a job: writing cover letter and curriculum vitae
Class 15 Applying for a job: writing cover letter and curriculum vitae
Essay writing: writing steps, principles and techniques, outlining,
Class 16
revising, editing, proofreading
Week 6 Class 17
Class 18
Narrative and descriptive writing: comparison-contrast and cause-effect,
Class 19
argumentative and opinion expression, assignment writing
Week 7 Class 20
Class 21
Class 22 Analyzing and describing graphs or charts
Week 8 Class 23 Analyzing and describing graphs or charts
Class 24 Analyzing and describing graphs or charts
Class 25 Practicing analytical and argumentative writing.
Week 9 Class 26 Practicing analytical and argumentative writing.
Class 27 Practicing analytical and argumentative writing.
Class 28 Public speaking: Basic elements and qualities of a good public speaker
Week
10
Class 31 Set speech and extempore speech: how to get ready for any speech – set
or extempore
Week Class 32 Set speech and extempore speech: how to get ready for any speech – set
11 or extempore
Class 33 Set speech and extempore speech: how to get ready for any speech – set
or extempore
Individual/Group presentation: how to be ready for presentation, prepare
Class 34 script for good speech, preparing power point slides etc., selected
books/selected stories for presentation.
Week
12
Class 37 Listening to long lecture on some topics
Week
13
Class 40 Listening and understanding speeches/lectures of different accent
Week Class 41 Listening and understanding speeches/lectures of different accent
14
Class 42 Listening and understanding speeches/lectures of different accent
383

Components Grading
Assignment I 20% CO1, CO2 C1, C2, C3
Assignment II 50% CO1, CO2 C1, C2, C3
Continuous Assessment 30% CO3, CO4 C1, C2, C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Jones, L. (1981). Functions of English. (Student‟s Book, 2 nd Ed.) Melbourne, Australia:
Cambridge University Press.
2. Dixon, R.J. (1987). Complete course in English. (Book 4). New Delhi, India: Prentice Hall
of India. (For book presentation)
3. Langan, J. (2005). College Writing Skills with Readings (6 th Ed). McGraw-Hill Publication
4. Interactions 1 (Reading), John Langan, Latest edition, McGraw-Hill Publication
5. Headway Series – Advanced Level (2 parts with CDs): Oxford University Press Ltd.
6. Speak like Churchill stand like Lincoln - James C. Humes
7. Cambridge IELTS Practice Book
8. Selected Sample Reports and Selected Research Articles
384
GENERAL EDUCATION COURSES
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GEBS 101 Credit Hours: 2.00
Course Title: Bangladesh Studies Contact Hours: 2.00
Level and Term: Level 1Term 1
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course has been designed for undergraduate engineering students to help them learn the rich
history of Bangladesh and to provide them with basic knowledge of historical events which eventually
led to the formation of Bangladesh and constitution of Bangladesh, current trends in economic
development and thereby to enhance their understanding of present phenomena in the light of history
which will make them responsible citizen.
OBJECTIVES
1. To equip students with factual knowledge that will enable them to learn history of Bangladesh.
2. To trace the historical roots of Bangladesh as an independent state focusing on the social,
cultural and economic developments that have taken place since its independence.
3. To promote an understanding of the development of Bangladesh and its culture.
4. To create an awareness among the students about the History, Geography, Economics, Politics
and Culture of Bangladesh.

1. Identify specific stages of Bangladesh‟s political history, through the ancient, medieval,
colonial and post-colonial periods and critically analyze plurality of cultural identities of
Bangladesh.
2. Explain the economy and patterns of economic changes through qualitative and quantitative
analysis.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Bangladesh Geography: Location, Area, Boundary, Physiography, River system, Forest and
Climate, Demography of Bangladesh, Maritime zones.
2. History: Overview of the ancient Bengal; anthropological identity of the Bengali race; main
trends in the history of medieval Bengal; Bengal under the East India Company; religious and
social reform movements; nationalist movements, division of the Indian sub-continent;
language movement 1948-1952; education movement of 1962; six-point movement of 1966;
mass uprising of 1969; war of independence and emergence of Bangladesh in 1971,
385
Constitution of Bangladesh, Political Development and Democratic Transition (1971-1990),
Political Development (1991- Present), Bangladesh‟s contribution to world peace and its
Security.
3. Environment, Economy and Culture: Land, Characteristics of tropical monsoon climate,
Forests and biomass, Fish, Minerals, Health, Education, Agriculture, Industries, NGOs,
Population, Sociological and Cultural aspects of Bangladesh, Economy and National
development, Development and Progress of the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs),
Public Administration in Bangladesh, State of Good Governance in Bangladesh, Art and
Literature, Main traditional cultural events, Vision-2021, Digitalization, Tourism and Natural
Resources, Bangladesh and International Relations.
Program Outcome
No Course Outcomes (CO) of the Course
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO-1 Identify specific stages of Bangladesh‟s political
history, through the ancient, medieval, colonial and
post-colonial periods and critically analyze plurality √
of cultural identities of Bangladesh.
CO-2 Explain the economy and patterns of economic
changes through qualitative and quantitative √
analysis.
Taxonomy Methods
Identify specific stages of CT, MT, F
Bangladesh‟s political history,
through the ancient, medieval,
CO-1 C1 7
colonial and post-colonial periods
and critically analyze plurality of
cultural identities of Bangladesh.
Explain the economy and patterns MT, F
CO-2 of economic changes through C3 7
qualitative and quantitative analysis.
Exam)
Teaching Strategies Lecture, Tutorial, Assignments

Learning Strategies Face to face, Guided learning, Independent learning, Assignments
Assessment Class Test, Mid-Term Exam, Assignments, Final examination
Strategies
386
Student Learning
Components Teaching and Learning Activities
Time (SLT)
Face to Face Lecture (2 hours/week x 14 weeks) 28
Guided Learning Tutorial/ Assignments (2 hours/week x
10
5 weeks)
Independent Individual learning (1-hour lecture ≈ 1 24
Learning hour learning)
Preparation for tests and examination 13
Assessment Pop Quiz/Class Test/Mid-Term Exam 2
Final examination 3
TOTAL SLT 80
CREDIT = SLT/40 2
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week-1 Topic CT
Introductory class: Brief discussion on the total syllabus, basic
Class-1 requirements of the course, methods of assessment of the course
Bangladesh Geography: Location, Area, Boundary, Physiography,
Class-2 River System, Forest and Climate, Demography of Bangladesh.
Week-2
Overview of the ancient Bengal; anthropological identity of the
Class-3 Bengali race; main trends in the history of medieval Bengal
Class-4 Bengal under the East India Company; CT-1
Week-3
Class-5 Religious and Social reform movements
Class-6 Nationalist movements, division of the Indian sub- continent
Week-4
Class-7 Language movement 1948-1952, Education movement of
1962
Class-8 Language movement 1948-1952, Education Mid
movement of 1962 exam
Week-5
Class-9 Six-point movement of 1966; Mass uprising of 1969;
Class-10 War of Independence and Emergence of Bangladesh in 1971
Week-6
Class-11 Constitution of Bangladesh, Political Development and Democratic
Transition (1971-1990)
Class-12 Constitution of Bangladesh, Political Development and Democratic
Transition (1971-1990)
Week-7
Class-13 Political Development (1991- Present), Bangladesh‟s contribution to
world peace and security.
Class-14 Political Development (1991- Present), Bangladesh‟s contribution to
world peace and security.
Week-8
Class-15 Land, Characteristics of tropical Monsoon climate,
Class-16 Forests and biomass, Fish
387
Week-9
Class-17 Minerals, Health and Education,
Class-18 Agriculture, Industries
Week-10
Class-19 NGOs, Population, Sociological and Cultural aspects of Bangladesh
Class-20 Economy and national development,
Week-11
Class-21 Development and Progress of the Millennium Development Goals
(MDGs) CT-2
Class-22 Public Administration in Bangladesh, State of Good Governance in
Bangladesh
Week-12
Class-23 Art and Literature
Class-24 Traditional cultural events
Week-13
Class-25 Vision-2021, Digitalization
Class-26 Tourism and Natural Resources CT-3
Week-14
Class-27 Bangladesh and International Relations
Class-28 Revision of the course
COs Assessment Method (100%) Remarks

Class Assessment
1 Class test (CT) 20%
1 Class performance 5% Assignment, quiz etc
Exam
1&2 Mid Term 15%
1&2 Final 60%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Bangladesh Studies: Md. Shamsul Kabir Khan and Daulatunnahar Khanam

2. The Constitution of the People’s Republic of Bangladesh
3. Discovery of Bangladesh: Akbar Ali Khan
4. History of Bangladesh, Vols, 1-3: Sirajul Islam
5. History of Modern Bengal, Vol, 1: R C Majumdar
6. Dynastic History of Bengal: Dr. Abdul Mumin Chowdhury
7. A History of Bangladesh: William Van Schendel
8. A History of Sufism in Bengal: Dr. Enamul Huq
9. Geography of Bangladesh: Harun Er Rashid
10. Banglapedia: National Encyclopedia of Bangladesh, Vols, 1-10: Sirajul Islam
11. History of Bengal: (Mughal Period 1526-1765): R. A. Chandra
12. Land of Two Rivers: Nitesh Sengupta
388
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GELM 275 Credit Hours: 2.00
Course Title: Leadership and Management Contact Hours: 2.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The course is designed to make students understand the overlapping connection between engineering
and management in an organization through the study of varied management practices and leadership
traits as an engineer.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce different management functions and approaches.
2. To expose students to different views and styles of leadership
3. To understand how an organization functions collaboratively with managers and
engineers.
4. To understand various personality traits and its impact on leadership and management.
5. To solve real-world management problems as an engineer.

1. Explain with the fundamental concepts of leadership and management skills.
2. Understand the role and contribution of a leader in achieving organizational goals.
3. Understand the contribution of leadership traits and management skills in decision making
and solving real life problems
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Leadership: Leadership styles, leadership theories, traits of a good leader, conflicts
negotiation, engineer as a leader, manpower control, motivation and theories, group dynamics
and participative management.
2. Planning and Control: Management functions, types, roles and responsibilities, management
skills, management approaches, organization.
3. Planning and Development: Organizational planning, organizational development models,
research process and diagnostic methods.
4. Personnel planning and HR Management System: Process of Human Resource Planning,
performance management and appraisal.
5. Cost and Financial Management: Elements of costs of products, break-even analysis,
investment analysis, net present value, payback period and benefit-cost ratio.
6. Marketing Management: Marketing concepts & organization, industrial and consumer selling,
channel & advertising decisions and new product strategy.
389
7. Operation management: Project scheduling, demand and supply forecasting, inventory control
and quality management.
8. Information Technology and Management: Management information system (MIS),
enterprise resource planning (ERP).
9. Case Studies: Solving real-world management problems.
PROGRAM OUTCOME (POs)

No COURSE OUTCOMES (COs)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain with the fundamental concepts of leadership
CO-1 √
and management skills
Understand the role and contribution of a leader in
CO-2 √
achieving organizational goals
Understand the contribution of leadership traits and
CO-3 management skills in decision making and solving √
real life problems
Taxonomy Methods
Explain with the fundamental concepts of
CO1 C3 1 T, R, F
leadership and management skills
Understand the role and contribution of a T, ASG, R,
CO2 leader in achieving organizational goals C2 1
F
Understand the contribution of leadership
T, ASG, R,
traits and management skills in decision
CO3 C2 1 F
making and solving real life problems
Complex Problems, CA-Complex Activities, KP-Knowledge Profile, T – Test, PR – Project, Q – Quiz,
ASG – Assignment, Pr – Presentation, R – Report, F – Final Exam, MT- Mid Term Exam)
Lectures, class performances, assignments, class tests, final exam
Student Learning
Time (SLT)
10
5 weeks)
Independent Individual learning (1-hour lecture ≈ 1- 24
Learning hour learning) 13
Preparation for tests and examination
390
Final examination 3
TOTAL SLT 80
CREDIT = SLT/40 2
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Lecture Topics TEST

1 Lec 1 Introduction to Leadership and Management: Definition
of leadership and management; basic difference between a
leader and a manager; relation of leaders and managers with
respect to efficiency and effectiveness; qualities of leader and
managers with examples from history.
Lec 2 Management Fundamentals: Definition of management &
manager; levels of management; management functions and
skills; Mintzberg‟s managerial roles; Henri Fayol‟s
management principles; strategic management.
2 Lec 3 Leadership & Motivation: Motivation, Maslow‟s hierarchy
Lec 4 needs; theory of X & Y; motivators and hygiene factors; goal
setting theory; reinforcement theory; equity theory;
expectancy theory
3 Lec 5 Leadership: Leadership styles; leadership trait theory;
managerial grid; contemporary leadership; conflicts Class Test 1
Lec 6
negotiation; leadership issues in 21st century; cross cultural
leadership; engineer as a leader and some simple case
discussions on leadership (positive and toxic leadership) in the
class (Interactive Learning).
4 Lec 7 Case Study – I : Engineer as Great Leaders
Lec 8
5 Lec 9 Organizational Management:
Organization; departmentalization; chain of command; unity
of command; cross functional area; authority; centralization
and decentralization; traditional & contemporary
organization; matrix project structure; learning structure;
organizing collaboration.
Lec 10 Planning and goal setting: Foundation of planning; goals of
plan; types of goal; types of goal & plan; goal setting; MBO;
well written goal.
6 Lec 11 Control: Controlling process; controlling for organizational
performance; types of control: (feed-forward, feedback &
concurrent); balanced scorecard; contemporary issues in
control; workplace concern & workplace violence.
Lec 12 Change and Innovation: Change and innovation; internal
and external for change; changing process; creativity vs
innovation.
7 Lec 13 Case Study – II : Planning and Goal Setting; A Managerial
Approach: Engineer as Great Managers
(Interactive Discussions in the Class)
391
Lec 14 Attitude: Components of Attitude; behavior model and
characteristics model; behavior vs. attitude; job attitude; job
involvement; job satisfaction and customer satisfaction.
8 Lec 15 Personality: Personality determinants: heredity and
environment; Myers-Briggs Type Indicator; Big five
personality model; personality traits (core self-evaluation,
Machiavellianism, narcissism, self-monitoring, risk taking,
proactive personality).
Lec 16 Perception and Individual Decision Making: Factors
influencing perception; attribution theory; errors/biases in
attribution
9 Lec 17 Perception and Individual Decision Making: Factors of
Mid Term /
individual decision making; rational decision making;
Project
bounded rationality; satisfice; common errors in decision
making; creativity in decision making.
Lec 18 Case Study – III : A Case on Decision Making – Involves
both leadership and managerial skills (Interactive Discussion
in the Class)
10 Lec 19 Understanding Work Team: Work group; work team;
problem solving team; self-managed work team; cross
functional team; virtual team; team effectiveness; team
challenges.
Lec 20 HR Management: Process of Human Resource Planning; Class Test 2
forecasting demand for labor; staffing.
11 Lec 21 HR Management: Internal supply of labor; performance
appraisal.
Lec 22 Operations Management: Project managing basics; goals
and boundary of project; WBS; scheduling a project.
12 Lec 23 Operations Management: Demand and supply forecasting;
inventory control.
Lec 24 Exercise – Use of Microsoft Project (MSP) for scheduling
a project at student level
13 Lec 25 Case Study – IV: A case that covers all relevant theories
taught throughout the course and involves both leadership
and management issues, e.g., Columbia's Final Mission.
(This may be given as group assignment followed by in class
short presentations/discussions)
Lec 26
14 Lec 27 Information Technology and Management: Management
Information System (MIS); Enterprise Resource Planning
(ERP) - For introductory knowledge.
Lec 28 Revision
Assessment strategies
CO Bloom’s Taxonomy
Components Grading
392
Class test 20% CO 1 C1-C2, P1
1-2 CO 2 C1-C2
Continuous Class CO 1 C1-C2, P1, A1
Assessment Participation 5% CO 2 C1-2, P1-P2, A1
(40%) CO 1 C1-C2, P1, A1
Mid term 15% CO 2 C1-C2, P1-P2, A1-A2
CO 3 C1-C2, P1-P2, A1-A2
CO 1 C1-C2, P1, A1
Final Exam 60% CO 2 C1-C2, P1-P2, A1-A2
CO 3 C1-C2, P1-P2, A1-A2
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Students must be provided with SOLID reading material instead of referring text books.
However, course teacher may select any text book as per his choice.
2. Engineering Management (Revised Edition) – A.K. Gupta
3. Industrial Engineering and Production Management - Martand T. Telsang
4. Leadership in Organizations – Gary Yukl
5. Developing Management Skills – David A. Whetten and Kim S. Camero
393
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GEE 303 Credit Hours: 2.00
Course Title: Fundamentals of Economics Contact Hours: 2.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course is designed to present engineering students the major concepts and techniques of
engineering economic analysis that are needed in the decision making process. This course provides
an introduction to a broad range of economic concepts, theories and analytical techniques. The
emphasis of this course is on the analytical analysis of money and its impact on decision making. The
use of a market, supply and demand, model will be the fundamental model in which trade-offs and
choices will be considered through comparison of costs and benefits of actions. The role of
government policy to address microeconomic market failures and macroeconomic objectives will be
examined.
OBJECTIVES
1. To enable students to demonstrate their knowledge of the fundamental and technical
concepts of economics.
2. To work effectively in the organizations with honesty and integrity.
3. To impart knowledge to understand consumer behavior, elasticity and different market
structure.
4. To enable identify the determinants of various macroeconomic aggregates such as national
income, full employment, unemployment, consumption and savings function, inflation,
productivity and the major challenges associated with the measurement of these aggregates.
5. To enable to apply the basic theories of economics in critical thinking and problem solving.
6. To make able to identify the basic features of economic development and regarding
planning for the economy of the country.

1. Understand the basic concepts and principles of Micro and Macro Economics.
2. Identify and apply the indifference curve theory and market equilibrium in real life
situation
3. Explain time-value of money concept and apply the knowledge of inflation, investment
and cost benefit analysis
4. Understand the Economic Development and Planning for the country. To get idea of
international economy.
394
COURSE CONTENTS
Broad Topic Details Topic

Fundamental of Economics Definition
Production Possibility Frontier and 1. PPF Curve.
Engineering Decision 2. Applying the PPF to Society‟s Choices by the
Engineers.
Utility Theory Law of diminishing marginal utility.
1. Definition. 2. Law of Demand. 3. Market
Demand Demand. 4. Reason for demand curve downward
slopping. Mathematical Analysis
Supply 1. Definition. 2. Supply curve. 3. Market Equilibrium.
1. Different types of elasticity.
Elasticity of Demand 2. Different types of price elasticity.
3. Relation between AR, MR and elasticity
4. Mathematical Analysis
Indifference Curve Analysis and Budget Line, MRS, Consumer Choice
Consumers Equilibrium
Production Function from Engineering 1. TP, AP, MP. 2. Law of Variable proportion. 3. Law
point of view of returns
Cost Analysis and Engineering Economics 1. TC, AC, MC. 2. Short run cost analysis
Analysis of Market Structure and 1. Perfectly Competitive Market
Engineering Decision 2. Monopoly and Monopolistic Market
Key concept of Definition
Macroeconomics
National Income GDP, GNP, NNP, NI
Circular Flow of National Income and Two, Three and Four sector Economy
Engineering Resources
Broad Topic Details Topic
Savings Savings Function, APS, MPS.
Derive the savings function from consumption
functions; Mathematically and Graphically.
Consumptions Consumption functions, APC, MPC
Investment Investment Theories, Investment Multiplier
Engineering Plan considering the Inflation
Rate of the Country Demand-Pull and Cost-Push Inflation
The Effect of Monetary policy on Impact and Use
Engineering Plan
The Effect of Fiscal Policy on Engineering Impact and Use
Plan
Theories of Developments 1 or 2 Theories of Economic Development.
Economic Problems in Developing
Countries especially in Bangladesh.
395
PROGRAM OUTCOME
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Understand the basic concepts and principles of
CO-1 √
Micro and Macro Economics
Identify and apply the indifference curve theory
CO-2 √
and market equilibrium in real life situation
Explain time-value of money concept and apply
CO-3 the knowledge of inflation, investment and cost √
benefit analysis
Understand the Economic Development and
CO-4 Planning for the country. To get idea of √
Taxonomy Methods
Understand the basic concepts CT, F
CO-1 and principles of Micro and C2 1-4
Macro Economics
Identify and apply the CT, F
indifference curve theory and
CO-2 C3 1-4
market equilibrium in real life
situation
Explain time-value of money CT, F
concept and apply the knowledge MT
CO-3 C2 1-4
of inflation, investment and cost
benefit analysis
Understand the Economic CT, F
Development and Planning for the MT
CO-4 C4 1-4
country. To get idea of
Exam)
Student Learning
Time (SLT)
10
5 weeks)
396
Final examination 3
TOTAL SLT 80
CREDIT = SLT/40 2
COURSE SCHEDULE
References/Teaching
Weeks Lectures Lecture/Tutorial/Assignment Topic
Materials/Equipment
Introduction to Engineering Economics Lecture notes,
1 Importance of Economics in Engineering. Reference texts/ video
Definition of economics, Difference between micro clips/etc.
1 2 and macroeconomics. Production possibility frontier
(PPF) and Engineering choice.
3 Demand and determinants of Demand
2 4 Demand curve related basic idea and Mathematical
Application
5 Supply and Determinants. Market
3 Mechanism.
6 Consumer Choice (Indifference Curve and Budget
Line)
7 Indifference Curve, Properties of IC, MRS
4 8 Theory of production in the point of view of
Engineers
9 Theory of cost, Short run and long run cost curve
5 10 Firms Equilibrium (Concepts)
11 Different types of Market.
6 12 How the Engineers will act in perfectly
competitive market.
13 How the Engineers will act in Monopoly Market
7 14 National Income analysis
15 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply
8 16 Determination of Level of Income and
Employment
9 17 Keynes Full Employment. Theory
Circular flow of Income and Expenditure (How
18 engineers will utilize the resources and decision-
making process of project plan)
10 19 Consumption Function
20 Saving Function
11 21 Inflation, Type of Inflation
22 Impact of Inflation
12 23 Unemployment problem and its impact on society
24 Cost benefit analysis
13 25 Theories of Economic Development
26 Economic Problems in Developing Countries
14 27 Contribution of the Engineers in the Economic
Development of Bangladesh.
397
28 How the Engineers compare their development projects
in the context of World Economy.

CO1 C1, C2
Class Test/
20% CO2 C1,C2
CO3 C3, C4
Assessment
Class
(40%) 5% CO4
Participation
CO1, CO2 C1, C2, , C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3, CO4 C1, C2,C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Economics by P. A. Samuelson and W. D. Nordhaus (7th Edition)
2. Microeconomics by Robert S. Pindyck and Daniel L. Rubinfeld (8th Edition)
3. Macroeconomics by N. Gregory Mankiw (8th Edition)
4. Principle of Economics by N. Gregory Mankiw (8th Edition)
5. Engineering Economics by Niall M. Fraser and Elizabeth M. Jewkes. (5 th Edition)
398
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GES 305 Credit Hours: 2.00
Course Title: Fundamentals of Sociology Contact Hours: 2.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course has been designed to understand the human inter-personal relationship and human
psychology in the society and to apply this knowledge in the practical field as an engineer through the
study of varied societies and cultures.
OBJECTIVES
1. To learn basics, scopes and perspectives of sociology.
2. To understand societal and cultural issues in national, global and environmental context.
3. To synthesis between social problem and social satisfaction in real life.

1. Understand the basic nature, scope and perspective of sociology and the criteria of social
research process and methodologies.
2. Apply contextual knowledge to assess societal and cultural issues in national and global context
and also environmental context for sustainable development.
3. Analyze social problem, social stratifications, socialism, capitalism and economic life and
political issues.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Nature and scope sociological imagination, perspectives of sociology.
2. Stages of social research and research method.
3. Culture and civilization, socialization and self –development
4. Globalization and social changes, media and individual
5. Social organizations and social problems, social stratification;
6. Industrial revolution, capitalism and socialism,
7. Work and economic life
8. Environment and human activities, climate change and global risk
9. Population and human society, urbanization and city development, social changes and
technology

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
399
Understand the basic nature,
CO1 scope and perspective of √
sociology and the criteria of social
research process and
methodologies.
Apply contextual knowledge to
assess societal and cultural issues
CO2 in national and global context and √
also environmental context for
sustainable development.
Analyze Social problem, social
CO3 stratifications, socialism, √
capitalism and economic life and
political issues.
Taxonomy Methods
Understand the basic nature, scope and
CO1 perspective of sociology and the criteria C1 - 1 T, ASG, F
of social research process and
methodologies.
Apply contextual knowledge to assess
societal and cultural issues in national
CO2 and global context and also C2 - 1 Q, F
environmental context for sustainable
development.
Analyze social problem, social
CO3 stratifications, socialism, capitalism and C2 2 MT, F
economic life and political issues.
JUSTIFICATION FOR CO-PO MAPPING
In order to understand the basic nature, scope and perspective of sociology and the
criteria of social research process and methodologies, it is required to
CO1-PO10 communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give
and receive clear instructions.
In order to apply contextual knowledge to assess societal and cultural issues in
national and global context and also environmental context for sustainable
CO2-PO6 development, application of reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to
assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent
responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice and solutions to
complex engineering problems is required.
In order to analyze Social problem, social stratifications, socialism, capitalism and
CO3-PO6 economic life and political issues, application of reasoning informed by contextual
knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the
400
Student Learning
Time (SLT)
10
5 weeks)
Final examination 3
TOTAL SLT 80
CREDIT = SLT/40 2
COURSE SCHEDULE
Assessment
Weeks Lectures Lecture/Tutorial/Assignment Topic
Method
1 1. Definition, nature and scope of sociology
2. Sociological imagination
2 Perspectives of sociology Class test- 1,
3. Final Exam
4. Orientation of sociological theories
3 5. Social research and its process
6. Research designs and techniques.
4 7. Introducing culture and its variations
8. civilization
5 9. Defining family and its changes
10. Socialization process and development of self
11. Introducing globalization and its impact on human life
6 12. Factors responsible to globalization
7 13. Media and its impact in modern society
14. Addressing social problems of Bangladesh
Class test- 2
8 15. Introducing social groups and organizations Mid Term
16. Introducing bureaucracy and good governance Final Exam
17. Introducing social stratifications and social inequality
9 18. Poverty and its types and dimensions
1 19. Industrial revolution and aftermath
0 20. Urbanization and city development
1 21. Capitalism: features and influence
1 22. Socialism: features and influence
1 23. Environment and human activities
2 Class test- 3
24. Climate change and global risk
Final Exam
1 25. Population of Bangladesh: problem or prospect
401
3 26. Crime and deviance: a brief analysis
1 27. Review 1
4 28. Review 2

20%
Continuous Assignment 1-3 CO4, CO5 C3, C4
Assessment Class
5% CO6
(40%) Participation
CO1, CO2 C1, C2, , C4
CO3, CO4 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO4, CO5 C5, C4
CO6 C5, C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Sociology in Modules: by – Richard Schaefer, 2nd edition, 2013
2. Sociology - Primary Principles: by CN Shankar Rao
3. Anthony Giddens- 5th edition
4. Relevant journal
402
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GESL 311 Credit Hours: 2.00
Course Title: Environment, Sustainability and Industrial Law Contact Hours: 2.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The development of the modern law of the sea and the growing concern for the condition of the
oceans have given rise to a number of legal regimes addressing problems of the marine environment
including pollution, loss of biodiversity, protection of endangered species, and marine mammals. The
international law of the sea provides a foundation for continuing progress. This course introduces to
the international legal framework on marine pollution, which covers global and regional legally
binding and non-legally binding agreements addressing different sources of pollution.
OBJECTIVES
1. To familiarize with marine environment and with the types and sources of marine environment
pollution.
2. To impart the knowledge of the importance of the protection the oceans from pollution.
3. To give brief idea on international law at sea.

1. Identify the sources of marine pollution and explain the impacts of sectorial marine activities.
2. Describe importance of the protection the oceans from pollution and outline the regional
approach to combat pollution of the marine environment
3. Explain general aspects of pollution management for sustainable shipping
4. Apply the international laws of maritime environmental conservation in ship design and
shipbuilding.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Marine Environment: Definition of the Marine Environment, importance of
the marine environment, Scope of the Marine Environment (Different Maritime Zones)
2. Pollution of Marine Environment: Pollution of marine environment, types and sources of
marine pollution (pollution from ships, pollution by dumping wastes at sea, land-based sources,
pollution resulting from seabed activities)
3. Impacts of Sectoral Marine Activities: Impact of fishing activities on marine life, shipping,
offshore oil and gas production and transformation, exploitation offshore wind energy, dredging
for navigation, for environmental cleanup and for sand, environmental risk of deep sea mining,
impacts of land-based activities, Pollution from diffusive sources
403
4. General Aspects on Marine Environmental Protection: General aspects of management and
governance of human activities on marine environmental protection; Social drivers,
development and perspectives of increasing ocean uses.
5. International Environmental law of the Sea: Major Developments in the International Law of
Marine Pollution and Marine Environmental Conservation, Marine Wildlife Conservation in
Law and Policy.
COURSE OUTCOMES - PROGRAM OUTCOMES MAPPAING

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Identify the sources of marine pollution and
CO1 explain the impacts of sectorial marine √
activities.
Describe importance of the protection the
oceans from pollution and outline the regional
CO2 √
approach to combat pollution of the marine
environment
Explain general aspects of pollution
CO3 √
management for sustainable shipping
Apply the international laws of maritime
CO4 environmental conservation in ship design and √
shipbuilding
Taxonomy Methods
Identify the sources of marine
1,3,
CO1 pollution and explain the impacts of C3, C4 CT, F
4
sectorial marine activities.
Describe importance of the protection
the ocean environment from
CO2 pollution and outline the regional C2,C4 1 7 CT, MT, F
approach to combat pollution of the
marine environment
Explain general aspects of pollution
CO3 management for sustainable shipping C2,C5 3,6 4 7 CT/ASG, F
and other ocean operations.
Apply the international laws of
CO4 maritime environmental conservation C3 7 MT, F
in ship design and shipbuilding
Exam)
404
The knowledge of theory based fundamental knowledge of this course will help the
CO1-PO2 students to define and distinguish the sources of marine pollution and explain the
impacts of sectorial marine activities.
Students will be able to describe importance of the protection the ocean environment
CO2-PO7 from pollution and able to find out sustainable solutions for various marine
environmental issues.
Students get a better understanding of the pillars of sustainable shipping and other
CO3-PO7 ocean operations through the marine environment pollution management which
needed to be strengthened for sustainable development.
Students will gain knowledge on several international law of sea related to maritime
CO4-PO6 environment which will make awareness of various environmental issues and it is
needed to address while working as an engineer in a society.
Student Learning
Time (SLT)
10
5 weeks)
Final examination 3
TOTAL SLT 80
CREDIT = SLT/40 2
COURSE SCHEDULE

Week 1 Introduction to Marine Environment
Class 1 Definition of the marine environment, importance of the marine
environment
Class 2 Scope of the marine environment, different maritime zones
Week 2 Pollution of Marine Environment
Class 3 Definition of the pollution of marine environment and types of marine
environment pollution CT 1,
Class 4 Sources of marine pollution Final Exam
Week 3 Pollution of Marine Environment (Contd.)
405
Class 5 Sources of marine pollution
Class 6 Review
Week 4 Impacts of Sectoral Marine Activities
Class 7 Assessment (CT-1)
Class 8 Impact of fishing activities on marine life CT 2,
Week 5 Impacts of Sectoral Marine Activities (Contd.) Final Exam
Class 9 Shipping
Class 10 Offshore oil and gas production and transformation, exploitation
offshore wind energy
Week 6 Impacts of Sectoral Marine Activities (Contd.)
Class 11 Dredging for navigation, for environmental cleanup and for sand
Class 12 Environmental risk of deep sea mining
Week 7 Impacts of Sectoral Marine Activities (Contd.)
Class 13 Impacts of land-based activities, Pollution from diffusive sources
Week 8 General Aspects on Marine Environmental Protection
Class 15 Challenges and foundation of sustainable ocean governance
Class 16 Institutional framework for marine environment governance
Week 9 General Aspects on Marine Environmental Protection (Contd.) Mid Term,
Class 17 Industrial principle of marine environment protection and future Final Exam
prospects of marine environmental governance
Class 18 Marine Management on sustainable shipping and hazardous substance
in the marine environment
Week 10 General Aspects on Marine Environmental Protection(Contd.)
Class 19 Social drivers, development and perspectives of increasing ocean uses
Week 11 International Environmental law of the Sea
Class 21 Major Developments in the International Law of Marine Pollution
Class 22 Conservation Prospects at UNCLOS
Week 12 International Environmental law of the Sea (Contd.)
Class 23 MARPOL 1973
Class 24 OPRC, Marine Environmental Hazard Control
Week13 International Environmental law of the Sea (Contd.)
Class 25 Wildlife Conservation in Law and Policy (Fisheries, climate change,
Exotic species, )
Class 26 Wildlife Conservation in Law and Policy (challenges of marine wildlife CT 3,
conservation, convention on international trade in endangered species Final Exam
of fauna and flora, convention biological diversity, migratory species)
Week 14
Class 28 Revision Class

Continuous Class Test/ 20% CO1 C1, C2,
406
Assessment Assignment 1-3 CO2 C1,C2
(40%) CO3 C3, C4
Class
5% CO4
Participation
CO1 C1, C2,C2
CO2 C1, C2,C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3 C2,C3, C5
CO4 C1, C2
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. „The environmental law of the sea‟ edited by Douglas M. Johnston Published by (1981)
2. „Handbook on Marine Environment Protection(Science, Impacts and Sustainable
Management)‟ edited by Salomon, Markus, Markus, Till
3. „Handbook on the Economics and Management of Sustainable Oceans‟ by Edited by
Paulo A.L.D. Nunes (et. al)
4. „Protection of the marine environment under international law‟ by Yousef H. Almutairi
(2016)
5. „International law and the protection of the marine environment‟ by Howard S. Schiffman
407
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GERM 352 Credit Hours: 2.0
Course Title: Fundamentals of Research Methodology Contact Hours: 4.0
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The Fundamentals of Research Methodology is a hands‐on course designed to impart education in the
foundational methods and techniques of academic research in Science and Engineering context. UG
students would examine and be practically exposed to the main components of a research framework
i.e., problem definition, research design, data collection, ethical issues in research, time management,
report writing, and presentation. Once equipped with this knowledge, participants would be well‐
placed to conduct disciplined research under supervision in an area of their choosing. In addition to
their application in an academic setting, many of the methodologies discussed in this course would be
similar to those deployed in professional research environments.
OBJECTIVES
The primary objective of this course is to develop a research orientation among the UG students and
to acquaint them with fundamentals of research methods. Some other objectives of the course are:
1. To evaluate/review related extant literature, form a variety of sources, pertinent to the research
objectives/questions.
2. To expose students to various research methodologies (design), relevant to the research
problem needing to be addressed.
3. To explain and justify how researchers will collect and analyze research data.
4. To educate students in the common mistakes, research misconduct, and ethical considerations in
the field of research methodology.

1. Understand the research fundamentals and formulate problem statement and research
questions/objectives.
2. Formulate and compose a research proposal considering research activities/design,
background studies, and following standard guidelines.
3. Develop writing and presentation skill, and demonstrate ethical considerations in
conducting Research.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Foundations of Research: Meaning of Research; Definitions of Research; Objectives of
Research; Motivation in Research; General Characteristics of Research; Criteria of Good
408
Research; Types of Research; Concept of theory, empiricism, deductive and inductive theory;
Characteristics of scientific method.
2. Problem Identification and Formulation: Meaning and need of Review of Literature;
How to Conduct the Review of literature; Research Question – Investigation Question –
Measurement Issues – Hypothesis – Qualities of a good Hypothesis –Null Hypothesis &
Alternative Hypothesis. Hypothesis Testing – Logic & Importance.
3. Research Design: Concept and Importance in Research – Features of a good research
design – Exploratory Research Design – concept, types and uses, Descriptive Research
Designs – concept, types and uses. Experimental/Computational Design: Concept of
Independent & Dependent variables.
4. Data Analysis: Data Preparation – Univariate analysis (frequency tables, bar charts, pie
charts, percentages), Bivariate analysis – Cross tabulations and Chi-square test including
testing hypothesis of association.
5. Research Misconduct and Ethics: Understand the research misconduct; type of research
misconduct; Ethical issues in conducting research; Ethical issues related to publishing,
Plagiarism and Self-Plagiarism.
6. Use of Tools / Techniques for Research: Layout of a Research Paper; Methods to search
required information effectively; Reference Management Software like Zotero/Mendeley;
Software for paper formatting like LaTeX/MS Office; Software for detection of Plagiarism.
Time management and developing Gantt Charts.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Understand the research fundamentals and
CO-1 formulate problem statement and research √
questions/objectives.
Formulate and compose a research proposal
CO-2 considering research activities/design, background √
studies, and following standard guidelines.
Develop writing and presentation skill, and
CO-3 demonstrate ethical considerations in conducting √
Research.
Taxonomy Methods
Understand the research fundamentals
CO1 and formulate problem statement and C3 1 ASG/Q
research questions/objectives.
Formulate and compose a research
proposal considering research R/Pr/ASG/
CO2 C3 1
activities/design, background studies, and Q
following standard guidelines.
409
Develop writing and presentation skill,
CO3 and demonstrate ethical considerations in C2 1 R/Pr /ASG
conducting Research.
Exam)
Lecture and Discussion, Mini-Seminars by Experts, Co-operative and Collaborative Method and
Problem Based Method
Teaching and learning activities Engagement (hours)

Lecture 14
Practical / Tutorial / Studio 14
Student-Centred Learning 08
Self-directed learning
Non face-to-face learning Revision 08
Report preparations 14
Formal Assessment
Continuous Assessment 1.5
Report Submission (2) -
Presentation (2) 0.5
Total 60
COURSE SCHEDULE
Week Topics
1 Foundations of Research: Meaning of Research; Definitions of
Research; Objectives of Research; Motivation in Research;
General Characteristics of Research; Criteria of Good Research;
Types of Research; Concept of theory, empiricism, deductive
Continuous
and inductive theory; Characteristics of scientific method.
Assessment
2 Practice session on Foundations of Research
(presentation/
3 Problem Identification & Formulation: Meaning & need of
quiz/other
Review of Literature; How to Conduct the Review of literature;
assignment)
Research Question – Investigation Question – Measurement
Issues – Hypothesis – Qualities of a good Hypothesis –Null
Hypothesis & Alternative Hypothesis. Hypothesis Testing –
Logic & Importance.
4 Practice session on Problem Identification & Formulation Assignment 1
5 Research Design: Concept and Importance in Research – Assignment has to
Features of a good research design – Exploratory Research provide before,
Design – concept, types and uses, Descriptive Research Designs here students will
410
– concept, types and uses. Experimental Design: submit report and
Concept of Independent & Dependent variables. give PPT
6 Practice session on Research Design
7 Data Analysis: Data Preparation – Univariate analysis
(frequency tables, bar charts, pie charts, percentages), Bivariate
analysis – Cross tabulations and Chi-square test including
testing hypothesis of association.
8 Practice session on Data Analysis
9 Research Misconduct and Ethics: Understand the research
misconduct; type of research misconduct; Ethical issues in
conducting research; Ethical issues related to publishing,
Plagiarism and Self-Plagiarism.
10 Practice session on Research misconduct and Ethics
11 Use of Tools / Techniques for Research: Layout of a Research
Paper; Methods to search required information effectively; Continuous
Reference Management Software like Zotero/Mendeley; Assessment
Software for paper formatting like LaTeX/MS Office; (presentation/
Software for detection of Plagiarism. Time management and quiz/other
developing Gantt Charts. assignment)
12 Practice session on Use of tools / techniques for Research
13 Review Session (Theory) – I Assignment 2

/Final Presentation Assignment has to
14 Review Session (Practice) – II provide before,
/Final Presentation here students will
submit report and
give PPT

Components Grading
Assignment I 20% CO1 and CO3 C2-C3
Assignment II 50% CO2 and CO3 C2-C3
Continuous Assessment 30% CO1 and CO2 C2-C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering Research Methodology: A Practical Insight for Researchers. Springer, by

Deb, Dipankar, Dey, Rajeeb, Balas, Valentina E.
2. Research Methods for Engineers, 1st Edition, by David V. Thiel.
3. Handbook of Research Methodology by Talati, J.K.
4. Introducing Research Methodology: A Beginner′s Guide to Doing a Research Project
by Uwe Flick
5. DRM, a Design Research Methodology by Lucienne T.M. Blessing and
411
Amaresh Chakrabarti
6. Research Methods: Information, Systems, and Contexts by Kirsty Williamson, Graeme
Johanson
7. Zelkowitz, M. V. and Wallace, D. R. (1998), Experimental models for validating
technology, Computer, vol. 31, no. 5, pp. 23-31.
8. Internet, mail, and mixed-mode surveys : the tailored design method (3rd ed.) by Dillman,
D. A., Smyth, J. D., & Christian, L. M.
9. Improving survey questions: design and evaluation. Sage Publications, by Fowler, F. J.
10. Applied multiple regression/correlation analysis for the behavioral sciences (3rd ed.).
Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, by Cohen, J., Cohen, P., West, S., & Aiken,
L.
11. Experimental and Quasi-Experimental Design for Generalized Causal Inference. Boston,
Mass: Houghton Mifflin, by Shadish W.R., Cook T.D. & Campbell P.T.
12. Computational handbook of statistics (4th ed.). New York: Longman, by Bruning, J. L. &
Kintz, B. L.
412
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GEA 407 Credit Hours: 2.00
Course Title: Principles of Accounting Contact Hours: 2.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
The course provides students with a basic grounding in topics such as assets and liabilities, financial
analysis, planning and budgeting and investment appraisal with specific reference to unique aspects of
finance and accounting in the realm of engineering, all of which are important in understanding
accounting and finance. It is comprised of a variety of different learning resources including case
studies of financial decision making in business and examples of when things go wrong and how this
can be avoided.
OBJECTIVES
1. To know the meaning, history and definition of accounting, the users and uses of accounting,
importance of ethics in financial reporting.
2. To impart knowledge, the International Financial Reporting (IFRS), Generally Accepted
Accounting Principles (GAAP), cost principle, monetary unit assumption and the economic
entity assumption.
3. To familiarize with and enable to prepare and understand the worksheet, preparation of financial
statements, cost benefits analysis of different projects with honesty and integrity.
4. To provide the students with an in-depth knowledge of Management Accounting to enable them
to apply its methods and techniques for preparing and presenting information for management
decision-making and control purposes.
5. To apply selected management accounting techniques and analyze the implications of the
techniques with regards to cost-volume profit analysis, budgeting, standard costing and variance
analysis.

1. Understand the cost principle, monetary unit assumption and the economic entity assumption
and ethics in financial reporting for each and every project.
2. Understand worksheet, preparation of financial statements, cost benefit analysis of different
projects.
3. Acquire knowledge of Management Accounting and apply it for preparing and presenting
information for management decision-making and control purposes.
4. Apply and analyze the cost-volume profit, budgeting, standard costing and variance analysis
for any project.
413
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Accounting in Action
a. History & Definition of Accounting,
b. Objectives and Importance of Accounting
c. Accounting & Engineering
d. International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS), Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
(GAAP), Ethics in Accounting
e. Accounting Equation (Math)
2. Recording Process : Journal, Ledger, T-account and Trial balance
3. Adjusting the Accounts : Adjusting Entries , Adjusted Trial Balance, Income Statement,
Retained Earnings Statement and Statement of Financial Position (Balance Sheet) , Worksheet
4. Financial Statement Analysis: Horizontal Analysis, Vertical Analysis and Ratio Analysis.
5. Computerized Accounting System: Manual vs. Computerized Accounting system, Some

Accounting Software: NetSuite ERP. Tipalti. Sage Business Cloud Accounting. Sage 50cloud.
Plooto. Tradogram. Tally accounting software.
6. Cost Concepts:
a. Explain The Distinguishing Features of Managerial Accounting
b. Identify The Three Broad Functions of Management
c. Classification of Costs on Various Bases
d. Indicate How Cost of Goods Manufactured is Determined, Break Even Point (BEP) for
Different Projects.
7. Absorption costing and Variable costing:

a. Prepare Profit Statements Based on a Variable Costing and Absorption Costing
System
b. Cost Volume Profit (CVP) Analysis for different engineering projects
c. Account for the difference in profits between variable and absorption costing
profit calculations
d. Explain the arguments for and against variable and absorption costing
8. Job Order Costing and Process Costing:

a. Job Order Costing
b. Process Costing
9. Short & Long-Term Decision-Making in Accounting:

a. Relevant & Irrelevant Costs for Decision-Making
b. How to Determine Costs & Make Decisions
c. Contrast annual rate of return and cash Payback in Capital Budgeting, Budgeting
for Various Engineering Projects.
d. Distinguish between the Net Present Value And Internal Rate Of Return Method
414

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Understand the cost principle, monetary unit
assumption and the economic entity assumption
CO-1
and ethics in financial reporting for each and √
every project.
Understand worksheet, preparation of financial
CO-2 statements, cost benefit analysis of different √
projects.
Acquire knowledge of Management Accounting
and apply it for preparing and presenting
CO-3 √
information for management decision-making
and control purposes.
Apply and analyze the cost-volume profit,
CO-4 budgeting, standard costing and variance √
analysis for any project.
Taxonomy Methods
Understand the cost principle, monetary unit
CO-1 assumption and the economic entity C2 1-4 Pop Quiz, F
assumption and ethics in financial reporting
for each and every project.
Understand worksheet, preparation of
CO-2 financial statements, cost benefit analysis of C2 1-4 MT, F
different projects.
Acquire knowledge of Management
CO-3 Accounting and apply it for preparing and C2 1-4
CT, F
presenting information for management
decision-making and control purposes.
Apply and analyze the cost-volume profit,
CO-4 budgeting, standard costing and variance CT, F
C4 1-4
analysis for any project.
Components Teaching and Learning Activities Student Learning
415
Time (SLT)
10
5 weeks)
Independent Individual learning (1-hour lecture ≈ 1
24
13
Final examination 3
TOTAL SLT 80
CREDIT = SLT/40 2
COURSE SCHEDULE
Lectures Lecture/Tutorial/Assignment Topic CT

Week-1
1 Meaning, history and definition of accounting
2 The users and uses of accounting.
Week-2
3 Ethics in financial reporting
4 The cost principle, monetary unit assumption and the
economic entity assumption
Week-3
5 Accounting equation and its components
6 The effects of business transactions on the accounting
Week-4 1
7 Four financial statements and how they are prepared.
8 Journal
Week-5
9 Journal
10 T-account, Ledger, Trial balance
Week-6
11 Adjusting Accounts
12 Worksheet.
Week-7 2
13 Completion of the Accounting cycle.
14 Financial Statement Analysis
Week-8
15 Managerial Accounting Basics
16 Cost Concepts
Week-9
17 Job Order Cost Accounting
18 Job Order Cost Accounting
Week-10
19 Process Cost Accounting
20 Process Cost Accounting
416
Week-11
21 Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships
22 Cost-Volume-Profit Relationships
Week-12
23 Performance Evaluation through Standard Costs
24 Performance Evaluation through Standard Costs 3
Week-13
25 Incremental Analysis
26 Incremental Analysis
Week-14
27 Capital Budgeting
28 Capital Budgeting

CO1 C1, C2
Class Test/
20% CO2 C1,C2
CO3 C3, C4
Assessment
Class
(40%) 5% CO4
Participation
CO1, CO2 C1, C2, , C4
Final Exam 60%
CO3, CO4 C1, C2,C4
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Financial Accounting IFRS edition by Weygand, Kimmel & Kieso (3th)
2. Accounting Principles by Weygandt, Kieso& Kimmel (IFRS Latest edition)
417
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GEEM 441 Credit Hours: 2.00
Course Title: Engineering Ethics and Moral Philosophy Contact Hours: 2.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course is an introduction to engineering ethics, which stresses analytical reasoning and
emphasizes clear thinking regarding the application of professional ethical codes to specific cases.
Theory includes ethics and moral philosophy of engineering which approaches to ethical issues
include: analyzing the factual, conceptual, application, and moral aspects of an issue; evaluating the
risks and responsibilities of a particular course of action; and using theories of ethics or codes of
ethics developed by engineering societies as a basis for decision making. Ethics can be built into the
education of engineering students and professionals, either as an aspect of courses already being
taught or as a component of engineering projects to be examined along with research findings. This
course will help students to conceptualize the dynamics of the ethical practice in the Naval
Architecture and Marine Engineering domain.
OBJECTIVES
1. To develop student‟s ability in analyzing and interpreting the real life situation and to enhance
the student‟s Moral/ Ethical integrity for the practice of Engineering Profession.
2. To develop attitudes required from engineers and values shared by engineers.

1. Explain the basic perception of profession, professional code of ethics, various moral & social
issues, industrial standards and role of professional ethics in engineering field.
2. Identify and analyze practical legal problems commonly encountered by engineers in their
professional field/industry and formulate solutions to some of the legal problems
3. Practice professional responsibilities of an engineer for safety and risk benefit analysis.
4. Assess the codes of professional conduct and their implications in Naval Architecture and
Marine Engineering field.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Engineering ethics and professionalism; History and development of
engineering ethics and Ethical theories; Ethics and law, Nature of ethical problems, Analysis
of Ethical Problems, Types of issues in ethical problem solving.
2. Applied ethics in engineering: Case Studies of ethics and
Ethical Problem-Solving Techniques; Risk, Safety, and Accidents;
3. Engineer's Responsibilities and Rights; Human qualities of an engineer. Obligation of an
418
engineer to the clients.
4. Introduction to Philosophy of Engineering; Professional Engineering Codes, Moral Reasoning
and Codes of Ethics, Codes of Ethics (IEB); Code of Ethics (BAERA & IAEA), Moral
Frameworks for Engineering Ethics, Attitude of an engineer to other engineers. Measures to be
taken in order to improve the quality of engineering profession.
5. Ethical expectation: Employers and employees, inter-professional relationship, Professional
Organization – maintaining a commitment of ethical standards. Desired characteristics of a
professional code. Institutionalization of ethical conduct. Environmental Ethics.
No. COURSE OUTCOME (COs) PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Explain the basic perception of
CO1 profession, professional code of
ethics, various moral & social
√
issues, industrial standards and role
of professional ethics in engineering
field.
Identify and analyze practical legal
CO2 problems commonly encountered by
engineers in their professional
field/industry and formulate √
solutions to some of the legal
problems
CO3 Practice professional
responsibilities of an engineer for √
safety and risk benefit analysis.
Assess the codes of professional
CO4 conduct and their implications in
√
Naval Architecture and Marine
Engineering field.
Taxonomy Methods
Explain the basic perception of
profession, professional code of ethics,
various moral & social issues,
CO1 C2,C3 - - 1 T, Q, F
industrial standards and role of
professional ethics in engineering
field.
Identify and analyze practical legal
problems commonly encountered by
engineers in their professional
CO2 C1, C2, C3 - - 1 T, Q, F
field/industry and formulate
solutions to some of the legal
problems
Practice professional
CO3 C4
responsibilities of an engineer for - - 1 MT, F
419
safety and risk benefit analysis.
Assess the codes of professional
conduct and their implications in
CO 4 C2
Naval Architecture and Marine - - 1 T, F
Engineering field.
Exam)
In order to develop foundation knowledge of ethics to be applied in professional
CO1-PO8 fields, application of ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
responsibilities and norms of engineering practice is required.
In order to be able to identify practical and legal problems commonly encountered by
engineers in their professional field/industry application of reasoning informed by
CO2-PO6 contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and
the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice and
solutions to complex engineering problems is required
In order to be able to Practice professional responsibilities of an engineer for safety
and risk benefit analysis commonly encountered by engineers in their professional
field/industry application of reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess
CO3-PO6
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities
relevant to professional engineering practice and solutions to complex engineering
problems is required
In order to engage in lifelong learning through acquiring knowledge on legal and
CO4-PO12 ethical aspects of professions of Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering, it is
required to recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in
independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Engagement
(hours)
Lecture 28
Formal Assessment
Final Examination 3
420
Total 75
COURSE SCHEDULE
Weeks Topics Remarks

Week-1 Introduction to ethics, history, evolution, need and importance of
ethics in Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering technology, Class Test
ethical terminology 1,Final Exam
Week-2 Introduction to the Engineering Ethics: purpose, objectives, scope,
methods etc.
Week-3 Introduction to Philosophy of Engineering
Week-4 Professional Engineering Codes, Codes of Ethics (IEB)
Week-5 Code of Ethics (IAEA) Class Test 2,
Week-6 Code of Ethics ( BAERA) Final Exam
Week-7 Ethical Problem Solving Techniques
Week-8 Whistle Blowing. Mid Term,
Week-9 Case study methodology, different case studies Final Exam
Week-10 The Rights and Responsibilities of Engineers
Week-11 Ethical Issues in Engineering Practice
Week-12 Ethics Issues in Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering Class Test 3,
Technology Final Exam
Week-13 Safety, Risk and Liability
Week-14 Trust and reliability

Class Test/ CO1 C1,C2
20%
Continuous Assignment 1-3 CO3 C1,C2
Assessment Class
5% CO2
(40%) Participation
Mid term 15% CO2, CO3 C2,C3,C4
CO1 C1-C3
Final Exam 60% CO2 C1-C3
CO3 C1-C3
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Charles E. Harris, et el. Engineering Ethics: Concepts and Cases, Cengage Learning Boston,
USA: 4th Edition, 2009.
2. Charles B. Fleddermann, Engineering Ethics, 4th Edition, NewYork, USA: Mc-Grawhill: 2012.
3. Davis, M., ed. Engineering Ethics. Farnham, United Kingdom Ashgate Publishing Co, 2005.
421
COURSE INFORMATION
Course Code: GEPM 471 Credit Hours: 2.00
Course Title: Project Management and Finance Contact Hours: 2.00
PRE-REQUISITE
None
RATIONALE
This course has been designed to understand the overlapping connection between engineering and
management with financial matters in an organization through the study of varied management
practices and finance as an engineer.
OBJECTIVES
1. To introduce some aspects of business management and business organization.
2. To identify the tools and techniques needed to lead any project to its intended conclusion.
3. To introduce sales fundamentals include understanding the customer and the competition, sales
strategy, sales management, product positioning, product life cycle, sales structures, margins,
and prospecting for new customers.

1. Develop in depth idea on ship design and building project management and organization to
perform the Management Functions.
1. Compare between selected Theories of Management.
2. Design ship building project and to perform the functions in the Marketing Mix.
3. Develop knowledge of effective material management; management and resource allocation;
Engineering economy and assessment on ethical issues in business situations.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Management Functions and Organization: Evolution; Management functions: organization,
theory and structure, span of control, authority delegation, manpower planning.
2. Human Resource Management: Importance, need hierarchy, motivation, leadership, wage
incentives, performance appraisal and participative management.
3. Production Control and Management Strategy: Production planning and control (PPC)
functions, quantitative methods applied in production, quality management, location and layout
planning, safety and loss management, cost management elements of cost of products, cost
centers and allocation of overhead costs.
4. Management Accounting: Marginal costing, standard costing, cost planning and control,
budget and budgetary control, development and planning process, annual development plan and
National budget.
422
5. Investment Management: Objectives, strategy, investing, performance analysis of enterprise,
investment appraisal, criteria of investment, cost planning and control, budget and budgetary
control.
6. Retail and Technology Management: Concepts, strategy, sales promotion, patent laws,
technology management, management of innovation and changes, technology life cycle.
7. Scheduling Management: Resource schedule, project schedule management, time-phased
costs, budget baseline management.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Develop in depth idea on ship
CO1 design and building project √
management and organization to
perform the Management Functions.
CO2 Compare between selected √
Theories of Management.
Design ship building project and to
CO3 perform the functions in the √
Marketing Mix.
Develop knowledge of effective
material management,
CO4 management and resource √
allocation; Engineering economy
and assessment on ethical issues in
business situations.
Taxonomy Methods
Develop in depth idea on ship design and
CO-1 building project management and
organization to perform the Management C3 1 - 1 CT, Q, F
Functions.
CO-2 Compare between selected Theories
C4 2 1 1 ASG, F
of Management.
Design ship building project and to
CO-3 perform the functions in the Marketing C5 2 - 1 MT, F
Mix.
Develop knowledge of effective material
management, management and resource
CO-4 allocation; Engineering economy and C6 3 1 2 CT, F
assessment on ethical issues in business
situations.
423
Exam)
JUSTIFICATION OF CO-PO MAPPINGS
Mapping Justification
The knowledge of mathematics, science, and engineering fundamentals is
CO1-PO1 required to develop in depth idea on ship building industrial management
and organization to perform the Management Functions.
CO2-PO1 The knowledge of mathematics, science, Engineering fundamentals is required
to compare between selected Theories of Management.
In order to develop a ship deesign project and to perform the functions in the
CO3-PO2 Marketing Mix, identification, formulation, research literature and analysis of
complex engineering problems are required to reach substantiated conclusion
using first principles of mathematics, sciences and engineering fundamentals.
In order to develop knowledge of effective material management; Students
will learn Management and resource allocation; Engineering economy and
CO4-PO11 assessment on ethical issues in Business situations, it is required to
demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering management
principles and economic decision- making and apply these to one‟s own work,
as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
Student Learning
Time (SLT)
10
5 weeks)
Independent Individual learning (1-hour lecture ≈ 1
24
13
Final examination 3
TOTAL SLT 80
CREDIT = SLT/40 2
COURSE SCHEDULE
Weeks Topics Remarks

Week-1 Management Functions and Organization: Evolution
424
Week-2 Management functions: organization, theory and structure, span of
control, authority delegation, manpower planning
Week-3 Management functions: organization, theory and structure, span of Class
control, Test 1,
authority delegation, manpower planning Final
Week-4 Personnel Management: Importance, need hierarchy, motivation Exam
Week-5 leadership, wage incentives, performance appraisal, participative
management
Week-6 Operation Management : Production planning and control (PPC)
functions, quantitative methods applied in production Mid Tem,
Week-7 Quality management, location and layout planning, safety and loss Final
management Exam
Week-8 Cost management elements of cost of products, cost centres and
allocation of overhead costs
Week-9 Management accounting : marginal costing, standard costing, cost
planning and
control, budget and budgetary control
Week-10 Development and planning process; annual development plan;
National budget
Week-11 Financial management : objectives, strategy, financing, performance Class
analysis of enterprise, investment appraisal, criteria of investment Test 2,
Week-12 Management Accounting: Cost planning and control, budget and Final
budgetary control Exam
Week-13 Marketing Management: Concepts, strategy, sales promotion, patent
laws
Week-14 Technology Management; Management of innovation and changes,
technology life cycle
Blooms
Components Grading CO
Taxonomy
Class Test/ CO1, CO2,
20% C3, C4, C6
Continuous Assignment (1-3) CO4
Assessment Class Participation 5% CO1, CO2 C3, C4
(40%) Mid term 15% CO3 C5
Final Examination 60% CO1-CO4 C3, C4,C5, C6
Total Marks 100%
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. P. Kotler, K. L. Keller, Marketing Management,15th ed., Pearson, 2016
2. D. H. Besterfield, G. Besterfield, Total Quality Management, 3rd ed,. Prentice Hall, 2002
3. J. Liker, The Toyota Way: 14 Management Principles from the World's Greatest Manufacturer,
1st ed., McGraw-Hill Education, 2004
425
ANNEX-A
CHAPTER 4. CRITERIA (BAETE MANUAL 2019 VERSION 2)
This section presents the criteria that a program must meet to become accredited. The following sub-
sections sequentially outline the ten major criteria.
4.1 Organization and Governance
Major positions should be filled, and the statutory bodies/committees of the institution should be
formed in accordance with the applicable rules and guidelines. These positions include Vice
Chancellor, Pro-Vice Chancellor, Treasurer, Dean, and Chairperson and bodies/committees such as
the Board of Trustees, Syndicate, Academic Council, Admission Committee, Finance Committee,
Curriculum Committee and the Faculty Selection Committee. The position appointees and committee
members should function effectively as per the roles defined in the relevant act/statute.
The institution should have published policies, including a mechanism for addressing grievances,
regarding academic and administrative matters involving students, faculty members and non-teaching
employees. These policies should be put into practice.
4.2 Financial and Physical Resources
The financial resources of the institution should be adequate to fulfill its mission and vision. The
financial resources committed to the program should also be sufficient for the appropriate functioning
of the program, including recruiting and retaining qualified faculty members, and procuring the
necessary lab equipment and equipment and tools to support teaching and learning.
The institution should have a process for budget planning and allocate resources to the priority areas
as required. The campus infrastructure, such as the extent of the land and built-up area, extra- and co-
curricular facilities, and support facilities, including maintenance support for infrastructure and
facilities, should be adequate for the total number of students and employees at the institution.
The possibility of any risk from manmade or natural hazards should be properly assessed and
addressed in the Safety Plan. All labs shall have their own plans to prevent and manage incidents and
accidents. Fire detection and firefighting facilities should be adequate. An action plan is required to
address safety issues as the situation demands. Adequate measures should be in place to make the
campus safe for students, employees and visitors.
4.3 Faculty
The department should have a sufficient number of full-time faculty members to ensure that the
faculties are not overloaded with courses and that the program does not become overly dependent on
part-time faculty members.
The faculty members should have adequate academic qualifications with specializations in areas
closely related to the program(s) offered by the department. The proportion of senior faculty members
and junior faculty members should be appropriate. Adequate interaction between students and faculty
members both within and outside classes is essential. The teacher-student ratio, class size and
teaching load should not compromise opportunities for interaction.
426
Faculty members should be motivated to improve their pedagogy and assist the students in achieving
outcomes. They should be committed to the continuous quality improvement activities of the
department. Faculty members should have the responsibility and authority to design and update the
curriculum; establish course and program outcomes, and select and use appropriate assessment tools
for evaluating student performance in classes and the achievement of outcomes.
Faculty members should be engaged in research, development and professional activities such as
consulting. They should also be involved in relevant professional societies. The results of these
activities should benefit the students. The institution or department should periodically arrange
training for the faculty members on outcome- based education and assessment. All the faculty
members should be adequately trained on how to establish course outcomes, conduct teaching-
learning activities that are appropriate for the outcomes and assess the level of outcome achievement.
4.4 Students
There should be a published policy for the admission and transfer of students into the program. The
admission or transfer requirements should be appropriate for the selection of students with the
potential to achieve the program‟s outcomes. The policy should be implemented in practice. Transfer
students must also show the attainment of program outcomes from courses in the institution.
Students‟ academic performance should be continuously monitored in terms of the achievement of

outcomes, and feedback should be provided to the students. There should be provisions for remedial
or corrective measures when necessary. Every student should be assigned an advisor. The advisor
should counsel, guide and mentor the student on all academic and professional matters.
Students should have opportunities to participate in extra- and co-curricular activities and the
activities of relevant professional societies. The institution should ensure the participation of a
significant number of students.
4.5 Academic Facilities and Technical Support
The institution should have a well-stocked library. The books, e-books, journals and other resources
available in the library should be adequate for the program and the faculty members. The number of
classrooms available should be adequate to properly run the program. The classroom facilities and the
environment should be conducive to learning.
The number of labs and equipment should be adequate for conducting the program‟s various
laboratory courses. Every student should have the opportunity for hands-on activity in the
laboratories. Each lab should have adequate safety and health measures.
Students and faculty members should have access to adequate computing and Internet facilities,
including hardware, software tools and support.
4.6 Curriculum and Teaching-Learning Processes
The curriculum should satisfy the relevant program-specific criteria described in Section 6.
The breadth and depth of the curriculum and the teaching-learning activities should be appropriate for
427
solving complex engineering problems in the relevant discipline. The curriculum should contain an
adequate number of courses on mathematics, physical science, humanities and non-engineering
subjects. The teaching-learning processes and activities selected for each course should be effective
and appropriate for achieving the outcomes. Student participation and learning should be enhanced.
Hands-on activities in the lab should be an integral part of teaching and learning. The program should
include adequate activities in the lab.
The program should demonstrate the culmination of program outcomes (POs) at the level of solving
complex engineering problems, preferably through a final-year design project or capstone project
extending over a period of one year.
4.7 Program Educational Objectives
Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) are broad statements that describe the career and
professional accomplishments that the program is preparing graduates to achieve. PEOs are
assessable based on the attributes and accomplishments of graduates, preferably those who have
worked for 3 to 5 years after graduation. Each engineering program should have published PEOs that
are clear, concise, assessable and realistic within the context of the available resources. The PEOs
should be consistent with the vision and mission of the department offering the program. They should
be supported by a curriculum and teaching-learning processes that lead to the attainment of these
objectives. Justifications should be provided for how the curriculum and the outcomes contribute to
the attainment of the PEOs.
A process should be developed to assess the level of attainment of each PEO to evaluate the academic
program‟s effectiveness. Adequate evidence and documentation on the assessment of PEO attainment
should be provided. The assessment tools should be indicated, and the way in which these tools are
used should be explained. PEO assessment should lead to the periodic review of PEOs. Feedback
from the various program stakeholders, including employers, alumni, students and faculty, should be
considered during the review.
4.8 Program Outcomes and Assessment
Program Outcomes (POs) or graduate attributes are narrower statements that describe what students
are expected to know and be able to do by the time of graduation. These statements relate to the
knowledge, skills and attitudes acquired by students while progressing through the program. The
program must demonstrate that by the time of graduation, students have achieved an acceptable
minimum level of certain knowledge, skills and behavioral traits. The BAETE specifically requires
that students acquire the following graduate attributes:
(a) Engineering knowledge: Apply knowledge of mathematics, natural science, engineering

fundamentals and an engineering specialization as specified in K1 to K4 respectively to the
solution of complex engineering problems.
(b) Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature and analyse complex engineering
problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural
sciences and engineering sciences. (K1 to K4)
428
(c) Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and
design systems, components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate
consideration for public health and safety, cultural, societal, and environmental
considerations. (K5)
(d) Investigation: Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge

(K8) and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of
data, and synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
(e) Modern tool usage: Create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern
engineering and IT tools, including prediction and modelling, to complex engineering
problems, with an understanding of the limitations. (K6)
(f) The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess
societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant
to professional engineering practice and solutions to complex engineering problems. (K7)
(g) Environment and sustainability: Understand and evaluate the sustainability and impact of
professional engineering work in the solution of complex engineering problems in societal
and environmental contexts. (K7)
(h) Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and
norms of engineering practice. (K7)
(i) Individual work and teamwork: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or
leader in diverse teams and in multi-disciplinary settings.
(j) Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and
receive clear instructions.
(k) Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of

engineering management principles and economic decision-making and apply these to one‟s
own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
(l) Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage
in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
In addition to incorporating the above-listed POs (graduate attributes), the educational institution may
include additional outcomes in its learning programs. An engineering program that aims to attain the
abovementioned POs should ensure that its curriculum encompasses all the attributes of the
Knowledge Profile (K1 – K8) as presented in Table 4.1 and as included in the PO statements. The
ranges of Complex Problem Solving (P1 – P7) and Complex Engineering Activities (A1 – A5) that
should be addressed in the program are given in Tables 4.2 and 4.3, respectively.
429
Table 4.1: Knowledge Profile
Attribute
K1 A systematic, theory-based understanding of the natural sciences applicable
to the discipline
K2 Conceptually based mathematics, numerical analysis, statistics and the
formal aspects of computer and information science to support analysis and
modeling applicable to the discipline
K3 A systematic, theory-based formulation of engineering fundamentals
required in the engineering discipline
K4 Engineering specialist knowledge that provides theoretical frameworks and
bodies of knowledge for the accepted practice areas in the engineering
discipline; much is at the forefront of the discipline
K5 Knowledge that supports engineering design in a practice area
K6 Knowledge of engineering practice (technology) in the practice areas in the
engineering discipline
K7 Comprehension of the role of engineering in society and identified issues in
engineering practice in the discipline: ethics and the engineer‟s professional
responsibility to public safety; the impacts of engineering activity; economic,
social, cultural, environmental and sustainability
K8 Engagement with selected knowledge in the research literature of the
discipline
Table 4.2: Range of Complex Engineering Problem Solving
Attribute Complex Engineering Problems have characteristic P1 and

some or all of P2 to P7:
Depth of knowledge P1: Cannot be resolved without in-depth engineering
required knowledge at the level of one or more of K3, K4, K5, K6 or
K8 which allows a fundamentals-based, first principles
analytical approach
Range of conflicting P2: Involve wide-ranging or conflicting technical, engineering
requirements and other issues
Depth of analysis P3: Have no obvious solution and require abstract thinking,
required originality in analysis to formulate suitable models
Familiarity of issues P4: Involve infrequently encountered issues

Extent of applicable P5: Are outside problems encompassed by standards and
codes codes of practice for professional engineering
Extent of stakeholder P6: Involve diverse groups of stakeholders with widely
varying involvement and conflicting requirements needs
Interdependence P7: Are high level problems including many component parts
or sub-problems
Table 4.3: Range of Complex Engineering Activities
430
Attribute Complex activities means (engineering) activities or projects
that have some or all of the following characteristics:
Range of resources A1: Involve the use of diverse resources (and for this
purpose resources include people, money,
equipment, materials, information and technologies)
Level of interaction A2: Require resolution of significant problems arising from
interactions between wide-ranging or conflicting technical,
engineering or other issues
Innovation A3: Involve creative use of engineering principles and
research-based knowledge in novel ways
Consequences for A4: Have significant consequences in a range of contexts,
society and the characterized by difficulty of prediction and mitigation
environment
Familiarity A5: Can extend beyond previous experiences by applying
Principles-based approaches
The program should describe the process involved in defining and refining the POs. The correlation
between the course outcomes (COs) and POs should be demonstrated through the mapping of COs
onto POs.
The way in which each attribute of the Knowledge Profile (K1 – K8) is addressed in the curriculum
should be demonstrated through mapping. The program should also demonstrate how each attribute of
the Range of Complex Engineering Problems (P1 – P7) and Complex Engineering Activities (A1 –
A5) is incorporated in the teaching, learning and assessment.
For each course, a course file must be maintained. The course file should include the assessment of
outcomes, curriculum, and examination questions and answer scripts, the results of other assessments,
and a summary of performance and attainment of course outcomes with suggestions or feedback for
future development.
POs should be assessed using direct methods. Direct methods of assessment are accomplished through
the direct examination or observation of students‟ knowledge or skills against measurable
performance indicators or rubrics. In addition, indirect methods may also be used for PO assessment.
Indirect methods of assessment are based on opinions or self-report from different stakeholders. The
way in which various assessment tools, including examinations and rubrics, contribute to the
evaluation of attainment of each PO should be described. The results of the evaluation of PO
attainment should be shown.
4.9 Continuous QualityImprovement
The program should have a continuous quality improvement mechanism. It should demonstrate an
established system for periodically compiling the level of attainment in terms of PEO, including a
mechanism for tracking and obtaining feedback from graduates and their employers. The outcomes of
these exercises should be evaluated, and the identified shortcomings and limitations should be used to
refine and improve the program.
POs should be assessed on a regular cycle. The program should prepare CQI file for each of the 12
POs to review. Each teaching module should have clear quality requirements and facilitate the
achievement of COs through teaching and evaluation methods. Students should provide feedback in
431
every course on the appropriateness of the COs, course content, delivery of content, assessment and
the attainment of the COs. The concerned course instructor should prepare course review reports
including CQI files for the courses he/she is teaching. The program should also evaluate the
curriculum and teaching quality on a regular basis while considering feedback from faculty members
and students. The program should demonstrate that the results of this periodic evaluation are used for
continuous improvement.
4.10 Interactions with the Industry
A communication channel between the educational institution and the industry should be in place. The
industry should be encouraged to provide feedback concerning the quality of the teaching-learning
process. There must be industry participation in the development of the curriculum to ensure that it is
relevant, regularly updated, and meets the needs of the industry, particularly in areas experiencing
rapid changes. An engineering program should have an Industry Advisory Panel (IAP) and an alumni
association (AA) for this purpose. The IAP or AA may meet at certain intervals with the department
to provide feedback.
The program should provide students with the opportunity to obtain industrial experience through
internships, industry visits or design projects conducted by practicing engineers and faculty members
with industrial experience.
432

Mist Name Syllabus_2021 (2)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mist Name Syllabus_2021 (2)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mist Name Syllabus_2021 (2)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MILITARY INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

APPLICABLE FOR NAME- 9 & ONWARDS

Lt Col Muhammad Rabiul Islam, PhD, EME

5.1 Program Core Courses 35

Annex-A: Chapter 4. (of BAETE Manual 2019 Version 2) Criteria 426

1.1 Introduction to MIST

1.2 Vision and Mission of MIST

1.3 Salient Features of MIST

1.5.1 Faculty of Civil Engineering (FCE):

1.5.2 Faculty of Electrical & Computer Engineering (FECE):

1.5.3 Faculty of Mechanical Engineering (FME):

The students must fulfill the following requirements:

(4) Sex: Male and Female.

(1) Educational qualifications as applicable for Bangladeshi civil students or equivalent.

1.7 Number of Seats

Ser Unit Department Seats

1.8 Admission Procedure

Ser. Subjects Marks

1.9 Students Withdrawal Policy

1.9.1 General Policy of Withdrawal

1.9.2 Withdrawal on Disciplinary Ground

b. Influencing Grades. Academic Council may expel/withdraw any student for

c. Other Indiscipline Behaviours. Academic Council may withdraw/expel any student on

d. Immediate Action by the Disciplinary Committee of MIST. The Disciplinary

1.9.3 Withdrawal on Own Accord

b. Temporary Withdrawal. A student, if he/she applies, may be allowed to withdraw

2.2 The Course System

The salient features of the Course System are as follows:

2.3 Number of Terms in a Year

2.4 Duration of Terms

Ser Events Durations

2.5 Course Pattern and Credit Structure

2.6 Course Designation System

The course designation system is illustrated as Follows:

NAME – 3 0 1 Ship’s Structure

NAME - 2 0 8 Ship Design and Drawing II

2.8 Types of Courses

2.9 Course Offering and Instruction

2.10 Teacher Student Interaction

2.11 Students’ Adviser

2.12 Course Registration

2.13 Registration Procedure

2.14 Pre-conditions for Registration

a. For first year students, department-wise enrollment/admission is mandatory prior to registration.

2.15 Registration Deadline

2.16 Penalty for Late Registration

2.17 Limits on the Credit Hours to be Taken

2.18 Course Add/Drop

2.19 Withdrawal from a Term

2.20 The Grading System

Numerical Markings Grade Grade Points

Conduct of Lab Tests/Class Performance 25%

2.21.3 Sessional Course in English: The distribution will be as under:

Class performance/observation 10%

2.22 Calculation of GPA

Course Credit Ci Grade Points Gi Ci*Gi

GPA = 78.75/20 = 3.9375 ≈ 3.94

Earned Credit Hours Earned GPA

2.25 Impacts of Grade Earned

2.26 Classification of Students